Magic. A Magazine of Wonder

Page 1

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER - SS ON ~~ N WN rer ‘ »\ ’; = IZ —— YY w S/Y 2 | OW | te EE + - A 7 - — \ + 4 ig - — : f — ' 4 “, hy 7 . y : 4 4 ; , if 4 ’ 7 7 ~ P \ JANUARY 1910 PRICE 10 CENTS What A Conjurer Can Do By David Devant Joseffy’s Marvelous Rising Cards By David P. Abbott

Page 2

MYSTO COMPANY Sample Our Goods Pages of the are positively ~ the finest sreatest Made : Our Factory i the largest wet in the Published bps and our Sent Catalogue KFREE the Best to any wae a [ria Address Pedic Send for Complete Sample Publication Pages Only Be WATER MIRACLE (AFTER GERMAIN) The sensation of the day. The most talked of trick in magic. We are the only manu- facturers. Price, complete, $14.00; without stands, $9.00. \ THE CALDRON The Tenth Wonder of the World. Positive- ly the greatest Illusion ever invented. (See our illustrated catalogue. ) MYSTO MFG. CO., Westville Sta., New Haven, Ct. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 3

PUBLIC LIBRARY 747908 ASTOR, LE®OX AND TILDEN FOUNDATIONS MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER R 1940 4 VOLUME I CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M. D. NUMBE CONTENTS FOR JANUARY, 1910 PAGE COVER From a lithograph of ‘Herrmann the Great’ Drawn by Joseph Baker oe THE MAGIC SHOP Frontispiece Illustration from a photograph in the collection of F. B. Johnstone WHAT A CONJURER CAN DO | Davip DEvANT 2 JOSEFFY’S MARVELOUS RISING CARDS Davip P. ApBorr 5 Illustrations from photographs AN EFFECTIVE MATCH-BOX FAKE PROFESSOR IIOFFMANN 8 Illustration from a drawing ; P A VANISHING CARD | | T. L. Warerman® | 9 Illustrations from drawings BERTRAM’S TWO-HANDED PASS C. Lanc NEIL 10 Illustrations from photographs of the hands of the late Charles Bertram HANDKERCHIEF AND RUBBER BAND WiLL Gotpstron | 11 Illustrations from drawings CONJURING AS A SOCIAL ADVANTAGE IIERMANN PALLME 12 Illustration from a photograph THE MAGICAL MARKET i Illustrations from photographs MAGIC is published every other month (six issues a year) by Ernest Evangeline, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. Yearly subscriptions, 60 cents. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright, 1909, by W. J. Lucas. THE TWIN MAGAZINES OF ENCHANTMENT MAGIC is a twin magazine to GHOSTS, a Magazine of Romance and Reason. ‘The two magazines will be pub- lished every month, alternating, making six numbers of each a year. 60 cents a year each, or $1 a year for both. These twin magazines will present magic and allied sub- jects to the general public in a most attractive manner, with strong leaning towards the entertainment and recre- ative side rather than the scientific or philosophical. “If a man die shall he live again?’’ is the Sphinx riddle of humanity. The publisher of GHOSTS hopes to print enough data during the next few years to enable any living being to decide for himself, once and forever, whether there is anything beyond the grave. Magic, Ghosts, Conjuring, Puzzles, Sleight of Hand, En- tertaining, Illusions, Spiritism, Ventriloquism, Psychical Research, Psychology and Sorcery are some of the sub- ~ | «jects to be thoroughly and completely covered in ‘‘The meee §=Twin Magazines of Enchantment.’’ ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 4

Tae a _ — —~ — —_ — —-- —-~ — — > <n — ~ _—— = ~ meat _ “2-6 ee _ “a . oe = eS a | s , « ee 4 ae, OR i ° r ~ aa a From a photograph in the collection of F. B. Johnstone, Cleveland, O. Of all the shops in the big cities that tempt the man with money to spend, or the sight- seer in search of the quaint and curious, there are few that compare in interest with the shops where magical goods are sold. There is nothing palatial about most of them. In fact, some The to the uninitiated. If you tell him you are yearning to delve into the mysteries of white magic, and incidentally to buy some of his ‘‘tricks’’ so that you may astonish some of your friends, he will gravely assure you there is no more delightful 2 form of entertainment than that af- do not look much bigger than a Lil- Ma 1C forded by the performance of a ma- liputian’s bedroom—but they boast more twentieth century wonders than any of the big skyscrapers and public buildings. The show-windows of the magic shop usually contain a medley of stage money, vicious look- ing snakes, card tricks, purses which explode when opened by the unwary, vanishing cigar cases and other paraphernalia dear to the heart of the magician. Inside is usually a genial salesman, who seems to take pleasure in dis- playing his wares, and explaining their uses. Shop gician, amateur or professional, and he will aid you not only in selecting the very best ‘‘props,’’ but will take no end of pains in teaching you how toemploy them tothe best advantage. If you are lucky enough to be permit- ted to visit the work shop in the back, you will see the most modern magic things, including improved and especially constructed apparatus of all kinds. There is an air of mystery about the magic shop that is almost oppressive, and it is no place for a nervous man after dark!

Page 5

MAGIC VOLUME I JANUARY 1910 NUMBER 1 The object of this magazine is NOT to expose the world’s best tricks, nor give away the darling secrets of clever professional and amateur magicians. MAGIC is intended to create a wider and more intelligent interest in a most attractive subject— to make more appreciative audiences for magical entertainers, and new devotees of a fascinating hobby. No excuses are made for this first number, except that it is rather thin. Appre- ciation and support are depended on to pad it out. A good dime’s worth if it never grows any bigger. No promises made for the future, but surprises can be looked for MAGIC will live up to its sub-title, * Write in and get acquainted with ‘The Magazine of Wonder.’ A. M. WILSON, M. D., Editor ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher What A Conjurer Can Do By David Devant msc] I is only after years of work hard, these teachers say, and you will w3 Gas ORG p) amateur begins his study of the art confident he will learn how to become a source of perpetual wonder to all his friends; but that ambition is seldom fulfilled. After reading part of the book that is to teach him the art | 1. of conjuring, the amateur will perhaps try to do afew tricks. He fails at the first few attempts, and because he has no perseverance, no real desire to learn conjur- ing, he throws the book on one side, and vows that it is silly and that he has no time to give to it. He is confident that if he gave up a certain amount of time to practic- ing tricks he would succeed in becoming a conjurer. Perhaps the amateur is not always to blame for coming to this conclusion, for it is the lesson that most of the books on conjuring set out to teach. Practice foun tion. that a conjurer realizes the limitations of conjuring. The Before an amateur can hope to understand conjuring, he must learn something of what a sae a can do. It will be that any magical effect that has ever been produced comes under one of the fol- lowing headings: — A production or crea- . A disappearance. . A transformation. . A transposition. . An apparent defiance of natural laws. . An exhibition of se- cret motive power. . Apparent mental or sight phenomena. succeed. Then they set the amateur con- jurer difficult exercises to practice, know- ing full well that he will be discouraged long before he has attained any proficien- cy. One of the objects of this magazine 1s to show that many of the difficul- ties hitherto considered to be indispensable to conjur- ing are in no way neces- sary to a man who wishes to know something about the art. Some years ago, child- ren who were taught to speak French were com- pelled, first of all, to wade laboriously all through the French grammar. Since, we have discovered that the best way to learn to speak French is to speak French. Simi- larly, the best way to learn how to do conjuring tricks is to do some tricks. It is quite possible—and very prob- able—that the time spent learning and practicing the various ‘‘palms’’ and pas- ses and changes, and other things, that

Page 6

4 MAGIC have been described in conjuring books from time immemorial, may be entirely wasted. A knowledge of such things is useful, and therefore they will be briefly explained in future numbers, together with easier methods of obtaining the same results. Under the first heading in the list of magical effects on the previous page, may be grouped all those tricks in which a performer produces something out of nothing. The trick may be performed with a very small object, such as a coin, by public performers will usually include two or three of the above effects. A re- ally good combination, in which the per- former leads from one effect to another in a natural way, and surrounds the en- tire trick with appropriate talk—or *"pat- ter,’’ as it is called—is really the out- come of a great deal of hard work and thought. Unfortunately, an original per- former who succeeds in this way soon learns the truth of the proverb that “‘imi- tation is the sincerest form of flattery.’’ His tricks will be copied extensively by in which case the trick is fairly easy; or the pro- duction may consist of a full-grown woman—a difficult problem. The second class—a disap- pearance—is just the re- verse of the first. In the third group we get all those tricks in which one object changes to anoth- er under conditions ap- parently precluding any nossibility of just sucha change occuring. Tricks of transposing an object from one place to anoth- er are perhaps difficult The Fairyland of Magic Perhaps the art of conjuring may be compared to a vast fairyland, full of pretty surprises that await dis- covery. It is impossible to give a complete guide to this wonderful land, because explorers are always finding fresh delights in it, and no one knows the whole country thor- oughly. The most that can be done in this magazine is to explain a few of the sign-posts that will guide the traveler along the broader avenues of this land of magic. When that -has been done, he must be left to wander where he will. Possibly, when he has learned something more about this fairyland, he will come to the conclusion that the pleasantest spots are those that he found for himself. inferior performers, who either cannot or will not invent new effects, new methods, and new ‘'pat- ter’ for themselves. To illustrate what J mean by a good combi- nation of effects, I may point out that in my own handkerchief trick I make use of four dif- ferent effects. First of all, I produce two white handkerchiefs from a lit match, and one from my empty hand. By passing these three white hand- kerchiefs through emp- to perform, and conse- quently are not so often included in the programmes of amateurs. The simplest of them ts the old trick of asking two people to count a certain number of coins or cards, and to hold them in the hand. The trick consists in making the two sets of coins or cards change places. Tricks which involve an apparent de- fiance of natural laws are always very effective. The famous illusion of cutting a man’s head off is an excellent exam- ple of tricks that come under this title. The “‘secret motive power’ tricks are such as the rising cards, the animated walking-stick, and—to make a sudden jump to some of the most wonderful tricks that have ever been performed— the various automata invented by Mr. J. N. Maskelyne. Lastly come the tricks in which the performer apparently gives a marvelous exhibition of thought read- ing in some form. These tricks are al- ways popular with amateurs, because they can be learnt comparatively easily, and can always be trusted to entertain a parlor audience. The most successful tricks presented ty paper cylinder, I turn them into three brilliantly colored hand- kerchiefs. I take two of these handker- chiefs, tie them together, roll them tn- to a ball, and put them into a glass cyl- inder, so that they are quite tsolated. The third colored handkerchief I put 1n- to another glass cylinder, and then, plac- ing my hands over the ends of the cyl- inder, so that the handkerchief cannot escape from it, I proceed to vanish the handkerchief in full view of the audi- ence. Afterwards I vanish and repro- duce the glass cylinder itself. Finally, the handkerchief which has disappeared is found tied between the other two handkerchiefs which the audience have had in view during the whole of the per- formance. It will be seen that in this one trick there are three productions, one transformation, two disappearances, and ‘a transposition. I hope that the reader will not con- tent himself with simply understanding the general principles of conjuring, but will also try some of the simple tricks described elsewhere in this magazine. I hope, too, that he may then become

Page 7

JOSEFFY’S MARVELOUS RISING CARDS 5 an enthusiast, for without a proper en- thusiasm he will never attain to any pro- ficiency In conjuring worth considering. The amateur who really wants to succeed, will find in the working out of his own ideas, in the arranging of new tricks, in the inventing of new effects and methods— with such aid as he will get from the knowledge of mechanics, chemistry and optics—a never fail- ing source of absorbing interest and unique entertainment. I believe that there would be more amateur conjurers if the old method of teaching conjuring could be swept away. There is no reason why any one should be deterred from taking up this fascina- ting work by the fear that it is too diffi- Mysteries of Conjuring The work of a conjurer is so subtle that to the enthusiast it will have as much fascination as the unraveling of a mystery has for a great detect- ive, and although all regular readers of this magazine may not become brilliant performers, they will at least be students of conjuring, and will be in possession of such knowl- edge of the art as will enable them to appreciate a good performance. cult. I grant that some authors of exist- ing books on conjuring seem to have started out with the idea of frightening the amateur student by a recital of the immense difficulties that have to be overcome before one can be considered to be even a moderately good performer. That such difficulties exist I do not attempt to deny, but I maintain that in most cases these stumbling blocks to success may be easily set to one side. NOTE—Mr. David Devant. author of “What A Conjurer Can Do,” is England's leading magician. He is associated with Mr. J. N. Maskelyne in the famous magical entertain- ments at St. George's Hall, London. He has invented many brilliant tricks, illusions and acts, and made valuable con- tributions to the literature of magic. The above article has been adapted from a chapter in his “Magic Made Easy.’ More about Mr. Devant, his tricks, his books and his in- ventions will appear in future i issues of this magazine. Joseffy’s Marvelous Rising Cards By David P. Abbott ERE the general public to become thoroughly instruct- ed in the means by which the magician performs his effects, the art of magic would disappear. It can existonly bythere being suitable subjects, upon whose minds the _ per- former can produce his illusions. Any advance in the knowledge of ma- gic made by such sub- jects, necessitates a cor- responding advance in the art by the performer. Of late there has been considerable publication of the secrets of magi- clans, and there has been a certain amount of ex- posing, conducted from the stage, by persons who could not earn their salaries by the legitimate presentation of the art. -Accordingly, any pronounced advance in the art has been welcomed by magi- cians generally. Performers are continu- ally looking for improvements in their NG AM evened @ ‘or { V MUSIC: MAGIC. ‘ Ha -MYSTERYina’ & AN ARTISTIC JOSEFFY POSTER art, and are diligently searching for new principles of which they can make use. Some recént important advances in the art, are the subject of this article. The performances of magicians are uSually a- long well defined lines. They are well exempli- | fied by those of the late } Alexander Herrmann, *) with whose work most of my readers are familiar. The great magicians of today are of that type and their performances are based on principles well known to conjurers. These principles, which underlie the art, consist in adroit substitutions, the misdirection of the spectator’s attention at the vital moment, the use of invisible threads, worked by concealed assistants, some mechanical contrivances, etc. Occasionally some performer 1s able to add a new principle ora new trick to the stock of those already employed by per- formers. The growth of the art has been ' h,| | if

Page 8

6 MAGIC slow, and a gradual process of evolu- tion; although occasionally some new star has appeared above the horizon, who was of such undoubted genius that he was able to revolutionize or greatly change the magic of his day. Of this class was Robert Houdin, whose original productions are very well known to readers of magical literature, quite youthful, and came to this country when nineteen years of age. When he first came he lived in a quiet way, did not push himself forward, and was not heard of by magicians at large. He de- voted some of his time to manufacturing apparatus for acertain dealer. Magicians marveled at the perfection of this appar- atus, and did not know who the maker and whose clever inno- vations were so sweep- ing that he may rightly be called, “‘the father of modern magic.’’ At a later date the great De Kolta appear- ed. He was a great orig- inator; and by copy- ing his ideas as best they could, other magicians were enabled to add a great many new things to the conjurer’s art. De Kolta, however, always refused to divulge his best secrets. When he died they perished with him. A committee of conjurers called on his widow and offered her a large sum of money for his secrets; but she posi- tively refused to reveal a single one; and she Is said to have concealed or destroyed all of her husband’s apparatus. So thus, some of the great secrets of the art passed away and perished with De Kolta. Of late there has ap- peared in the firmament of magica new star who has attracted consider- A Joseffy Program PART I “Neither the naked hand nor the under- standing, left to itself, can do much; the work is accomplished by instruments and helps, of which the need is not Jess for the understanding than the hand.’’—Bacon. Introducing J oseffy in a series of original experiments in pure sleight-of-hand, com- pletely up to date, novel, unique and amusing. Imagination Something from Nothing Penetration of Matter A Paper Chase Coins Here, There, Everywhere and Nowhere Transmigration | PART II Aseries of Violin Solos, selec- ted from the lighter classics. | PART III “To make modern and familiar all things supernatural and causeless.”"—All’s Well That Ends Well. Necromancy The Sun and Moon A Japanese Fantasy The Hindoo Dial Escapade of a Chronometer Experiments in the Fourth Dimension Spirit Knots A Message from Unknown Parts The Congress of Nations was, as the dealer kept his name in the back- ground. During all of this time he was quietly working out ideas of his own and performing ex- periments. Most of my readers have seen some form of the rising card trick per- formed by the various magicians. This consists in the performer passing among the crowd witha card pack from which spectators draw cards of their own choice, glance at and replace them tn the pack. This is then placed in a glass goblet which sets on a table up- on the stage, and at the performer's command, the chosen cards arise one by one. Sometimes a nickeled card case 1s swung on two ribbons and the cards are placed therein, or there are va- rious other devices. The principles of this trick have always been the same. The selection of the cards is ‘‘forced’’ on the spectator by the ma- gician. He does this by able attention. This originator calls him- self, “‘Joseffy.’’ In the opinion of the writer Joseffy is among the best origi- nators since Robert Houdin’s day. Tobe sure, he started where Houdin, and later De Kolta, left off; but he has certainly reached a high degree of perfection in his particular line. Who ts Joseffy? He is Mr. Freud, an Austrian who was born in Vienna. Heis aman with a scientific trend of mind, a splendid violinist, and a master of six languages and five trades. Joseffy traveled all over Europe when running the cards from one hand tothe other rapidly, and requesting the spec- tator to take a card. Just as the specta- tor reaches for one, the performer adroit- ly pushes the proper one right into the spectator’s fingers, and the latter thinks that he has exercised free choice. Next the performer adroitly exchanges the first pack forasecond prepared one that is concealed in a depression on the back of a table on the stage, or about some other piece of furniture. This prepared pack has an invisible black silk thread placed across its top end when it ts

Page 9

JOSEFFY’S MARVELOUS RISING CARDS 7 being prepared, and the required du- plicate cards placed against this thread and pushed down into the pack, thus carrying down a loop of the thread which accordingly runs under*each selected ly. If no goblet is used, sometimes the thread runs through the double ribbons from which the nickeled case is hung. Now it has always been the desire of conjurers to doaway with the forcing of Rete eee b> ae + ak _ a i? a ; = 74) - ~ a > “} Se o. & 2) — i, P. A'S ‘ F | oe (ie Re ig Sie ee ae “Uy eee batons > 7 > em ; a CS LN, 6 ee Ae nee Peek gai) 1 ope Se Bhie =~ & ’ Be 7 ee JOSEFFY PERFORMING THE RISING CARDS card. This thread is led to the floor, then through an eyelet and off toa concealed assistant in the wings, who at the proper time pulls on the thread, thus causing the cards to rise one at atime. The spec- tators think that they see their chosen cards rising, and the trick is considered marvelous and is applauded according- cards so as to allow the spectators free choice. It has also been their wish to do away with an invisible thread worked by an assistant, but this has never been accomplished before. For years Joseffy has been working on this idea, and he has stated to his magician friends that he hoped some day to be able to do

Page 10

8 MAGIC away with all threads, forcing and everything heretofore used; to permit his spectators to handle and examine his card case; to let them bring their own pack and freely choose the cards they desire; to let them place the pack in the case themselves; to make no sub- stitution; to have no outside connection with the card case and yet to cause to arise,at his command,any card called for at any time. The reader can judge the effect of this on magicians, who regarded such things as impossibilities. They smiled a quiet smile and said nothing, but it was under- stood that Joseffy was just a little bit ‘off.’’, They knew that he was an en- thusiast, that his work was excellent and all of that, but they did not think that he could accomplish this. Frequently, when he was at work onit, they would, when calling upon him, and when they thought he was not looking, tap their heads significantly, look at each other and smile in a quiet but sympathetic way, as if to say, ‘Poor Joseffy! He is crazy. He has wheels.’’ The day has come for Joseffy to smile when he meets these same friends. He has actually accomplished what he un- dertook, and these magician friends can only look on with admiration. Joseffy uses a tiny. card case made in imitation of a lyre, with glass front and back. This is held in the hand ofa little cupid made of metal. The case has flat sides to hold the cards and ts very ar- tistic. Thisis handed toa spectator. The latter brings his own pack of cards, and freely shuftles them. He places the pack in the card case himself. Joseffy now takes the case in one hand and holds it aloft so all can see. There is positively noexchange. He sets the case on asmall table in full view of all. There 1s no thread running to a concealed assistant. Joseffy leaves the side of his case, and can be in any part of the room, hall, or auditorium. Now, any spectator who desires may choose any card freely. Joseffy then calls upon it to arise, whereupon it does so. It will remain up as long as desired, and at the spectator’s word return into the pack. It will keep rising and return- ing as long as the spectator wishes, or it will again arise at any time during the performance. The same person or any one may now choose a card and re- peat the same performance. There ts ab- solutely no forcing of the cards, and at any time any spectator may choose one. During the performance, the spectator can at any time remove the pack from the card case, examine everything, and replace the pack. He can then choose another card, or the same one, and it will come up, stay up, or go down as he desires. When the performance ts finish- ed, he may remove the cards from the card case and keep them as a memento. Joseffy’s rising card trick is the result of years of research and study. Offers of thousands of dollars for it have been refused by him. NOTE—Mr. David P. Abbott, whose interesting story of Josetty’s rising cards is given here, is one of the most en- tertaining of the writers on magic al subjects. His “Behind the Scenes with the Mediums" is the best work on the sub- jectever published. He is a business man of Omaha, Neb., and makes mazic his hobby. Invitations to his private seances of mystery are much sought after. Mr. Abbott is a brilliant amateur performer, his principal work consisting of the varioustricks performed by spirit mediums, He prob- ably performs in an expert manner twenty ditterent forms of slate writing, Mr. Abbott haswritten anentertaining brochure on “The Marvelous Creations of Josetty.” whichis published by The Open Court Publishing Co., Chicago. An Effective Match-box Fake By Professor Hoffmann ! S/\etva| NY borrowed ring, coin or small object, may be received \W} in a wood- Yi en match- x= box, which is at once closed, and yet the ring passes In- stantaneously into the possession of the per- former. I refer to an ordinary match- pox, and the description 1s correct as far E. P. Dutton & Co., New York. 1 ‘Later Magic.” FIG. 1 as it goes, but the box must be “‘faked’’ a little to adapt it for this special pur- pose. The outer case 1s not altered, but on the inside of one end of the drawer portion (Fig. 1), a cut is made with a sharp penknife from @ to a, just deep enough to divide the wood, but not to injure the blue paper which forms an outside cov- ering to this portion of the box. Further

Page 11

A VANISHING CARD 9 cuts are made from @ to 6 at each cor- ner, and another from 6 to 4; all these, however, dividing both wood and paper. The effect of this 1s that the portion so dealt with, 26éa, becomes a little flap- door, as is indicated by the dotted lines, the blue paper left unbroken between a a forming the hinge. To prepare it for use, the box is open- ed by pulling out the drawer half-way, thumb above, under which conditions the ring naturally passes right through the box and falls into the palm of the hand. When it has duly arrived, a pres- sure of the thumb and fingers on the op- posite ends closes the box, and at the same time brings back the little flap to its normal condition, the ring lying be- neath the box. This little apparatus has the advantage its ‘‘faked’’ end being thus brought to the center of the outer case. The little trap-door 1s then pushed open. When receiving the ring, the performer holds the box with the fingers underneath and of costing practically nothing. It 1s equally available for use with a marked coin or any other very small object. NOTE—Professor Hoffmann is the greatest authority on magic. A review of bis work will appear in an early issue. See eee eae ea Oss aaa er a ee ee eee eee eee ee SS OS OC On Ons — ——— es CARD is chosen from a pack and an envelope given for examination Ww} and marked. The performer seals oa ee re ‘ é << ' ‘ ! WWJ Zp in mF FIG. 1 distance and commands the card to disappear. He then advances and tears open the envel- ope and it is seen that the card has vanished. The card is chosen by a spectator from a pack made up of cards all alike,* say knave of hearts. This can be exchanged, while the spectator 1s looking at and showing the card, foracomplete pack with same backs, previously placed in coat pocket, and which, of course, contains a knave of hearts. The performer then requests the card to be handed back to him and asks someone to hold the rest of the pack (the complete pack). With the original knave of hearts pack safe in his coat pocket, the conjurer now has someone mark an envelope on the address side and takes it between the thumb and first two fingers of the left hand, with the marked side to the audience. The card is next taken in the right hand, and placed, not in the envelope, but behind it, so that the flap on being sealed down closes the envelope and also secures the card. (The back is then as Fig. 1.) After vanishing the card, the envelope ts first torn along the top, then down the sides, and on being opened out, the card 1s seen to have disappeared, though in reality it is stuck firmly to the back of the upper part (Fig. 2). It now only remains for the spectator to find the duplicate card, which finishes the trick From “The Wizard,"' London. 2 Can be had of magical dealers,

Page 12

10 | MAGIC Bertram’s “I'wo-handed Pass The Latest Method for the Oldest Standard Card Sleight By C. Lang Neil 6FAue7 OLD the pack in the left hand (P| as if about to deal (Fig. 1), | and open the cards at the W i>, middle, or =) at the part of the pack where the pass 1s to be made, in- serting the little fin- er of the left hand Fig. 1A). Advance the right hand toward the pack and while doing this open the left hand so that the cards will be Open—at the top an inch, at the bottom two inches. (The half of pack above the lit- tle finger we will call No. 1, and that below, No. 2. This brings No. 1 half (Fig.2) obliquely under the fingers of the right hand. The second, third, and little fingers must be kept close together, so as to form a screen. The firs¢ finger and thumb grasp No. 2 half of cards at top and bottom. The fingers of left hand draw No.1 half downwards so as to clear No. 2 half (Fig. 3). At the same time the thumb of left hand presses on the center of top side of No. 2 half, which has the ef- fect of turning it, the first finger and thumb of right hand acting as pivots. This pres- sure raises the bottom side of No. 2 half, en- abling No. 1 half to clear it easily. As soon as it is clear the left fingers are closed up, bringing No. | half up underneath No. 2 (Fig. 4). The fingers of both handssquare up the cards and the pass 1s finished. This pass must be practiced in front of a looking-glass, and made to blend into one instantaneous movement, which must be quite notseless and also quite un- seen, the right hand being all the while held in just such a position as will serve FIG. 1. Left hand holding pack and inserting little finger at the place where cards are to be cut. FIG.1A. Back view of Fig. 1 showing the little finger inserted at point of division. to screen No. 1 half in its removal and replacement beneath No. 2 half. In the illustrations the hands have been held round a little to allow of a side view expos- ing all the positions, and the distance by which the No. 1 half clears No. 2 is much greater than is neces- sary except for the purpose of explana- tion. The audience see only the back of the right hand during the pass. The beginner should bear in mind that this pass is the most im- portant of all sleights to acquire to perfection, for it is the basis of, or used in, almost every card trick which requires any sleight of hand. It is by means of this pass that any card placed by a member of the audience into the pack is secured by the performer, or a sight of it obtained; in fact, without proficiency in this pass (for no other pass is absolutely necessa- ry) no one can conjure cleverly with cards. This latest method of working the ‘‘two- handed pass’’ differs in several important points from any that I have seen published,. in that no one, tomy knowledge (not even the up-to-date Pro- fessor Hoffmann him- self), explains that by the thumb and first finger of right hand gripping ends of No. 2, half a much better screen is ob- tained for the whole movement by the second, third, and little fingers being to- gether. And more important stillis the advice that No. 2 half is levered up by the thumb of left hand, and not, as is always advised, raised by the second and third fingers and thumb of right hand, which necessitates a movement of

Page 13

HANDKERCHIEF AND RUBBER BAND | 11 the right hand. The result of Bertram’s method is that right hand comes to the done, even if they cannot see what it is. I have dwelt at some length and repe- FIG. 3. No. 2 half drawn down by the fingers of left hand clearing No. 1 half. Note the position of left thumb pressing on center of No. 2 half, the first finwer and thumb of right FIG. 2. The fingers of left hand just beginning to bring down No. 1 half. pack ostensibly to square up cards, and remains dead still as a screen for the operation of remov- al and replacing at bottom of half No. 1, which is done in the fraction of asec- ond by the left hand under the complete cover of right. The slight move- ment of the right hand (in order to raise No. 2 half) usu- ally made by con- jurers when making the pass, permits the audience to see that something is being its importance. FIG. 4. Fingers of left hand closing up and bringing No. 1 under No. 2. By Will Goldston a) | ee By own colored ones and submit them for inspec- (Z tion), and by a single wave of the hand both OM handkerchiefs are found tobe securely tied to- is gether. The performer then makes them into _a ball and throws them into the air, and they fall to the ground separated. A glance at x ae para ue qe es = and afew minutes rehearsal be- fs fore a mirror will make you ex- pert in this trick. NOTE—Mr. Will Goldston is a popular author and inventor of magical tricks and illusions. Handkerchief and Rubber Band HE conjurer borrows two silk handkerchiefs (or carry your hand acting as pivots. Also note position of first finger of left, which keeps No. 1 half from falling out of position. tition upon this point on account of NOTE—C. Lang Neil is the author of ‘“The Modern Con- jurer and Drawing-room En- tertainer,’’ a superb volume of 414 pages, and the most completely illustrated book on magic ever published, con- taining over 500 original illus- trations from photographs. Published by C. Arthur Pear- son, London. The illustra- tions to this article are from photographs of the hands of the late Charles Bertram, the King's Conjurer. whose method of making the pass Mr. Neil describes. “Isn't it wonderful?" was the keynote of Bertram’s pat- ter. He asked this, with a smile, after each of his tricks, and the audience was always ready toreply in the affirma: tive. It was not so much what he did—it was the way he did it. People who knew his tricks enjoyed them more, perhaps, than those mystified. 747908

Page 14

12 MAGIC Conjuring As a Social Advantage By Hermann Pallme HILE magic is a splendid Neat | profession, both as to being Pipl a dignified calling and a re- f#| munerative one, yet it is my “=J purpose to consider it in its broader field, that of the amateur—and when I say amateur | mean the correct definition of the word, ‘‘A person who practices an art, especially a fine art, not as a means of liveli- 7 « - hood or profession- ally, but for the love of it. Magic compels a broader mental ho- . rizon on account of a tendency towards erudition. Its care- ful study cannot but help you to increase a command of lan- guage, and, what Is better still, the pro- , per expression of — thought—an_abso- lute necessity for one who desires so- cial prominence. The practice of magic gives a gra- cious Manner, a per- fect poise and scelf- confidence that 1s acquired in no oth- er art. It also gives polish, makes one quick-witted, devel- ops the gift of bright repartee, and addsa fine finish to one’s manner and speech. I knew a chap who had all the advan- tages wealth could give him of educa- tion and position, but of sucha quiet, re- tiring disposition that he got the reputa- tion of being morose. Naturally, he re- ceived but few invitations to social func- tions, and at those he did attend he was neglected. He lacked nothing as regards educa- tion. He was a deep thinker and conver- sant with almost every subject, but he lacked self-confidence. For his own amusement he took up the study of magic and developed rare ability in the art. One day he was per- suaded to give an exhibition of his tal- Le awe MR. CHARLES S . EBY AND HIS LITTLE DAUGH- TER ELEANORE GIVING PERFORMANCE AT A SOCIAL GATHERING IN THEIR HOME, WASHINGTON, D.C. ent before some of his father’s friends. Thoroughly wrapped up in his sub- ject he gavea really marvelous perform- ance, and had deportment and speech accompanying each trick down toa fine point. The result of that exhibition was his awakening. The report of his cleverness spread and he Is today one of the bright- est and most sought after members of his social set. He has developed into a brilliant and witty conversation- alist, has lost all dif- fidence of manner, and in fact, Ido not know a more gra- cious, better poised fellow than he is; and he gives all the credit to his study and development of that fascinating art, ' Magic. . The man or wom- ~ an who knows a few sleights in legerde- main, and can prop- erly present them for the edification of their friends, has an entree Into society, and is sure of an in- Vitation to a social function from which they might otherwise not be invited. How often have you been at enter- tainments, both public and_ private, where the program consisted only of vocal and instrumental music, and reci- tations or readings, and how many times have you declared that you would never attend another. Mark the difference if some one of the entertainers varied the monotony by performing a few tricks in magic; it add- ed varicty very essence of success- ful entertaining—to the evening, and gave a better flavor to the music and recitations. te nee ts cad AN AMATEUR MAGIC NOTE—Hermann Pallme is a nephew of ‘Herrmann the Great.” He abandoned the stage fora commercial life and lives in New York. His litte volume on” Entertaining by Mavyic”’ is one of the best essays on mawic ever written,

Page 15

THE MAGICAL MARKET 13 The Magical Market Gossip About the Magical Manufacturers and Dealers and Their New Tricks and Books Re | a glance rec- ognize little ——S——) reproduction ofthe front cover of the catalogue of Martinka & Company. Martinka’s is the oldest magical de- pot in this country, and they have been in their present quarters at the Magical Palace, 493 6th Avenue, New York City, for more than twenty- five years. Every con- ceivable thing in magic, from the nail through the finger to the most elaborate illusion, can be found or made to order at Martinka’s. Their es- tablishment is the head- quarters of magicians in America. The Society of American Magicians ILMOST every professional eg) and amateur magician will at COVER OF MARTINKA'S CATALOGUE Martinka attends to the front retail department, while Mr. Anthony Martin- ka looks after the man- ufacturing of apparatus. These three make a firm that has not only won and retained the con- fidence and support of all magicians the world over, but have also the respect and good will of all the other dealers and manufacturers. Itis conceded among magical dealers and the magic profession the world over, that Carl Willmann’s magical ap- paratus Is the best made. The Bamberg Magic & Novelty Company, 1193 Broadway, New York, have the exclusive agen- cy for these celebrated goods. They have one of the most interesting hold their meetings there, and magi- ‘Magic Shops,’’ in America. The Bam- cians from all over the world try out berg School of Magic is conducted per- their new acts on the little stage. Mr. sonally by Mr. Theo. Bamberg, form- Francis J. Martinka has charge of the erly known as ‘‘Okito.’’ Bamberg’s ex- business end of the establishment; Mrs. perience as a magician dates back 23

Page 16

14 MAGIC years. He comes from a family of magicians of the past six generations. He is conceded to be the best teacher of sleight of hand manipulation in the world. Hecan perform overone hundred original passes with balls, cards, coins, etc., and when a student enters this school he comes out a magician worthy of the name. When you are in New York, drop in and see this firm. ‘Tricks For Everyone’’is a new book by David Devant. It is a neat and at- tractive compilation of a series of articles recently published in the Royal Magazine. The book makes 130 pages, and 135 excel- lently executed art en- gravings illustrate the sixty-two tricks. The ten chapters describe: Tricks at the Writing Table; in the Smoking Room; at. the Work Table; at the Dinner Table; More Tricks at the Dinner Table; two chapters on Tricks at the Card Table; Tricks in the Garden; Tricks in the Billiard Room; and Tricks in Thought Reading. All are writ- ten up as only David Devantcan write. The book is fully worth the price asked for itand can be had of Martinka & Company, 493 Sixth Ave., New York. Mr. S. W. Bailey, of the well known firm of Bailey and Tripp, Cambridge- port, Mass., has a unique collection of handcuffs and similar appliances. He has many different styles of handcuffs and shackles, besides freaks, imitations, ‘twisters,’’ insane belts and jackets, etc. He 1s a magical enthusiast and has been successful as an amateur and professional magician, and manufacturer and deal- er in magical apparatus. The beautiful new catalogue issued by the Mysto Mfg. Company, New Haven, Conn., 1s full of excellent illustrations and full descriptions of new tricks and illusions. One of the most interesting of all those described is the ‘‘Great Wa- ter Miracle,’’ after Carl Germain. Five beautiful, heavily nickled, brass recep- TRICKS EVERYONE DAVID DEVANT tacles are shown unmistakably empty by exhibiting them, one after the other, in- side and upside down—even placing one within the other (this being done with each tube) without covering them or changing them, never taking from view; done slowly and carefully, in an abso- lutely convincing manner. Instantly, to the great astonishment of all, they be- come apparently filled with water, full and overflowing, and asaclimax, a duck emerges from the last one. No outside connection used, and it 1s real water. If you want to seea beauty in the art of bookbinding and print- ing,and to read a good lot of real magic and illusion, then get ‘‘The Magician’’ Annual for 1909-10, edited by Will Goldston. All previous efforts have been sur- passed in the compila- tion of this annual. In point of mechanical execution the book is a work of art. In con- tents there isa feast of all that is newest and best in all branches of magic; to say nothing of the many chapters on various other phases of magic art, together with the relation of ex- periences by men who have really had experi- ence. Twenty-one con- COVER OF DAVID DEVANT'S NEW BOOK trjbutors, giving all the cream of their knowledge, fill a hundred large pages with such magic and mystery as 1s not only new in name but in fact. From the chapter on ‘‘Apparatus for Amateurs,’’ by Geo. Johnson, to the last trick on page 100, there is not a dull word nora mediocre description. Tricks with all sorts of objects, and from the simplest sleight of hand to the most elaborate illusion; tricks for the begin- ner, the practiced amateur, the expert professional; tricks for the parlor, the lodge, the stage; tricks with and without apparatus; illusions of the simplest char- acter and illusions of the most ingenious construction, and yet all so plainly de- scribed by word and diagram that they can be easily made by the ordinarily skillful mechanic, or one’s own self.

Page 17

ADVERTISEMENTS 15 Twin Magazines of Enchantment Conducted by A.M. WILSON, M. D. NOW READY The first issue of MAGIC, the magazine of Wonder, is now ready. Order of your news- dealer or of the publisher direct. Single copies, 10 cents. Yearly subscriptions, 60 cents. xIC will be followed January 1, 1910, by the first number of GHOSTS, a magazine of Romance and Rea. ag and the two magazines will ublished every month, alter bar ng, making six issues of each a year. $1 a year for both. MAGIC and GHOSTS will pre- sent magic and allied subjects to the general public in a most at- tractive manner, and will deserve the support of all lovers of magic, Articles, Notes, and Pictures on the Following Subjects will Appear in Early Numbers Parlor juggling Hand shadows Planchette Tricks without apparatus Anti-spiritualistic tricksfor Magic in everyday life Amateur entertainments amateurs Impromptu tricks Crayon drawing for stage Bunkum entertainments Amateur performances Simple coin tricks Practical ventriloquism Conjuring wonders Optical illusions The talking hand Simple accessories for ama- Easy second sight Chapeaugraphy teur conjurers Novel notions Oriental magic Harmless practical jokes Hoop rolling Haunted houses Games and novelties New patter for old tricks Ominous night noises How to become an ama- Famous magicians Inexpensive methods of _ teur spirit medium Card tricks without sleight amusing Magical effects of hand Plate spinning Spirit communications Substitutes for sleight of Ventriloquial dialogue Telepathy hand New Punch and Judy dia- Astrology Shadowgraphy logue and business Clairvoyance Puzzles How to give conjuring en- Spirit return Exhibition paper manipu- _ tertainments Sealed letter reading lation Evening party entertain- Ouija talking board Crystal gazing ments Occultism Table lifting Lightning sketches Magnetism Slate writing Magical acts and sketches Metapsychics Rope tying Magic applied to advertis- Magical novelties Spirit materialization ing Shadow pantomimes Spirit photography Magic in business Photographic amusements Psychology of deception Real ghost stories Spectral illusions Psychic phenomena Speaking trumpets Practical psychology Apparitions Parlor amusements Noted spirit mediums magazines of Enchantment. Novel surprises in every number. A monthly prize package of wonder, entertainment and novelties for amateurs, enthusiasts and students. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Missouri $ 1 gets MAGIC and GHOSTS together for one year. Twelve interesting numbers of twin

Page 18

16 MAGIC Martinka & Company Magicians’ Headquarters in America 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods need no extravagant claims, being known for solid quality the world over. Complete catalogue, 25 cents. List free. Latest Color Change Handkerchief © A New Book by One hand only used. A blue David Devant handkerchief with a white TRICKS FOR border is held by the finger tips and suddenly chanyed EVERYONE to a bright red handkerchief es with a white border. Most Clever Conjuring surprising effect. No prac- . tice necessary. Works on With Common Objects f. first trial. Price, $1.50. Price, 50 cents The Changing Spots MAGICIAN A solid 3-inch die, black with white spots, is shown. A metal ANNUAL tube open at both ends is then exhibited, and performer puts 1909-1910 his arm through it. The tube is then placed over the die. A handful of round, red paper discs are thrown into the tube. On Edited by Will Goldston lifting it up the spots on the die are found tu have changed from 1(() pages, 300 Dlustrations white to red. Price, 34.00. Price, $ =2.00 Production and Color Change of Flowers A large shallow metal tray, 16x14 inches, is shown from both sides; suddenly, without any covering the tray is filled with red flowers, heaped up high; just as suddenly all the red flowers change into white, then they vanish completely. Each time the tray isshown from both sides, This very startling trick is suitable for any act and will specially be appreciated by lady mayicians and Japanese acts, Price, 36.00. NEW MAGIC 10c Pocket Trick 10c ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE FREE with the Pocket Trick. Retails at 25c. We make this generous offer to intro- duce our catalogue. Address Magic Supply Co., Dept. 40 270 West 39th St., New York When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC Copy Wanted The publisher of MAGIC will pay real, if not ‘big,’’ money for articles, drawings, photo- graphs and sketches suitable for publication in the ‘‘Twin Magazines of Wonder.’’ Ma- terial must be of interest to amateurs and the general public. No descriptions of com- plicated apparatus tricks or elaborate illusions will be considered. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 19

If It is Magic We Have It Best of Goods at Prices that are Right Catalogue Free The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 417, Cambridgeport, Mass. If you want to know MORE about the oldest and most fasci- nating amusement in the world, ST A |) : subscribe to << ZA Ges GERISS ‘THE SPHINX A monthly magazine for amateur and professional magicians. The SPHINX is the greatest paper ever de- voted exclusively to the subject. The World of Magic is thoroughly and completely cover- ed. Special, skillfully conducted departments give all the latest news about all the profes- sional magicians. News letters from corres- pondents in all parts of the world are a regu- lar feature. The newest sleights and illusions are explained, and the most recent ‘‘wrin- kles’’ and the most up-to-date effects and “‘patter’’ are published in this pre-eminent Magazine of magic. $1 a year. Single copies, 10 cents A. M. WILSON, M. D. Editor and Publisher 906 Main St., Kansas City, Mo. A.M. WILSON, M.D, MARCH 1909 Price 10 Cents When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 20

The Largest and BEST Firm in the World Handling High Class Magical Apparatus 1s The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 BROADWAY NEW YORK ROOMS7, 8 and 9 MAGIC Illusions Sole and Exclusive Agency for the Celebrated CARL WILLMANN GOODS Finest Magical Apparatus in the World. Used by all High Class Magicians NOVELTIES » If you are interested in MAGIC as a profes- sion, or as an art of entertainment, send for our complete cata- logues. They are worth their weight in gold. Professional Catalogue, 50 cents Amateur Catalogue, 10 cents NEW GOODS FACTORIES EVERY WEEK HAMBURG, GER. Bamberg School of Magic Devoted to the teaching of the Magic Art. Guarantees that you can become a Magician. Our school is endorsed by Kellar, Thurs- ton, Mme. Herrmann, Allan Shaw, Adrian Plate, Marshall P. Wilder and hundreds of others. Visitors welcome. The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York

Page 21

A MAGAZINE OF ) ROMANCE AND REASON

Page 22

Improved Ink Versus Water Trick The effects produced in this trick far surpasses any Ink Trick yet brought before the public. The performer comes in showing fourempty tumblers, a bottle of ink, and a glass jug containing water, and asmall finger bowl. Into the latter is poured the bottle of ink. This is then poured into one of the tumblers and covered with a handkerchief and given to one of the audience to hold. Anotber glass is filled with wa- ter from the jug and passed to someone to hold. After a few seconds this is seen to instantly change into ink, the other glass upon being uncovered is seen to change to water. NOW NOTE—The glass which changed to water is poured into one of the empty glasses when it instantly changes back to ink. The glass of water is poured into the other tuin- bler when it instantly develops into ink. Description fails to fully justify this splendid illusion. Price, 14 [ 6 ($3.48). Post free, 15 [3 ($3.66). Postage extra for abroad. CYCLOPS COIN TRICK This consists of a brass cap in the top of which is a small hole. It may be thoroughly examined. Three coins are borrowed and placedona table and covered with the cap. The coins and cap are then placed on the hand of one of the audience. Upon the cap being removed only two coins are found, the other coin having completely vanished. The cap and coins may be thoroughly examined to prove there is no deception, the hole in the cap allowing the audience to see right through it. This forms a splendid pocket trick. Price, 1 | 8 (40 cents), post free. Cheaper make, not rec- ommended, 1 | 2 (28 cents), post free. Postage extra abroad. PROBLEMS IN MYSTERY By Max Sterling This book contains many unique tricks and illu- sions, and should prove vey useful to both profes- sional and amateur conjurer. The tricks are well explained and it contains several illustrations. rice 2 | 6 (60 cents). Post free, 2 | 7 (62 cents). HAMLEY BROS,., Ltd. 35, New Oxford Street, W. C., London, England LONDON BRANCHES 510a and 512, Oxford Street, W. 29, Ludgate Hill, E. C. 200 and 202, Regent Street, W. 59, Knightsbridge, S. W. 86 and 87, High Holborn, W. C. (Head Warehouse) Standard Magical Books Professor Hoffmann’s Books MODERN MAGIC. Formany years Profes- sor Hoffmann has held the field as the stand- ard writer upon the fascinating subject of natural magic, and his two books, MODERN MAGIC and MORE MAGIC, cover al- most the whole range of known tricks up to the date of publi- cation of the latterin 1889. 578 pages, 318 illustrations. Hand- somely bound in cloth. Price, $1.50. MORE MAGIC. Uniform with the ahove, 457 pages, 140 illus- trations. Price, $2.00. LATER MAGIC, Professor Hoffmann’s latest book. Most up-to-date hook on magic. Ex- planation of the latest tricks. | 557 pages, 221. illustrations. Price, $2.00. Books by Henry R. Evans MAGIC ANDITS PROFESSORS. The life stories of many famous magicians. 220 pages, fully illustrated. Price, $1. 25. THE OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC, Introduction by Paul Carus. With numerous illus- trations and programs of enter- tainments of leading magicians - oh times. 383 pages, Price, 2), D. P. Abbott’s Books BEHIND THE SCENES WITH THE MEDIUMS. The best work on this subject aa printed. 328 pages. Price, $1.70. THE MARVELOUS CREA- TIONS OFJOSEFFY. 25 pp., 15illustrations. Price, 15 cents. « Any of the above books will be sent on receipt of price hy the following dealers THE BAILEY & TRIPP MAGICAL CO. Box 417, Cambridgeport, Mass. MARTINKA & CO. 493 Sixth Ave., New York. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention GHOSTS

Page 23

A MAGAZINE OF ROMANCE AND) REASON VOLUME I CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M. D. NUMBER 1 CONTENTS FOR FEBRUARY, 1910 COVER From a rare book in the Astor Library, New York DIRECTIONS FOR SEEING THE SPECTRES Frontispiece Iustration from ‘‘Spectropia’’ SPECTRAL ILLUSIONS 3 Plates and illustrations from drawings TITREADING THE MAZES RHODE KNIGHT 7 Illustrations from drawings THE SPHINX RIDDLE OF HUMANITY HEnNrkY RIDGELY Evans Y Hlustration from a drawing AN AFTERNOON IN A MAGICAL LIBRARY . ErNeEst EVANGELINE 10) Mlustrations from old prints, etc. ee HOW I BECAME A SPIRIT MEDIUM A Mepium 12 GHOSTS is published every other month (six issuesa year! by Ernest Evangeline, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Missouri, C28. 4. Yearly subscriptions, 60.cents. Single copies. cents. Copyright, 1910, by W. J. Lucas. MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER THE TWIN MAGAZINES OF ENCHANTMENT GHOSTS is a twinto MAGIC, The Magazine of Wonder. The two magazines are published every month alternating, making six numbers of each a year. 60 cents a year each, or ¥1 a year for both; single copies, 10 cents. These twin mayazines present magic and allied subjects to the general public in the most attractive manner, with a strong leaning towards the recreative side rather than the sceintific or philosophical. The March number of MAGIC, ready February 25th, will contain a novel paper cut-out trick, an original comedy magical sketch, interesting illustrated articles on magical subjects, practical tricks, and lots of pictures. A prize pack- age of wonder, entertainment and novelties foramateurs, enthusiasts and students. Magic, Ghosts, Conjuring, Puzzles, Sleight of Hand, En- tertaining, [lusions, Spiritism, Ventriloquism, Psychical Research, Psychology and Sorcery are some of the sub- jects to be thoroughly and completely covered in ‘“The Twin Magazines of Enchantment.’ ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo. JANUARY 1910 PRICE 16 CENTS What A Conjurer Can Do Ry (we! Dev eer The Marvelous Rising Cards of Joseffs tr Cees FA»

Page 24

PLATE I. Changes to white skeleton, with green mantle, blue background. DIRECTIONS FOR SEEING THE SPECTRES To see the spectres, itis only necessary to look stead- ily at the cross, below the chin in the above figure, tor about a quarter of a minute, or while counting about twenty, the plate being well illuminated by either arii- ficial or day light; then turn the eyes to the ceiling. the wall or sky, or, better still, to a sheet hung on the wall ola darkened room (not totally dark), and looking stead: ily at any one point; the spectre will soon begin to make its appearance, increasing in intensity and then vradually vanishing, to reappear and again vanish. It will continue to do so several times in succession. each reappearance being fainter than the one preceeding. Winking the eyes, or passing a finger rapidly to and fro before them, will frequently hasten the appearance of the spectre, especially if the plate has been strongly Hluminated, Those who use gas light will find it convenient, after having looked at the plate as above described, to ex temporize a darkened room by having the gas sudden lv turned low. The size of the spectres will be determined by the distance of the eves from the plate and trom) the sur: face awainst which thes are seen, being larger the near- er the plate, and smaller the nearer the surface; sothat short-sighted persons will see them larger than long sighted, ifboth are equidistant from the surface against which they are seen, Should anyone not be able to see the spectre’s fea tures, the reason will be that eitherthe eyes have been allowed to wander or the head move while looking at the plate, Many persons will see some one colored spectre bet- ter than others in consequence of their eves not being equally sensitive to all colors. The colors in the plate will be found to reverse them- selves in the spectre, the spectre always appearing of the complementary color to that of the plate from which it is obtained. Thus, red willappear green. and green, red, etc. An infinite amount of amusement can be derived from the simple experiments here given. Haunted house parties, with a white sheet ina darkened room. against which the guests (ina lighted hallway or adjoin- ing room) can see ghosts, thus offering a splendid even- ing sentertainment. The experiment must be repeated, if the ghosts are not seen on first trial. ~ nail _- . 2g. oe res

Page 25

VOLUME | Publisher’s Prologue Yes, [believe in Ghosts. Not the kind vou think I mean, but—I! believe tn Ghosts. Ibelieve in Ideas. The thought is the thing. But then, ve had lots of pleasant thouglits. Many a man with a good one has to beat it up and down Main Street blowing for his own Invain. It takes a good salesman to sell a bet- ter idea. lam going tothresh out this ghost business. The LAST WORD on this subject is going to be said in this mayazine. I am yoing to print ideas enough here, during the next few vears, to enable any living being to decide for him- self, once and forever, whether there is any- thing beyond the grave. Atthe start, Pwant it to go on recerd that | dearly and truly want to believe thatif Pdic, Iwill live ayain. | know vou believe as I Go. 1 will have a sympathetic audience. So, we will go into this matter together carefully and thoroughly. As the months go by we shall see what comes. May be we will prove some- thing—demonstrate something. FEBRUARY 1910 NUMBER | Send me YOUR ideas---and your friends’ ideas. ‘Tell me anytime anything that will help us make connections with the next world. | want other people's expenences. Ihave had remarkable experiences myself. Were I to put them down here vou would not. believe to me they are real. But I pray you not to send me any written word cf yours or of others’ psychic experiences that | cannot) print in this mayazine with YOUR NAME AND ADDRESS AT THE BOTTOM. I want to convince others. You and | may KNOW but the rest don't. I have ho patience with those ‘‘well known’ and “*responsible’’ men and women who have experienced most wonderful and convincing psychic phenomena but refuse to give the public names, dates and places for verifica- tion and analysis. Truth has never injured the human race, but the misapprehension and fear of it have. ERNEST EVANGELINE Spectral Illusions Shades, Shapes and Shadows of the Eye and Imagination From ‘‘Spectropia,’’ Astor Librarv, New York a} GIIOST, according to the general descriptions of those who fancy they have been favored with a sight of one, a appears to be of a pale phos- phorescent white, or bluish white color; usually indistinct, and so transparent that objects are easily seen through tt. When moving it glides in a peculiar man- ner, the legs not being necessary to its locomotion, All the senses are more or fess subject to deception, but the eye 1s pre-eminent- ly so; especially in the case of persons who are in all health, because the sen- sibility of the retina is then generally more exalted, as Is also the imagination, We may divide the dlustons to which the sight sense is Hable into four kinds. First, mental, or those arising from the brain itself, and only referred to the eye. Second, those produced by the structure of the eye. Third, those arising from the impressions of outward objects on the retina. Fourth, those produced by vart- ous combinations of the forgoing. It ts only the second and third we shall have occasion to touch upon. But before we can well understand thetr nature, it will be necessary to get aslight knowledge of the structure of the eye, and some idea respecting the nature of ght. With perhaps the exception of the ear, the eve is the most wonderful example of the infinite skill of the Creator, A more exquisite piece of mechantsm it ts impossible for the human mind to con- ceive. The annexed diagram (Fig. 1) of a horizontal section of this organ will give a better idea of its general structure

Page 26

4 GHOSTS than whole pages of letter-press. It will be seen to consist of'a globe of three en- velopes or coats, which are kept distend- ed by three transparent humors or lens- es: the aqueos (¢), the crystaline (/), and the vitreous (g). The outer coat (a) 1s dense, white and fibrous. In front of the eye it gives place to a perfectly trans- a> hes | qs: ee” FIGs. t parent one, called the cornea (d@). The next coat, the choroid (4), is vascular, very black on its internal surface, in order that light falling on it through the pupil (4) may not be reflected. The pu- pil is an opening througha diaphragm which is called the iris (2), from its color varying in different individuals. It has the power of expanding and contract- ing the pupil, for the purpose of regu- lating the supply of light to the retina (c), or third and last coat which les im- mediately on the choroid. It as) trans- parent, very complex, and the only part of the eye we shall carefully consider. ae CPCs R —— 3900000000 re) Ce eae g on NIG. 2 FIG. 3 The following diagram (Fig. 2) repre- sents a section of magnified 250 diam- eters: ais called the limitary membrane, and forms its innermost surface, or that which is next the vitreous humor; 6 consists of the layer of optic nerve fibres; cis a layer of grey nerve cells; ad, two layers in which the principal retinal blood wessels are spread out; e, two lay- ers of granular matter; 4, Jacob's mem- brane, or layer of rods and cones. Fig. 3 will give some idea of the supposed con- FIG. 4 nection between these various parts, the same letters referring to the same parts as in Fig. 2. Whena ray of light enters the eye, it passes through the humors or lenses, and FIG. 5 is formed by them into an image, on the choroid, of the object looked at. The ex- tremities of the rods and cones have the power of appreciating the image there formed, and convey it up through the FIG, 6 ultimate parts of the retina (Fig. 2), thence along the optic nerve fibres to the brain. We are inclined to regard the extremities of the rods and cones as the

Page 27

SPECTRAL ILLUSIONS- 5 true seat of perception, in consequence of observing a considerable distance be- tween the retinal blood vessels and the choroid, when performing Parkinje’s ex- periment. This experiment consists tn passing a lighted candle slowly to and fro in front of the eyes, at about two or three inches from the nose, when the retinal vessels will exhibit themselves before the observer not unlike branching tery will be seen emerging and spread- ing over the entire retina; but in the dia- gram that part only is represented which could) be seen tolerably distinct. The background to the artery appears of a pale red, exceptat the part occupied by the optic nerve where it ts white. After this rapid glance at so compli- cated a structure, and bearing ino mind that some persons can see its several PLATE If. Changes to white skeleton, Look steadily at cross in mouth to get spectral in pression trees. They may be seen by daylight, by passing the large teeth of an ordinary comb slowly back and forwards before the eye whilst looking on asmooth sheet of paper, or the sky. Fig.4 represents those of the left eye, as seen by candle- light. The spot marked & 1s the exact center of the retina. (The same letter marks the same spot in Fig. 1). It is the seat of most distinct vision. 71s the en- trance of the optic nerve (Figs. 4+ and 1), from the center of which the retinal ar- parts with far greater facility than oth- ers, it cannot be a matter of surprise that persons not aware of these facts are, now and then—especially at night, and when carrying a light about— startled by what they fancy an apparition, but which ts In reality nothing more than some part of the structures above considered. “A lady assures us that she saw the ghost of her husband as she was going down stairs with a lighted candle in her hand. The spot 4, Fig. 4, when seen against a

Page 28

0 GHOSTS wall a few feet distant, appears about the size of a human head, and wants very little to furnish it with features. Figured paper on the wall, and a host of other things, may supply them, or even the retinal artery, which often lends body and limbs (Fig. 5). Besides the above mentioned struc- tures, there are others which may play an important part in these illusions, es- pecially the common muscoe volantes, So called from their resemblance to flying flies. They consist of cells and filaments, the debris of the eye, and float about in its humors. That some of them exist very near the retina appears evident from the fact that, on placing the eye close toa gauze wire blind, distinct miniature imn- ages of parts of the gauze will be seen in them (Fig. 6). We now pass to consider some of the leading properties of light. There have been many theories propounded from time to time in order to explain the va- rious phenomena connected with this subject, but only one accords well with them all, and that is called the undula- tory or vibratory theory, which, from its numerous complications, will compel us to confine ourselves toa consideration of that part only which ts necessary to our present use. This theory regards light as the vibrations of an imponderable ether pervading all space, the number of these vibrations varying in a given time for each of the three primary colors—blue, yellow and) red—the greatest number producing blue, the least red, and an tn- termediate number yellow, all other col- ors being produced by the combination of these in vartous proportions. Any two primary colors mixed together makes the complementary color to the third, and the third is also complementary to Thus, blue and yellow makes green, which is the complementary color to red; red and blue make purple, comple- mentary to yellow; yellow and red make orange, complementary to blue. When the three primary colors are mixed to- gether, white isthe result: sowhen a ray of white light falls upon a piece of paper, and all the vibrations are equally redect- ed, the paper will appear white, and. if they are all absorbed, it will) appear black; but, ifthe paper absorbs some and reflects others, it will appear colored. Thus, if. it absorbs those producing red, it willappear green, from the mixture of the vibrations producing blue and yel- low: and if it absorbs blue and yellow, and reflects red, then it will appear red. In this manner any object we look at will appear of any particular color, according to which vibrations it absorbs and which it reflects. The retina is so admirably construct- ed that it ts susceptible of different im- pressions of color by these different vi- brations, except, in the case of a few in- dividuals who are either blind to all col- or, and therefore sce everything black or white, and their intermediate shades, or who are blind to only one or two colors. | When we look steadily ata red object for a few seconds that part of the retina on which the image impinges begins to vet less sensitive to vibrations producing red, but more sensitive to those produc- ing blue and vellow; so that on turning the eye away from the red object, and permitting a little white light to enter it, that part of the retina which received the red image will, in consequence of its diminished sensibility to that color, and its exalted sensibility to blue and yel- low, be able to perceive the two latter colors best, and by their mixture will give rise to a green image of the red ob- ject. The same thing will be observed with all the other colors; the secondary imaye orspectre always appearing of the complementary color to the object from which the impression ts obtained. The duration and vividness of these impressions on the retina vary greatly in different individuals, and can be pro- cured from almost any object. A person, looking steadily, and, as often happens, unconsiously for a short time at printed or painted figures, on paper, porcelain, etc., see, on turning the head in some other direction, a life-sized or colossal spectre (the spectre appears larger the greater the distance of the surface on which the color spectre is seen), and there can be little doubt but that many of the reputed ghosts originate thus. Dr. Lombard was seated on the porch of a house neara bay. His host's daugh- ter was sitting on the steps, about nine feet from him, her profile well in view. For no particular reason, he began to stare at her, concentrating all his atten- tion upon her features. On turning his eyes tothe bay, he saw the girl's image very distinctly.

Page 29

THREADING THE MAZES Threading the Mazes A Puzzler’s World Tour Through the Labyrinths Famed in History, Art and Fable By Rhode Knight ie asl Tis a farcry from Hampton — Fig. 8 is innocent of any such intent. lan f a | N y,.\ Court: Palace to the City of In ancient Crocodilopolis, then, we SM eZ) Crocodilopolis, have the starting point of i yc yi yet it is to the our tour of the mazes of the | eS latter spot that we must repair if we would visit the site of what was not only the original maze or labyrinth, but also one of the most wonderful struc- tures the world has) ever seen. Crocodilopolis is now better known as) Arsinoe, near Lake Moeris in Egypt. Although graphically and minutely described by He- rodotus and other ancient the earliest known drawing writers, It was only within Rey of a maze. Itistaken froma ae . PIG. 1. UThe Wilderness.” Ver- . comparatively recent years | sailles—the most beautifulwork tude drawing scratched by that the massive ruins of fie kind exer deyiend: an idle hand on a pillar in this city, and the more famous laby- ancient Pompei. The Latin inscription rinth were identified by Lepsius, whose 9 ““Labyrinthus hic habitat Minotaurus,”’ discoveries led him to. be- freely translated) means: heve the city itself was Here in the labyrinth the founded 1800 B. C., and Minotaur dwells. the labyrinth was built by The curious and tn many Amenhemha ITI. instances beautiful laby- The chambers and pas- rinthian mosaic pavements ages of the labyrinth were known at the time of the so arfully contrived thatit Crusaders as “*chemins de was impossible for anyone Jerusalem,’’ which may be to enter and = retrace his seen yet in the Continental steps without a guide; and churches, especially Italy Pliny sums up the matter __. and France, appear never : : . FIG. 2. A typical maze which once . ° styling it one of the won- | existed on Ripon Common with a tO have been introduced in ders of the world. path 407 yards long. English churches or cathe- How bewildering such a multiplicity 9 drals. In England, during the medieval of passages may become ts, however, — pertod the adaption of the maze took a manifest from Fig. 7, although in this somewhat different and a rather more case the confusion is intentional, But practical form. As the rules of the mon- world. The next spot to be visited is Cnossus in Crete, the site of a labyrinth still more celebrated in history and picturesque mythology, about which archeologists and antiquarians generally have long wrangled. Mean- while, it may not be inap- propriate to show a very much reduced facsimile of one of the earliest——perhaps FIG. 1. Conventional representations of labvrinths on Cnossian coins. B.C. 500-200,

Page 30

Ss GHOSTS o astertes then existing often) prohibited the monks from going “out of sight and A py xf X: FIG. 6. Plan of the maze formerly eyisting near St. Ann's Well. Sneinton, where the monks were exercised. hearing,’ and as the ground available for exercise was sometimes limited, it became necessary to devise some plan whereby the friars of orders grey and other shades could enjoy that physical recreation which is so essential to good health. Thus it came about that open spaces in the vicinity of several abbeys or monasteries were laid with narrow paths in a geometrical pattern-— general- ly of concentric circles, similar to that shown in Fig. 6, which represents a maze formerly existing near St. Ann's Well, Sneinton, in Notts. . There is reason to kelieve, that these mazes, as was the case in France and Itahan churches, were also used as a means of penance—monks who had been guilty of some slight breach of monastic LABIN Ty 1S PABI TAST * ie NA IK ea) (\ ss oe FIG, 9. One of the earliest known drawin-ss of a labs rinth, scratched ena pillar in ancient Pompeii. discipline being ordered to recite pray- ers at different stations on their way to the center, and, for severer punishment, perform the journey on theirhands and knees. Space will not admit of a list of the many places in England where these nazes were, at no distant date, to be found. Most of them have been plowed up, orso neglected that their original de- sign would be unknown were it not for the plans preserved in musty folios. A FIG. 4. The Hampton Court maae, latd out in 1700, maze which once existed at Pimperne, near Blandford, in Dorset, the plan of which was extremely intricate. This naze, itis said, covered an acre of land, and the length of the extremely tortu- ous path, which ran between small grass ridges about a foot high, exceeded a mile. A maze, shown in Fig. 2, which formerly existed on Ripon Common, had a path 407 yards long, andin point of desiyn may be taken as typical of the majority, that at Pimperne being quite exceptional in its intricacy. So popular were these mazes among the simple-minded villagers of olden FIG. 7. Imagine this to be the ground plan of the big laby- rinth at Crocodilopolis, and see how confusing a nuniber of passages may become. times that dances were specially made for them, and to tread, or, more prop- 4 ae erly, to thread the maze,” was once a

Page 31

THE SPHINN RIDDLE OF These like the mazes themselves, were (BZ favorite and picturesque pastime. dances, a” FIG. 8. A hedge maze designed in 1608. The tending of all the hedges involved an enormous amount of labor. intricate, and recall the lines: ‘*Mark how the labyvrinthian turns they take, The circles intricate, and mystic maze.’ The famous maze at Hampton Court, ma] HIS is the question of the DF ages, the Sphinx riddle that 2% llumamty has been trying BY H to solve since time began. == A scientific demonstration of immortality is declared to be ut- terly impossible. But why go tosci- ence for such a proof? The ques- tion docs belongs to the domain of philosophy — and religion. Science deals with phys- ical forces” and thetr relations : collects and = in- ventories facts. [ts mission is not to es- tablish a universal metaphysic of things; that is philosophy’s preroga- tive. All occult thinkers declare that lhifeisfrom within, out. In other words life, or a spiritual principle, preceeds The idles Riddle of Humanity By Henry Ridgely Evans HIUMANITY Y lig. 4+, was constructed in 1700. The key: to this maze is to keep to the hedge on IG. 5. \varden maze designed by Batty Langley in 1725. Constructed of hedges 8 to 10 ft. high, your right and follow it without devia- tion, both tn going tothe center and on leaving it. The maze at Versailles, Fig. 1, was laid out in the midst of a dense wood and the most beautiful ever made. organization, Science proceeds to in- vestigate the phenomena of the unl- verse in the opposite way from with- out, in; and pronounces: life to be ‘a fortuitus collocation of atoms.’’ Still, science has been the torch-bearer of the ages and has stripped the fringe of super- stition from the tree of life. It has revealed to us the great laws of na- ture, though it has not explain- ed them. We now know that light, heat and electri- city are modes of motion; we know no more. Science 1s responsible for the ma- terialistic philosophy in vogue today. A philosophy that sees no reason in the universe. A powerful wave ofspintual thought has set in.

Page 32

10 GHOSTS . 7 ei Fares © eed Gee Ne 4 hee he whet te te eta ere fe tet oe Hele @! —. ° i atenedd nae See of ie rele! eh dt Om tir Rete ota & » o- ASCRAP BOOK IN DR. WILSON'S COLLECTION, An Afternoon in a Magical Library rel FEW hours iS) research ina 1 magic libra- ory would, no = doubt, rude- ly disillusion shortsight- ed, near magicians, who beheve that magic was invented in) 1872, the date of the first book by Prof. Lloffmann. In 1774 gentlemen of leisure, court hangers-on, stu- dents, and teachers and business men, diverted themselves by perform- ing tricks that lots of young fellows fall upon nowadays accidentally, and imagine that they are uncovering: a really new sleight. But !n 1774, they called them “‘Rec- reations ! 0" The most interesting work in Dr. A. M. Wil- son's) splendid collection of magical books, 1s Rational Recreations, printed in By Ernest Evangeline RATIONAL RECREATIONS, In which the PRINCIPLES of N U M B E R § AWD NATURAL PHILOSOPHY Are clearly and copioufly elucidated, BY A SERIES OF EASY, ENTERTAINING, INTERESTING EXPERIMENTS. Among which are All thofe commonly performed with the Carns. By W. HOOPER, MD. VOL. Iv. LOoOnobD oo i#wN, Printed for L. Davis, Holborn; J Rossow, New Bond-freet , B. Law, Avemary-lane; and G Rosinson, Pater.noker row. MDCCLXXIV. six volumes in 1774, and profusely illustrated by full page copper etch- ings. Toreproduce these books today, would cost asmall fortune and no publishercould be found who would attempt it. The title-page and one of the full page illustra- tions from this work are shown herewith, greatly reduced, and the reader will discover in one cor- ner of the reproduction of the copper etching, anexplanatory diagram of the rising cards trom a goblet. They are do- inge that trick yet! It would) take many afternoons and dozens of pages of this maga- zine to digest and de- scribe Dr. Wilson's ma- gical library. The lower part of the walls of nearly every room in his home are completely covered with

Page 33

AN APIEERSOON IN. A MAGICAL LIBRARY 11 shelves of books. And many volumes, and thousands of pamphlets, newspaper COPPER ETCHING FROM A BOOK ON MAGIC PUBLISHED IN 1774. Wilson Collection, clippings and magazine articles are kept in boxes, awaiting Dr. Wilson’s time for classification and indexing. For forty years the editor of 7he Sphinx and “The Twin Magazines of Enchantment’ has been gathering together this storehouse of magical literature and odds and ends. Hundreds of friends and correspondents in all parts of the world have contributed everything from magicians’ programs and newspaper notices, to magazines and books. An endless chain of magic and—Magic! In glancing through the many vol- umes, I was especially attracted by the Overture’ to the Life of Robert Houd- in, written by himself: “Eight o'clock has just struck: my wife and children are by my side. I have spent one of those pleasant days which tranquility, work and study can alone secure .With no regret for the past, with no fear for the future, lam —lam not afraid to say it—as happy as man can be. And vet, at each vibration of this mysterious hour, my pulse starts, my temples throb, and I can scarce breathe, so much do | feel the want of air and motion. I can reply to no questions, so thoroughly am I lost in a strange and deliri- ous reverie. Shall | confess to you, reader. And why not? For this electrical effect is not of ana- ture to be casily understood by vou. The reason for my emotion being extreme at this moment is, that, during my professional ca- reer, cight o'clock was the moment when I must appear before the public. Then, withan eye fixed on the hole in the curtain, | surveyed with in- tense pleasure the crowd that flocked in to see me. Then, as now, my heart beat, for I was proud and happy of such success. At times, too, a doubt, a feeling of uneasiness, would be mingled with my pleasure. ‘‘Heav- ens !"" [| would say to myself, in terror, ‘‘am | so sure of mysclf as to deserve such anxiety to see mer. But, soon reassured by the past, | waited with vreater calmness the signal for the curtain to draw up. I then walkedon the stage: I was near the foot-lights, before my judges—but no, | err hefore my kind spectators, whose applause | was in hopes to gain.”* I found the old scrap-books the most entertaining of all. Some of them, past- ed full by Dr. Wilson in the early days of his interest in magic, are especially curious and instructive. Old clippings from Screntific American, Harper's Week- ly, New York Sun and the leading jour- nals of the world, are found in profusion. The history of American magic 1s writ- ten there. Careers of famous performers, like Carl and Alexander Herrmann, Hel- ve) : ’ MAGICAL COMBINATIONS Fifty Years in the Magic Circle.” by Signor Blitz. Wilson Collection, From" ler, Keller and Thurston can be followed almost month by month. And for those who fear the results of exposure of the iAnitizan b\ ,_e\ “we Pe VIQHIZED DY WHA

Page 34

12 GHOSTS secrets of magic, there are hundreds of clippings from the most prominent pe- nodicals and newspapers in the United States yviving away the world’s best - tricks, with splendid pictures and mi- nute explanatory diagrams. Nota good trick or famous illusion performed in the last half century that has not been com- pletely and accurately explained many times in the leading journals of America. They were the wonders of their day soon forgotten by the general public. If there are 90,000,000 people in this coun- try, there are only 900,000 who enjoy magical performances, and only 9,000 who would ever read a magical paper. I received a letter from aman the oth- er day who wrote: “IT am afraid that by the sale of your paper on the newstands the secrets of magic will soon become public property.’” Well, they have been, for about two hundred years! I] came away from Dr. Wilson's home and left his enchanting books more firm- ly convinced than ever that there ts a lot to forget in magic. And inspired too, with the ambition to work for the appli- cation of the principles of magic to ef- fects that have atwentieth century look about them ! How I Became A Spirit Medium A Remarkable Confession of ‘Trickery and Deceit By A Medium "BOS (Ces! N the year [871 Lwasa young 3 man of seventeen years, and Sab 7 working at my chosen occu- ) pation in one of the capital [Skee Cities of the middle States. I was a materialist of the most pronounc- ed type. Idid not delieve anything, hold- ing that what was truth, could be dem- onstrated, My family, with the exception of my father, were converts to Spirttualistic philosophy and phenomena, and were regular attendants at the seances of the three or four local mediums and the mectings held on Sunday by the organi- zed society of Spiritualists of my city. My family at no time obtruded their views upon me, nor said anything in op- position to the ideas held by myself. Not being given to airing my opinions iInspeechat any and all places and times, itcame about that the members of my family had been numbered in the fold of the Spiritualists for perhaps four years before my attention was sufficiently at- tracted to the subject to undertake an in- vestigation ofits peculiar claims. Know- ing that the members of my family were possessed of ordinary intelligence and exhibited average powers of logical ar- sument on questions other than reli- gious or Spiritualistic, ] concluded that either there was some fire beneath the smoke, or there were some clever artists engaged in the business. From the ac- counts of the phenomena occuring with and in the presence of their favorite me- dium, given me by my married sister, a lady with a liberal education and a cool, analytical mind, I was forced to the con- clusion that those ‘‘kings of magic," Herrmann and. Hellar, still had a few things to learn. The first seance that I attended, was one given in my native city by a man reputed so wonderful that I found it im- possible not to go just once, anyway. That first seance changed the whole course of my then honorable life and led to a professional career of deception and adventure. Had 1 never come in contact with other than finished, professional medi- ums, the chances are that I would not have become an adventurer. It. finally struck me that, inorder to make certain of the truth of the matter, it would) be the proper thing to sit for the develop- ment of a ““mediumship’’ of my own. | would use every endeavor to obtain some mediumistic gift, and if PE succeed- ed, that would finally and indisputably settle the matter. If ] did not succeed | would, of course, have the same uncer- tainty about it as before | attempted my development. It would cost nothing but a small portion of my time, and even if it was a failure there would be no Loss. Accordingly, after asking several me- diums for the proper instructions until they were obtained, and I had been as- sured that if they were carefully observ- ed there would be no such thing as fatl- ure, a cabinet was erected at my home

Page 35

HOW TIT BECAME A SPIRIT MEDIUM 13 and the attempt at development begun. I begun my ‘development’ sittings in-as handsome a cabinet, and with as good instruments as the purses of my friends, who would not allow me to go to any expense, would permit. Those who sat outside were Spiritualists, six of them; all interested in seeing the pros- pective medium developed to the full- ness of his capabilities, whatever they might be. They were friends of my fami- ly and IT found the development busi- ness quite pleasant. The sittings were kept up for the three months named as the time that the mani- festations would begin, but none had put mn appearance, neither had I expert- enced anything that led me to believe that any progress had been made. Iwas abjured to be patient by the ‘sitters,’ who told me that it was an easy thing for the spirits to be mistaken as to the length of time required to bring about results, but that they were probably not far wrong, and possibly the next sitting would see the first of the manifestations. Thus encouraged, I continued the sit- tings for six months. Nothing occured, except a healthy desire on the part of both medium and sitters that the mani- festations be forthcoming, giving mean Inchnation to cause some phenomena on my own hook. The more | thought about it the stronger became the desire to practice a little deception on my friends, then, after telling them about it, drop the matterentirely. After turning it over mmy mind for some time, | concluded 1] would sce what effect a few spurious manifestations would have upon my friends. It would be easy, they having unbounded confidence in me. My mind made up to doit, Lhardly knew what to try, and finally concluded I would wait until the sitting came around and, after vetting into the cabinet, see what sug- eested itself. This was the course J pursued, and on one Saturday evening, after the first song had been sung, the sitters were de- lighted to hear sharp raps, seemingly on the walls of the room, within the cabtr- net. Of course, Thad to be happily sur- prised, or appear so, which IT did, and my first act of deceit was done. 1 was forced to deny the authorship of the raps also, and the first lie had been given birth. The sitters endeavored to get re- ples to questions, but they did not suc- ceed, for I did not care to go to that length with my deception and, besides, did not know what answers to make to the inquiries. Nothing occured but the raps, although every ear and eye was alert to catch anything that might tran- spire. The sitters also displayed a tend- ency to connect any noise occuring to Spiritual agency. Noting this, I could not help reflecting with what ease one could deceive them. It also gave me an Instructions for Developing Spirit Mediumship Construct a cabinet in the corner of your room by hanging across it a pair of heavy curtains, fastening them to the walls of the room where they touch at the sides, but leav- Ing themropen in the middle of the front. Put into the cabinet a banjo or guitar, tea-bell, tambourine, pair of slates and tin trumpet. Have four or six persons to sit with vou, equally divided between the sexes. They are to sit in a semi-circle about the front of the cabinet, the sexes alternating, clasping each other's hand. Youare to sit inside the cabinet alone, and remain one hour in as passive a condition as it possible for you to attain. The sitters outside should sing about four songs during the hour you are sitting. You should sit twice per week, always the same evening and hour, Tuesday and ‘Saturday evenings, eleht until nine o'clock. These instructions are all that will be neces- sary until you are able to get further advice through your own ‘‘mediumship.” There is no such thing as failure if you persist in fol- lowing out these instructions, and you will begin to receive demonstrations within three months. idea that the average medium had pretty smooth sailing when he had none but Spiritualists in his circle. If he could not readily offer an explanation forany thing OCCUrIN, some one of the sitters would doit for him, thus educating himin the business, | When nine o'clock had struck and 1 came from the cabinet, you may rest assured J felt strange. To owas sure that every time one of the sitters looked upon iIny face they not only knew that I had made the raps, but had led about it afterwards. A dozen times T was on the point of peaching on myself, but as many times did a sense of shame overcome my resolution and I told myself that I would tell them one at a time, as [met them, laugh it down and dismiss any turther sittings. The sitters were so delighted, and offered so many unselfish congratula-

Page 36

14 GHOSTS tions and encouragements, shaking my hand and patting me on the back, it 1s no wonder that I felt my smallness. One of the ladies remarked: — - “There! I am sure none of us need ever have any doubts regarding phys- ical manifestations after this. Iam sure Mr. — would be guilty of no act of deceit.”’ Think of it, reader. A respected lady friend offering such an expression of per- fect confidence in me regarding the very thing in which I had just been deceiving her. Would you have felt perfectly at case In my place? I think not. I was glad when the sitters had depart- ed, and thought long and deeply on my deception, and concluded not to say a word to any of them about it, but just shut down on any more seances. My wits were at work the entire time that elapsed between the regular sitting nights trying to concoct some plausible reason why 1 discontinued the development course. The evening came, however, and no excuse that I could offer without excit- ing the suspicion that the manifestations of the previous sittings were a fraud, had been formulated. After the sitting had gotten under way, the requests by the sitters tor phenomena were s fre- quent and entreating that my conscience smote me again and again for my pre- vious deception. Tlowever, Psoon found myself rapping again. This time I essay- ed answers to the questions regarding the progress made in the medium’'s de- velopment, rapping an affirmative an- swer to the questions, ““Is the develop- ment proceeding satisfactorily, and will he develop good physical powers?" Nothing but raps occured at this sit- ting, and the sitters were much pleased that the raps had been made to answer their questions. This was looked upon as a decided impovement over the preceed- ing sitting. L was not so much abashed at their compliments and encourage- ments as on the previous occasion, and during the following week T actually found myself wondering what new thing I could do that would create more inter- est and enthusiasm than the raps. The only thing I could think of was to pro- duce “spirit lights.” This I tried with match-heads. It was successful and the sitters were delighted. The lights and raps were all that were produced for some dozen or more. sit- tings, for the reason that I could: think of nothing more wonderful. One evening l went to sleep in my cabinet, and upon waking found that I was supposed by the sitters to be entranced. It struck me as the proper thing to allow them to re- main undeceived, which I did. The sit- ters took this for a sign that some new phenomena was about to occur, It did not, however, until one evening I found about twenty feet of rope that had been concealed in the cabinet without my knowledge. I found it nicely coiled and tied with thread to the under side of the cane chair seat in which I sat. I had no knowlege of rope tying feats, but under- took to bind myself with the ropes, and this I finally succeeded in doing. I then essayed my first speaking under control by exclaiming, ‘‘Look, look, look, un- til the sitters understood that the spirits wanted them to examine the medium s condition, The sitters were delighted beyond measure at finding me apparently so se- curely bound. The light was so dim that it was impossible to detect anything wrong with the knots or manner of tying. I was fearful, though, all through the ex- amination that some of them would dis- cover my deception, and only breathed freely when the examination had been completed and I was admitted to be ‘most securely bound, and in away that it was impossible to have accomplished himself.”’ 1 realized, however, that the absolute confidence of the sitters in my honesty had as much to do with the successful termination of my rope tying test as any- thing else, and that with a “‘circle” of skeptics, it would have been an entirely different matter. Little did I think at this time that at one day in the future F would have the reputation, deservedly too, of being the best and most satisfactory phenomenal medium in the United States. Little did I suspect that I would be able not only to duplicate the performances of the most skilled mediums, but improve them and be the means of converting hun- dreds to a belief in the phenomena of modern Spiritualism. Such, however, are the facts in the case. NOTE —The above remarkable confession of deception is from" Revelations of a Spirit Medium.” published in SUL. author unknown, Ttis said that the plates forthe book were afterwards bought up and destroyed and many han: dreds of copies burned Ty persons whe did not want the book circulated,

Page 37

ADVERTISEMENTS 15 Send 10 Cents for Catalogue of Magic Tricks, with up-to-date lists. Ask for list of Mind Reading, Second-sight and Anti-Spiritualistic Illusions for Parlor and Stage. Send $1.00 for the “Zanzig’’ setof Mind Reading Cards. Easy and effective. W. D. LEROY Boston School of Magic 103 Court Street, Boston, Mass. A Magic ‘Trick CATALOGUE FREE Peerless Trick & Novelty Co. Dept. 18, 3148 State Street Chicago, Ill. —— ————————————— The March issue of MAGIC, ready kebruary 25th, will contain a notable contribution tothe art of entertaining in the form of a sugvestion fora come- dy magical sketch entitled: The Bell Hop and the Animated Refrigerator By ERNEST EVANGELINE Professional and amateur performers Will welcome this unique novelty. An outline of the dialogue will be given as Well as instructions for constructing the apparatus, costumes and accessories. MAGIC FOR MARCH found Inthe March issue of this Maga- zine of Wonder. ‘Something Different’’ This is the question invariably asked by the modern magician in his quest for new material in his chosen profession. His insatiable thirst for more knowledge (‘‘something new'") ts responsible forthe wonderful advancement of the Artin recent years. If you really want something new, novel and practical you should order at once ‘The Book of the Year SOME MODERN CONJURING By Donald Holmes A Series ‘of Original Experiments in the Magic Art Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than any book of twice its size. Not a singie space filler. ‘Tricks with Watches, Rings, Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice, ete., lu- cidly explained. Of interest to professional! or amateur alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant half-tone cuts. “Something different’ in every respect. Price One Dollar, Postpaid Your dealer supplied Donald Holmes Box 315, San Angelo, ‘Texas ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention GHOSTS

Page 38

16 GHOSTS Martinka & Company Magicians’ Headquarters in America 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods need no extravagant claims, being known for solid quality the world over. Complete catalogue, 25 cents. List free. Latest Color Change Handkerchief |= A New Book by | — i , One hand only used. A blue David Devant handkerchief with a white , . border is held by the finger TRICKS FOR tips and suddenly changed EVERYONE to a bright red handkerchief oe with a white border. Most Clever Conjuring surprising effect. No prac- ‘ . tice necessary. Works on With Common Objects first trial. Price, $1.50. Price, 50 cents The Changing Spots MAGICIAN A solid 3-inch die, black with white spots, is shown. A metal ANNUAL tube open at both ends is then exhibited, and performer puts 1909-1910 his arm through it. The tube is then placed over the die. A handful of round, red paper discs are thrown into the tube. On Edited by Will Goldston lifting it up the spots on the die are found to have changed from (pages, 300 Ilustrations white to red. Price, %4.00. Price, $2.00 Production and Color Change of Flowers . ,) i dg) PSA) A large shallow metal tray, 16x14 inches, is shown from both sides; suddenly, without any covering the trav is filled with red flowers, heaped up high; just as suddenly all the red flowers change into white, then they vanish completely. Each time the tray is shown from both sides. This very startling trick is suitable for any act and will especially be appreciated hy lady mavicians and Japanese acts, Price, $6.00. NEW MAGIC 10c Pocket Trick 10c ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE FREE with the Pocket Trick. Retails at 25c. We make this generous offer to intro- duce our catalogue. Address Magic Supply Co., Dept. 40 270 West 39th St., New York When writing to advertisers, kindly mention GHOSTS Copy Wanted The publisher of MAGIC will pay real, if not “hig,’’ money for articles, drawings, photo- graphs and sketches suitable for publication in the ‘“‘Twin Magazines of Wonder.’’ Ma- terial must be of interest to amateurs and the general public. No descriptions of com- plicated apparatus tricks or elaborate illusions will be considered. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 39

If It is Magic We Have It Best of Goods at Prices that are Right Catalogue Free The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 417, Cambridgeport, Mass. If you want to know MORE about the oldest and most fasci- nating amusement in the world, subscribe to ‘THE SPHINX A monthly magazine for amateur and professional magicians. The SPHINX is the greatest paper ever de- voted exclusively to the subject. The World of Magic is thoroughly and completely cover- ed. Special, skillfully conducted departme: ts give all the latest news al out all the profcs- sional magicians. News letters from corres- ee in all parts «f the world are a regu- ar feature. ‘The newcst sleights and illusions are explained, and tlie must recent ‘‘wrin- kles’? and the most up-to-date effects and “pattcr’’ are pul lished in this pre-eminent Magazine of magic. $1 a year. Single copies, 10 cents A.M, WILSON, M.D, Pa M. WILSON, M. LD. 3 ? Editor and Publisher Eighth Year MARCH 1909 Price 10 Cents 906 Main St.. Kansas City. Mo When writing to advertisers, kindly mention GHOSTS

Page 40

MYSTO COMPANY Sample Our Goods Pages of the are positively G the finest reatest Made Our Factory Catalog the largest bes in the Published ” orld and our Sent Catalogue FREE the Best to any Give - a Tria Address 7 Y; Send for Complete ‘“ Sample Publication Pages Only Be Z5€ Convinced : i ’ Ke Gin ‘ = “rk ~e 7. i * t ii Meds a | “apt. VY 4 WATER MIRACLE (AFTER GERMAIN) ~ ~ ' T THE CALDRON The sensation of the day. The most talked The Tenth Wonder of the World. Positive- | of trick in magic. We are the only manu- ly the greatest Illusion ever invented. (See | facturers. Price, complete, *14.00; without our illustrated catalogue. ) stands, $9.00. MYSTO MFG. CO., Westville Sta., New Haven, Ct. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention GHOSTS

Page 41

MARCH 1910 The Animated Refrigerator Card Through a Handkerchief The Golden Age of Magic The Changing Die PR ICE

Page 42

IMPROVED LIQUID CHANGE AND ee TRICK This is really a splendid trick. The performer shows three tumblers containing respectively Red and Purple Liquids and Water, also an empty cylinder and fancy cover. He then pours the liquids into the empty cylinder, first the Purple. then the Water. finally the Red. cov- ering it over with the empty cover, he commands the Liquids to sepa- rate and appear in the cylinder in the order in which they were emp- tied, viz; Purple, White and Red. Upon uncoveriny it this wonderful sceparation is seen to have taken place. He again covers it over and up- on the cover being removed, the colours have vanished and only clear water remains inthe cylinder. Price 11 | 6($2.76). Post Free 12 | 2 082.92), Carriage extra to abroad. LATEST BOOK ON MAGIC PEERLESS PRESTIDIGITATION. This book, by Mr. Herbert De Caston contains a collection of entirely new ideas and eftects in the fascinating art of magic, the sole rights of which we have purchased. It contains several tricks with Cards, Handkerchiefs. and Exws. etc.. and is profusely Dlustrated, Itis beautifully bound in a fancy cloth cover. We anticipate a great demand for this book. Price 2 | - (48e). Post free 2 | 2 (520) NEW BOOKS SOME MODERN CONIURING. Price 4 | - (960). Post free 4 | 2 (81), Sole Agents in England for this book. HANDCUFF SECRETS. By the celebrated Harry Houdini. Price 1] (24e¢). Post free ft | 20.28c¢). PROBLEMS IN MYSTERY. By Max Sterling. Price 2)6 (Uc). Post free 2 | 7 thc). ENTERTAINING. By’ ‘Albe ‘rtus.” - (24c), Post free t | 2 (28¢). HAMLEY BROS., Ltd. SA 8dss LONDON BRANCHES 510a and 512, Oxford Street, W. 29, Ludgate Hil], FE. C. 2) and 202, Regent Street, W. 59, Knightsbridve, S. W. 86 and 87, High Holborn, W. C. (Head Warehouse) If You Are Interested in Magic Send Your Name and Address to The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York THE LARGEST DEALERS IN THE WORLD Amateur Catalogue 8+ Pages, 600 Tricks, 10 Cents When writing Advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 43

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME I CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M D. NUMBER 2 CONTENTS FOR MARCH, 1910 COVER Drawn by Krieghoff CUT-OUT FOR THE CHANGING DIE THE GOLDEN AGE OF MAGIC THE ANIMATED REFRIGERATOR PAGE From 7he New York Herald Frontispiece L;RNEST EVANGELINE 19 ERNEST EVANGELINE 21 Ilustrations from drawings THE PAPER RINGS IHustrations from drawings CARD TITROUGH A HANDKERCHIEF (C. Lanc Neit) 24 Ulustrations from drawings of photographs FLOWER PRODUCTION INustrations from drawings and a photograph THE OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC 28 Ulustration from a photograph THE DAZZLING TOP 29 Illustration from a drawing THE CHANGING DIE IHustrations from drawings THE PENETRATIVE PENNY (Pror. HOFFMANN) 30 INustration from a drawing MAGIC is published every month by Ernest Evangeline, 419 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri. U.S. AL Yearly subscriptions. $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright. 1910, by W. J. Lucas MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER JANUARY 1910 PRICE. #68 CENTS What A Conjurer Can Do The Marvelous Rising Cards of Joseffy Ry Der on MAGIC FOR APRIL Complete details of ‘‘The A. M. Wilson Annual Prize,’’ a prize to be given for the most valuable con- tribution to the Art of Magic in 1910, are reserved for the April number of MAGIC, This prize is offered tothe magicians of the world and will be given forthe best trick, illusion, method, idea, book, article or per- formance invented, designed, written or given during the year 1910, The April issue will contain also an original article by Mr. Hereward Carrington, ‘Tricks in the Gambling Game."’ Profusely illustrated with drawings of the - many tricks and devices used by cheating gamblers. In this issue, too, the publisher will say a few words about his paper and the unique conditions under which it is printed and published. GHOSTS, the Magazine of Romance and Reason, originally announced to be published every other month, alternating with MAGIC, will be discontinued. MAGIC will be published every month hereafter. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Av., Kansas City, Mo.

Page 44

Publisher’s Announcement The publisher of MAGIC, having succeeded in getting out three numbers of his publication, feels bold enough to chance the following announcement of forth- coming articles and features. Artistic Cover Designs New and different covers for every issue of the Magazine of Wonder will be a regular feature. These will be printed in two or more colors and of great artistic merit and variety. The designs for almost all of the issues for 1910 are on exhibition at the publisher's office. Paper Manipulation Extraordinary One of Mr. Ernest Evangeline’s specialties. A suggestion for a complete ev enine’s entertainment or stage act with paper wonders will be viven in an early number, This article while greatly ab- breviated for lack of space, will be illustrated with diagrams and illustrations of all kinds of paper ladders, pinetrees, flowering rods, lace, and a grand finale of revolving vari-colored paper pin- wheels, rockets, fountains and confetti showers—a yorreous paper carnival. When the Toy Circus Comes to ‘Town The April number will contain a charmingly written and illustrated article on the pleasures of col- lecting paper cut-out toys, games and novelties. The collection of a well known magical enthusiast, whose interest covers a wide ranse, will be drawn upon to illustrate this article. Cafe and Office Tricks A series of easy but effective impromptu tricks, fakes and stunts suitable for presentation on short notice in business offices, restaurants, cafes and hotel lobbies is in preparation for early appearance. Romance and Wonder in the [fe of Robert-Houdin Robert-Houdin's career is the most fascinating subject In the whole of magical literature. In an article now in preparation, a great effort will be made to throw new hght on the marvelous story of his life. The World’s Best Tricks for Beginners The policy of publishing only tricks that anyone can do without a great deal of practice, will be continued in future numbers of MAGIC. New tricks will be shown as well as the old ones. ‘The best tricks of the last half century will be drawn upon for this purpose. Articles and Notes on the Following Subjects Will Appear Shortly Magic in everyday life Magnetism Parlor jugeling ‘ Impromptu tricks Metaphysics Tricks without apparatus Amateur performances Mavical novelties Amateur entertainments Conjuring wonders Simple accessories Hand shadows Harmless practical jokes Games and novelties Crvstal gazing Kope tying Mavical effects Spirit communications Telepathy Astrolory Clairvevance Spirit return Scaled letter reading Ouija talking board Occultism Shadow pantomines Spectral illusions Practical psvchology Noted spirit mediums Magic in advertising Lightning sketches Mavical acts and sketches New Punch and Judy Bunkum entertainments Practical ventriloquism Vable lifting Plate spinning -arlor amusements Planchette Real ghost stories Cravon drawing for stage Simple coin tricks Optical illusions Easy second sight Novel notions Hoop rolling New patter for old tricks Famous magicians Apparitions The talking hand Substitutes for sleights Chapeaugraphy Shadowgraphy Puzzles Exlubition paper folding ‘Haunted houses Oriental magic $1 Y A vapee is SEL erase under the direction of A.M. Wilson, »and is published every month. Yearly subscriptions, bs | an 10 ( . py a Ca r Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies. 10 cents, C a O ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo.

Page 45

Page 46

Cut-out for the Changing Die (See Page 30) \ little care taken in cutting and gluing this little die and shell will be rewarded, Cut along outer edge, taking care to cut exactly on line between black and white—not cutting into the white margin nor the black. Fold on lines against a ruler or other straight edge and glue flaps inside of each adjoining side. The three flaps on top or ‘one spot" should also be tuck ed in after covering with glue. and the four sides pressed gently but firmly against them. In pre paring shell, take care to keep the three sides square to each other.

Page 47

MAGIC VOLUME 1 MARCH 1910 NUMBER 2 “Tt is wonderful the expulsive power ofa hobby. It comes in, takes possession of us and drives out worry and care.’’—WIxLL C. Corr ‘There is, perhaps, no phase of amateur entertainment which attracts such universal attention as Magic. There is no other amuse- ment which holds so much fascination. The halo of mystery which envelopes the art may account for this fact. The vast majority are not vet certain whether its wonders are wholly within the realm of the natural, or lap over a bit into the sphere of the supernatural. It is this very doubt which lends to magic some of its charm. + —HERMANN PALLME The Golden Age of Magic By Ernest Evangeline HTT E Golden Age of Magic has ay not yet dawned. No one can 2x convince me for a single mo- (O94 ment that the glory of the art ES of magic has faded—that the romance and wonder of the fairyland of magical enchantment is to be found only in musty folios of the past. 1 be- lieve the twentieth century crowd that roars its approval of dare-devil conquer- ors of the air will still applaud clever ex- ponents of magic. But their magic must be as new as the aeroplane. It is only now and then that a man sees magic through his own eyes. I never read a book on magic until three years ago. The only magical performance I can remember having seen betore that time was the sad debut of a young man at an amateur night’? in a little East New York theater. One Monday after- noon, too, at Keith's Fourteenth Street Theater, I saw a magical entertainer come on, unbilled and unannounced (having been booked at the last moment in place of an act that failed to show up), and perform a tew children’s tricks (the ‘Dancing Sailor’ is the only one I can remember) with the air of a headliner but minus the applause. His performance would have been amusing had it not been pitiful. Poor fellow! Since that ime IT have seen all the big ones, from Kellar and Thurston down to the magician in the side show of Lemon Brothers’ ten cent circus. One of the most artistic and entertaining perform- ances | ever saw was that of a streetman who gave the ‘“Talking Hand,’’ painting and costuming his hand before the crowd and pattering as he went. [Te was an art- ist to his finger tips and only lacked a magical education to make a topnotcher. Do not sigh for the old timers lke Anderson, Robert Houdtn, Alexander Herrmann and Heller. Today, Howard Thurston, Kellar's successor, puts on a better show than those good fellows ever dreamed of. And there are several other Aving magicians who are trying to work along new lines. Understand me, I am not a magical grouch or knocker. am just unsatished. I crave something more from magic. Tonce saw a good card juggler give a conventional card manipulation act to an indifferent audience and for days afterwards was haunted by a vision of what his performance might have been. I saw in mista stage setting of clean, white canvas patnted with enormous red and black card pips and a floor cov- ering of cloth on which thousands of playing cards had been glued, face up,

Page 48

20 MAGIC as though the stage were ankle deep with them. To the right was a low, black mission table on which was standing a giant card case of imitation leather about three feet Pigh. In center of the stage, towards the back, was a mammoth ace of hearts, apparently made of paper pasted on a steel or heavy wire frame. This big card was resting on an iron stand, ele- vated slightly from the floor. Suddenly, through the big ace of hearts, the performer burst and ran smiling to the footlights. He was made up asa clown—white face and white silk costume decorated with card pips. In his hand he held a card case—a miniature of the big one on the table. The act was asilent one. The performer removed the cover from the big card case, showing it to be full of gigantic playing cards. With amusing pantomime he then removed the cover from the little card case and took out a regular pack of cards. Fhen followed an exhibition of high class card manipulation. The performer did not pose as the world’s greatest, but concen- trated his endeavors to entertain his au- dience with laughable diversion and skillful dexterity. Wonderful, immense playing cards rose from the big: case, some of them floating about the stage subject to the command of the clown. Finally, the cover was put back on the giant case and after making ridiculous passes over it, the clown again removed the cover. Fhe cards had vanished. An enormous crushed silk flag burst out. Removing this, the clown proceeded to pull out of that case enough junk to start adry goods store. A half dozen big col- lapsable suit cases filled with silk flowers and vari-colored balls came out, fol- lowed by big inflated baloons, dolls, waste paper baskets—the hat production extraordinary ! The climax came when a little child, dressed as a clown in fac-sitmile of the performer, jumped out of the card case. Amid the generous applause of the au- dience, the two clowns bowed them- selves off the stage. That act made a big hit withme! In a future number Tam going to illustrate and deseribe it in detath In the mean- time itis just an idea. But you are wel- come toit! Take it, work it up and use it. Timake no claims to @rviing in ma- gic. TPcall it “Pierrot and the Giant Card Case.” Its only a suggestion. @ To be a great magician a man must first be a good actor. Then, in addition to having the magical microbe well de- veloped, he must now and then sit down on an idea. Some mayicians have sore than one idea in a lifetime. Surely you don't call a man who goes into a shop witha bankroll and buys the biggest tricks in the catalogue, a great magician. A great magician must invent his own tricks, originate his own act, create his own methods and presenta- tion. The big fellow in the magic game will never worry about a newspaper ex- posing an old stock trick. The sooner the public knows a lot of tricks that would tire an audience in a nickle show, and forgets them, the better. Once I saw a man work the sliding die box and then proceed to swallow a couple of swords and eat a glass lamp chimney ! He was billed as the Great Somethingorother. If that ts magic, give me death ! Give us something sensational, but new. Put on, for instance, a “Revolving Hoop of Fire,’ and have the “Queen of the Circus’’ come flying through the hoop apparently from nowhere. Lam go- ing to put it on in this magazine. Watch early numbers for further particulars ! Shortly, too, I] am going to show [Tou- dint, that really clever handcuff expert, how he can make the greatest hit of the century, and tell him about an act that will make an ordinary handcuff king look like a speck of last summer's dust. The Golden Age of Maeic will not dawn forthe professtonal. There are not fifty menin the whole world devoting their whole time to magic as a business and makine good. Vhe glories of magic are reserved for the artistic and enthust- astic amateur who works for love. It. ts he who is responsible for the impetus riven the art during the past year or two, Itis he who fans the flame of interest when the big magic show comes to town. Anditisthe amateur, too, who furnishes the velvet for the magical dealers and manufacturers, and stays up nights de- vising new magical schemes and tricks. A graduate of Yale University, in touch with some prominent men, re- cently told me he knew of very few who were not carrying around a few practical pocket tricks wlth them. Phere are lots of men doting magic just for the love of the art and the fun they get out of it.

Page 49

THE ANIMATED REFRIGERATOR THE ARTISTS IDEA OF “THE ANIMATED REFRIGERATOR" The Animated Refrigerator An Original Suggestion for a Comedy Magical Sketch By Ernest Evangeline CHARACTERS THE ANIMATED REFRIGERATOR Bet bLlop “Gee, ain't it warm tonight! "’ Sylvester U. Keepthechange SCENE—Lobby of the Swell Hotel EXPLANATION —-This is merely a sugges- tion for a magical entertainment. Some will ask, “Where is the magic ?* But just the same I sub- mit it to the readers of this magazine confident that, if properly worked up and really performed, it would at least be entertaining. Only part of the dialogue and business is giv- en here. The present size of the magazine will hot permit me to devote very much space to any one subject. However, | will be pleased to fur- nish the rest of the matter to anyone who will work up the act and try it out. I have talked with lots of magicians who claim to be looking for something different that would not take a lot of money and trouble to put on; that would be suitable for presentation in ‘‘one,”* or in front of the first drop scene on the vaude- ville stage. ‘“Lhe Animated Refrigerator’ is an attem)tto meet these requirements. It may have merit. The refrigerator case or box, to fit over per- former's shoulders and waist, can be construct- ed of thick hookbinders’ card or millboard tacked to a simple frame (Fig. 1) and then covered with glazed paper made in imitation of white tile. Paper lithographed in unitation of oak can also be obtained for pasting over the millboard, The doors in front can be made of the same material and attached with hinges as fancy as desired. Fig. 2 shows the completed case with openings for the arms and neck. ‘The top consists of two flaps hinged at front and back so that they can

Page 50

22 MAGIC drop after head is inserted and fit snug around the performer's neck. The case is open at the bottom and quite hollow inside except for three or four inches in front, back of the doors. Fig. 3 shows the doors removed. AA are small mirrors joined at the center in front, and running back on each side about three or four inches, leaving two small triangular shaped spaces for a bottle, glasses, egys and fruit, oranything intended for use during the performance. a } il | Above the space occupied by the mirrors is a litle shelf about three or four inches wide. The space above this shelf is backed by a piece of perforated zine to suggest a place forice (15). No attempt is made to explain the tricks sug- gested, as any with which the performer is fa- miliar can be substituted. I will be glad to correspond with anyone re- vardine this sketch, only asking that a stamp be enclosed for reply. [Enter THE ANIMATED REFRIGERATOR, moping face with red handkerchief. | TL ALR. Gee, ain’t it warm tonight! | Pulls handkerchief through fingers-—turns blue) Just been talking with the janitor. [lanishes handkerchief | There is a sick man, that janitor. Says he has been ail- ing for weeks. He was eating a wiener- wurst and looked like a piece of oiled paper round a pound of creamery butter. I said, “Gee, man, why don't you stop eating—skip a few meals.’’ He. said, “Stop eating ? Why I just figger on eat- ing When I vet sick—I just figgers on it.”’ _ . . Gee, ain't it warm tonight ! [Opens front of refrigerator case, takes out bottle of beer and glass and pours out a drink| ... Here’s looking at you! [Drinks and puts back bottle and glass\ Wish Thad a hot wienerwurst myself! To was in (nearby city) last week. Big mystery over there. Miss Anna Bell’s dog disap- peared. I solved the mystery acciden- tally. Went into a restaurant on (swell street in nearby city) street and ate a wienerwurst. Init was a dog tag—num- ber 4413. 1 certainly went crazy when I bitonthat tag! . . . Well, after the po- lice had quelled the riot, T brushed off my clothes, went up tothe city hall and asked the license clerk whose dog was numbered 4413. He looked carefully through his many records and then he said, “Miss Anna Bell's. It's a Scotch terner named Daisy !"” . I told him, “Tve eaten her; better cancel the li- cense!’’. . . When the beef trust puts up prices so high that a restaurant keeper can't afford to serve anything but dog, its time to put hens on silver dollars tn- stead of eagles, and change the motto to “E Pluribus Henum.”’ . What good are eagles, anyhow. Whoever heard of afarmer going to town with a basket full of eagle’s eggs and exchanging them for a pair of shoes, a suit of clothes, astove and a motor cycle 7 [Opens front and takes out an ve] Here is anegg laid by ahen that has just been invented out in Kansas. This hen lays eves with the date stamped on them and the very valuable property of disappearing if kept in-cold storage for more than thirty days. L[Age vanishes and performer appears surprised | Gee, that egg worked with me for two years ! My, ain't it warm tonight ! .. Twas over talking to the hotel clerk awhile ago when one of those real lady swells comes up to the desk and says, Say, is der a guy goes by de name of Wenolds stoppin’ here 7’ She had the clerk going too all right! Pe said, “‘I beg your pardon 2"... ‘Tsay, is der a guy by de name of Wenolds stayin’ here-—Wenolds, Wenolds, do you get it 7’ Well, that clerk got red in the face, stammered, stuttered and said, “‘I beg your pardon, lady but I don’t get that vet. . Then she leaned over the bar -——] mean desk—and came back strong: ‘Say, young fellow, if dis slab was much wider a lot of good stuff would get past you. /sa7,is dera guy what's named

Page 51

THE PAPER RINGS 23 Wenolds, R-e-y-n-o-l-d-s [spells i7], Wen- olds, stoppin’ here 7”’ ‘Oh, you mean Reynolds—Reynolds, the gentle- man that comes here every Saturday with his boss 2’ ‘Yes, dat’s de guy, dat’s de guy, is Ae here 71 saw him three times last week and every time he gave me the Dr. Cook !’’ The clerk said, “Why, do vow know him?’ ... “Do I know him * Do I Anow him % Say, he fell for cis [indicates imaginary hat\, and dis [ feather boa], and dis es made gown), do Ll know him 7 . Gee, ain't it warm tonight! | (Enter BELL Hop.) RB. H. Oh, you Ice Box! T. A. R. ’S' nuffin the business, kid, look him in de face! Want an orange ” B. H. Sure. T.A. R. [Opens front, gets orange, hands it to BELL Hop. ] That’s a ticker orange. B. H. [Examines orange closely| Why is a ticker orange ? T. A. R.[ Zakes orange in left hand, rubs itc«uth fingers of right and suddenly yerks out two or three yards of yellow ribbon | Be- cause, my young friend it is full of tape. [ 7 rows ribbon to one side and hands or- ange to BELL Hop, who cuts it in halfand shows it to be unprepared. | The Paper Rings s;MONG those who have not | been initiated in the manner | of performance, this little | arrangement, which we are A about to explain, will create some 1e astonishment: it gives rise to some very interesting geometrical questions. We will show how it is done. Look at the illustration (Fig. 1). Here are three paper rings. They ought to be in reality of much greater diameter in proportion to their length, but in the cut we have reduced the circumference sO as not to Insert such a large picture as would be necessary if the true dimen- sions were given. First, 1 give you ring No. 1 with a pair of scissors, and request you to cut it as indicated by the dotted line. You will then obtain two rings, as shown un- derneath. The dotted line will not be in the paper bands in practice. Then I request you to cut ring No. 2 in the same manner; but this time you will be surprised to find in your hands, when you have finished cutting round the ring, not two rings as at first, but one long ring, twice as large as either of the former rings. Now for No. 3, There is another sur- prise in store. As you cut the third ring you will be astonished with the result. You will again obtain two rings, but one will be looped inside the other. Let us explain this trick. You must prepare paper bands 2 tn- ches in width, and about 50 inches in length. Take the first strip, cut and join its ends directly in the ordinary manner, as shown in No. 1, sothat the same side of the paper forms the edge all round. The second band is united after it has been twisted on itself, so that one of : ! FIG. 1 the ends ts united with the opposite sur- face of the other extremity; as for the third band, you must give it two turns before you unite the ends. Let the paste dry, and then your apparatus will be ready. The longer the rings are the less apparent will be the turns in them.

Page 52

24 MAGIC Card Through a Handkerchief One of the Simplest and Most Effective Tricks in Magic (C. Lang Neil) when called upon to give a convincing demonstration of “41 the powers of magic, is to shake a playing card through a borrowed FIG. | The handkerchie€ is shaken out thus. The card is palmed in fight band. handkerchief. For convincing it is: at least it was to me the first time I saw it. A member of the audience chooses any card from the pack, and replaces it, . laying the pack upon the handkerchief, to which it is entirely folded. The corners of the handkerchief are held, and the chosen card is shaken right through the center of the handkerchief. The performer offers the pack of cards to someone, whom he asks to choose a card and show it to the company. He then takes the rest of the cards in his left hand, and desires that the chosen card be replaced, dividing the pack at about the middle by lifting off about halt of the cards with the right hand. As the card is placed on the lower half, which is in his left hand, the little finger of that hand is inserted above it, and as the top half is placed upon it the two- handed pass is made (Sce January num- ber of Maaic) and the chosen card is brought to the top of the pack. The hand- kerchief is now picked up from the table (or one may be borrowed), and the gen- tleman or lady assistant is asked to hold itforamoment. Asif by an afterthought the pertormer says, ““Oh, but perhaps you will be so good as to shuffle the cards,’ palming the chosen card and then handing the pack with the right hand,and the handkerchief is taken back and held as in Fig. 1. The right hand is quickly placed under the handkerchief at about the center. The pack, which is now shuffled, is taken from the assistant with the left hand, and placed upon the handkerchief im- mediately over the chosen card, which is in the right hand underneath as seen in Fig, 2. The handkerchief is now folded over the cards as in Fig. 3, saying, ‘‘We will now cover the pack in the handker- chief—so.’’ The left hand grasps the pack and also the card beneath (Fig. 4), and the right hand gathers up the loose ends of the handkerchief, allowing the pack to fall gently into the position of Fig. 5) Fig. FI(s, 2 Pack placed on handkerchief directly over the chosen card might hand. 5a is aback view of the handkerchief and pack as in Fig. 5, showing .the chosen

Page 53

CARD THROUGH FIGs. 3 The handkerchief doubled over the pack. card between the folds of the handker- chief. A pretence is made of drawing the card out by passing the left hand up and down in front of the handkerchief, say- ing, “You can see your card, can you not?’ The assistant will reply in the neg- ative, whereupon a slight shake of the handkerchief will bring the card out of the fold as in Fig. 6, the performer ex- claiming, “No! Why there it is."’ If instead of allowing the assistant at the beginning of the trick to choose any card one is forced on him, its name may Sage wn tre.) ) AR see tee A + XV tee . 4, A . ss te bi8 * Pe Dokeg Ct hae At30A4 5 ate Syne Ban Ns. Sa Back view of Fig. uw IG. 5 Handkerchief is held thus. A TANDKERCHIEF 2 sets Nag tre —¢- 7 $ re FIG. 4 Left hand grasps pack and card beneath. and right hand vathers ends of handkerchicl, be told. This adds a little effect when the hand is being passed in’ front and the performer says, “You can see your card, can you not 27" He may point to the pack and say, ““No! Why, I can; there it is. Look, the eight of dia- monds,”” or as the case may be. Those who cannot execute the two- handed pass can use a prepared pack of thirty or forty cards all alike. But) the use of such a pack naturally detracts from the trick. It is much more. effect- ive to show your audience an ordinary pack upon beginning the trick. pe yet SNA ESP SE URE RIS QI ates’ gay fea ete prety ts ae rita 8 De tN Sey ey 4 SY 17] « i eee ; 2.109} iAP ae whe? gah: had FIG. 6 Vhe card is shaken slowly out,

Page 54

26 MAGIC Flower Production Spring Flowers from a Paper Cone one of the Prettiest Deceptions Known to Magic —=—WIHE production of paper flow- My ers of all sizes and colors f from a piece of paper shown {O94} freely on both sides and then AY rolled into a cone, or the production of big, beautifully colored FIG. 1 feather flowers and magnificent long plumes, from a handkerchief or flag, forms one of the prettiest deceptions in the art of magic. The whole secret of this really beauti- ful illusion lies in the grace with which it is performed, and in the spring flow- ers and feathers used. The construction of the paper flowers is extremely ingenious. They are made as follows: The first step is to cut out a number of pieces of green tissue paper (not Ae thin) of the shape shown at ain Fig. 1. The extreme length of each may be 4 1/2 inches, and its greatest width an inch and three quarters. Next should be cut out double the number of mixed colors, red, yellow, blue, pink, mauve and white. These should be of the shape of 6 in the same figure. They may be of the same width as the green leaves, but are only one and three-quarter inches in length. The next step is to provide the neces- sary “springs’’ to made the flowers ex- pand. These are mace by cutting a sheet of rolled steel or hardened brass, the thickness of heavy paper, into strips two inches long, and a little less than a quarter of an inch wide; each strip must then again be cut down its center to within three-eighths of an inch of the op- posite end, asc, and the two portions then bent apart as @ in the same figure —when it will be found that however often they may be closed, they will when released revert to the expanded position. Taking one of the green papers fold it across the middle, and placing one of the steel springs between, secure it with strong paste to the center of the leaf, pasting a strip of the same paper, ' three-cighths of an inch wide, over it to ~ conceal the spring. Lay these aside to dry, and meanwhile taking pairs of the smallest pieces of paper (each pair being of the same color), paste two of their edges together, and let them dry In like manner. Thisdone, take one of these and inserting it in the opening of one of the green papers, paste the free edges to the corresponding edges of this lat- ter. The effect will now be as shown tn Fig. 2, a sort of compromise between a sweet-pea and a butterfly. By pressing the sides together, the flower becomes perfectly flat, though it instantly ex- pands when the pressure is removed. Having provided himself with the flowers, of which a couple hundred will be required, the performer should div ide this quantity into (say) three “‘loads.’ Taking the flowers one by one between finger and thumb, he presses each flat upon its predecessor, and when he has thus dealt with a sufficient quantity, se- cures them with an elastic band, or, bet- ter still, between two slips of stiffish cardboard, 3 by 2 inches, with an elastic band passed round these in the direction

Page 55

FLOWER PRODUCTION of their greater length. If the ends of the cardboard be pressed they naturally separate in the middle, and at once free the flowers. The getting off of a couple of elastic bands from the flowers them- selves takes longer, and even seconds are of importance to the effect of a con- juring trick. Having thus prepared his “‘loads’’ 27 bag and pins it. Some introduce the load in the act of making the cone; by palm- ing it and forming the cone around the hand containing the load—then drop- ping it into the bottom. The production of a second load ts a very easy matter, for the general atten- tion being drawn to the gush of flowers from the mouth of the cone gives the * | - 7 ™ 2 _ > | ‘ - a A r een THE PRODUCTION OF FEATHER FLOWERS FROM A FLAG (which will comprise about seventy flow- ers in each), and disposed them about his person so as to be instantly get-at- able when needed, the performer is ready to show the trick. His only further requirements will be a full-sized sheet of wrapping paper, and a pin, which he may stick into the col- lar of his vest till needed. Showing both hands and paper to be empty, he twists the sheet intoa conical performer a chance to produce It. The performer gets the third load in the palm of hts left hand, opens out the empty cone. Then spreading the paper over his right hand, he brings the left hand down on its center, as if merely crushing the paper, and twists it into a crumpled ball, the load safely secreted in the center. Hle now unfolds the paper and again a flood of flowers comes pour- ing from it.

Page 56

28 MAGIC sy a ie MP ESANE. ae) Th »- we a o> eae Perit i eS yy? ? ail 24 a — tell -_—~ -— ; v2 a * \ it. J 24 4 > pa a bo -— « es * FRONTISPIECE PORTRAIT OF ROBERT HOUDIN AND TITLE PAGE TO NEW EDITION OF “LH OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC” ‘The Old and the New Magic A New Edition of a Valuable Book MERE is a real magic book. — 550 big pages of wonderina ~ cover of brillant red cloth stamped in black and gold. ae A genuine book. The beau- titul frontispiece and colored title page are reproduced herewith. Magic needs more books like this. It issucha work as will get a place on the shelves of the big public libraries and will be referred to by thousands of people who look up the sub- ject. And no better reference work will be found for the individual who reads the story of magic for the first time. Ilere is writtenin Mir Henry Ridgely Evans’ fascinating style the history of natural magic, the romanticcareers of the world’s greatest conjurers and the se- crets of well known tricks, automata and THE OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC. By Henry Ridgely Evans, Second Edition, revised and enlarged. In- troduction by Dr. Paul Carus. Hlostrated. 550 pages. Price, ¥2.00. Published by The Open Court Publishing Co., 358 Wabash Ave. Chicago. HI. second sight. No better idea of the com- plete manner in which the whole field of magic 1s covered can be given than by reproducing the entire table of contents: Introduction by Dr. Paul Carus—History of Natural Magic and lrestidigitation— the Cheva- lier Pinetti—Cagliostro: A Study in Charlatanism —Ghost-making Extraordinary—- the Komance of Automata —RKobert-Houdin: Conjurer, Aw- thorand Ambhassador—Some Olcd-time Conjurers —The Secrets of Second Sight—- t he Confessions of an Amateur Conjurer—.\ Day with Alexander the Great—A Twentieth Century Thaumaturgist —A Gentleman of Thibet—Mavgicians | Have Met—The Riddle of the Sphinx—Treweyism —Thurston the Thaumaturgist —The Davenport Brothers—The Great Slate ‘Test-—Mysterious Mr. Maskelyne—Automata: A Sequel to ‘“The Komance of Automata’’—The King’s Conjurer —A Master of the Magi ~The Necromancy of Numbers and Letters—Appendix: Additional Notes on Preceding Chapters-—Index. One of the most entertaining chapters In the book is ““The Confessions of an Amateur Conjurer,’ in which Mr. Evans

Page 57

THE DAZZLING TOP tells of his own introduction to the mys- teries of magic. Lhe Old and New the Vacic \s the great- est Inspirational work on magic art ever written, and will arouse, stimulate and inspire every professional and amateur magician and make magical enthustasts of those who read its enchanting pages. Writing of magical books and litera- ture, Mr. Evans says: ‘Phe literature of natural magic is not ¢xten- sive. Thirty vears ago, first-class works on leg- erdemain were rare. Houdin'’s ‘Secrets de la Prestidigitation et de la Mavic,’ which was pub- lished tn 1868, was out of print) and, savs Prof, Hoffmann, ‘the possession of a copy was regard- ed among professors of magic as a boon of the highest possible value.” Hoffinann picked up an old second-hand copy of the work tn Paris, and translated it in the year 1877, ‘To-day, books on sleight of hand have been multiplying rapidly. Every professor of the art thinks it incumbent upon him to publish a treatise on magic. Strange to say, the good works on the subject have been written by amateurs. Prof. Hoffmann (Angelo Lewis), amember of the London bar, has written the best book; following him have come Edwin Sachs and C. Lang Neill. The autobiography of that arch-master of magic, Robert-Houdin, was translated, in 1859, by Dr. R. Shelton Mackenzi« of Philadelphia. Thomas Frost, in 1881, produced an interesting work on ‘Lives of the Conjurers, ' 2 but it is now quite out of date. 1 know of no really scholarly treatise extant to-day on the his- tory of prestidigitation. ' Mr. Evans is too modest. 72e Old and the New Magic is the most scholarly trea- tise on magic that I know. ] cannot refrain from also quoting a few words about Charlier, the card adept and one of the most unique characters in the history of magic: “Charlier is a name to conjure with. He wasa species of Don Quixote and Robert: Macaire fusedtogvether: a 'Maointhe fron Mask,’ minus the covering of wire and velvet. But masked he was, with the impenetrable face of an Egyptian sphinx, “Phere never lived outside the history books amore mysterious personage. . Some sav that Charher taught card manipulation to Kobert-Houdin in’ Paris, and instructed many other famous professionals of the Continent. Some say he was a German, some a Frenchman, some a Turk, some a Russian, some an Italian, some a Greek. Some men say he was the ‘Wan- dering Jew,’ Ahasuerus, about whom so many legends c luster. No one seems to know exactly whohe was He spoke many languages well, and preserved the secret of his identity and nation- ality. He appeared mysteriously in London, and as mysteriously disappeared. [ask again who was this sphinx-like Charlier, this old man, pos- sessed of such astonishing vitality: dried up like amummy, vet vigorous as a fellowoftwenty 2" The Dazzling Top PA LT . the scientific playthings a oever invented do not com- pare, to my mind, with the “Dazzling Top.” This. re- oe markable toy, founded upon the persist: incy of Impre ssions upon the retina, occupies the position of honorin my cabinet of curious optical illusions. l have entertained children, and grown- ups too, for hours at a time with this charming novelty. It is an ingenious specimen of a per- fected) TPlelmholtz top -a metallic toy putin motion by means of a cord wound round a groove. It is well described) by M. Gaston Tissandier in Les Reereations Screntifiques, The axis ts hollow, admits a metallic stem and fits tnto a handle which is held in the hand. The top is placed upon a little cup in an upright position, and it is then set spinning in the usual way with a cord. Vhe stem and handle are then withdrawn and as the top will continue to spin for adong time, discs and various outline shapes can be fixed upon it and various objects will be shadowed thereon. Cups, bowls, candlesticks and jugs can be seen plainly revolving as the top carries the wire representation in outline rapidly past the eyes.

Page 58

30 MAGIC The Changing Die (See paper cut-out apparatus inserted as Frontispiece ) VERY few pocket tricks will be found more effective than this charming little decep- tion, An examined die ts made apparently to change THE CHANGING DIE completely from black to white, though itis in reality only of the first named color, A black paper or wooden die, about an inch square, is submitted for examination ina casual, off-hand way. Itisthen taken and held betw een a finger and thumb of the left hand by two di- agonally opposite corners, as shown in the lustration, three of its sides being thus simultaneously exposed. The per- former has but to pass the forefinger of the opposite hand over it, in an upward direction, when i is seen not only te have changed points, but color, being now white, with black spots. Another touch of the right hand, and it becomes black as before. Itis immediately hand- ed for examination, but nothing can be found to explain the mystery. The secret Hes in the fact that the die is used th conjunction with a paper or tin shell, which exactly fits over it, cov- ering three of its sides. This is enameled white with black spots. After the die has been examined, this is privately passed over it, and the die ts arranged in the hand, as shown in the diagram, in such a oway that only the three uncovered sides are visible. When the diets fora moment covered by the opposite hand, it ts made to per- form aio semt-revolution, bringing the three white faces to the front, When the trick is over, the die is taken in the nght hand, and allowed to drop out of the shell, the latter betng then palmed, and the dite offered for examina- thon. NOTE—The explanation aziven bere is from) Professor Hottmann’s “Later Magic.” \ neat wooden die and white enameled tin shell for this trick may beobtained from any of the masgical dealers whose advertisements can be found i this meawazine, ‘The Penetrative Penny ( Professor ac Noa piece of stout paper cut acirele three sixteenth of an Inch less in diameter than / a penny. Invite any one to pass a penny through the hole apithout touching the coin or tear- ing the paper. He will naturally tell you that it can’t be done, the penny being larger than the hole. And yet the thing can be done easily done, Fold the paper exactly across the cen- ter of the hole; then take it in both hands, and ask some one to drop the penny into the fold. Let it rest Just over the hole, its lower edge projecting below. Hoffmann) Bend the corners of the paper slightly upwards, as indicated in the tlustration., This clongates the opening and, if the movement be continued, the penny will, fall through by The paper re- after a second or two, force of Its own weight. mains uninjured.

Page 59

ADVERTISEMENTS Sl The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of us ‘If its Leroy’s, its the best.”’ Magician’s Annual, Nos. 1 or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2.00; Ma- giclan’s Book of Patter, 50 cts. ; Goldston’s ‘Tricks and Illusions, $1. 50; Some Modern Conjuring, $1.00. and 2, each, 35 cts.; Red Demon's Fire Book, 50 cts. ; Selbit’s Books of Patter, Nos. 1 Send $2.00 for our *‘Svengali’’ Pack and Mene-tekel Pack. These cards surpass anything ever put out. ‘‘ I have ever seen and are easily worth $5.00 a pack. ‘‘T consider they surpass anything ’-—Ml ax Ho pen. Send 10 cts. for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50 cts. for 212 page Illustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the “Society American Magicians."' A Magic Trick CATALOGUE FREE Peerless ‘Vrick & Novelty Co. 18, 3148 State Strect Chicago, II. Dept. a i) i ie Ihe Magician Monthly Edited by Will Goldston A journal for all interested in Magic and Mys- tery. In its sixth year of success. Annual sub- scription, SE.15, Sample copy, 10 cts. Korein stamps hot accepted in payment. THE MAGICIAN, Ltd..6 Robin Hlood Yard. London, F.C. LoILLUSIONISTE Journal for Professional and Amateur Magicians. The only Magical Magazine printed inthe French Language. Published Monthly. Hlustrated, Annual subscriptions. SN {tranes tS0.40, Sample copy. 75 centimes (£5 cts. Editer. CAROLY. 2) Boulevard St. Germain, Paris. Fr. Burlesque Magic Act. for two characters, S30 cents. A lot of mawical apparatus for sale cheap. D. Lo RAPNEY, 1404 Locust Street, Kansas Citv. Mo, ‘“Something Different’ This is the question invariably asked by the mod- ern magician in his quest for new material in his chosen profession, His insatiable thirst for more knowledge (‘something new'") is responsible for the wonderful advancement of the Artin recent vears, If vou really want something new, novel and practical vou should order at once The Book of the Year SOME MODERN CONJURING By Donald [Lolmes A Series of Original Experiments in the Magic Art Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than any book of twice its size. Nota single space filler. “Fricks with Watches, Rings, Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice. ete., lucidly ex- plained. Of interest to professional or amateur alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant half- tone cuts. Something different in every respect. Price One Dollar, Postpaid Your dealer supplied Donald Holmes Box 315, San Angelo, Texas When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 60

32 white to red, Price, $4.00. magicians and Japanese acts, Price, $6.00. The January Issue of MAGIC The January number of MAGIC is of great in- terest to magicians in general, asa glance atthe Fable of Contents will show: The Magic Shop—What a Conjurer Can Do—Josctty’s Marvelous Rising Cards—.An Ettective Match: Box Fake— A Vanishing Card—Bertram's Two-Handed Pass—Hand- kerchief and Rubber Band—Conjuring as a Social Advan- tage—The Magical Market. A few left. 10 cents a copy while they last. LERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 3610 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. Martinka & Company Magicians’ Headquarters in America 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods need no extravagant claims, being known for solid quality the world over. Complete catalogue, 25 cents. List free. Latest Color Change Handkerchief One hand only used. A blue handkerchief with a white border is held by the finger ups and suddenly changed to a bricht red handkerchief with a white border. surprising effect. No prac- tice necessary. first trial. Price, ¥1.50. The Changing Spots A solid 3-inch die, black with white spots, is shown. A metal tube open at both enus is then exhibited, a:.d performer puts his arm through it. ‘Uhe tube is then placed over the die. A handful of round, red paper discs are thrown into the tube. On lifting it up the spots on the die are found to have changed from Production and Color Change of Flowers A large shallow metal tray, 16x14 inches, is shown from both sides; suddenly, without any covering the trav is filled with red flowers, heaped up high; just as suddenly all the red flowers change into white, then they vanish completely. Each time thetray isshown from both sides. ‘This very startling trick is suitable for any act and will especially be appreciated by lady MAGIC A New Book by David Devant TRICKS FOR EVERYONE Clever Conjuring With Common Objects Price, 50 cents MAGICIAN ANNUAL 1909-1910 Edited by Will Goldston 100 pages, 300 Hlustrations Price, $2.00 Most Works on Copy Wanted The publisher of MAGIC will pay real, if not “‘hig,’’ money for articles, drawings, photo- graphs and sketches suitable for publication inthe “Twin Mavazines of Wonder.’’ Ma- terial must be of interest to amateurs and the general public. No descripuons of com- plicated apparatus tricks or elaborate illusions will be considered. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo. When writing Advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 61

A New Spirit Collar Collar will stand the closest examination, any padlock used, in- stantaneous release, this is something different, will foil the fellow who knows all about Spirit Collars, complete, full directions. Post Free, $3.00. Some Modern Conyjuring By Donald Holmes Best Book Published in years, $1.00 Post Free Catalogue Free The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 341, Cambridgeport, Mass. Get inthe Magic Game First and oe Issue If you want to know some MORE about the oldest and most fascinating amusement in the world, subscribe to q! MANCE ANI) REAS THE SPHINX ; scene 2 mare oj Pviahcal A. My WITSON, M: D, The Fel ruary, 1910, issue of GHOSTS con- A monthly magazine for amateur and profes- tains the following articles: sional magicians. Spectral Plusions—Threading the Mazes—The Sphinx Special, skillfully conducted de ‘partments give all the Riddle of Humanity —An Afternoon in a Magical Library latest news about professional magicians, News letters from —How I Became a Spirit Medium. Badd coe bailed tis Aa iti coach Only afew copies left. 10 cents each while they last. A. M. WILSON, M. D.. Publisher ©ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 906 Main Street, Kansas City, Mo. 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. When writing Advertisers. Kindly mention MAGIC

Page 62

The only drum head tube trick Vanisher, only Se, LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and Illusions. We sell only the best Tricks, and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill. All our directions are very plain and in most cases illustrated. ee No Practice Required > Send 2 cts.in stamps for our Ox Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manufacturers of Magic “oo Tricks, Puzzles and Illusions in \earchist (stinky b mbs the world. Mysto Mig. Co. ral Sines Factories: Fadeaway card Pappy dgctian Westville Station, New Ilaven, Ct. a Acrial suspension Card levitation a The caldron illusion

Page 63

APRIL 1910 Imro Fox Comic Conjurer The Ribbon from an Orange CENTS

Page 64

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS eS IMPROVED LIQUID CHANGE AND SEPARATION TRICK This is really a splendid trick. The performer shows three tumblers containing respectively Red and Purple Liquids and Water, also an empty cylinder and fancy cover. He then pours the liquids into the empty evlinder, first the Purple, then the Water. finally the Red. cov- ering it over with the empty cover, be commands the Liquids to sepa- rate and appear in the cylinder in the order in which they were emp- tied, viz: Purple. White and Red. Upon uncovering it this wonderful separation is seen to have taken place. He again covers it over and up- on the cover being removed, the colours have vanished and enly clear water remains inthe cylinder. Price 11 | 6(82.76). Post Free 12 | 282.92), Carriage extra to abroad. LATEST BOOK ON MAGIC PEERLESS PRESTIDIGITATION. This book, by Mr. Herbert De Caston contains a colle ction of entirely new ideas and effects in the fascinating art of magic. the sole rights of which we bave purchased. It contains several tricks with C ards, Handkerchiefs, and Exys. etc.. and is profusely [lustrated, Itis beautifully bound in a fancy cloth cover. We aay a great demand for this book. Price 2 | - 48%e). Post free 2] 2 (520). NEW BOOKS SOME MODERN CONJURING. Price 4! -(96c). Post free.4 | 2(°D. Sole Agents in England for this book. HANDCUFF SECRETS. By the celebrated Harry Houdini, Price 1|- (24e). Post free 1 | 2(28¢). PROBLEMS IN MYSTERY. By Max Steriing. Price 2] 6 (60c). Post free 2 | 7 (62¢). ENTERTAINING. By “Albertus.” -(24c), Post free 1 | 2 Be), HAMLEY BRO G., Ltd. rindonw Cr entand LONDON BRANCHES 510a and 512, Oxford Street, W. 29, Ludgate Hill, E. C. 200 and 202, Regent Street, W. 59, Knightsbridye, S. W. 86 and 87, High Holborn, W. C. (Head Warehouse) Tae SD heats posed ants Keve he hquids change Muar y The Best Magical Apparatus in the world is made by CARL WILLMANN, Hamburg, Germany, and the line is controlled by The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York Advertising draws custom; only merit wlll hold it. We give you wore than we promise in our goods. What Edison is to the Electric World, Carl Willmann is to the Magic World—the master builder of magical goods. Send for our Professional Catalogue. If you are a beginner in magic, send for our Catalogue of Parlor Tricks. Professtonal Catalogue, 100 pages, stage tricks, 50 cents lmateur Catalocue, 90 pages, 600 tricks, 10 cents When you are in New York visit our display rooms and see the largest line of magical goods in the world. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 65

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME I CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M D. NUMBER 3 CONTENTS FOR APRIL, 1910 COVER From an advertisement used by T. W. Butler Paper Co. ais IMRO FOX, COMIC CONJURER ~ Henry RIDGELY Evans 35 Hlustration from a photograph of an oil painting A CARD MYSTERY DonaLpD HOLMES 36 Ilustrations from photographs THE RIBBON FROM AN ORANGE ERNEST EVANGELINE 37 IHustrations from drawings THE MAN WITH THE MYSTIC SHADOW Max STERLING 39 Illustration from a drawing PROBLEMS IN PRACTICAL MAGIC 40 1. AN ORIGINAL HANDKERCHIEF PRODUCTION 2. DIMINISHED CARDS 3. A SMALL FLAG CHANGE Illustrations from photographs BOX, BALL AND HANDKERCHIEF HarOLD LATHAM 42 INustration from a drawing _ MAGIC is published every month by Ernest Evangeline, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. Yearly subscriptions, $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright, 1910, by W. I. Lucas ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. The Distinctively Different Book WRINKLES By S. Willson Bailey and Harold A. Osborne Members of S. A. M. _ Twice the value for half the price. 34 new, novel and practical crea- tions. The dawn of a new day in magical literature. _ Does the ‘‘New ‘Kellar’ Finger,” ‘‘The Coin Finale to the Miser’s Dream’’ (which has them all guessing), ‘“The Coin Tray’’ (which de- livers any number of coins), ‘The Rising Cards’’ (which can be taken into the audience), ‘“‘Barton’s Sliding Billiard Ball Box,’’ together with a score of other WRINKLES, sound like novelty to you ? Printed on velvet finished paper, 64 pages, cover in three colors. A popular book at a popular price. Ready for delivery NOW. Price postpaid, 5(0c. lor sale by The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 241, Cambridgeport, Mass. Catalogue and bargain sheet free. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 66

The Publisher Says The making of Macic isa la- bor of love. It represents his con- tribution to the most fascinating hobby the world has ever known. The type is set and the paper print- ed, two pages at a time, on a job press in his own home. It isan ama- teur effort, only his evenings being devoted to the work, and cannot for a moment be considered an ef- fort to compete with the profes- sional magical press. ~ His only regret is that he has so little time for letter-writing. He has been able to acknowledge per- sonally only a few of the many sub- scriptions and letters of apprecia- tion received from all parts of the world. He will make this, there- fore, an opportunity to thank every one who has shown an interest in his little magazine. He is pleased to announce that among his sub- scribers are most of the men who are making magical history. A Twenty-five Dollar _ Prize for Magicians In the last two issues of Macic, reference was made to an annual prize to be given for the best con- tribution made to the art during 1910. It has now been decided to offer this prize upon the following terms: Twenty-five Dollars (real mon-+ ey) will be paid January 1, 1911, for the best contribution offered to Maaic for publication during the present year. The length of the article and the style in which it 1s written will not be considered. The award will be made on the merit of the idea expressed, and is offered to the magicians of the world for the best trick, illusion, idea, method, book or article that is invented, designed or written in the year 1910. The award will be made by a commitee comprising the follow- ‘ing gentlemen: Mr. Adrian Plate, Mr. Howard Thurston, and Dr. A. M. Wilson. The picture of Imro Fox accompan- ing Mr. Evans’ article in this number, was made from a photograph of the memorial picture on exhibition in the rooms of Martinka & Co., New York. The original is an oil painting made by a friend of the late comic conjurer, an eminent artist in| Munich, Germany. All of the apparatus used by Fox has been turned over to Martinka to dispose of for the benefit of the estate. Mr. Hereward Carrington’s article on “Tricks in the Gambling Game,’’ an- nounced last month tor publication in the April number, has been reserved for the May issue on account of additional time being required to complete the il- lustrations. The illustration entitled, ‘‘The Pro- duction of Feather Flowers from a Flag,’’ used with the article on Flower Production printed in the March num- ber, was reproduced trom a photograph of a''Mysto’’ demonstrator, kindly fur- nished by the Mysto Mfg. Co., West- ville, Conn. So many requests have been made for the rest of “The Animated Refrigera- tor,’’ that it has been decided to com- plete it at once and run it in an early number. Mr. Henry Ridgely Evans has written for the May issue of MaGic a very in- teresting article on “The Wand.’’ It will be illustrated from photographs of famous wands and explanatory draw- ings of trick wands. Mr. Donald Holmes, whose original ‘Card Mystery’’ appears in this num- ber, is the author of “Some Modern Conjuring,’’ one of the best of the new books on the subject.

Page 67

MAGIC APRIL 1910 VOLUME | NUMBER 3 ‘And while Time hasbeen flying, Magic has not lagged behind. The Art of Deception, like other arts, has made vast strides during the last quarter of the dead century. Indeed, probably at no time in the world’s history has so much thought and ingenuity been brought to bear upon this subject. New and brilliant illusions have been de- vised, new sleights and improved methods have been invented, and old tricks have been so rejuvenated as to be practically new.’’ —Pror. HorrMANN Imro Fox, Comic Conjurer By Henry Ridgely Evans feat was accomplished behind a table. ba Ak Wg SH or K@ (2 jurer. The AA! staye has lost one of its most unique figures. He diedin Utica, N. Y., on March 4th. I met Fox in) Martinka’s “little back shop” some ten years ago. Hle remarked to me, *“Lam no conjurer; | am a comedian.’ He was both. He took Magic seriously, like all students of the art, but his presen- tation abounded in) hu- morous features. Phe man who has a contempt for Mavic exposes it on the stage. This Foxneverdid, so far as I can recollect. He had many littleeccen- tricities, such as pretend- ing to stumble and pick up a pin. The spectators usually thought this to be a part of Fox's comic act, but it enabled him to execute many subtle magical moves unbeknown to the audience. He would clumsily drop the solid “cannon ball’? and exchange it for a hollow one “‘well loaded.’’ This AALE! And so the curtain has ai rung down forever on genial : Imro Fox, the comic con- IMRO FOX From an oil painting by an artist friend I always thought it a bad move, an inartistic piece of sleight of hand, but it was @a/almro. Enough said! Fox differed from most necroman- tic comedians in this way —healwaysmade himself the butt of his own jokes, not some poor devil of a spec- tator, dragged upon thestage unwillingly to be the victim of a Roman holiday. Imro Fox was not a great con- jurer, but he was a most genial, a most amusing entertainer. No one look- ed bored when the cur- tain fellon his act. He was the prince of good fel- lows. Concerning his ear- ly career, I quote the fol- lowing from) my book, The Old and the New Mag- Ww: Imro Fox, ‘‘the comic conjurer,> was born May 21st, 1852, in Bromberg, Germany. He came to the United States in 1874, and after serving as a chef de cuisine in several New York hotels, final- ly came to Washington, where he pre sided over the kitchen of the old Hotel

Page 68

36 MAGIC Lawrence, a famous resort for vaude- ville people. When not engaged tn culi- nary duties, he practiced sleight of hand tricks. In the year 1880, a strolling com- pany came to the city, having as tts bright, particular star a magician. The man of mystery, alas, was addicted to the flowing bowl, and went on a spree after the first night’s performance. The manager of the troupe, who was staying at the Lawrence, was in despair. He told his woes to the proprietor of the hotel, who informed him that the che/ of the establishment was a conjurer. Descend- ing to the ‘‘lower regions’’ (a capital place, by the way, in which to seek a dis- ciple of the black art) the theatrical man discovered the genital Imro studyingabig volume. Near by a black cat sat blink- ing at him. Upon the stove was a hugh caldron. The mse en scene of the place was clecidedly that of a wizard’s studio. But things are seldom: what they seem. The book which Fox was so industri- ously conning proved to be a dictionary of the French language, not a black- letter tome on sorcery. The chef was en- gaged in making up a menu card, in oth- er words, giving French names to goou old Anglo-Saxon dishes. The caldron contained soup. The cat was the regular feline habitue of the kitchen, not an imp or familiar demon. ‘The chef. [believe,”’ ger, politely. ‘‘lam,’’ said Fox. ‘You are an amateur conjurer ?”’ ‘‘Lamuse myself with legerdemain oc- said the mana- casionally.’”’ “You're the man I’ m looking for. Lam the proprietor of a vaudeville company playing at. . . The gentleman who does the magic turn for me has disappeared; gone on a prolonged debauch . ‘Ah, Isee,’’ interrupted Imro, ‘‘a dev- otee of the ‘inexhaustible bottle’ trick.” ‘I want you to take his place,’’ said the manager, and fill out the week's engage- ment. I will arrange matters with the hotel proprietor for you."’ ‘Donner und Butsen\’’ cried Fox. “Why, I never was on a stage in my life. I'd die with fright. Face an audience? I'd rather face a battery of cannons.”’ ‘*Nonsense,’’ answered the theatrical man. °'Do help me like a good fellow. It will be money in your pocket.”’ After considerable persuasion, Fox consented. The culinary department was turned over to an assistant. That night Imro appeared on the stage, hab- ited in a hired dress suit that did not fit him like the proverbial “‘paper on the wall.’’ With fear and trembling he made his bow, and broke the ice by the follow- ing allusion to his very bald pate: ‘‘La- dies and gentlemen, why ts my head like Heaven? .. . You give it up! Good! Because there is no parting there!’’ Amid the shout of laughter occasioned by this conundrum, Fox began his card tricks. In the argot of the stage, he ‘made good.”’ This event decided him; he aban- doned cooking for conjuring; menu cards for the making of programmes. A Card Mystery By Donald Holmes | fled, and one placed in the wea hands of a spectator, per- 8 former retaining the other. ! The spectator is requested to mentally select any number; then to privately count down the cards in his pack to such number, and turn up the card next in order. The performer fol- lows his example by counting down the cards in his own pack until stopped by the spectator, when it is found that the two cards turned up are exactly the same in suit and value. While the above effect is not new in WO packs of cards are shuf- - card magic, I believe the means em- ployed are not generally known. A little preparation is necessary before presen- tation. Obtain two packs of cards, and from one remove any card you may elect, say the three of spades. Cut a sec- tion out of one end of this card, as in Fig. 1, of such size that it may easily be covered by the ball of the thumb when held as in Fig. 2. Place this prepared three of spades on top of the pack. This pack, which I shall designate as No. 1, is the one you retain in your possession during the trick. Pack No. 2 is unprepared, except that

Page 69

A CARD MYSTERY just previous to the beginning of the trick under consideration you take pains to have the three of spades of this pack on the top. You come forward with pack No. 2, carelessly shuffling the cards, but taking care that the position of the three of spades remains undisturbed at top. (Uf you are able to palma card, you may palm off this card and offer the pack for shuffling. ) Hand the pack toa gentleman and request him to mentally select any number he may elect, and to count a like number of cards, one after the other, off the top of his. pack. You caution him— to count his cards noise- lessly, so that it will be impossible for you to easily determine the precise num- ber chosen. Meanwhile, you may turn your back as an extra precaution in his favor. When your assistant announces his task accomplished, you request him to replace the counted packet on the top of the pack. (Note: The mere process of counting the cards off the pack shifts fof card—the three of spades— to the dottom of the packet. Therefore, when the assistant has counted packet and it is replaced on the pack prop- er, the three of spades rests in the pack at the num- ber mentally chos- en by the specta- tor.) You then take the pack in your own hands, plainly showing, without verbally calling atten- tion to the fact, that your hands conceal nothing. You explain to your auditors what has so far taken place. You say, “*This gentleman has counted off a few cards from the pack, the precise number = aq yi EZ .§ oe SE pa FIG. 2 of which is known only to himself-—cer- - FIG. 1 i: . ey ’ fe . 7 ea * me 7 Oe ESS 4 aA. 2 .¥% — + -* -&. ‘an i. a me ey le Bd yi tainly notto me.”’ As you say ‘‘counted off,’’ you suit the action to the words, and with a careless gesture apparently draw off the top card of the pack, in- stantly replacing it thereon. Now, as a matter of fact, you ac- tually draw off Zio cards, the fof and bor- tom cards of the pack. Fig. 3. shows the op- eration in detail, and just a little practice be- fore a mirror will ena- ble you to execute this simple sleight effect- ively. You hold pack, face down, in left hand in position for dealing, but slightly elevated off the palm. The right hand approaches the end of the pack nearest to it, fingers above, thumb below. Then, as the fingers of the right hand draw the top card off the end of the pack, the thumb simultaneously draws off the bottom card, pressure between the fin- gers and thumb bringing the two cards together as one the instant they clear the pack, and as such they are replaced on the top. A little practice will enable you toperform this operation so_ that the two cards come away from the pack fairly squared up together, but even should they show as two cards, audi- ence would haveno reason to suspect anything, merely supposing that you had drawn several cards together off the top of pack. You replace the two cards on the pack, and hand the latter back to your volunteer assistant. By the secret trans- fer of the bottom card to the top, the three of spades now occupies a position one card lower down in the pack than it did when the assistant counted off his packet. You obtain pack No. | from the table, and after a little shuffling, during which the prepared three of spades 1s ta i += 7 ss = rs tae, Ss 4 . Se! See ® * ¥ FIG. 3 Photographs after drawings by Mr. Holmes

Page 70

38 MAGIC retained on the top, you place the cards in your left hand in position for dealing, with the prepared end of the three of spades towards the right. You state that you are about to deal a few cards off this pack, and you will ask the gentleman to call ‘’stop’’ when you have dealt off a number of cards corresponding to the number originally chosen by him. You proceed to draw one card at a time off the top of the pack, dropping them tn a packet upon the table. In other words, in each case you draw the card directly under the prepared three of spades, the segment cut out of this top card permit- ting the tip of the right forefinger to withdraw the card next below it. When the spectator calls ‘‘stop,’’ you immedi- ately seize the Zop card (the prepared three of spades), and draw it off the pack between the thumb and fingers, the ball of the thumb masking the missing seg- ment, asin Fig. 2, when you show the face of the card. Show plainly that this card is actually drawn off top of pack. You now request the gentleman to count offa like number of cards from the top of pack in his possession. When he complies, request him to turn up the next card on pack proper, and he will be amazed to find the three of spades occupying the identical position in his pack as the same card occupied in your own. The Ribbon from an Orange By Ernest Evangeline mt} HIS brilliant parlor trick is py described by Professor Hoff- (5 mann as, ° The Bewitched | Orange,'’' and by David De- dos! ar vant, “The Weird Orange.”’ In the actual presentation of this trick I have found it advisable to depart from their methods. The effect of the open. It is found to be quite innocent of any intent to deceive. The pictures tell the whole story. I use a darning needle or bodkin with an eye’ long enough to just take the rib- bon through flat. I color the needle by heating it over a lamp or gas flame to give it a ‘‘gun metal’’ finish, so that FIG. 1 trick is the same in every case. A small unprepared orange is selected by one of the company from a plate containing several. It is examined and returned to the entertainer, who immediately seizes a knife and begins to peel it. After one or more small picces have been torn off, he suddenly jerks out about a foot of ‘baby’? ribbon. Laying down the knife he proceeds to pull out of the orange a long strip of the ribbon which ts handed to any lady present, and the orange passed for inspection after being cut FIG, 2 FIG. 3 when it is dropped with the knife on a table with a dark covering it cannot be seen, I prepare for the trick by purchasing three or four ‘‘Sunkist’’ oranges of the same size, with the tissue, trade-marked wrapper on them, having my needle and ribbon coil with me and selecting or- anges which, when pressed on the nee- dle and coil of ribbon, will just allow the point to appear on the other side. I use two yards of the best narrow orange- colored silk ribbon with smooth edges.

Page 71

THE MAN WITH THE MYSTIC SHADOW 39 One end of this 1s passed through the eye for about one anda half inches, and the rest of it wound tightly round the nee- dle in the form of a little coil A’ pin stuck right through the cotl keeps it from coming undone. I present the trick in the following manner: Task my friends to excuse me for a moment and disappear tn the direction of the kitchen, returning immediately with a plate of oranges with the tissue wrapper still round them as though I had just picked them out of a full box, and with the needle and ribbon coil con- cealed in my left hand (Fig. 1), from which I pull out the pin that holds the ribbon in place. As ] enter the parlor I commence my “‘patter.”’ ‘My wife's uncle, out in California, wrote us a couple of weeks ago that he was sending a box of silk ribbon made of silk spun by California silk worms. We have not seen the ribbon but we re- ceived a box of Sunkist oranges and have discovered our uncle is something of a practical joker.”’ Here I offer the plate to someone in the room. ‘I want you toselect anyone of these oranges. That's right, take the wrapper off and give it a close inspection. Looks just like a regular orange does it not 2’ I put the plate and remaining oranges on the table. ‘Now if you will let me take the or- ange, I will show you where the joke comes in.”' I take the orange with my right hand and press it home full on the needle in my left hand. Then with my right hand ] pick up a fruit knife and tear off.a part of the peel where the needle comes through. With the knife blade on one side of the needle and my thumb on the other I jerk the needle out, bringing some of the ribbon with it, the end in- serted in the needle eye slipping out. With my thumb I work the needle against the side of the knife blade be- tween the company and myself and put them both on the table, the knife on top. About a foot of the ribbon comes through at the first jerk..As I pull out the rest of it I say, “‘] once saw a snap- shot of a California yirl with her hair done up in oranges, but I never knew before how it was done.”’ Handing the ribbon to one of the young ladies present, I again pick up the orange and cut it in half, endeavor- ing to cut inthe same direction taken hy the needle. It is then offered for ex- amination, and of course, is found ina perfectly natural condition, with noth- ing whatever to account for the presence of the ribbon. The Man with the Mystic Shadow By Max Sterling 0 eee ten is a novelty necessarily : 4D) intended for the stage only, and involves an entirely new bea | principle in magic. The con- pile ts —=) ception is entirely original, and although the author has never staged it, On a minature scale it proves thor- oughly practical. [tas now published for the purpose of stimulating further ap- plication of the system, or the act may be adopted in its entirety. In effect, the rising curtain discovers a narrow raised platform supported by a number of slender trestles, behind which, centered at the back of the stage, is a single projecting lantern with fold- ing screens at either side. The performer enters, and describing the exceptional character of shadow pantomine he is about to introduce, draws special attention to the absence of all apparatus, etc., and the impossi- bility of utithsing stage traps, orthe side entrances of the stage itself, for the re- markable phenomena produced, for dur- ing the entire performance it will be ob- served his isolated shadow does not fora second leave the sheet. He now mounts the platform and the white sheet de- scends in front of him. Ilis shadow and that of the platform are immediately thrown into strong re- hef by the turning of the stage lantern up and the ‘Front of House’ lights down. The performer commences in the or- thodox manner by baring his arms, slow- ly turning his hands to proclaim them empty. Without further movement than closing the fingers an egg is produced. A second later it is a living chicken;

Page 72

40 again it changes into a full grown fowl. A series of handkerchief tricks provide sufficient cover to produce tables, chairs, or any other desired objects the solidity of which are demonstrated by slowly re- MAGIC which are the whole key to the mystery. The center lantern is turned low with open lens, on the curtain rising. The two side lanterns have been pre- viously keyed to the point of fusing the Dummy Lanrern Zs 5 —— —=—— = ——— — \ eg ——— Saas ———_— — AY, JZ ———————SS— ———— — — = —{— Properties AN “7, /, —————» — = —=mme x ot reaqucraed A \ 5:1DE —= ees OOO “~~ a= Qe w < fe A Y Sz ee Z% AN ——— = = SS, ; - Serve , See SS Yor Jf = mn un ee —————————— Sereen on RS . 6 ¥ = UPS Hg —— opening ROO SSE 7 a WeIiTe t a 4 ——— SHEET O DIAGRAM OF STAGE SET FOR “THE MAN WITH THE MYSTIC SHADOW" volving that the shadow of all sides may be cast. Possibilities of the most extravagant effects are only limited to the ingenuity of the artiste himself. The accompanying illustration fully explains the stage setting and prelimi- nary screening of two secret lanterns focus in the center of the sheet, to ob- tain which each lens is masked with one side square. The center lantern is of no importance, and acts simply as a ‘‘mis- direction’’ while the stage is exposed. NOTE—Mr. Max Sterling is the author of “Problems in Mystery.” and the novelty described above, which is com- pletely explained in that book, is one of the most valuable contributions made to the art of magic in years. Problems in Practical Magic New Problems in Subtle Conjuring for Magical Students “The work of a conjurer is so subtle that to the enthusiast it will have as much fascination as the unravelling ofa mystery has for a vreat detective. "—DEVANT These “Problems in Practical Magic” cull be a regular feature of MaGic. Origit- nal problems and solution to those printed are desired and will be paid for when ac- ceptable. Send rough pen or pencil draw- ings when necessary and a stamp for re- turn if unavatlable. I An Original Handkerchief Production For the first problem I have selected an excellent suggestion submitted by Mr. Harold Latham. As his trick stands, without any changes whatever, it is a splendid effect and well worth while. I will give his version just as written: EFFECT—The left hand shown empty and sleeves right up. Performer pretends to see handkerchief floating in air and makes a grab with left hand. A fan is taken in right hand. Left hand is fanned forawhile. Handker- chief is now pulled out of the closed left hand. SECRET—A fan is lying upon a_ table spread out. Under handle end of fan is ) lying a small tube of brass or tin, 1 1-40r 1 1-2in. in diameter and 2 1-4 in. long, FIG. 2

Page 73

PROBLEMS IN PRACTICAL MAGIC 4l open at both ends. This tube contains the hand- kerchief. Left hand is now shown empty, and closed. Right hand picks up fan with tube at same time. Performer now stands left side to au- dience. Right hand now fans left, during which a slight stroking movement is made with fan over left hand, which for a moment conceals left hand from the audience. It must be under- stood that when fanning the left hand, the right should he just above left. During one of the stroking movements, tube issimply dropped by right hand, under cover of fan, into left. The movement is so natural that it is unnoticeable. Right hand now pulls handker- chief out of closed left hand (really from) tube in left hand). In placing handkerchief on table or over chair hack, tube is dropped under cover of handker- chief into servante or got rid of by means which suit the performer best. I believe Mr. Latham’s trick can be made still more artistic by endeavoring to have the handkerchief appear slowly while fanning, after dropping the tube into the left hand (See tllustration). A beautiful and perfect illusion will thus be created. It is possible that the handkerchief could be worked up and out of the tube with the finger. I would like to have some other opinions on this point. 2 Diminished Cards In this capital deception, sent in by Mr. J. J. Charles, Jr., 1s the making ofa stunning pocket trick suitable for 1m- promptu performance on any occasion. The trick should be executed without the use of the card box. EFFECT— The performer comes forward and has three cards chosen. He then shows his pock- et empty and tells the audience that he ts going to pass the cards into his pocket, and to make it more wonderful he is going to reduce them in size in the passing. ‘The cards are shuffled back in the pack and are commanded to pass. The cards are found in the performer's pocket, but ereatly reduced in size. Then, being afraid that they cannot sce them well, he restores them by putting them in a box. SECRET—The secret Is simple enough. The performer forces the three cards on the persons by the aid of a forcing pack, if he is not adept at the common way. The pocket is shown emp- ty by the simple way of having the small cards, which are duplicates of those forced, in the up- per corner of the pocket. When the cards are in this position the pocket may be turned inside out without disclosing the concealed cards. The cards are restored by the use of a card hox which almost everybody knows. It is usually made of some polished wood. It is about half an inch deep and has a loose flap which may he placed against the top or bottom, for the box opens in the middle and looks the same = from which ever side it is opened. The large cards are placed in top or bottom and the flap put on top of them. In this position the box may he shown apparently empty. The cards to be changed are placed in the box and the box closed. The box is then turned over, thus letting the flap fall down on small cards and disclosing the large ones when box is opened. I believe it possible to reduce this trick to simpler terms. The card box should be omitted and cards restored to original size ina less obvious manner. Can the whole trick be executed from the pock- ets 7 Here is a chance for some magical inventor to score! Mr. Charles’ idea is a good one. 3 A Small Flag Change Mr. Loual Sugarman submits the next trick. It needs a little working over to obtain more natural movements. EFFECT—Two small pieces of paper about four inches square and a small silk lay are shown. One piece of paper is formed intoa tube around the forefinger and the silk flag tucked in. The ends of the paper tube are then folded in and sealed, andthe tube hung up in full view or put in a glass. The second piece of paper is then rolled upempty, sealed and putin another glass. The flay is then commanded to change from the first tube to the empty one, and both glasses handed, without touching paper tubes, to. two different spectators, who open tubes and find flay transposed. SECRET—Geta piece of tubing (brass preferable but seareboard will do), about three inches long and just large enough to fit over forefinger. A piece of vaseline camphor ice tube with slide is just the thing, Place this on two pins stuck into the back of a cigar-box as in Fig. 2. A folded handkerchief under the tube makes a pad on which to drop the loaded tube. Lay papers on top of cigar box so that one edge projects over tube. Show flag and in pick- ing up one ofthe papers insert forefinger in tube and roll paper round it. Stuff flag in, fold in one end and in doing so let the tube containing the flay slide out on table back of cigar-box. Then tuck in other end and seal both ends. Roll up the other paper around finger, fold the ends in and seal as before, and in turning back for glasses exchange for sealed tube already loaded with duplicate flay and kept in coat pocket or vest. Place this in glass and hand hoth glasses to audience. FIG, 2 A very pretty trick. While similar to other tricks that have recently appeared, I believe it to be worth further consid-

Page 74

42 MAGIC eration. I object toit for the reason that the first tube, when formed, must have the ‘‘load’’ secretly dropped out of it behind the cigar-box on table in the act of closing one end of the tube. Now this is a difficult thing todo ina natural manner with a tube of this size. The problem, therefore, is to devise some other means of getting the flag out of the first tube. Box, Ball and Handkerchief By Harold Latham ret SMALL wooden box, five rF, aN I inches high, five inches wide | 2 } SV : and eight inches long, is VOM given for examination. A =: billiard ball is then placed p in the box by the audience, together with a borrowed handkerchief. The box is now tied up with string or tape, dr the audtence. Knots can be sealed if desired, and the string can be supplied by the audience. The box is now given into the hands of the performer who goes behind a screen for only twenty seconds and reappears once again with the billiard ball and handkerchief in his hands. Box is again examined and knots found to be exactly as they were tied and sealed. The box can be easily knocked up at home. The wood should be a quarter or an inch thick. The sides must be nailed together with one inch nails. One end of box is faked in the following manner: To outward appearances both ends seem alike, having five natls to secure each end. Ifthe reader will glance at the illustration a moment he will see that the two nails at bottom of one end piece (AA) are imitation ones; that is to say, they are knocked in before the end ts fitted and then filed off flush with the sides, thus letting the end piece swing backwards and forwards. The end piece is put in place and the nail B driven home. Thus, it willbe seen, by with- drawing B, the end piece is free to swing as described. The nail Bis now worked in and out a few times, so as to make it fairly loose fit, but not too loose. Performer should have concealed in his pocket, a small screw-driver. On gaining possession of the box he retires behind the screen. The moment he is out of sight, he takes screw-driver from pocket, inserts the point under the head of the nail B and presses it out from the bottom. He next catches hold of it by his fingers and pulls it right out. It is then quite a simple matter to press side inwards, extract ball and handkerchief, after which, performer presses the top of end piece, causing it to swing Into place again. He then replaces nail, press- ing it hard into place again and comes before audience showing ball and hand- kerchief out of box, which can be untied and examined once more. Care should be taken to have the two top nails as near the top of end piece as possible, as the string and tape, if tied tightly, prevents to a certain extent the end piece being pushed in any great way, the top pressing against string when bottom is pushed inwards. It does not matter how much string is used. It is quite easy to pull handker- chief and ball through it. I invented this trick some five years back, and have never had the secret discovered, although continually work- ing: it.

Page 75

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of -us ‘‘If its Leroy’s, its the best.”’ Magician’s Annual, Nos. | or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2.00; Ma- gician’s Book of Patter, 50 cts.; Red Demon’s Fire Book, 50 cts.; Goldston’s Tricks and Illusions, $1.50; Selbit’s Books of Patter, Nos. 1 and 2, each, 35 cts.; Some Modern Conjuring, $1.00. Send $2.00 for our ‘‘Svengali’’ Pack and Mene-tekel Pack. These cards surpass anything ever put out. ‘‘I consider they surpass anything I have ever seen and are easily worth $5.00 a pack.’’—Max Ho pen. Send 10 cts. for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50 cts. for 212 page I|Justrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the ‘‘Society American Magicians.”’ 66 : : +) A M : T : Ik : Something Different agic r1C This is the question invariably asked by the mod- ern mayician in his quest for new material in his CATA LOGU EK | chosen profession. His insatiable thirst for more — knowledge (‘‘something new’) is responsible for the wonderful advancement of the Art in recent years. Tf vou really want something new, novel and practical you should order at once Peerless Trick & Novelty Co. The Book of the Year Dept. 18, 3148 State Street Chicago, Ill | SOME MODERN ~ CONJURING , » e e 1 Ihe Magician Monthly | By Donald Holmes rdited by Will Goldston ‘ ee ae ‘ ‘ A journal for all interested in Magic and Mys- A Series of Original Experiments in the tery. In its sixth year of success. Annual sub- | Magic Art scription, 31.15, Sample copy, 10 cts. Foreign Contains the explanations of more REAL stamps not accepted in payment. | TRICKS than any book of twice its size. Nota THE MAGICIAN, Ltd..6 Robin Hood Yard, London, F.C. | single space filler. Tricks with Watches, Rings, rs ; ; ; —~ | Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice, etc., lucidly e¢x- ’ "THR ~ plaine fessional or amateur plained. Of interest to professional or a L ILLUSIONIS ! 1 alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant half- Journal for Professional and Amateur Magicians. The gone cuts. Something different in every respect. only Masical Magazine printed inthe French Language. , . Published Monthly. Uustrated. Annual subscriptions. Price One Dollar Postpaid 8 frances (SLA), Sample copy, 75 centimes (15 cts.) i : lied Editer, CAROLY. 20 Boulevard St. Germain. Paris. Fr. Your dealer supphe Oe eae ety Donald Holmes ear ae Mawic Act. for two ER ae cents. A lot of magical apparatus for sale cheap. D. L. RAINEY, 1404 - ¢ > Locust Street, Kansas City, Mo. | Box 315, San Angelo, Texas When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 76

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Martinka & Company Magicians’ Headquarters in America 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods need no extravagant claims, being known for solid quality the world over. Complete catalogue, 25 cents. List free. Latest Color Change Handkerchief | A New Book by SHS atte only used. A blue David Devant andkerchief with a white . border is held by the finger TRICKS FOR tips and suddenly changed EVERYONE to a bright red handkerchief ae with a wits border. Most Clever Conjuring surprising effect. No prac- . an tice necessary. Works on With Common Objects first trial. Price, $1.50. Price, 50 cents The Changing Spots MAGICIAN A solid 3-inch die, black with white spots, is shown. A metal ANNUAL tube open at both ends is then exhibited, and pcrformer puts 1909-1910 his arm through it. The tube is then placed over the die. A. handful of round, red paper discs are thrown into the tube. On Edited by Will Goldston lifting it up the spots on the die are found to have changed from —_1(0 pages, 300 Illustrations white to red. Price, $4.00. Price, $2.00 Production and Color Change of Flowers A large shallow metal tray, 16x14 inches, is shown from both sides: suddenly, without any covering the tray is filled with red flowers, heaped up high; just assuCcdcnly all the red flowers change into white, then they vanish completely. Each timethetray isshown from both siccs. This very startling trick is suitable for any act and will eapecialy be appreciated by lady mayicians and Japanese acts, Price, $6.00. The January Issue of MAGIC The January number of MAGIC is of great in- terest to Magicians In general, asa glance atthe | Table of Contents will show: | The Magic Shop—What a Conjurer Can Do—Josetty's | Marvelous Rising Cards—An Ettective Match-Box Fake— A Vanishing Card—Bertram’s Two-Handed Pass— Hand: - kerchief and Rubber Band—Conjuring as a Social Advan- taye—The Magical Market. A few left. 10 cents a copy while they last. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo, When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC The publisher of MAGIC will pay real, if not ‘‘big,’’ money for articles, drawings, photo- graphs and sGeiches suitable for publication in the ‘‘Twin Magazines of Wonder.’’ Ma- terial must be of interest to amateurs and the general public. No descriptions of com- plicated apparatus tricks or elaborate illusions will be considered. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 203 Temple Block, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 77

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS A New Spirit Collar Collar will stand the closest examination, Any padlock used. In- stantaneous release. This is something different; will foil the fellow who knows all about Spirit Collars. Complete, full directions, post free, $3.00. Some Modern Conjuring By Donald Holmes Best Book Published in vears, $1.00, post free Catalogue Free The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 341, Cambridgeport, Mass. Firstand Only Number Get in the Magic Game If you want to know some MORE about the oldest and most fascinating amusement in the world, subscribe to THE SPHINX 2: a _ oft ar GHOST OMAN r AND RE ASON = Sra Pia ¢ , > bi nh ee 7 -t ve e's a) NC oes em a3 The February, 1910, issue of GHOSTS con- tains the following articles: A. M. WILSON, M. D. A monthly magazine for amateur and profes- slonal mayicians. Spectral Hlusions—Threading the Mazes—The Sphinx Special, skillfully conducted departments give all the Riddle of Humanity—An Afternoon in a Magical Library —How I Became a Spirit Medium. Only afew copies left. 10 cents each while they last. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. latest news about professional magicians, News letters from correspondents in all parts of the world area regular feature. Soa year. Single copies, 10 cents. A. M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher 906 Main Street, Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 78

Aerial suspension MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The only drum head tube trick Vanisher, only Sic. LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and Ilusicns. We sell only the best Tricks, and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill. All our directions are very plain and in most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts.in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manufacturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and [lusions in the world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station, New Haven, Ct. Card levitation When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC Palladine’s spirits Sy “2 C ~ ee, ee Fire eater x Anarchist (stink) bombs gf “e e, Aed :\ ‘ “- AS} ve * a ‘ Fadeawavy card The caldron illusion

Page 79

Sa)HE May, 1910, issue of THE #4, MAGAZINE OF WONDER ‘| Devoted to the world’s most fascinating pursuit and amusement Published every month by ERNEST EVANGELINE, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri. Yearly subscriptions, $1.00. Single copies, 10 cents. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. ‘This number contains articles by Henry Ridgely Evans and Hereward Carrington. Every number contains tricks and magical deceptions that can be performed without sleight of hand

Page 80

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS IMPROVED LIQUID CHANGE AND SEPARATION TRICK This is really a splendid trick. The performer shows three tumblers containing respectively Red and Purple Liquids and Water, also an empty cylinder and fancy cover. He then pours the liquids into the empty cylinder, first the Purple, then the Water, tinally the Red. cov- ering it over with the empty cover, he commands the Liquids to sepa: rate and appear in the cylinder in the order in which they were emp- tied, viz; Purple, White and Re d. Upon uncovering it this wonderful separation is seen to have taken place. He again covers it over and up- on the cover being removed, the colours have vanishe diand only clear water remains inthe cvlinder, Price 1 | 6682.76). Post Free 12 | 2 682.92). Carriage extra to abroad. LATEST BOOK ON MAGIC PEE RLEss PRESTIDIGITATION. This book. by Mr. Herbert De Caston contains a colle ‘ction of entirely new ideas and ettects in the fascinating art of magic. the sole rights of which we have purchased. It contains several tricks with Cards. Handkerchiefs. and Frys, ete. and is profusely Tlustrated. Ttis beautifully bound in a fancy cloth cover. We anticipate a great demand for this hook. Price 2 | - 4&e). Post free 2 | 2 (52e), NEW BOOKS SOME MODERN CONJURING. Price 4 | - (960). Post free. 4 | 281). Sole Agents in England for this book. HANDCUFF SECRETS. By the celebrated Harry Houdini. Price 1 | - (24c). Post free 1] 2028 ¢). PROBLEMS IN MYSTERY. By Maw Sterling. Price 216 (6c), Post free 2] 7 (@2e). ENTERTAINING. By “Albertus.” - (240), Post free ft | 2 028er. HAMLEY BROS., Ltd. Sass: LONDON BRANCHES 510a and 512, Oxford Street, W. 29, Ludyate Hill, F.C. 20) and 202, Regent Strect, W. 59, Knightsbridge, S. W. 86 and 87, High Holborn, W. C. (Head Warehouse) The 3 hounds posed mo Kebve the hgurd> change Mywalbr The Best Vv Magical Apparatus in the world is made by CARL WILLMANN, Hamburg, Germany, and the line is controlled by The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York “Advertising draws custom; only merit wlll hold it. We give you mere than we promise in our goods. What Edison ts to the Electric World, Carl Willmann is to the Magic World—the master builder of magical goods. Send for our Professional Catalogue. If you are a beginner in magic, send for our Catalogue of Parlor Tricks. Professtonal Catalogue, 100 pages, stage tricks, 50 cents clmateur Catalozue, WO pages, 600 tricks, 10 cents When you are in New York visit our display rooms and see the largest line of magical goods in the world. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 81

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME | CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M D. NUMBER 4 CONTENTS FOR MAY, 1910 Cover design from an advertisement used by the United Kansas Portland Cement Company PAGE THE STORY OF THE WAND Henry RipGety Evans 47 IHustrated from old prints and photographs SOME NEW MAGICAL WRINKLES 50 Iustration from a title page THE PSYCHOLOGY OF ILLUSION 51 PROBLEMS IN PRACTICAL MAGIC 51 THE MILLION DOLLAR MYSTERY 52 Hlustration from a photograph A WATCH DIAL PROBLEM (Davip Drvanr) 52 TRICKS IN THE GAMBLING GAME HEREWARD CARRINGTON 53 Illustrations from drawings and photographs \ MAGIC is published every month by Ernest Evangeline, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. early subscriptions, $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright, 1910. by W. J. Lucas ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. Sas The Distinctively Different Book WRINKLES By S. Willson Bailey and Harold A. Osborne Members of S. A. M. Twice the value for half the price. 34 new, novel and practical crea- ations. The dawn of a new day in magical literature. Does the ‘‘New ‘Kellar’ Finger,’ ‘“The Coin Finale to the Miser’s Dream’’ (which has them all guessing), ‘“The Coin Tray’’ (which de- livers any number of coins), ‘“lhe Rising Cards’’ (which can be taken into the audience), ‘‘Barton’s Sliding Billiard Ball Box,’’ together with a score of other WRINKLES, sound like novelty to you ? Printed on velvet-finished paper, 64 pages, cover in three colors. A popular book at a popular price. Ready for delivery NOW. Price, postpaid, 50c. For sale by The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 241, Cambridgeport, Mass. Catalogue and bargain sheet free When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 82

The Publisher Says Flowers for the Living I suppose every publisher gets a lot of letters from discontented ones —the never-can-bes that sputter round the big flashlights. A few have come my way lately. But | am too busy trying to make my paper worth a dollar a year, and insure my advertisers some profit on their investment to answer let- ters of this kind, or give them any consideration. With the writers, however, I want to go on record as standing for the distribution of flowers and bouquets to a deserving | man before he is dead. Therefore, if I err in handing out a few posies toa man who is work- ing in magic and making good by entertaining the public, inventing new tricks, or writing about magic, please bear in mind that I believe in respecting the dead and in flow- ers for the living—when they can appreciate them. With the June number Macic will be six months old. While no increase in size of the magazine is contemplated, I am making that number the best one issued so far. One of the ‘‘big store’’ features will be “‘Selbit’s’’ charming lightning artist sketch, A Aveht lith the Moon, Special permission for the repro- duction of this sketch has been granted by the English Publishers, and it will be given complete with all the original drawings, patter and instructions. A Nieht With the Moon \s one of the very few up-to-date entertainments of this character that are avatlable to the amateur for production without much practice and very little expense. With a few hours’ study of this sketch, any bright young man, with a small black- board and piece of chalk, can give a lightning “‘chalk talk’’ that will get some real laughs. No experience in drawing is necessary to do this sketch. Commencing with the June number, the regular feature, Problems in Practical Maetc, will be profusely illustrated with photographs made by one of the best amateur photographers in America, one who makes magic a ‘‘Sunday’’ hobby. No expense will be spared to make this department of great value to all tinter- ested in the art. A most remarkable mystic drawing by Charles Ricketts entitled, ‘“The Tree of Creation,’ forms the cover of the June number. A Twenty-five Dollar Prize for Magical Students Twenty-five Dollars (real money) will be paid January |, 1911, for the best contribution offered to Macic for publication during the present year. The length of the article and the style in which it is written will not be considered. The award will be made on the merit of the idea ex- pressed, and 1s offered to the magi- cians of the world for the best trick, illusion, idea, method, book or arti- cle that is invented during the pres- year. The award will be made by a com- mittee comprising the following gen- tlemen: Mr. Adrian Plate, Mr. How- ard Thurston and Dr. A. M. Wilson. Beginning withthe June number, two new departments on Paper Manipulation and Shadowgraphy will be added to the regular features. While no great amount of space can be given to these subjects, enough good material will ap- pear every month to make them worth while. They will be completely illus- trated with drawings and photographs. Experiences and ideas on these subjects are desired and will be paid for when acceptable. Other regular departments will be added as fast as possible on Lightning Sketches, Practical Ventrilo- quism, Chapeaugraphy and other sub- jects related to magical entertaining. ERNEST EVANGELINE

Page 83

MAGIC VOLUME 1 MAY 1910 NUMBER 4 “Tt might seem that if the public became familiar with the meth- ods of magicians who give public entertainments, their business would be gone. But this is not the case. As a peep behind the scenes and a knowledge of the machinery of the stage only help us to ap- preciate scenic effects, so an insight into the tricks of the prestidig- itateur will only serve to whet our appetite for seeing him perform his tricks. The prestidigitateur will be forced toimprove his tricks before an intelligent audience; he will be obliged to invent new methods, but not to abandon his art.’>—Dr. Paut Carus. The Story of the Wand By Henry Ridgely Evans “ Come, bring thy wand. whose magic power Can wake the troubled spirits of the deep." Sa |HE marshal carries his bat- My) on, the general his sword, | the king his sceptre, and the i wizard his wand. Every pro- a fession, every calling tn life, has its peculiar in- signiaorsymbol. A magician without a wand would be like the play of ‘‘Ham- let?’ minus the mel- ancholy Dane. The use of the wand is very an- clent indeed. In the Old Testament we read that Moses strucktherock with hisrod (wand), and the water gushed forth to quenchthe thirst of the Israel- ites, during their journey in the Wil- derness. When the Lord ‘‘multiplied his signs’? in Egypt he sent Moses and Aaron to Pharaoh to contend against the Egyptian sorcerers. Aaron ‘‘cast down his rod before Pha- roah, and before his servants, and it be- came a serpent. Then Pharaoh also MOSES AND ANRON PERFORMING THE MIRACLE OF THE SERPENTS BEFORE PHARAOH (After Schnorr von Carolsfeld.) —HeEMANS: “Address to Fancy.” called the wise men and the sorcerers: now the magicians of Egypt, they also did in like manner with their enchant- ments. Forthey cast down every man his rod and they became serpents: but Aa- ron’s rod swallow- ed up their rods.’’ [Ex. vii: 10, 11, 12.] Robert Heller, the famous presti- digitateur, told me once that he had seen this feat per- formed in Cairo by the Dervishes. The rods actually were serpents and hypnotized to such an extent as to be- come perfectly nig- id and stiff. When thrown upon the ground and recall- ed tolife by sundry mystic mantpula- lions, they crawled away alive and hide- ous as ever. Pressure upon the neck will often paralyze a snake. This, perhaps, will explain the miracle of the anctent magicians. Dr. Paul Carus, in his introduction to

Page 84

48 MAGIC The Old and the New Magic, says: ‘The early Christians (who, we must remem- ber, recruited their ranks from the low- ly in life) looked upon Christ as a kind of magician, and ‘all his older pictures show him with a magician’s wand in his hand.’’ In a fresco of the catacombs, discovered in the St. Callisto Chapel, and dated by Franz Xaver Kraus (Geschichte der Christ- lichen Kunst, 1, p. 153) at the beginning of the third centu- ry, Jesus is depicted holding in his left hand the scriptures, while his right hand grasps the wand with which he raises Lazarus from the dead. Laza- rus is represented as a mum- my. The miracle of turning the water into wine, at the marriage feast of Cana, is portrayed on a Christian sar- cophagus as being performed by the Saviour with a wand. The ancient peoples, as will be seen from the above examples, always associated the performance of miracu- lous or magical feats with a wand. These wands were sometimes of metal as well as wood, and were engraven with mystical characters, zodiacal signs, and emblems of power. The Egyptian sorcerers pos- sibly were acquainted with the magnetic properties of metals, and their wands played an important part in the curing of diseases. The old Druids of Great Britian and Gaul carried wands. The student of the so-called genuine sorcery should consult the works of Eliphas Levi, where much curious information may be obtained about the magic wand, The modern professor of sleight of hand and illu- sions carries a wand for two reasons: Ist, Aecause of the historical significance of the mag's rod; 2nd, Because the wand subserves many useful purposes. It mate- rially assists in concealing large articles in the hand, and tt affords a convenient excuse to turn one’s back on the spec- tators, tn order to pick up or lay down the mystic rod, thereby effecting some ONE OF THE OLDEST REPRESENTATIONS OF CHRIST From a Fresco of the Catacombs CHRIST TURNING WATER INTO WINE From a Christian Sarcophagus secret sleight. Every magician should have his wand. It lends grace to his art. When some magical result is to take place, he should bring about the trans- formation presumably with the wand. As Houdin says: *‘A touch of the wand on any object, or even awave in that direction, forms the ostensible cause of its transformation or disap- pearance. . . . Last but not least, the wand 1s to the con- jurer what a fan ts to a lady: it gives ease to his move- ments, and saves him from the well known stage bug- bear, the consciousness of possessing arms, and not knowing what to do with them.”’ The wand should be about thirteen or fourteen inches long, and tipped with ivory. An ebony rod is the most ef- fective looking. The celebra- ted magician, John Henry Anderson, had a small ivory skull fixed to one end of his wand. He set great store on this weird wizard’s baton. Alex- ander Herrmann always used the wand with great effect in palming oranges. He spoke of his wand as his ‘‘little stick.’’ ‘‘Give me a little stick!’’ he would say, in the middle of a trick. Then turning round to look for the wand would effect some clever ‘‘hat-load.’’ Mesmer, the famous magnetizer, carried a white wand and used itt in his seances. There are some tricks where the wand is abso- lutely tndispensable. For example: in the cup-and- balls. The Jacob’s Rod, or wand, is the supposed re- ceptacle for the little cork balls usedin the trick. The balls are extracted from the rod—at any rate they look as if they were squeezed from it by the clever sleight of hand of the magician. To see Alexander Herr- mann apparently extract eggs and or- anges from his wand was something to remember. For straight out palming I have never seen his equal, beause his work was so natural and convincing. In

Page 85

THE STORY OF THE WAND 49 his day ‘‘backhand’’ palming was almost unknown. I doubt tf it has added any- thing to conjuring. Conjurer's wands are now made to disappear and produce handkerchiefs | | mark to his audience: *This little stick I have in my hand is called the magic wand. It is absolutely of no use. I only carry it because the Magician’s Union compels me to do it.’’ This speech pro- | ie ta) OMI ee UE Veer tieter eee LI CP Ve tt TERS) SOME FAMOUS WANDS IN THE ELLISON COLLECTION and perform other magical effects too numerous to mention. The old coin-pro- ducing wand is known to all amateurs, but a number of fine improvements have been recently made in it. I once heard a prominent conjurer re- voked a laugh, but it was inartistic be- cause it disparaged the historicalemblem of the wizard’s calling: the supposed instrument of his power. Far better to say: ‘Ladies and gentlemen, behold the mystic wand. It was found in the mum-

Page 86

50 my-case of an Egyptian sorcerer, who lived two thousand years ago. It pos- sesses great Magnetic pow- ers,’ etc., etc. Then let the conjurer proceed to exe- cute some of the clever wand tricks described by Professor Hoffmann tn his ‘Later Magic.’’ Innumer- able pretty tricks may be executed with the wand, such as wrapping it in pa- per, and making it disap- pear, etc. | advise amateurs to study the uses of the magic rod. One of the prettiest is the ring and the wand. ‘‘Old,’’ you will say! Yes, old, but very clever. The Chinese and Japanese magicians use the fan instead of the wand. So much for the wizard’ s wand. Long may it wave. To lay it down, means for MAGIC a THE CLIMBING RING From “Latter Magic™ the conjurer to retire from the boards or to disappear forever into the realm of shadows. The great col- lection of wands of famous magicians made by Dr. Saram R. Ellison, of New York City, has recently been given by him to the Astor Library along with his magical books. NOTE—In the Climbing Ring here iustrated, the wand isan ordinary one with anickle plated mount at cach end. A cap of very thin metal. and plated in like manner. is made to slip over the mount at either end. At one side of this cap isa minute bole through which is threaded a piece of fine black silk, se- cured by a knot on the inside. The op- posite end of the thread is attached to the lowest button of the performer's vest. The cap. til needed, may be tucked under the vest, or hie hidden just inside the vest pocket. The ilustration plainly shows how the trick is worked. Having banded the wand for inspec: tion, the performer gets the cap into bis right band. and when the wand is re- turned to him slips its lowerend into i. He then takes the wand (by the opposite end). in the left hand, so that the cap is now on the vuter end. The slack of the thread is secured by the thumb, and ly- ing along the wand. cannot be detected. Some New Magical Wrinkles Another Valuable Collection of Practical Conjuring Secrets 4 Ww! Harold A. Os- \ Ci® UI borne has just I recently been published. It is advertised as being sold for 50 cents, and contains more useful and practical material than any book ever offered for that money. A glance at the list of good things con- tained therein reveals some suggestive titles: HANDKERCHIEFS—The Cloth Finger, A New ‘‘Kellar’’ Fin- ger, An Excellent Method of Rolling Handkerchiefs for Pro- duction, The Trap-Fold, Hand- kerchief from Paper Tube, A Flag Harness, A Second Flag Harness, The Knotted Handker- chiefs, The Handkerchief and Candle, The Match and the Handkerchief, The Handker- chief and Nested Envelopes, VERY valuable little volume by Mr. S. Willson Bailey and The Soup Plates. Coins— Finale to the ‘‘Miser’s Dream, proved Glass of Water Vanish for Coin, New- Era Coin Tray, A Spectacular Coin Vanish. BILLIARD BALLS—RBarton’s Billiard Pall Box, Wrinkles A FEW SUGCESTIONS AND INNOVATIONS Lad S&S WELSOR BARLY «1 HAROLD A OORORN a LD I yihalrelog _Hatd Q Onin - [sg t's wate Ree cs ee Aces TITLE PAGE OF “WRINKLES” Im. which was The An Advanced Billiard Ball Vanish. CARDS—An Effective Card Vanish, Marked Cards, A New Force, The Unique Rising Cards, Another Rising Cards, The Cards Out of the Pocket. MISCELLANEOUS—Fuel _ for the Fire Bowl, The Nest of Boxes, The Confetti-Glass, The Tape and Rings, A Load for Umbrella Flowers, The Emer- gency Dial, A New Fish Pole, The Vanishing Glass, A Single Slate Messaye, Appearing Glass and a Lemon. The short but charming- ly written Foreword ts es- pecially attractive and is reproduced here: ‘Wrinkles is an unpretentious little volume with no well de- fined mission as a sponsor for its inception, The suggestions and innovations which are contained in the subsequent pages are not presented as original creations, but rather as a collection of rare curios, each of at one time the cherished child of another's genius—the zealously guarded gem of a contemporary. “Through strange and devious but legitimate paths they have journeyed into our hands, until,

Page 87

THE PSYCHOLOGY OF ILLUSION by a veritable process of metabolism, such a change has been wrought that it is quite impos- sible, in the great majority of instances, to dis- cover the original in the metamorphized. l sl “We do not expect that all the material will be novel to each reader but we do cherish the hope that each reader will find here and there a novelty—perhaps a suggestion of value.’' The Psychology of Illusion From the New York Vedical Journal es] Tis characteristic of the thor- oughness of French methods of education that more than oy one essay has been written <M] in that language for the pur- pose of popular instruction in the art of the prestidigitator—an art that Amert- can pedagogues would probably con- sider beneath their notice. When we re- flect, however, that religions have been founded on the apparent miracles of sleight of hand and the judicious man- agement of tllusory processes, the 1m- portance of the subject becomes mani- fest. We have read with tnterest a small volume on this subject recently issued in France. It is not a manual for instruction in conjuring, but an analysis of the meth- ods used by modern stage illusionists to amuse an audience by baffling and con- fusing it. These methods are substantial- ly the same as those of the Egyptian magicians, as recorded in the Bible and elsewhere, and it 1s curious to learn that the same methods are used all over the world, and have been known tothe ma- gician caste everywhere from before the dawn of history. They are as much a part of human psychology and have played as important part in history as any other human characteristic. There is nothing in the little work that is not already known to every ama- teurconjurer, but what he has learned in detail is here scientifically generalized. The fallacy that “‘the quickness of the hand deceives the eye,’’ which has sat- ished so many spectators, is exposed and the real secret is explained—sug- gestion or misdirection at the proper moment. The skeleton of a given trick, the apparatus used, is least import- ant; what tells is the performer's man- ner, his personality, his handling of the mise en scene. A trick that in the hands of a schoolboy would merely excite the derision of his companions becomes in the hands of a Robert Houdin a thing to stupefy a king, his court, judges and princes of the Church. These last, by the way, along with women, are the most easily taken in; while curiously enough, children are the hardest to de- ceive. The more highly intelligent and educated—as the word 1s generally un- derstood, t. e., well read—an audience is, the more thoroughly is it taken in; this accounts for the imposing names cited in support of the genuineness of the silly tricks of sirpitualistic “‘mediums.’’ For reasons into which we have not space to enter, physicians have always furnished a large proportion of the stu- dents of magic; physician and magician were once the same individual. We rec- ommend the perusal of L’///usion, not only to our colleagues, but to all who are interested in human nature and the history of its development. Problems in Practical Magic New Problems in Subtle Conjuring for Magical Students “The work of a conjurer is so subtle that to the enthusiast it will have as much fascination as the unraveling of a mystery has for a great detective." —DEVANT. These “Problems in Practical Magic” will be a regular feature of Macic. Origi- nal problems and solutions to those printed are desived and will be paid for when ac- ceptable. Send rough pen or pencil draw- wngs when necessary and a stamp for re- turn tf unavailable. Unable to obtain the illustrations for this month’s installment of this feature I am compelled, at the last moment, to omit it. Some very interesting material has been received, including an original method for vanishing small articles on a table or chair, and a very clever rising cards from the pocket. These, together with others, next month.-—EDITOR.

Page 88

De MAGIC The Million Dollar Mystery Theodore L. De Land’s Latest Card Stunt _ a t 4 = | ~ ._> Le aE epi THE MILLION DOLLAR MYSTERY and cards No. 1, 8, 2, 9 and 7; these numbers total 27. Therefore, the 27th card on card A (counting down from the two little red arrows), is the Ace of Spades. In some cases you will be handed card B, instead of A, the same rule applies. The cards A and B will be known as the KEY cards; there are five little cards in each row, so it is an easy matter to count down by fives, as five, ten, fifteen, etc. Always hold the KEY card with the two little arrows pointing upwards.”’ Mr. Ve Land is the inventor of more new, original and startling mechanical card ef- fects than any other man living or dead. Some of his creations bime . are: Pick-it-Out,”’ es “.? The Devil’s Own . sé Trick,’’ The Haunt- 6 ed Ace,”’ — Knock- sé Out,’’ Fadeaway,”’ a a) . Cagliostro’s Card,”’ ae ° 4 Yogi's Wonder,”’ ee =) Two from Five , . ’” eé ° Leaves Nothing, Rainbow Crema- tion,’’ and many other effects. A Watch Dial Problem (David Devant) =| HIS is a trick which any one Y) can learn in half a minute, S) [G49 yet it is a trick that will baf- 4COy KE fle ninety-nine people out WENA Gf a hundred. Take out a watch, put it on the table, and ask some one tothink of an hour and then to con- sider that they have counted up to that number. Tell them that you will tap on the watch and that they are to stop you when the hour they thought of and the number of taps that you make ad- ded together come to twenty. Itis then found that the performer alway stops on the hour that the person thought of. Let us suppose that some one has mentally chosen the hour of eight. When the per- former has made twelve taps on his watch the audience tells him to stop, and his pencil stops on the hour of eight. The se- cret of this trick les in the fact that the performer remembers that his eighth tap must always be on the twelve, and —~also, that then he must go backwards round the watch from twelve to eleven, then toten, and so on. It will always be found that the hour selected by the au- dience will be the hour at which the pen- cil stops when the number of the hour added tothe number the of taps amount to twenty. If a large clock dial is used, it adds greatly to the effect in this trick.

Page 89

TRICKS IN THE GAMBLING GAME 53 Tricks in the Gambling Game The Methods of the Cheating Gamblers and Card Sharpers By Hereward Carrington PART ONE al SHAIL endeavor in this article to explain the meth- ods of well known gamblers Sort a and card sharpers—such as we see at the race course, the saloon, and the gaming table. I be- gin by a very simple trick, often seen, —the “‘three-card trick.’ A BEVELLED COIN The ‘‘sharp’’ takes up three cards, two suit cards and (say) a King. He places them on the table, face downwards, in order, and it is apparently very easy to see just where each card is placed. The King is at once picked out. Money 1s bet; it is again picked out. More money is bet, but this time, when the card 1s turned over, it is not the King, but one of the lower cards. The sharper had in some manner succeeded in changing the cards under our very noses. and making us lose our money—after allowing us to win the first time, so as to increase the bet! How did he do that ? In this way: Let us call the two suit cards, 1 and 2. The King we shall call 3. 1 and 2 are picked up, one in each hand, and then 3, the King, in the fingers of the right hand, under 1, which is held also in the right hand, only higher up in the fingers. Now, in laying down these cards, the first time, the lower of the two cards in the right hand is laid down first, then the top card, 3; but the second time, this top card, the King, is slipped out from under the other fvs¢, and the lower card placed on the table last. If this 1s done quickly, by an expert, it 1s almost impossible to detect the substitution; and we could swear that the lower card was placed down first, and the higher one last. We bet accordingly—and lose! Now, let us pass on to something else. We approach a group of men, three of whom are matching coins by spinning them. The ‘‘odd’’ man loses his coin— that is the bargain. Soon we notice that one of the men is losing nearly all of the time; the two others spin either both heads or both tails, all the time. And yet the spin seems to be fair: how is this ? Each of the two “‘sharps’’ (for they work in pairs) has two coins that have been ‘“‘faked.’’ The edge of the coin is bevelled, so as to make the coin slant one way or the other slightly—enough to determine on which side it will fall, when spun. Now, on a certain signal, A and B both spin heads, or tails, as the case may be, and the coins cannot do anything else du¢ agree. The third man, therefore, runs the chance, either of spinning the same as they do—making all heads or all tails—or of being the odd man, in which case he loses his money. But it will be seen the two sharpers can- not lose, no matter how many spins are macle. BLOCK OUT WORK Undoubtedly the finest work put on cards. “‘a’’ shows the ornament marked for ace, and “‘b™ shows unmarked scroll. A trick often seen on the English race courses is what is known as the * purse trick.’ The sharp, in this case, throws a shilling and a two-shilling piece into a large purse, and tics them tn It. He then offers to sell the purse, money and all, for six pence ora shilling, as the case

Page 90

54 MAGIC may be. Needless tosay, he finds many buyers. But when they open the purse, it contains only a penny and a _half- penny. The trick which is absurdly simple, is based on sleight of hand merely. The sharp throws a real coin into the air sev- eral times, and finally into the purse. But in throwing it into the purse the last time, he exchanges it, by palming, for another just the same size. [In England the penny is just the size of the two- shilling piece, and the halfpenny as the shilling. | This is twice repeated, and the coins can be felt through the leather of the purse. In that manner is another ‘‘flat’’ hoodwinked. When we come tocards, marked cards are the most frequently employed, of course; and the methods of marking them are as Ingenious as varied. Some- TWELVE DIFFERENT MARKINGS Details of the little scroll have been blocked out to indicate a suit from the deuce to the king. times the cards are glazed highly, all ex- cept in one spot; sometimes they are glazed more highly in one spot than else- where; sometimes a dot is imprinted on the back of the card, to indicate what it is—in some portion of the printed scroll work—and it would be practically undis- coverable to everyone unfamiliar with the marks, no matter how long he might look. Sometimes the scroll itself is a lit- tle different in every case. Sometimes, the stripes of a plaid, on the back of a card, will not make the corner all in the same way—the difference indicating the card. The slightest difference in the printing will serve to identify a card if you know what to look for, but can never be detected otherwise. Of course, the employment of marked cards is not al- ways possible; the sharp has to play with cards that are offered him: What then ¢ In that case, he proceeds to mark them himself, all unknown to the play- ers, during the actual progress of the game. Todothis, he may employ a num- ber of different devices, one of the sim- ‘ Yi TCCNCCA MORI OG THE TABLE REFLECTOR Once of the best “shiners” made. Showing the reflector in position when in use and when turned down. plest being a finger ring, on the inner side of which isatiny needle-point, and this he presses into the card at the proper place, when it isin his hand. When that card comes round again he will know itt. All the tmportant cards may soon be marked in this manner. He wins from that time on. Another means used is asmall mirror. By its aid, the sharp can see every card that he is dealing to those present, and this without any markings whatever. A mirror is simply hinged ontoa stout nee- dle, and this is embedded in the table, below its edge. The glass 1s then hinged out, and it will then reflect every- thing held above it. In this manner, every card dealt will be reflected in the mirror. Another means used is to insert a small mirror in the bowl of a pipe; and this, lying on the table, bowl to- wards the dealer, will reflect every card likewise. This mirror is sometimes in- serted in a ring, which may be slipped round into the palm of the hand at will. This is a very common device. Even a A STICKER REFLECTOR A small refleccor that can be stuck tothe palm of the hand. quill toothpick has been employed—a very small magnifying mirror being in- serted in the hollow of the quill. Or a small mirror is stood on the table, behind a pile of chips; or fastened to the in- side of the hand by means of a bit of wax. Tne simpler the means, the better, as a rule. (TO BE CONCLUDED)

Page 91

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 53 The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of us ‘Tf its Leroy’s, its the best.’’ Magician’s Annual, Nos. 1 or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2.00; Ma- gician’s Book of Patter, 50 cts.; Red Demon’s Fire Book, 50 cts.; Goldston’s Tricks and Illusions, $1.50; Selbit’s Books of Patter, Nos. 1 and 2, each, 35 cts.; Some Modern Conjuring, $1.00. Send $2.00 for our *‘Svengali’’ Pack and Mene-tekel Pack. These cards surpass anything ever put out. ‘‘I consider they surpass anything I have ever seen and are easily worth $5.00 a pack.’’—Max Ho pen. Send 10 cts. for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50 cts. for 212 page Illustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. 99 Eastern Representative of the ‘‘Society American Magicians. Lv ILLUSIONISTE ; ‘Something Different’’ Journal for Professional and Amateur Magicians. The This is the question invariably asked by the mod- only Magical Magazine printed in the French Language. ern magician in his quest for new material in his Published Monthly. Illustrated, Annual subscriptions, Seance SiGOl Sanple copy 75 canines IS -c1s 1. chosen profession. His insatiable thirst for more Editor. CAROLY, 20 Boulevard St. Germain, Paris. Fr. knowledge ( something new ) IS responsible for the wonderful advancement of the Art in recent years. ‘The! Magician Monthly _ If you really want something new, novel and Edited by Will Goldston practical you should order at once A journal for all interested in Magic and Mys- r tery. In its sixth vear of success. Annual sub- The Book of the Year scription, $1.15. Sample copy, 10 cts. Foreign Stamps not accepted in payment. SO M E; M O D E; RN THE M AGICI AN, Ltd., 6 Robin Hood Y ard, London, E. c C O NJ U RI NG (J. UE E ee The iene! of Conjuring Magazines, Its M \ ei C tenth successful year of pub- By Donald Holmes lication, Oldest. brightest, ; capa : ' best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians, The A Series of O1 iginal Experi ments in the recognised Journal of the professional magician. Magic Art Features every month—Original lessons ino Magic. be- : ; : oe ing ilustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage Contains the explanations of more REAL iusions, Explanatory programmes of promiment mai- TRICKS than any book of twice its size. Nota cians, showing the order of tricks presented. with an ex- Dai Mian Gl Wich Aig ete Sle ins ed tS Gi sinvle space filler. Tricks with Watches, Rings, Twelve months, 5 [6 (81,50), Table of Contents of the ten Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice, erc., lucidly ex- volumes mailed free. Americ an stamps and Dollar netes | plained. Of interest to professional or amateur eee er ve we : 2 . . . > stead. London, N. W, Ne “England, clent Road, West Hamp) alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant half- ee : ; tone cuts. Something different in every respect. FOR SAT Outht of Jate Pain HUNTER, THE | Price $1.00. postpaid. Your dealer supplied. aad Wizarb. Fine mavical apparatus eee ge of special destyn and construction: tables of individual DONALD HOLMES character, packiny-cases, trunks, efe.. ete. Most of the out- = : a fit. having been used but one season, is in excellent con- Box 351, San Angelo, Texas. dition. The entire lot must be sold at once and at prices from one-half to one-sixth the original value. [f interested, Burlesque Mawic Act. for two characters, 50 cents. A lot send stamps and list will be sent. DARD HUNTER, East of magical apparatus for sale cheap. D. L. RAINEY, 1404 Aurora, Erie County, New York. (| Locust S‘reet. Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 92

ADVERTISEMIENTS Martinka & Company Magicians’ Headquarters in America 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods need no extravagant claims, being known for solid quality the world over. Complete cataloguc, 25 cents. List free. Latest — Change Handkerchief A New Book by One hand only used. A blue David Devant handkerchief. with a white TRICKS FOR border is held by the finger tips and suddenly changed EVERYONE to a Lright red handkerchief aed with a white border. Most Clever Conjuring surprising effect. No prac- . : tice necessary. Works on With Common Objects first trial. Price, $1.50. Price, 50 cents The Changing Spots MAGICIAN A solid 3-inch die, black with white spots, is shown. A metal ANNUAL tube open at both enus is then exhibited, ard performer puts 1909-1910 his arm through it. ‘Lhe tube is then placed over the die. A handful of round, red paper discs are thrown into the tube. On Edited by Will Goldston lifting it up the sors on the die are found to have changed from 1( pages, 300 Illustrations white to red. Pr ice, FA.00~ Price, $2.00 Production and Color Change of Flowers A large shallow metal tray, 16x14 inches, is shown ‘ani both sides; suddenly, without any covering the trav is filled with red flowers, heaped up high; just assucdenly all the red flowers change into wlite, then they vanish completely. Each time the tray isshown from both siccs. This very starting trick is suitable for any act and will especially he appreciated by lady mavicians and Japanese acts, Price, $6.00. Paper Cut-Out for the Changing Die The March number of MAGIC contains a genuine novelty in the form of a paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a litth: glue. a beautifil black paper die and white shell can be made that willenable anvone to perform this charm- ing Mlusion, Complete instructions given, A few copies left. 10 cents cach, while thev last. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri When writing to adver.isers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 93

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS A New Spirit Collar Collar will stand the closest examination, Any padlock used. In- stantaneous release. This is something different; will foil the fellow who knows all about Spirit Collars. Complete, full directions, post free, $3.00. Some Modern Conjuring By Donald Holmes Best Book Published in years, $1.00, post free Catalogue Free The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 341, Cambridgeport, Mass. Firstand i selena Get in the Magic Game GHOSTS If you want to know some MORE about the oldest and most fascinating amusement in the world, subscribe to THE SPHINX IMAN( F ANDRAS ASON 5 x, ” * a a - yy » a. a "tee es eee re 5s 2 re Die Finn oye ; — A. M. WILSON, M.D. he February, 1910, issue of GHOSTS con- tals the following articles: A monthly magazine for amateur and profes- Spectral Tlusions—Threading the Mazes—The Sphinx sional magicians. Riddle of Humanity—An Afternoon in a Magical Library Special, skillfully conducted departments give all the —How 1 Became a Spirit Medium. latest news about professional magicians, Ne “ws letters from Only afew copies left. 10 cents each while they last. correspon lenis in all parts of the world are are pulls iv feature, Soa vear. Single copies, 10 cents. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher a M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher 3019 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. | 906 Main Street, Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 94

€:} ‘ mt 2 ea i Was 1m bys , oe al The water miracle Acrial suspension J ay AA MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The only drum head tub. trick Vanisher, only S0c. LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and Illusions. We sell only the best Tricks, and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill. All our directions are very plain and in most cases illustrated. | No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manufacturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and Illusions in the world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station, New Haven, Ct. Card levitation “When writing to advertisers. kindly mention M AGIC Fadeaway card The caldron illusion ee ee ee ee aad ag eee i => a.

Page 95

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER CONDUCTED: BY A, St. WILSON, M.D, , 7 22? tad | ~ “A * —_ = THE TREE OF CREATION A MYSTICAL DRAWING BY CHARLES RICKETTS JUNE 1910 PRICE 10) CENTS A Night With the Moon A Lightning ‘‘Chalk Talk’’ The Disappearing Vase and Flower A Beautiful Parlor Table Illusion

Page 96

‘\ MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The New Triple Color Changing Handkerchief An original novelty. An instant hit. This beautiful new effect is the very latest handker- chief creation. A single green handkerchief is exhibited, held by one corner with the fingertips of one hand. With a downward stroke of the other hand (which conceals nothing at any stage of the trick), the green handker- chief changes to red; another pass and the red becomes yellow,—three successive colors. The change can be in- stantly reversed and the trick repeated as often as desired. Beautifully and durably made in the best manner possi- ble. Easily operated by anyone, no fakes, the trick being contained within itself. Price, $1.50. . We handle a complete line of tricks, magical apparatus and magician’s supplies. Amateurs supplied as well as Professionals Send four cents, stamps, today and receive the following FOUR CATALOGUES Superior Magical Apparatus Latest Supplements New Card Miracles Trick Novelties and Jokers READ & COVERT $17-D East 43rd St., Chicago, II]. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 97

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Hamley Bros., Limited Hamley’s Special Conjuring Table To meet the demand, we have just introduced a specially cheap line in Tables, which we feel sure will give great satisfaction. The top measures 15 inches in diameter, covered with splendid quality black cloth with border about 4 inches wide all round trimmed with fancy gold silk braid and fringe. The legs are nicely made and are telescopic, making them very portable for traveling. The table can be raised or lowered to any height to suit the convenience of the per- former. The legs when closed measure about 21 inches long, and for packing will lay flat across the table. We are confident that these tables will have a great and lasting sale, and we are offering them to our customers at a nominal cost. Price 8 | 6 (32.04). Carriage to be paid on reccipt. We have alsoa splendid selection of Table Legs without tops, as follows: Cheap Table Legs, 3| 6 (84c). Superior Nickel Plated Table Legs, 8 | 6 ($2.04). Fancy Brass Table Legs, 15 | 6 (33.72). The Wandering Jacks The four Jacks are taken out of the pack. laid face upwards on the table. on each Jack three inditterent cards are dealt, the audience choose one pile. this is left'on the table tn full view of evervbody, and the other three piles are return- ed to the pack, the latter is now spread out on the table. the Jacks have vanished. and on turning over wh at appe ared to be one Jack and three inditterent cards. they are found to be the four Jacks. Price 1 | - (24c). Post free 1 | 1 (6c), LONDON BRANCHES 35, New Oxford Street, London, W. C., England 510a and 512, Oxford Street, W. 29, Ludgate Hill, E. C. 200 and 202, Regent Strect, W. 59, Knightsbridge, S. W. 8&6 and 87, High Holborn, W,. C. (Head Warehouse) o @ WILLMANN’S fe MAGICAL WONDERS Everything that is NEW in Magic is his. His Goods stand alone. You cannot compare other apparatus with Willmann’s. They are the best made. Cost more, but worth more. When you want GOOD tricks, buy Willmann’s and you will see what WORKMANSHIIP is. The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York, U.S. A. ARE PROUD TO ANNOUNCE THAT THEY ARE WILLMANN’S Sole Agents Send for our Professional Catalogue, 100 pages, Stage Tricks, Price 50 cents. Send for our Amateur Catalogue, 90 pages, Parlor Tricks, Price, 10 cents. It will pay you to visit our beautiful Magic Shop; finest in the world. We Have Everything that is New in Magical Construction When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MacGic

Page 98

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME I CONDUCTED BY A. M. WILSON, M. D. NUMBER 5 CONTENTS FOR JUNE, 1910 PAGE COVER From a drawing by Charles Ricketts A NIGHT WITH THE MOON ‘“SELBIT’’ 59 Ilustrations from a photograph and drawings PRACTICAL MAGIC 63 4. THE MAGNETIZED CARDS 5. SOME PRETTY FLORAL EFFECTS 6. DISAPPEARING VASE AND FLOWER Illustrations from photographs TRICKS IN THE GAMBLING GAME HEREWARD CARRINGTON 65 THE SHADOW WORLD 66 PAPIERGRAPHY 67 VENTRILOQUISM 68 MAGIC is published every month by Ernest Evangeline, 319 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. Yearly subscriptions. $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright. 1910, by W. J. Lucas ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. MARTINKA’S Catalogue Biggest and Best Catalogue of High Grade Magical Goods sent postpaid for 25 cents. MAGICIANS’ HEADQUARTERS IN AMERICA Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship, being known for solid quality the world over. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will greatly please everybody. A heavy brass cap is given for thorough inspection. In the cap is a small hole. going right through it. Three solid coins are placed on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same immediately, only two coins are left. No. sleight of band. Can be performed at once by anyone. Wits Price, complete $1.00 MARTINKA & CO., 493 Sixth Ave., New York, U.S. A. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 99

The Publisher Says ‘T think we will all agree, with- out making too much noise about it, that it is an exception for a ma- gician to speak of a fellow artist’s work in terms of the highest praise. It is with great pleasure, therefore, that I take the liberty of making public, but without consulting the writer, the following letter from Mr. Max Sterling, one of the most artistic of present day conjurers. I think it is quite the most beautiful letter I ever received, and a source of continual inspiration to try to deserve all the nice things he says about my little mystery paper. *“KERSWELL”’ CULLOMPTON, DEVON May 9th, 1910 Dear Sir:—In ‘The Golden Age of Magic’’ (published in your March issue) lies the golden key opening up ‘‘The Only Way’”’ to artistic and professional success In the mystic art. There is more real help in that one article than in all the volumes published for years past for it is thoroughly practical. How simple it all seems when placed so lucidly before one! Yet, ‘‘dressing an act’’ is by no means as easy as it would appear. ‘Pierrot and the Giant Card Case’’ is an example of perfect stagecraft, trans- forming an ordinary manipulation act into a spectacular head-liner capable of commanding top-notch salaries. It stimulates original thought in ap- plication to other mediums than cards, although card novelties are by no means exhausted. In England, ‘'Carlton’’ juggles cards simply as a foil for his running fire of inimitable comedy. “‘Dunningato’’— another card expert—surrounded his work with a powerful dramatic story as a frame to display an expose of tricks at the gambling table, andl titled it “The Master Card.’’ Both of these acts instance actual magic as secondary to an entertaining interest. Moreover, an act so ‘dressed’ provides invaluable misdirection by di- viding attention on the dual parts. Original suggestion is contained in every line of that editorial and it is just what magicians have long been waiting for. Provide more such articles treating upon similar stagecraft, with the same ingenious brilliancy of effect; propose other problems to which your readers can themselves apply true magical prin- ciples; project novel schemes for incli- vidual research, then shall “The Golden Age of Magic’’ dawn in your own time, in your own beautiful little publication, at the waft of your own magic thought, Wishing you complete success in your labor of love, believe me, Yours fraternally, MAX STERLING The July number of Maaic will con- tain two tricks that willbe worth many times its cost to discriminating ama- teurs. “‘The Reversed Oatmeal Car- tons,’’and “‘A Black Art Box and Bot- tomless Tumbler’ will be completely illustrated from drawings and = photo- graphs, and will form a valuable ad- dition to an up-to-date parlor or club- room program. A Twenty-five Dollar Prize for Magical Students Twenty-five Dollars (real money) will be paid January 1, 1911, for the best contribution offered to Macic for publication during the present year. The length of the article and the style in which it is written will not be considered. The award will be made on the merit of the tdea ex- pressed, and is offered to the magi- cians of the world for the best trick, illusion, idea, method, book or arti- cle that 1s invented during the pres- ent year. The award will be made by acom- mittee comprising the following gen- tlemen: Mr. Adrian Plate, Mr. How- ard Thurston and Dr. A. M. Wilson.

Page 100

MAGIC VOLUME |! JUNE 1910 NUMBER 5 ‘*Magic is an art, by means of which a man can exercise a kind of spell over others, and persuade them into believing that they have seen some natural law disobeyed.’’—-Davip DeEvanr. ‘‘Magic isamong the earliest growths of human thought. It is and ever has been present in some form or other, among all the races of mankind.’’—HERMANN PALME. A Night With the Moon A Practical Lightning ““Chalk Talk’’ for Amateurs By ‘‘Selbit’” Reprinted by special permission of G. Ornum & Co., London u<iN submitting the following performance the author would preface his instruc- tions with the remark that no artistic merit ts claimed given as examples. Furthermore, the experience gained by introducing this number will give the reader confidence to extend his repertoire in this branch of entertaining to include the more per- A PARLOR PRESENTATION OF “A NIGHT WITH THE MOON” for it. This item is merely something that each reacler, be he or she never so ignorant of the art of sketching, may produce without much practice and, by its means, provoke considerable merri- ment even though the ‘‘sketches’’ be, if possible, worse than those we have fect studies to be given later in this magazine. Obtain a black-board such as is sold by dealers in artists’ materials, and firm- ly outline a circle with white paint there- on. The size of the board and circle must be subject to the entertainer’s particular

Page 101

60 MAGIC requirements. For drawing-rooms, quite a small board will answer the purpose admirably. The board shown in the 1l- lustration is a “‘dough’’ board painted black. The total cost was twenty-five cents. A duster to wipe out the expressions as they are done with, and apennyworth of prepared chalk complete the outfit. The chalk may be obtained in lumps from the druggist; it 1s the same that ladies use for purposes that are outside the scope of this treatise. For further information we can only refer the reader to the accompanying sketches. Taking each expression as it is portrayed herein as a copy, the bud- ding artist must enlarge it to fit his own circle. Then he must practice until, with- out hesitation, he can create the same expression in the fewest number of strokes. There is no necessity to keep the sketches exactly as they are given in the examples; so long as the different lines are given an approximately correct slope the drawing will tally with the patter set out to give point to some of the sketches. Should the reader sudden- ly find that one of his ‘‘creations’’ does Fig. 1. A Vacant Expression. not match with the remark he intended to make, he must alter his patter in preference to having asecond shot at an elusive expression. If a sketch somehow falls very wide of the mark we can, with a clear conscience, recommend the read- er to sign the drawing and inform his audience that he did so to indicate which was the bottom of the sketch. On one of our first attempts with this unastro- logical lecture we escaped from a di- lemma this way, and the chance remark ‘‘went’’ considerably better than a well- executed sketch might have “‘gone.’’ PATTER Ladies and gentlemen, having drawn such a large audience, permit me to draw your attention to this drawing board. Here you see the moon, and I want you to particularly notice its expression. No- tice how pathetically vacant it looks. (Fig. 1.) By stroking this face in the proper way with a piece of chalk I hope to il- lustrate the different expressions that appear on the face of the man in the moon during a single night. You may verify each character by looking upward on a dark night with a long telescope. You get a better result if youshut both eyes. All drawings are made up of high and low lines. Here are a few ‘‘eye’’ lines. These are the nose lines. Of course Fig. 2. The Moon Asleep. Fig. 3. ‘ie Moon Awake. (Do not rub out Fig. 2. Simply add cyes to make Fig. 3.) the moon requires no clothes line be- cause he only wears an expression. It is very hard lines, and I really believe the moon pants for an overcoat these cold evenings. There you see the moon snoring. If he was a trifle nearer you would hear him. (Fig. 2.) Having all day to sleep through this is just about the time he wakes up. He always wakes when the sun casts reflec- tions on him. You notice he has caught a bit of the cast in his eye. (Fig. 3.) I must now wipe him off the face of the family circle. There go his eyes and his mouth, and now we will wipe his nose. You have all heard of yawning chasms, and I want to show you the moon giv- Fig. 4. The Moon Yawns,. Fig. 5. Looking Downward. ing an imitation of that kind of scenery. Of course when the moon can see every- thingthat goes onin[local town]he has to close his eyes to a lot of things. For the benefit of a lady and gentleman at the back of the hall he 1s shutting them now. This gap 1s an important item of the

Page 102

A NIGHT WITH THE MOON 61 moon's face. He uses that to yawn with. (Fig. 4.) Having stretched his face sufficiently he has a look down stairs to see if all married men are safely at home. At the present moment he is looking at [local town]. He actually sees a policeman who is sleeping on his beat. (Fig. 5.) Naturally the moon is very much sur- prised that a [local] policeman should be out in the cold street at this time of night. You know that when people are surprised they say, Oh! The moon says five O's. There are his Eye O’s-—fortu- nately he has no need of I. O. U.’s-—a ‘little nose O, anda big mouth O. (Fig.6. ) 0.0 0 Fig. 6. O! What a Surprise. Fig. 7. Looking Upward. People are apt to tmagine that the moon ts lonely. Such isalong way from the truth. If he wants company he mere- ly looks round until a star winks at him. Tonight, I am sorry to say, he is carry- ing on with the milky way. That forward young lady is just over the moon's head, and in this picture you may see him looking pleasant at her. (Fig. 7.) He has reason to think that the milky way favours his pursuit. Mind, he has no ground for his belief, because she is an “‘airy’’ young lady, but at any rate he sees his way clear toa flirtation. In our next figure you can see him weigh- ing up his possibilities. (Fig. 8.) wge\ (Sees | ee V7 /\ > Fig. 8. ‘I wonder if she saw me?" The moon stands well in his own es- timation, although he has no legs. He thinks he can outshine any rival, and trusts himself to cast an encouraging glance on Miss Way. It isn’t much of a glance I must own, but perhaps if the Fig. 9. Looking for Trouble. young ladies will look at it quickly they will see the effect this look has on their susceptibilities. (Fig. 9.) The Milky Way twinkles, and the gen- tlemen here will perhaps tell the ladies how they feel when they are twinkled at. It has a very curious effect on the moon. His features break away from each other, and he indulges in a_per- ceptible smile. (Fig. 10.) Fig. 10. “I've been twinkled Fig. 11. ‘I understand.” at. I am very sorry tosay that the moon Is not so well-behaved as the gentlemen in [local town]. Iam sure no one here would wink at any young lady even if she did twinkle first. The moon, how- ever, so far forgot himself as to let one eye slide away from the other like this. (Fig. 11.) Fig. 12. “Sir!” Although the milky way lives in the same sphere as the moon she is too up- pish to move in a similar circle. The lady has many graces and several[h]airs: here area few of them. When noses were being dispensed she only just turned up in time. This stroke (the mouth) is the line on which she airs her views. That face 1s merely a condensed expression of opin- ion—the milky wayturnedsour. (Fig. 12.) Just at this moment, Madame Moon, who had been hiding behind a cloud, gives her husband a pleasant surprise. You see she was not due for another ten minutes. Madame believes in being gen- tle but firm—sometimes more firm than gentle. You can see by her face she is a vegetarian. She calls her husband a bad old mormo(o)n, and other Brigham

Page 103

62 MAGIC Youngish names, and treats him to her honeymoon look. (Fig. 13.) Fig. 13. Madame Honeymoon. Of course Mr. Moon hasn’t a leg to stand upon. He said he laughed because a cow had just jumped over him and broken its leg. But Madame wouldn't have the tail of the cow. She said it was a lame excuse, and gave her husband some tongue for his supper. Luckily, ladies do not do that kind of thing in [local town]. Mr. Moon became angry, and nearly told oo wife to go to [local town]. (Fig. 14.) Fig. 14. “Oh, the women!" Fie. 15. “Boo-er.”’ Instead of doing as she was told, Ma- dame picked up the nearest star and hurled it in her husband's eye. It isa common belief that up above women never throw things in men’s faces; but that isonly moonshine. After seeing more stars than usual, our friend’s feel- ings descended in the form of rain upon Qe <— Fig. 16. The New (merical Moon. (831 turned over.) the earth, and here you see the moon in tears. (Fig. 15.) Fiv. 17. Herr Moon. You will understand, ladies and gen- _tlemen, that the number of different ex- pressions that may be drawn in acircle is practically limitless. Ata very mean estimate I should say there are 831 ways. You see, it is simply a question of ways and means. This, you will notice, is the eight hundred and thirty-first face or a ‘newmerical’’ moon. (Fig. 16.) So am, Fig. 18. Drawing a Pipe. (Add pipe to Fig. 17.) Every country has its own moon, and you may be very sure that Germany has one to itself. Herr Moon. necessarily has a moustache, and a German band round his spectacles. This one = shines Fie. 19% A Drawn Face. (The Empty Moon.) specially for the Kaiser. It is periodic- ally cleaned with Globe polish. (Fig. 17.) If any lady or gentleman present will try to draw a moon they will find it quite as easy as drawing a conclusion, and a Fig. 20. The Full Moon, little harder than drawing a check. At the same time itis often very difficult to draw a pipe. (Fig. 18.) Moons, as you are doubtless aware, usually feed on herbs and ginger beer.

Page 104

PRACTICAL MAGIC 63 There was one moon who was a personal friend of mine that lived entirely on oysters. When they were discovered to be unfit for food he lived on air, and this is how he looks today. Notice how I have “‘drawn"’ his face. (Fig. 19.) My last picture is one of a moon that lived on volcanoes and eggs. Being the last of this series you may be delighted to know that I offer it for sale to the highest bidder. I merely make a small reserve of fifty dollars to defray the cost of the chalk used, and now it only re- mains for you to settle among yourselves who is to possess the full moon. (Fig. 20.) Practical Magic Problems in Subtle Conjuring for Magical Students Arranged by Ernest Evangeline “The work of a conjurer is so subtle that to the enthusiast it will have as mach fascination as the unraveling of a mystery has fora great detective."—DEVANT. These “ Problems” area regular feature of Maaic. Original problems and solutions to those printed are desired and wll be paid for when acceptable. Send rough pen or pencil drawings when necessary, and a stamp for return Uf unavattlable. 4 The Magnetized Cards I have never seen this simple but in- teresting trick performed. The only de- scription of it I ever read is in Mr. De- vant’s Jagic Made Easy. Vhe performer is instructed to group the cards waderthe FIG. 1. THE MAGNETIZED CARDS first card placed in the hand. I have found that the thread across the face of the first card can be completely con- cealed by grouping the cards on top as in Fig. 1, the corners of several cards being tucked under the thread and the other corners allowed to support adjoin- ing cards. EFFEctT-—The performerannounces that he will give a proof of the mastery he has over the cards by mesmerizing them. He proceeds to put a card lengthwise on the palm of his right hand. Under this card he inserts other cards until he has a number of cards arranged tn his hand. ‘‘So far,"’ says the conjurer, ‘‘the trick is perfectly simple. Any one can arrange the cards in this way; the trick comes in when you do this.’’ The performer then puts his other hand on the cards and turns the hand containing the cards completely over. The performer takes his other hand away, and to the surprise of every one, the cards do not fall to the floor, but remain apparently glued to the conjurer’s hand; held there, so he asserts, hy the mystic power he is exerting over them. SECRET—The power, however, is no more mystic than that conveyed by a loop of very fine flesh-colored thread, which the performer slipped over his hand before he commenced the trick. Unperceived by any one, the performer slipped the first card through this loop, and thus invisi- bly fixed one card in his palm. The card being thus fixed, it was an easy matter to insert the first two cards under it, andthe remainder could be added quite easily. ‘fo conclude the trick, the performer can turn his hand round again, get hold of the loop of thread with his thumh, snap it, and thenthrow the cards in the ais, to prove that they are not prepared in any way. Under cover of the mass of cards in the air the performer can easily get rid of the thread, or it can be allowed to dropon to the carpet, where it will probably remain undiscovered. 5 Some Pretty Floral Effects Mr. Max Sterling, author of Problems in Mystery, and one of England’s lead- ing and most artistic magicians, has very kindly contributed some notes on “‘Flo- ral Effects.’” They are submitted with- out theirsimple solutions, that they may call forth the personal ingenuity of those desiring to work them in applying natu- ral principles. They are actual effects of his own, worked in conjunction with

Page 105

64 MAGIC other more intricate novelties in his current ‘Carnival des Fleurs.’’ Mr. Ster- ling’s own method of working these ef- fects will be published later. In the meantime, interested readers kindly write. The full beauty of M. Bautier de Kolta’s fa- mous spring flowers, and the older feather crea- tions have never, except in rare instances, been adequately displayed on the magical platform. Perhaps the monotonous similarity of method adopted by performers has so hackneyed their employment that their popularity has to a great extent departed. This applies more particularly to the ‘‘Cone of Flowers’’ and ‘‘Bouquet Pre- duction.”’ Personally | have always entertained a warm regard for floral effects, although | cannot plead guilty to ever having worked them ‘“‘in the usual way’’—i. e., I have always carefully avoid- ed the prescribed instructions sold with the goods. In this manner alone can individuality be es- tablished and with it the success that follows originality. ‘Toward this desirable end I now submit a few effects arranged in natural sequence for general acceptance or further improvement. EFFECT—Performer enters in conventional evening dress, gloved hands and crushed hat. The hat may be placed on the table for the mo- ment or under the left arm—-to be discarded or used later. Apparently proceeding to take off his gloves, the fingers of the right hand approach the left and produce instantly at the tips a single car- nation. From this flower several others are pro- duced separately until quite a bouquet of them is held, and that without once nearing the body. These placed in suitable vases or otherwise disposed of, the gloves are removed and van- ished. ‘The arm bared to the elbow, hands ex- hibited empty back and front, without any con- fusing movement a small bouquet of natural flowers is taken from the atmosphere—a la the ‘*Miser’s Dream’’—and handed down to a fa- vored patron. With ‘‘feather’’ blossoms this can be repeated ad. lib., each in single sprays about six Inches long. One of these the performer can place in his own buttonhole, when it instantly vanishes without covering in any way. For a finale a larger ‘‘feather’’ bouquet. is similarly produced from which hundreds of spring flowers are allowed to fall in a brilliant cascade to the carpet, and two mammoth bou- quets secured under such cover form a fitting close. A distribution of fresh flowers from the hat can be introduced with advantage immediately after the production of the small natural bouquet at the finger tips; this however may be found too expensive an item to include regularly in a programme. Disappearing Vase and Flower Apropos of Mr. Sterling’s plea for more flower tricks, I have arranged a little parlor table floral effect of my own that seems to meet all the require- ments for a simple and perfect illusion. Criticism and suggestions for improve- ment desired. EFFECT—A little vase containing a single natural flow- er spray is placed on any table. A silk handkerchief is lowered in front with both hands and then pulled back across the table, when the vase and flower is found to have vanished. SECRET— This is a new vanish and is effected by means of two little wire rings fitting rather loosely over each thumb and connected by a strong white thread. In taking the very successful photographs repro- duced here, a black thread was used. A white thread would have been invisible to the camera. ‘Two small brass curtain rings are shown inthe pictures. In the actual performance of the trick, 1 use rings made of catgut, which is practically invisible. The two rings, with the thread loosely coiled on top, can be picked up withthe handkerchief and retained in the right hand, held securely be- tween the joints of the first finger. (Fig. 2.) In showing the handkerchief front and back, and in turning it round from corner.to corner, the hands e _ ,, ‘ Pi ~ = 4 ey es = P 4 ~ 5 4q aa) FIG. 3. approach each other several times, affording opportunity to get the rings overthe two thumbs. kKven held as in Fig. 3, the handkerchief can be shown front and back, if care is taken not to let the thread fall over the top and show against the dark background of your clothes. The vase is prepared with a fine wire loop just under the rim at the top, twisted tight with the two ends forming a little hook which is kept at the back when placed on the table. The manner in which the illusion is performed is plainly shown in Figures 4 and 5. The hand- kerchiefis lowered in front of the vase and flower and dropped to afford the spectators a final glimpse. With this move, the thread is permitted to fall behind the vase. The handkerchief is then slowly raised and pulled backwards, sweep- ing over the table top, the thread catching the wire hook at the top of the vase, and raising it clear of the table. To lower the vase and flower into the little

Page 106

TRICKS IN THE GAMBLING GAME 65 cloth bag at the back of the table is the work of a second, the catgut rings and white thread he- ing also dropped into the bag. The bag is made one side, so that the vase will tilt back slightly. A large thumb-tack serves to attach the wooden - rim to any position at the back of the table. These FIG. 4. of dark cloth, to match the color of the table (a white cloth hag used for the picture), sewed round a small wooden embroidery hoop, and the bottom of the hag is cut and sewed to taper to FIG. 5. embruidery frames can be obtained in circles and ovals fur a few cents at any dry goods store and with thumk-tacks make excellent servantes for any purpose. Tricks in the Gambling Game The Methods of the Cheating Gamblers and Card Sharpers By Hereward Carrington PART TWO si NOW come to. consider | ‘‘hold-outs.’’ These are me- | chanical devices so arranged | as to ‘hold-out,’ or keep to ’ one side, certain cards until they may be needed, later on in the game. Of course in those games in which all the cards are distributed, they cannot be employed; but in poker, forexample, they can be used very effectively. Cer- tain cards are substituted by their means, and played later on, thus win- ning the pot when it is most needed. Hold-outs are of various kinds. The simplest, perhaps, is that known as ‘‘the bug.’’ It consists of asmall shoe-maker's awl, into the handle of which has been inserted a bit of watch spring. Now, when this awl is dug into the table ata certain angle, the spring presses against the under side of the table, and formsa sort of clip, into which cards may be slipped. This is done in the act of tak- ing the cards off the table, or placing them on it. A sweep of the hand will cover the action. Cards may be substt- tuted, in this manner, with a little prac- tice. Next there is the cuff hold-out. It 1s really a little pocket within the sleeve, into which cards are slipped. It has many disadvantages. Then there is the ring hold-out, which simply clips the cards in thehandby means ofabit of wire. This wire is attached to a ring, worn on the finger. It is a very risky method. A number of other elaborate hold-outs are in Operation, which would take too long to describe. They are all very ingenious, and are intended to shoot cards out into the hand, from the sleeve generally, when a spring is pressed. Some of these are very complicated. But the expert will generally depend

Page 107

66 MAGIC on sleight of hand, more than on clumsy mechanical devices. This branch of the art is known as ‘‘Manipulation.’’ Cards are manipulated, in the deft fingers of the sharp, so that he knows just what cards each player has; either by means of marking, shuffling, dealing, or han- dling, he 1s perfectly familiar with the cards that are dealt, and knows just what hand each player holds. This may sound incredible, but itis the truth. I shall give a few such methods only. First, there is the old trick of dealing the bottom —instead of the top—card. This is probably too well known to need explanation. Next, there is the trick of dealing the next-to-the-top card, instead of the top card itself, which is ‘held over.’’ Again, there are many varieties of false shuffles, as they are called shuffles which do not in reality shuffle the pack at all, but leave it precisely as it was before. Generally, it is only nec- essary to see that a certain section of the deckis undisturbed, and this is easi- ly enough done, on any method of shuffling. The cards are left together at the top or the bottom ofthe deck, andthe rest are shuffled. Or the deck is “‘riffled’’ from different angles, and the two halves simply pushed through one another, leaving the cards as they were before. There are many false shuftleswhichwould take toolong to describe. There are also various devices of offsetting the cut, and leaving the cards as they were. The in- genuity displayed in some of these feats is simply amazing. Let us turn our attention to dice for aminute. Loaded dice are familiar to all; but these are a small part of the stock-in- trade of the professional gambler. He usesthem but seldom. There are other de- vices. For instance, he has a table, the surface of which can be charged by an electric current—thus making the tablea magnet (the surface is of iron). One side of the die is of iron also, and so, when the current is turned on, this side naturally comes down to the table, while it is ‘true’ at all other times. Again, when dice is thrown into a box, one is fre- quently retained in the fingers, and the side with the high spots retained upper- most. This method of palming and sub- stituting clice is very common. Did space permit, I could explain the tricks employed in such games as faro, roulette, high-ball-poker, etc., and may on another occasion. This installment will at least serve, I hope, to open the eyes of the unwary, and to show them that it is absolutely unsafe to gamble in any way whatever, tn public resorts; there is invariably some trick, whether discovered or not, and, you can depend upon it, you will be fleeced) sooner or later, however sharp you may be. When you come in contact with men who make their living by these means, you will probably find that you are very much of a “‘flat’’—to put it squarely ! ~The Shadow World Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Shadowygraphy, Silhouette Shows. and Shadow Plays and Entertainments. Articles, iHustrations, notes and items ag interest solicited, Any one can make shadows on the wall, but to reduce this to an art considerable ingenuity and practice must be called into play. In making hand shadows, you require a puint of light—the smaller and the brighter the better. Ina parlor an ordinary candle will give all the light necessary. Turn out all the lights before you set a match to the candle; the flame will then appear to be brighter than that of an ordi- ary candle. BALLET. APOTHEOSE Silhouette cut-out from the French shadow spectacle. “Le Mariage de Betinette.” If an oil lamp is used, care must be taken to turn it so that the edge of the lame is towards the sheet; otherwise the shadows will be blurred and hazy. The glass chimney also breaks up the light. Mr. David Devant on one occasion gave his shadowgraphic entertainment in the dazzling glare of a noon-day sun, the figures being pro- duced on a sheet spread on the lawn at a fash-

Page 108

PAPIERGRAPHY 67 ionable garden party; much maneuvering was necessary however. Shadowgraphy can be learned, with persever- ance, in less than amonth by any person who has a taste for it. Ladies can make hand-shadows as well as men —often better—for piano playing renders a wo- man’s finger-joints much looser than those of the average man. Mons. Trewey, who has done more in the way of inventing and improving novel parlor amuse- ments than any other man in his day, can make anything with his hands, from a monarch to a sail wheel. Some simple finger exercises will be given next month for students. To execute artistic hand- shadows it must be possible to move at will every joint or part of the fingers and hands. -Papiergraphy Contributions under this he aainta? will be devoted to Pa- per Folding and Paper Tearing and Manipulation. Articles. illustrations, notes and items of interest solicited. MAGIC acknowledges with thanks the receipt, from Mr. A. G. Smiley, of a set of ten beautiful photographs of a child with different head cov- erings made of a sheet of folded paper formed to represent the various styles of head dress. talented sheets of pa- per into fancy shapes is the simplest form of Papiergraphy, as noth- Ing is required but a few sheets of white and col- ored paper, which, after being folded and torn with the fingers, are opened out and a more or less elaborate design displayed. At present, there are a number of artists on the variety stage who make a complete turn of paper tearing, and in order that the time taken to tear the paper, which is usually a very large sheet, about eight or nine feet square, will not drag on the audience, they sing a song, or intro- duce a little patter. THE SPHINX Paper Folding is known under the names of ‘‘Papier Multiforme,’’ ‘‘Chinese Paper,’’ and ‘Trouble Wit.’’ The art of paper folding is very ancient, hav- ing been a favorite amongst the Chinese a thou- sand years ago, and in modern times that con- sumate French artist, Trewey, has shown the pa- pier multiforme all over the world. The performer may prepare his own paper, and will find this cheaper than buying, if he goes by the directions that will be published in future issues of this magazine. Two things must he carefully kept in mind, the quality of the pa- per, which must be strong and tough, and the olds must be most accurately made. THE: BOSTON SCHOOL MAGIC (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of us ‘If its Leroy’s, its the best.’’ Magician’s Annual, Nos. 1 or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2.00; Magi- cian’s Book of Patter, 50 cts. ; Red Demon’s Fire Book, 50 cts. ; Gold- ston’s Tricks and IIlusions, $1.50; Selbit’s Books of Patter, Nos. 1 and 2, each, 35 cts.; Some Modern Conjuring, $1.00. Send $2.00 for our *‘Svengali’’ Pack and Mene-tekel Pack. These cards surpass anything ever put out. ‘I consider they surpass anything I have ever seen and are easily worth five dollars a pack.—Max Ho Lpen. Send 10 cts. for Appendix Cata- logue and latest lists; 50cts. for 212 page Illustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY 103 Court Street Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the ‘Society American Magicians.”’

Page 109

68 MAGIC Ventriloquism Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Prac- tical Voice Throwing and Vocal Mimicry. Articles, illustra- tions, notes and items of interest solicited. Considering the vast store of amusement that may be derived from ventriloquism, it appears at first somewhat surprising that comparatively few persons have been able to acquire the ac- complishment. This, however, can he readily accounted for. The prevaling impression respect- ing ventriloquy is so thoroughly erroneous, that the majority of persons, without inquiry or ex- amination, have accepted the theory that pecul- iarly-formed organs were necessary for its ac- quisition; consequently they have refrained from attempting a task which time and application would have rendered easy. Centuries ago, Ventriloquism, like conjuring, was extensively practiced by the priesthood to compel people to acknowledge their divine in- spiration. Miracles were performed and the credulous and ignorant paid a high price for what was really an ordinary entertainment. Ventriloquism is not in any sense of the word a ‘‘gift’’; that is to say, it does not depend on any abnormal development of the muscles of the vocal organs, nor doves it call for any ex- traordinary shape or formation of the throat. If ventriloquism were a gift, a child without previous practice could give an exhibition of ventriloquial powers; this we know to be impos- sible. Of course, many persons, by the forma- tion and adaptability of the muscles of the throat are more readily taught the art, but it is possible for all and any to learn. The first thing necessary to be done is to ac- quire complete control of the facial muscles, to prevent their moving when they should be kept still. Absolute and complete control is necessary, as the lips and jaws must be still or active at will, without effort. An example of the necessity for this, is in a dialogue between the ventrilo- quist and one or more figures, in which one sentence is said apparently by the ‘‘figure,’’ when of course the lips and jaws are kept still, and perhaps the next by the performer; in the latter case of course the face should be moved the same asinordinary conversation. Moreover, seeing that the best and most entertaining dia- logues are interspersed with many short and sharp interruptions and exclamations, it will be evident that great attention should be paid to this matter. MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS ‘THE SPHINX A Monthly Magazine for Amateur and Professional Magicians Tells you more about magic than any magazine pub- lished. News letters from correspondents in all parts of the world area special feature. $la year. Single copies. 10c. A. M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher HW Main Street, Kansas City, Mo. $25.00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A $25 course in ‘'Expert Billiard Ball Manipulation’’ as given at the leading New York Magical Studio. 100 Tricks and Sleights 200 Beautiful Photographic Illustrations 35,000 Words Expert Instruction 56 Original Tricks Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lizard Skin Finish Art Covers, Gold 77- tles, Silk Bound. Most beautiful, unique and artistic Mystery Volume yet pro- duced. Price $1.00, postpaid. BURLING HULL COMPANY 393 Fourth St., Brooklyn, N. Y. The Leading HE WIZARD brtisi ae ical Monthly Magazine. Now in the fifth yearof its success. FEATURES— A guinea trick in every number. Bright chatty gossip. Hu- morous patter. Valuable articles and interesting news items from all parts of the world. Profusely illustrated. Official organ of the "Magic Circle."' 6d (12c). postpaid to any part of the world. Subscription. 5 [| - ($1.20) per annum, or 2 | 6 (Oc) for6 months. WIZARD PUBLISHING COMPANY, 4, Duke Street. Adelphi. London, W. C., England. Paper Cut-Out for the Changing Die The March number of MAGIC contains a genuine novelty in the form of a paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a little glue, a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that willenable anvone to perform this charm- ing tHlusion, Complete instructions given. A few copies left. 10 cents each. while they last. ERNEST EVANGELINE, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri

Page 110

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Distinctively Different Book Wrinkles By S. Willson Bailey and Harold A. Osborne Members of S. A. M. Twice the value for half the price. 34 new, novel and practical crea- tions. The dawn of a new day in magical literature. Does the ‘‘New ‘Kellar’ Finger,’ ‘“The Coin Finale to the Miser’s Dream’’ (which has them all guessing), ‘“The Coin Tray’’ (which de- livers any number of coins), ‘“ The Rising Cards’’ (which can be taken into the audience), ‘‘Barton’s Sliding Billiard Ball Box,’’ together with a score of other WRINKLES, sound like novelty to you? Printed on velvet-finished paper, 64 pages, cover in three colors. A popular book at a popular price. Ready for delivery NOW. Price, postpaid, 50c. For sale by The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 241, Cambridgeport, Mass. Catalogue and bargain sheet free ; _ , 66 : = 99 L’ILLUSIONISTE Something Different This is the question invariably asked by the mod- ern magician in his quest for new material in his chosen profession. His insatiable thirst for more knowledge (‘‘something new’’) is responsible for the wonderful advancement of the Art in recent | | | | years. The Magician Monthly | If vou really want something new, novel and | | | | Journal for Professional and Amateur Magicians. The only Mayical Magazine printed in the French Language. Published Monthly. Hlustrated. Annual subscriptions, S francs (S1L.60), Sample copy, 75 centimes U5 cts.). Editor, CAROLY, 20 Bowevard St. Germain, Paris, Fr. Edited by Will Goldston practical you should order at once Ste rd ee ar The Book of the Year scription, $1.15. Sample copy, 10 cts. Foreign SO M FE MO D ERN | CONJURING stamps not accepted in payment. By Donald Holmes THE MAGICIAN, Ltd..6 Robin Hood Yard. London, E.C. - A Series of Original Experiments in the Magic Art Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than any book of twice its size. Nota single space filler. Tricks with Watches, Rings, Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice, etc., lucidly ex- plained. Of interest to professional or amateur alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant half- | tone cuts. Something different In every respect. FOR SAT, E Outht of Jate Poin HUNTER. THE | Price $1.00, postpaid. Your dealer supplied. | | (London, Eng.) The pioneer of Conjuring Mavazines., Is tenth successful vear of y ub- lication, Oldest, brighiest. best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians, The recognised Journal of the professional magician. Features every month—Original lessons in Mawic, be- | ing illustrated explanations of all the latest tric ks and st: we iusions., Explanatory programmes of prominent magi- cians, showing the order of tricks presented, with an ex- planation of cach trick, ete. Sample copy, 61 2d 5cets). "Twelve months, 5] 6 (81.50). Table of Contents of the ten | volumes mailed free, American stamps and Dollar netes | accepted. ST ANYON & CO., 76Solent Road. West Hamp- stead, London. N. W., England. WIZARD. Fine magical apparatus ied of special de sl and oo tion; table of individual DONALD HOLMES character, packing-cases, trunks, ete., etc. Most of the out- z : : fit, having been used but one season, is in excellent con- Box 351, San Angelo, Texas. dition. The entire lot must be sold at once and at prices ee ae ae from one-half to one-sixth the original value. Tf interested, Burlesque Magic Act, for two characters, 50 cents. A lot send stamps and list will be sent. DARD HUNTER. East | of mayical apparatus for sale cheap. D. L. RAINEY, 1404 Aurora, Erie County, New York. Locust Street, Kansas City. Mo. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MaGcic

Page 111

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The only drum head tube trick Vanisher, only Oc. LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Loaded cigars Results guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and I}lusions. We sell only the best Tricks, and the ones that are easy to perform, SOE OMCES and that require no skill. All our directions are very plain and in most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manufacturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and Illusions in Anarchist (stink) bombs the world. ¢, -. Exploding matches L. Mysto Mfg.Co. Gg Factories: Fadeaway card per eoetialn Westville Station, New Haven, Ct. Aerial suspension The caldron illusion When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC Card levitation

Page 112

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER SEPTEMBER 1910 PRICE ]() CENTS

Page 113

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Hamley Bros., Ltd. Hamley’s Special Conjuring Table To mect the demand, we have just introduced a specially cheap line in Tables, which we feel sure will give great satisfaction. The top measures inches indiameter, covered with splendid quality black. cloth with border about 4 inches wide all round trimsmed with fancy gold silk braid and fringe. The legs are nicely made and are telescopic, making them very portable for traveling. The table can be raised or lowered to anv height to suit the convenience of the performer, The legs when closed measure about 21 inches long, and for packing will lav Hat across the table. We are contident that these tables will havea great and lasting sale, and we are oftering them to ourcustomers at a nominal cost. Price 8 | 6 2.00, Carriage to be paid on receipt. We have also a splendid selection of Table Legs without tops, as follows: Cheap Table Leys, 3/6 (4c); Superior Nickel Plated Table Legs, 816 ($2.04); Fancy Brass Table Legs. 15 | 6 (83.72). The Wandering Jacks The four Jacks are taken out of the pack. laid face upwards on the table; on each Jack three inditterent cards are dealt, the audience choose one pile, this is left on the table in full view of everybody and the other Ghree piles are returned to the pack: the latter is now spread out on the table. the Jacks have vanished, and on turning over what appeared to be one Jack and three inditterent cards, they are found to be the four Jacks, Price 1 | - (24c). Post free d | 1. LONDON BRANCHES 45, New Oxford Street, London, W. C., England 5l0a and 512, Oxford Street. W. 29. Ludyate Hill. E.C. 200 and 202, Regent Street. W. S89, Knightsbridge, S. W. 8Y and 87, High Holborn, W. C. (Head Warehouse) WILLMANN’S MAGICAL WONDERS Everything that is NEW in Magic is his. His Goods stand alone. You cannot compare other apparatus with Willmann’s. They are the best made. Cost more, but worth more. When you want GOOD tricks, buy Willmann’s and you will see what WORKMANSHIP is. The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York, U.S. A. ARE PROUD TO ANNOUNCE THAT THEY ARE WILLMANN’S SOLE AGENTS Send for our Professional Catalogue, 100 pages, Stage Tricks. Price, 50 cents. Send for our Amateur Catalovue, 90 pages, Parlor Tricks. Price, 10 cents. It will pay you to visit our beautiful Magic Shop; finest in the world. We Have Everything that is New in Magical Construction When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MaGic

Page 114

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 6 CONTENTS FOR SEPTEMBER, 1910 PAGE COVER A “Mysto” Demonstrator THE REVERSED OATMEAL CARTONS — ERNEST EVANGELINE 3 Ilustration from a photograph and drawings A SUBTLE HANDKERCHIEF PRODUCTION DONALD HOLMES 5 Illustration from a photograph THE LITTLE BLACK BOX ERNEST EVANGELINE 7 THE BEST PARLOR CARD TRICK y) VENTRILOOUIS\M 10 THE SHADOW WORLD 11 CRYPTOGRAVRY 12 PAPIERGRAPHY 13 MAGIC is published every month except July and August by F.T. Singleton, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. 2 Yearly subscriptions, $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cunts extra. Sinwle copies, 10 cents. Copyright. 1910. by F.T. Singleton. FF. T. SING I, KS TON, Publisher, 34519 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Biggest and best catalogue of high grade mavical goods sent postpaid for 25c. Maxi- cian’s Headquarters in America. Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship, being famous for solid quality. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will greatly please everyone, A heavy brass cap is given for thorough exam! nation. In the cap is a small hole, go ing right through it. Three coms are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im mediately. only two coins are left. Nosleight of hand, Can be performed at once by any one. Price, complete, 31. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue. New York.

Page 115

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Publisher Says Your publisher has taken a two months’ vacation. There will be no issue of Maaic for July and August, 1910. On account of the slight reduction in size this September number begins a new volume. Succeeding numbers will be mailed as near the Ist of every month thereafter as possible except July and August, making ten issues a year. Present subscribers will receive twelve consecutive numbers; new subscribers will receive ten numbers for $1, including the big twenty-five cent Christmas number. This action is necessary because, since starting the pa- per, the publisher has discovered that he cannot write, edit, arrange, draw plans, make photographs, get up tricks, write articles, answer correspondents, set the type and print the paper two pages at a time ona job press for One issue in evenings of asingle month, his time during the day being employed in making a living. ‘The Flying Card Pips’’ next month. An Acknowledgement With this issue Maaic parts company with Dr. A. M. Wilson, editor and publisher of ** The Sphinx.’’ I cannot make this announcement without also making due acknowledgement to Dr. Wilson for the great help he has given this little magazine from the start. The small percentage of gross receipts he has received will never repay him for the time, experience and valuable pub- licity in his own paper that he has given freely. Dr. Wilson’s mailing list of magicians was placed at my dis- posal at the beginning, and he has been of help in many ways in getting the magazine going. I believe Dr. Wilson will feel repaid if Macic forges ahead and lives up to the reputation of his own publication for square dealing and lovalty to the art.

Page 116

AATIC | MAGIC VOLUME Il SEPTEMBER 1910 NUMBER 6 The Reversed Oatmeal Cartons By Ernest Evangeline | a WHI S QUAKER ‘Z @ WHITE OATS YIvWNo — —— FIG. 1. THE REVERSED OATMEAL CARTONS The principle involved in this illusion is as old as magic itself, but its use in this case 1s the newest thing under the sun. The trick consists in passing for examination two boxes, or cartons, of oatmeal (or any other cereal package food), and, after stack- ing them on a table one on the other, putting a cardboard cover over them for a moment. When the cover is withdrawn the cartons are found to be upside down (Fig. 1). They can be restored to their original position by placing the cover over them again. Four boxes of “Quaker Oats” will be required. Select ones

Page 117

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 4 MAGIC that are not dented or broken and with labels in good condition. As the oatmeal is rather heavy and has a tendency to bulge out the cartons somewhat, the contents of two of the boxes must be removed and replaced with cotton or any light material that will fill out the boxes evenly without bulging. Care must be taken in doing this so that the boxes will not show any evidences of having been opened. The contents of “Quaker Oats” cartons can be removed very easily at the bottom by splitting the double thickness of card folded over the bottom from the sides. After stuffing with excelsior or cotton, these folds can Le glued to- gether again. ross Section Cover Two" Genuine Carto Fake FIG, 2. The cther two boxes can be emptied very easily, as the tops and bottoms wi!l nct Le needed at all. The sides of these two boxes can then be split down at each corner, making four sep- arate pieces to each box. The eight pieces should be put in clean water to soak the labels off. A thin shell of cardboard must next be made to just fit over the two filled cartons. Strips of yellow paper to match the back- ground of the oatmeal labels should be pasted down the four corners and top and bottom edges of this shell, and the eight pieces of labels pasted on neatly so that at a short distance the shell, when placed over the two genuine cartons, will appear to be the same. To prevent the pasted labels from warping the cardboard shell, corresponding pieces of plain paper the same thickness must be pasted on the inside of the shell. The explanatory drawings give an excellent idea of the very te

Page 118

SUBTLE HANDKERCHIEF PRODUCTION 5 simple apparatus required. The cover can also be of cardboard, scored at the corners to fold neatly. It must be flexible enough to grip the shell or faked cartons when placing the cover and shell over the genuine boxes. The cover must have a flange uround the inside of the top about cne and one-half inches wide and about an eighth of an inch thick. A neat edging of colored paper can be pasted around the top edge to conceal the double thickness. The cover, with the fake in it, can be shown to the spectators so that they can see through it from one end to the other. The top or double thickness end only must be held to- wards the spectators. The cross section in I*ig. 2 shows how the Hange at the top will hide the presence of the shell. A Subtle Handkerchief Production By Donald Holmes The magician comes forward with a little piece of note paper, showing it freely both sides, and indirectly calling attention to the otherwise emptiness of his hands. As a further precaution against deception, he draws his sleeves well back to the elbow: then rolls the paper into a tiny tube, and immediately extracts therefrom a pretty silk square, which is passed out for inspec- tion. FIGS. 1 AND 2. A SUBTLE HANDKERCHIEF PRODUCTION This most subtle method of magically producing a handker- chief especially recommends itself, not only from the standpoint of effect, but from the fact that no “fake,” or apparatus, of any kind remains to be secretly disposed of after the production. The only requisites, in addition to the handkerehief, are two pieces of common note paper, one about 4x4 inches; the other 3x3, or a trifle smaller. The latter piece is beforehand formed

Page 119

de a MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 6 MAGIC into a tube about three-quarters of an inch in diameter, and se- cured with glue. When dry, the handkerchief 1s packed into it, and the ends of the tube pressed inward to prevent any premature expansion of the silk. (ne corner of the handkerchief should he permitted to protrude from the parcel to the extent of a quarter of an inch. Thus prepared, the little tube is laid on the left coat sleeve, in the bend of the elbow, and the fullness of the sleeve above the elbow drawn downwards over the tube. Jt will now be found that, by holding the left arm m a slightly bent position across the body (a very natural one), the little parcel is easily retained in concealment. These preparations duly made, you make your entrance with the larger piece of note paper held at finger tips between both hands, palms outermost, thus indirectly showing the hands other- wise empty. Making a few introductory remarks based on the “mystical process of silk creation,” vou proceed to draw back your sleeves, holding the paper, for this purpose, in the left hand. Standing with your Ieft side to the company, you draw back the right sleeve. Then, «without changing your position, you draw back the left sleeve in like manner. The instant the fingers of the right hand grasp the sleeve, a half turn is made, thus bringing your right side to those in front. Ly this time the right hand has grasped the left sleeve at elbow; the fingers seize the concealed parcel (crosswise, in the bend of the fingers), and, assisted by the thumb, this hand draws the sleeve well back (Fig. 1). Cf course, during the whole of the time that you are draw- ing back the sleeves, vour eves have not once left the palm of the hand for the time being presented to the company ; therefore no importance is attached to the hands approaching the sleeves. Up to this time the visible piece of note paper has remained in the left hand. Yousnow make a half turn to the right, at the same time bringing the hands together, with the extreme edge of the paper covering the palm of the right hand, and therefore concealing the palmed parcel. The left hand immediately rolls the paper into a tinv tube. around the parcel, the latter being passed down to the opposite hand by the fingers at the beginning of the roll. Trig. 2 shows the relative position of the two hands. which are turned over to show precise position of fingers and parcel. Now, holding the completed evlinder in the left hand, you insert the tip of the right forefinger at tep: seize the little corner of silk protruding from the “load,” and slowly extract the silk. You then tear the tube (both tubes) into pieces and cast them carelessly to one side, thus destroving the only visible source of the production. By employing handkerchiefs of the finest silk, upwards of three or four may be preduced from a single tube, and the effect is all that could be desired,

Page 120

The Little Black Box By Ernest Evangeline This is a gold medal trick box for amateurs who care. It should be covered with black velvet and lined with white or light id - ee ey meee me. o. Loose Partition resting on table FIG. 1. PERSPECTIVE Showing the box placed ready for use as it will appear before covering with black velvet. colored silk, and can be brought into the parlor full of silk handkerchiefs, flags and small accessories intended for use dur- we ‘ ie 4d Cr ee” Ae ee er ae nara \- Sr a a a er eg 4 ' ; ' | ‘ ‘ > & AE oy a Bag crushed to one ae side by Partition ‘ ‘ a 2 1 a5 ws FIG. 2. CROSS SECTION ing the evening's entertainment. ‘The contents can be emptied out and the box freely shown (not inspected) and placed bottom up with lid opened out flat on the table towards the spectators,

Page 121

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS & MAGIC as in Trig. 1. .\ few bilhard balls, a glass tumbler, mirror glass, or anv small bright piece of apparatus can be placed on the lid and will show up fine against the black velvet of the ld and side of the box, serving remarkably well to catch the eves of spee- tators. The presence of the “black art” trap and the little shelf in the back will never be suspected. The box will provide all the assistance necessary to put on a parlor magical entertammment anywhere. [ts presence, when at a friend's house, will be accounted for by the fact that it serves to pack vour accessories in; and to place it carelessly to one side of the table, hottom up. with the hid out flat in front, seems most natural after emptying it. It is particularly adapted for working with a bottomless tumbler, and in many other wavs will prove the most valuable all-around assistant an amateur could wish. Sa ae er é So oie eas HlGr.3. PELAN The drawings are self-explanatory. Tlalf-ineh boards are used for the sides, bottom and lid of the box, with an extra quarter- inch board nailed on one side out of which the folding shelf 1s cut. The shelf, when open, is supported by half-inch wide black sik ribbon or tape. The bag is three and one-half inches deep and should be made with the nap or finished side of the velvet out, the dull back of the cloth serving better to prevent any re- flection of light.

Page 122

The Best Parlor Card Trick At a recent gathering of several clever and experienced ama- teur magicians 1n Kansas City, a discussion arose as to what was the most effective parlor card trick suitable for performance by ae ’ SIGHTING THE BOTTOM CARD beginners without sleight of hand, apparatus or much practice. A great many good card tricks were executed by those present and the palm was finally awarded to what, for want of a better uame, I will call, “Sighting the Bottom Card.” With the secret of this trick in your possession you can throw a pack of cards face down on the table and “force” anyone to pick out any cards from the pack you may name. In looking up the trick in my library [ find that Mr. David Devant has “covered” this illusion in a most complete manner in his Magic Made Easy, and | will present his instructions. You name any card and ask the person to pick it out of the pack. He or she will naturally say that they do not know where it is but you tell them that with your mystic will-power you will direct them to the right card you have named, which, we will say, is the six of spades. They pick up a card and hand it to you; you thank them and assure them that they are quite right ; it is the six of spades. You then ask for another card—say the ten of diamonds. They pick up the card, hand it to you, and you thank them again. They are quite right, it is the ten of dia- monds. You then say that vou can do it quicker yourself. You

Page 123

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 10 MAGIC can explain, if vou like, that you often have curious presenti- ments which are sometimes fulfilled, and that on this particular occasion you have a presentiment that a certain card you take up is the ace of clubs. You pick the card up and say that you are pleased your presentiment in this case has been fulfilled. Turn- ing round to the person with whom you have been doing the trick, you say, “I.et me see, | asked you for the six of spades, ten of diamonds, and I said I would take out the ace of clubs. There are the three cards.” This trick is done by sighting the bottom card of the pack. When you throw the pack down on the table, apparently care- lessly, and separate the cards, vou really keep the bottom card in sight all the time and know what it is. We will suppose that in this case it is the six of spades. You ask the person with whom you are doing the trick to hand you the six of spades. The chances are fifty-one to one that he or she will hand you some other card, which, in this case, is the ten of diamonds. You then say that you have asked for the six of spades, and that you have got the six of spades, whereas in reality you have the ten of diamonds, and you then ask for the ten of diamonds and get the ace of clubs. When you announce that vou will get a card out yourself, you pretend to pick up the ace of clubs, but really pick up the card which you know to be the six of spades. In this way the interested spectator has apparently handed you the two cards which you told him to pick out, and you have taken out the card which you announced that you would find. This is a trick which requires no practice, but it goes all the better if the amateur will invent a little suitable patter, and will take care that the cards are apparently strewn carelessly all over the table. The amateur's eyes must not be fixed on the card which he knows. Let him sight it when he throws the cards down and then remember whereabouts on the table it. is. VENTRILOQUISM — ee eae _—— = ee Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Practical Voice Throwing and Vocal Mimicry. Articles, tllustrations, notes and items of interest solicited. Mr. P. Selbit. in his Magician's Handbook, devotes a most interesting and valuable chapter to Ventri.cquism. IT can do no better this month than to quote one or two paragraphs from the same: “The entertainments that are most appreciated by the average audiences of the present day are not the distant-voice experiments that used to be the mainstay of the old-time professors, but the comic dialogue with dolls; and ventriloquists nowadays will find that the people who visit places cf

Page 124

THE SHADOW WORLD lt amusement will more highly appreciate the man who is funny than the man who is clever. “To carry ona dialcgue with your figure then is not really ventriloquism, because there are no distant-voice effects brought into play. This branch of the art is called “Colloquism,” and means imitating the human voice, therefore what the so-called ventriloquists do is to carry on a conversation with themselves, at the same time leading the audience to believe that it is the figure who is answering the question and cracking the chestnuts which, if presented in any other form, would scarcely raise a smile. To pro- duce a “colloquial” voice is an easy matter, but will require practice; this is best done in front of a mirror so that you can observe the lips, which should be nearly closed. Always assume a natural expression: commence to articulate by first repeating the alphabet right through—study to do this without disturbing the repose of the features. It is impossible to pro- nounce B, P, and M without a slight movement of the lips, so you must slur these letters and substitute those most resembling them in sound. For B, and words containing B, substitute V, such as ball—‘vVall,” bas- ket—"vasket,” etc. P is very similar, and in its place must be used V or F. M, the third difficult letter, must be pronounced “ng,” such as “ngarvel.” “When arranging your dialogue, try as far as possible to avoid using words with these difficult letters accentuated in them. After having repeated the alphabet until you can do so without any facial movement, commence practicing short sentences: practice them first of all by forcing the sound against the top of the teeth, keeping the tongue as low down as possible, then repeat the exerices again, this time raising the tongue a little and forcing the sound toward the back of the roof of the mouth. This will enable vou to talk in two distinct tones of voice. When this is thoroughly mastered, the student may consider himseif well on the way towards being what is technically styled a ‘colloquial’ humorist.” THE SHADOW WORLD Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Shadowgraphy, Silhouette Shows, and Shadow Plays and Entertainments. Articles, illustrations and items of interest solicited. I have made some photographs of finger exercises that turned out to be quite excellent pictures, but they have been left out of this issue for lack of room, At least some, if not all, of them will appear in the October number. A copy of Hercat’s new bock on Shadowgraphy has just been called to my attention and IT cannot refrain from quoting his little historical note on the origin of this form of entertamment: “As a public entertainment it possibly came to England from Italy, for about the beginning of the last century a Sig. Gallanti, an Italian, started a shadow entertainment in London which was patronized by all the fash- ionable people of the day. In ‘Gallanti’s Show,’ as it was called, the shadows must have been created by small puppets and dialogue was intro- duced. “Gossip of the time says that in one scene a carpenter was seen repairing a bridge; a traveler came up and asked him if the bridge was safe, what

Page 125

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 12 MAGIC time it was, etc. The carpenter appears to have been of a musical turn, for he sang a reply to each anesticn. It is said that Gallantys Show enjoyed a long.run in London.” SCENE FROM THE SHADOW PLAY, “THE BROKEN BRIDGE” CRYPTOGRAPHY i: i NE LS Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Hidden or Secret Writings. Ciphers and Cryptoyraphs. Articles, lustrations. notes and items of interest solicited, The meaning of the word “cryptography” is, as we all know, “hidden or secret writings,” and was used in ancient times, when ccnspiracics were common and murders an ever,day occurrence, as the means of communi- cating from one perscn to another in such a manner that it could not be read by anyone save those who were admitted into the secret of its con- struction. A widespread conspiracy, or, 2s it would be more properly termed, rebellion, could not be carried on between persons at a distance from each other unless they resorted to Cryptography—in fact, the means of corre- spondence was, in those times, of so slow and dangerous a nature, that without the utmost care and secrecy in the arrangement of the cipher, it would certainly have been discovered, and then death would be the con- sequence. In order to mature their designs in safety, and to throw off all suspicion, men were obliged to put their wits to work and invent some way of inform- ing each other of everything that did transpire, so that no one else should be the wiser for it; thus was Cryptography discovercd; and wonderful cunning and ingenuity were displayed in its construction, as you will sce by the examples that will be given. It was also used in former times in transacting affairs of state, in communicating messa’ es fro one general to another in tine of war, and in many other ways of a more innocent niture, too numerous to mention Now, at the present time, when all is peace and prosperity, and news is brought to our very doors by post and telegraph. Cryptcegraphy is only

Page 126

PAPIERGRAPHY 13 interesting as a curious study cr to amuse ourselves in an idle hour in finding out its hidden mysteries. The first and most common form of Cryptograph we read of was by the transposition of letters, and is, as we may see, capable of great improve- ment; indeed, it is the hasis on which most of the letter ciphers are formed at the present day. Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Paper Folding and Paper Tearing and Manipulation. Articles, illustrations, notes and items of interest solicited. ee The publisher of Macic is pleased to announce that this department will hereafter be conducted by Mr. Louis Nikola, author of Paper-Tearing Extraordinary and many magazine articles on this and allied subjects. Mr. » uo) ge “ x 7s e *% > EXAMPLE OF PAPER TEARING BY LOUIS NIKOLA Nikola’'s contributions have appeared in the leading English periodicals during the past seven or eight years. ard the reiders of this magazine can look forward to being favored with some interesting talks on what can be done with a sheet of paper. Mr. Nikola has been taking a holiday in Germany during August, and on his return to London will take up his new editorial work. A benutiful and original paper creation by Mr. Nikola is presented here. Looks like the real thing! A Af mam ete | miele

Page 127

he MAGIC ADVERTISEM ENTS a oe 14 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS. ¢25.00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A $25 course in ‘‘Expert Billiard Ball Manipulation,’’ as given at the leading New York Magical Studio. 100 Tricks and Sleights. 200 Beautiful Photographic Illustrations. 56 Original Tricks. 35,00) Words of Expert Instruction. Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lizard Skin Finish Art Covers, Gold Ti stles, Silk Bound. Most beautiful, unique and ar- tistic Mystery Volume yet produced. Price $1.00, postpaid. BURLING HULL CO., 393 4th St., Brooklyn, N. Y. ne eae dan te eee : The Leading British Magical Monthly Maxa- zine. Now in the fifth year of its success, FEA: TURES—A guinea trick in every number. Bright chatty gossip. Humorous patter. Valuable articles and interesting news itemsfrom all parts of the world. Profusely illustrated. Oficial organ of the “Magic Circle.” 6d «12c). postpaid to any partof the world. Subscription. S| - ($1.20) per annum, or 2 | (Ve) for 6 months. WIZARD PUBLISHING COMPANY. 4. Duke Street, Adelphi, London, W. C., England. “Something Different’ This is the question invariably asked by the modern magician in his quest for new materiaf in his chosen profession, His insatiable thirst for more knowledge (something new") is re- sponsible for the wonderful advancement of the Art in recent years. If you really want something new, novel and practical you should order at once The Book of the Year, SOME MODERN CONJURING, by Donald Holmes. A Series of Original Ex- periments in the Magic Art. Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than any book twice its size, Not a single space filer. Tricks with Watches, Rings. Handkerchiefs. Flaus, Dice. etc.. lucidly ex- plained. Of interest to professional or amateur alike. Printed on fine paper. with elegant half- tone cuts. Something different in every respect. DONALD HOLMES (oo. Ce eS eaviseretes eae ets at, & - ) Journal for Professional and Amateur i I ; i i SI IS E, Maxyicians. Theonly Maxyical Masa- ted in the French Language. Published Monthly. Illustrated. Annual subscriptions. 8 francs ($1.60), Sample copy, 75 centh mes (15 cts.). Editor, CAROLY, 20 Boulevard St. Germain, Paris, Fr. tear ahs oe eS Edited by Will Goldston. A he agician ont y journal for all interested in sae : Mazic and Mystery. In its sixth year of success. Annual! subsoription, $1.15. Sample copy, 10 cts. Foreign stamps not accepte in payment. THE MAGICIAN, Ltd.. 6 Robin Hood Yard, London. E. C. Pat as Oe ee (London, Eng.) The pioneer of Conjuring Magazines. Its tenth successful year of publication, Oldest. brightest, best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians. The recognised Journal of the professional magician, Features every month—Original lessons in Magic. being illustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage illusions. Ex: planatory programmes of prominent magicians, showing the order of tricks presented, wit an explanation of each trick. ete. Sample copy. 6 1-2d (15 cts). Twelve months. 5 [6 GEI.SU). Table of Contents of the ten volumes nailed free. American stamps and Dollar netes ac- cepted. STANYON & CO., 76 Solent Road. West Hampstead, London, N. W.. England, Sap ide ga THE SPHINX A Monthly Magazine for Amateur and Professional Magicians. Tells you more about magic than any magazine published. News letters from. corres- pondents in all parts of the world area special feature. $la year. Single copies. 10c. A. M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher 906 Main St., Kansas City, Mo. = i as eee = ® ———$—

Page 128

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS THE DISTINCTIVELY DIFFERENT BOOK WRINKLES By S. Willson Bailey and Harold A. Osborne Members of S. A.M. Twice the value for half the price. 34 new, novel and practical creations. The dawn of a new day in magical literature. Does the ‘‘New ‘Kellar’ Finger, *§*The Coin Finale tothe Miser’s Dream" (which has them all guessing), ‘“The Coin Tray’’ (which delivers any num- ber of coins), ‘“The Rising C Cards"* (which can be taken into the audience), ‘Barton's Sliding Billiard Ball) Box,’’ together with a score of other WRINKLES, sound like novelty to you ? Printed on velvet-finished paper, 64 pages, cover in three colors. A popular book at a popular price. Ready for delivery NOW. Price, postpaid, 50c. The Bailey and Tripp Magical Company Box 241, Cambridgeport, Mass. Catalogue and bargain sheet free. The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 vears Always exclusive features, to be had only of us. “Tf its Leroy’s, its the best.”’ “Magician Annual,’’ Nos. | or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2. ‘*Magician's Book of Patter,’’ 50c. ‘SRed Demon's Fire Book,’*' 50c. Goldston’s ‘“Pricks and Illusions,'’ $1.50. Selbit's ‘‘Books of Patter,'’ Nos. 1 and 2, each, 35c. ‘Some Modern Conjuring,’’ 31. Send %2 for our ‘‘Svenyali’’ Pack and ‘‘Mene-tekel’’ Pack. ‘These cards surpass anything ever put out. “T consider they surpass anvthing Phave ever seen and are easily worth 3 a pack.” —Max HOLDEN, Send 10c for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists: 50e for 212 page Il- lustrated Book Catalovue, largest ever issued anvwhere, None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Magicians When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGic

Page 129

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS "yon, Palladino's spirits LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Mavic ‘I ricks and Illus- ions. We sell only the best Tricks and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill. All our directions are pla n and Exploding matches in most cases illustrated. i aging, AD persipe No Practice Re quire d Anarchist (stink) bombs Send 2 cts. in stam, s for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manu- facturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles avd Illusions in the world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station New Haven, Conn ng” Card levitation Ee aan aire eee Aerial suspension The Caldron illusion When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC

Page 130

GIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER OCTOBER 1910 PRICE 10 CENTS | NOVEMBER 1910 : PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 131

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Hamley Bros., Ltd. Hamley’s Special Conjuring Table To meet the demand, we have just introduced a specially cheap line in Tables, which we feel sure will give vreat satisfaction. The top measures inches in diameter, covered with splendid quality black cloth with border about 4 inches wide all round trinnmed with faney gold silk braid and fringe. The legs are nicely made and are telescopic. making them very portable for traveling. The table can be raised or lowered to any height to suit the convenience of the performer. The legs when closed measure about 21 inches long. and for packing will lav flat across the table. We are confident that these tables will have a great and Jasting sale. and we are oftering them to ourcustomers at a nominal cost. Price 8 | 6 (82.04). Carriage to be paid on receipt. We have also a splendid selection of Table Legs without tops, as follows: Cheap ee Leus, 3] 6 (4c); Superior Nickel Plated Table Legs. 8/6 692.04): Fancy Brass Table Less 15 | 6 t88.72). The Wandering Jacks The four Jacks are taken out of the pack, laid face upwards on the table; on each Jack three inditterent cards are dealt, the audience choose one pile. this is left on the table in’ full view of evervbody and the other three piles are returned to the pack; the latter is now spread out on the table. the Jacks have vanished. and on turning over what appeared to be one Jack and three indifterent cards, they are found to be the four Jacks. Price 1} | - (24), Post free 1 |. LONDON BRANCHES 35. New Oxford Street, London, W. C., England 5l0a and 512. Oxford Street. W. 2%. Ludygate Hill. E. C. 200 and 202. Regent Street. W. 59, Knightsbridge. S. W. SY and 87. High Holborn. W. C. (Head Warehouse) WILLMANN’S. MAGICAL WONDERS Everything that is NEW in Magic is his. His Goods stand alone. You cannot compare other apparatus with Willmann’s. They are the best made. Cost more, but worth more. When you want GOOD tricks, buy Willmann’s and you will see what WORKMANSHIP is. The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York, U.S. A. ARE PROUD TO ANNOUNCE THAT THEY ARE WILLMANN’S SOLE AGENTS Send for our Professional Catalogue, 100 pages, Stage Tricks. Price, 50 cents. Send for our Amateur Catalogue, 90 pages, Parlor Tricks. Price, 10 cents. It will pay you to visit our beautiful Magic Shop: finest in the world. We Have Everything that is New in Magical Construction When writing to advertisers, kindly mention Magic i’ \ ™~ : cr Acrial suspension The Caldron illusion When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 132

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 7 CONTENTS FOR OCTOBER, 1910 COVER From a lithograph of ‘Herrmann the Great™’ its THE BOTTOMLESS TUMBLER 17 Illustration from a photograph THE ELUSIVE POSTAGE STAMP ERNEST EVANGELINE 19 Illustrations from photographs CRYPTOGRAPHY 22 VENTRILOQUISM 23 THE LIGHTNING ARTIST 23 PAPIERGRAPHY 24 THE MAGICAL MATINEE 25 MAGIC is published every month except July and August by ie T. Singleton, 3oly Thompson Avenue. Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. London: A. W. Gamage, Ltd... Holborn. E. Yearly subscriptions, $1.00. Foreign postage. 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright. 1910, by F. T. Singleton. F.T. SINGLETON, Publisher, 3619 Thomipee Ave., Kansas mie Mo. MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Biggest and best catalogue of high grade magical Kkoods sent postpaid for 25c. Magi- cian’s Headquarters in America. Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship. being famous for solid quality. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will greatly please everyone. A heavy brass cap is given for thorough exami nation. In the cap is a small hole, go ing right through it. Three coins are arranged on the back of the spectator'’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im mediately, only two coins are left. Nosleight of hand, Can be performed at once by any one. Price, complete, $1. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue. New York.

Page 133

The Publisher Says A big treat is in store for the readers of Macic inthe form of a big double Christmas number. I hope to have ———. ASSEMBLY “200 , THURSDAY and. FRIDAY, ¢ MLEVANIO! WAGICHAN VEN TRILOQUIST, THE MOST LMINENT ANTIOT: OF THE Day. ENTERTAIN ™ ELA E SPL. EXDID uw EXTRAORDINARY erage: A RARE HOUDINI POSTER it (the December issue) ready before the 15th of that month, and am able to an- nounce at this time two very valuable features. In ‘“The Romance of Mag- ical Collecting,’’ Mr. Harry Houdini will tell the fascina- ting story of his first interview with that famous old time English parlor magician, Mr. Henry Evans Evanion, and how he obtained the most valuable items in his remark- able collection of magician’s posters, announcements and programmes. Mr. Houdini’s article will be illustrated with reproductions of rare exam- ples from his collection. Another article of great merit will be ‘“The Hand,’’ by Henry Ridgely Evans, illustrated with photographs of the hands and palms of fa- mous magicians. The Christmas number will contain twice the num- ber of pages in regular issues, and will be beautifully printed and illustrated with many half-tone and line re- productions of photographs and drawings made espe- cially for it. or al : The caldron illusion F. T.SINGLETON (ERNEST Ev ANGELINE) Fr Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MaGic

Page 134

MAGIC VOLUME II OCTOBER 1910 NUMBER 7 ‘It is easy enough, no doubt, to play the conjuror without possess- ing either dexterity or mental ability. It is only necessary to lay in a stock of apparatus of that kind which of itself works the trick. This is what may be called the ‘‘false bottum’’ school of conjuring. Clever- ness at this sort of work is of the same order as that of the musician who produces a tune by turning the handle of a barrel-organ. Such performers will never merit the title of skilled artists, and can never hope to obtain any real success. ‘*Conjuring makes too heavy a demand upon the faculties of the spectators to admit of being unduly prolonged. “A conjuror is not a juggler; he is an actor playing the part ofa mayician; an artist whose fingers have more need to move with deft- ness than with speed.’’— ROBERT HOUDIN. The Bottomless Tumbler A Magical Accessory of Great Utility HE bottomless tumbler, like Topsy, ‘‘just growed.’’ The utility of such an appliance is so obvious that Ay it may well have been invented, and reinvented, (O¥#) half a dozen timesover. Professor Hoffmann had an sea ordinary glass tumbler from which the bottom had been cut out, and for some years believed himself to possess a monopoly of the idea. It has, however, for a long while past been common property. | It is truly remarkable how freely a bottomless tumbler may be turned about and shown right under people’s noses without fear of detection, so long as the bottom, or the end where the bottom ought to be, is not turned directly towards the specta- tors. When used in connection with a “Black Art’’ table or ‘The Little Black Box’’ described in the last number of Maaic, the bottomless tumbler will produce some very surprising ef- fects. Bottomless tumblers may be had of the leading magical deal- ers in several styles and prices, from the plain tumblers at fifty cents with all the bottom missing and those with only the cen- tral portion removed, leaving a rim, a quarter of aninch or so wide, all round, to the more elaborate ones with the bottom

Page 135

1s MAGIC ground off perfectly even to permit a disc of thin glass cut pre- cisely to the shape of the bottom to adhere to it when smeared with vaseline. A glass so arranged will be for the time quite water-tight, so long as the loose bottom is kept from shifting. It is well to havea genuine glass, or even two, exactly simi- lar to the faked article, lying upon the table, and used, if possible, for some other trick previous to the one re- quiring the use of the bot- tomless glass. A genuine one may be examined by the au- dience, and changed for the faked one under cover of the body while returning to the table. The magical effects which may be produced by the use of one of these glasses are many. Anegg may be placed in the glass while it Is resting upon the entertainers open hand; the whole is then cov- ered witha handkerchief. The glass is then removed (still covered) by the free hand, the egg remaining palmed in the other hand. The tum- bler is placed upon a table or chair, and the cover removed, showing the glass to be emp- ty. The egg can then be re- produced in any manner. By the use of a glass with a reduced opening at the bottom and a wide rim all round, an egg may be laid lengthwise in the tumblerand shown without placing the hand beneath. The ends of the egg rest, so long as it is kept horizontal, on the edges of the opening, but the moment the glass is tilted, in ever so slight a degree, the egg falls through as readily as though the whole bottom of the glass was wanting. Agentle shake, professedly to show by the sound that theeggisstill in the glass, willinstantly dislodge it. The greatest value of the bottomless tumbler, however, is in connection with a‘ ‘Black Art’ table or box with invisible black velvet pockets or traps. Indeed, the one may almost be said to be the complement of the other, from the extraordinary a THE BOTTOMLEss TUMBLER jf — a Lv — atk. w—F Aerial suspension The caldron illusion | When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 136

THE ELUSIVE POSTAGE STAMP 19 facility the two combined afford for the vanishing of small ab- jects. An egg or billiard ball, say, is placed in the glass as it rests on the table beside one of the pockets, and the glass is covered with a handkerchief. (In such cases, by the way, it heightens the effect to secure the handkerchief by stretching a rubber band over it, round the rim of the glass.) The glass has then only to be moved antnch or soin the direction of the pocket; the article falls in, and the glass is empty. The Elusive Postage Stamp By Ernest Evangeline I—7erayey/|ERE is a very pretty table illusion with a postage MH PL stamp, a wine-glass, a paper cone and three small ===)|{| name card envelopes made in different sizes to nest Sgwiy! one within the other. A box of cigarettes, a small S/S} square of white paper, a tray or plate, a duplicate stamp and duplicates of the two smaller sized envelopes are used incidently. The trick consists in causing a postage stamp to disappear when covered with the wine-glass and paper cone. The stamp is then discovered in theinside or smallest of the nested envelopes, after they have been ‘examined and sealed by the spectators, the envelopes being kept in plain. view all the time. A little preparation is necessary. Take a wine glass, and, having placed a little glue all round the top edge, turn it over on a sheet of white paper. When dry, cut away the paper close to the glass. Obtain a tray or plate (the fancy one in the pic- ture cost ten cents!) and on it lay a square of white paper same as thatglued to the mouth of the glass and place the glass on it, mouth downwards. Makea neat paper cone of stiff. deco- rated paper to fit over the glass (Fig. 1). A cigarette box must be prepared as shown in Fig. 2. A duplicate of the postage stamp to be used ts placed in a dupli- cate of the smallest sized envelope, which is then sealed and put in a duplicate of tne middle sized envelope. This ts then sealed in turn and attached to the bottom of the cigarette box in such a manner that it can easily be slipped off when need- ed. I used a small folded piece of celluloid, from alittle pock- et case of court plaster given away as an advertisement. The little slip of celluloid, folded at both ends, which held the gum- med cloth inside the case, was cut apart and oneend glued to the bottom of the cigarette box. The envelope was freely but securely held by the fold which ts visible in Fig. 2. The cigarette box, which should have some real “‘smokes’’

Page 137

20) MAGIC in it and with the prepared duplicate stamp and envelopes slip- ped in the celluloid clip, can be placed, bottom down, on a shelf or any place where a box of cigarettes would naturally be kept, orit can be produced from the pocket at the proper time. The box used by the writer is a box holding twenty cigarettes. The use of an attractive foreign stamp is desirable. For my own presentation of this little trick, I was lucky enough to ob- tain a pair of green English penny stamps from a package of London papers that had been cancelled with bars running across both stamps exactly alike. When doing my trick I call atten- tion to the mar s on the stamp and ask that they serve to iden- tify it. To present the trick, first hand out the stamp for examina- tion. I produce my stamp from the stamp compartment in my FIG. 1. Accessories for “The Elusive Postage Stamp." wallet and make some remarks about the care given it because of its great value as a talisman. 1 patter of how it was carefully taken off a letter from London which dropped from the ceiling at a gathering of Theosophists in New York recently. While the stamp is being examined I place on the table the tray with the white paper square, the faked wine-glass, the paper cone and the three envelopes on it. On receiving back the stamp I place it deliberately on the white paper on the tray just in front of the wine-glass (Fig. 1). In a parlor or other room em, — Aerial suspension The caldron illusion When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC a i ee —— a ee a ST SS a

Page 138

THE ELUSIVE POSTAGE STAMP 21 in one’s home the trick would be performed at close quarters and the stamp could easily be kept in sight of all the specta- tors. The three envelopes are then handed out with the request that they be carefully examined and sealed one within the other to make a single packet consisting of the largest envelope in which are the two others, the smaller one sealed within the middle sized. When the sealed envelopes are given back I hold packet in plain sight and look around for something to lean it on. I pick up the prepared cigar- ette box with the free hand, froma shelf orfrom my pock- et, and place it on the table on one edge, with the top or lid facing the spectators, and with the bottom of the box as shown in Fig. 2. The pack- et of sealed and nested envel- opes is then placed upright against the box, practically hiding it, the largest envelope being just a trifle larger than the box. | The next move is to vanish the stamp on the tray. This is done by first placing the paper cone over the wine-glass and then raising both by gripping the glass through the paper and placing them over the stamp. The stamp is then commanded to disappear, and on removing the paper cone it will seem to have done so, the paper over the mouth of the glass, being the same color and character as that on the tray, effectually con- cealing the stamp. The tray can now be shown right under people's noses, care being taken that no one touches the wine- glass. Returning the tray to the table, you reach for the exposed packet of envelopes resting against the prepared box of cigar- ettes. Your right hand picks up both the packet and the box, with the thumb in front of the visible envelopes and with the remaining fingers falling behind upon the substitute envelopes containing the duplicate stamp. Turning about to face the spectators, the left hand approaches the right and grasps the box by the thumb and middle finger. By pressing the thumb and finger of the right hand on the top and bottom packets of en- velopes, and withdrawing the box quickly with the left hand, the two packets will be retained in the right hand, the larger one masking the packet of smaller ones. Fig. 2. Back view of cigarette box.

Page 139

22 MAGIC It now remains to throw the box of cigareftes carelessly to one side and prepare for the final effect. Keeping the larger packet towarcls the eyes of the spectators, the end of the visi- ble envelope is torn off preparatory to withdrawing its contents, but instead of so doing, draw the substitute envelopes from their seclusion, behind this original or exposed envelope. The illusion ts perfect and there is not one person in a thousand who would realize that such a subterfuge had been adopted. It only remains toopen the two remaining envelopes, ultimate- ly exposing the stamp which has been apparently passed into the center one, or the two envelopes can be handed tothe spec- tators to open. The original packet can be thrown aside with the cigarette box. Applause and curtain! NOTE—Magical students will recognize in the above some features of the “Coin and Har- ness Ring” and “Coin, Wine glass and Paper Cone. I acknowledge my indebtedness to Prof. Ellis Stranvon andto Mr. S.Willson Bailey and Mr, Harold A. Osborne for explanations of some of the details of the above little trick, CRYPTOGRAPHY oe a at wees 2, — Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Hidden or Secret Writings. Cipbers and Crvptographs. Articles, tllustrations. notes and items of interest solicited. As an example of the first and most common form of Cryptography, the following is given: -— For—a bedefghijkimnopqrstuvwx y z Use—d e f g hij kk Imnopyqrstuvwxyzaphbe. The sentence, ‘‘We meettonight,"’ in this cipher would become, ‘‘Zh phliw wr-qlykw."" The nextis formed on the principle of the above, but is rather more in- tricate; for instance, if | wanted toinform some one that, ‘‘All going on well, send supplies as soon as possible,’’ [should put it down in the follow- ing order: — ayp Ss p § oO lo oe looeos l noni = s wdeon ii o es gs ah i ltuaeost n lps pe You must read it down the first perpendicular column, then down the second, and soon. You mustthen form the lettersin the horizontal columns into imaginary words, and place them down on paper as you would a com- mon sentence, thus: —‘*Ag spso loelos lnn iosewden ives sabiluas Inlpspe.”’ You must arrange with your correspondent beforehand that the width of the horizontal column should consist of six letters (or more, if you like), so by placing the letters stx ina lineone under the other, without regard to words, the puzzle is easy to solve. gr a ies \ = we Aerial suspension The caldron illusion When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MaGic == a r- ee al ‘ee ae a

Page 140

VENTRILOQUISM Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Practical Voice Throwing and Vocal Mimicry. Articles, lustrations. notes and items of interest solicited, The following excellent advice to would-be ventriloquists is from Hercat’s “Ventriloguist and Ventriloquial Dialogues," and is good advice, indeed: “In commencing to practice the student should strain his chest a little, and then make a prolonged noise in his throat--what Sir Morell Mackenzie calls “phonation without articulation’ —a kind of grunting noise in a high kev, allowing the air to escape slowly, which will produce a sound resembling ‘tah.’ Practice this first a quarterof an hour, and later half an hour, daily, being most careful not to tire or strain your throat. When your throat becomes ac- customed to this new form of exercise, try the word ‘hello’ in’ the same manner, at the same time contracting your abdominal muscles, which will vive quite a distantsound tu the word. Practice this diligently, but without tiring your throat, until you can sound the word without the slightest ditticul- tvor inconvenience. ‘Then stand before a mirror, hold your lips ina natural position, slightly apart, your yaws rigid, with your upper teeth resting firmly upon your lower lip; keep your features perfectly immovable, and repeat the words ‘‘ah’’ and ‘‘hello’’ in the way already described. Practice this contin- ually before the mirror until you are able to make the sounds without an ef- fort and without the slightest facial movement. Make haste slowly. Begin- ners frequently try to progress too rapidly and injure their throats in) conse- quence. The mucous membrane of the air passages are, according to Sir Morell Mackenzie, more delicate than the covering of the eve, and there- fore great care must be taken not to subject the throatto violent exercise at first; but allow it to become gradually accustomed to the strain. As soon as you have acquired the knack of sounding the two words vou have been practicing without any movement of your lips or features, try other words and short sentences, such as, ‘‘l Say, where are vou?” ae m coming,” etc., and you willsoon be able to use longer phrases with ease. "’ THE LIGHTNING ARTIST Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Lightning Sketches, Cartoons, and Sinoke, Sandand Ray Pictures, ete. Articles, Hlustrations. notes and items of interest so- heited. The title of this new department was suggested by the title of a very val- uable book on the subject by Mr. J. F. Burrows. Lightning cartoon sketching consists of drawing caricature and other por- traits of celebrated men and women; also of well known types of people, such as Dude, Tramp, Policeman, etc. Both the genuine and fake methods for making lightning sketches of this character will be described inthis de- partment, Transformation Cartoons are very amusing. You first draw an egg orother object, then with a few additional lines it is transformed into a face. Smoke pictures are so named from being drawn on a plate which has been covered with soot fromthe smoke of atorch.

Page 141

24 MAGIC Pictures made from pieces of ray, etc., are at the present time a very novel, though simple, formof entertainment. Fake pictures are so called from the paper used being prepared, having a very faint outline on it, made by several methods which will be described laterin this department. PAPIERGRAPHY CONDUCTED BY LOUIS NIKOLA Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Paper Folding and Paper Tearing and Manipulation. Articles, illustrations, notes and items of interest solicited. Than paper tearing nothing can be easier. But like many absurdly easy, simple things, it can be developed by artistic application to a height that compels wonder and admiration, In principle itis so simple as scarcely to need explanation. One = folds a sheetof paper so that several thicknesses are torn together and when open forma repeating design of certain symmetry. eweoeaew’e @@ @& Fig. 3 Fig. 1 DIAGRAM FOR PAPER TEARING For your first attempt take a square of common aes Say a news-sheet: fold it on each axis, ason the dotted lines of Fig. 1, and then fold radially into two, three or four, or more, as indicated by the dotted lines of Fig. 2. This gives a triangular folded paperas Fig. 3. Tear holes along each edge at random or fancy. When opened out you will have a circular design—a crude one doubtless, but the basis of an art. A study of design and the exercise of taste, judgment and skill will pro- duce unending variety of beautiful effects. In your future attempts direct attention not upon merely tearing holes, but have regard tothe lines and form of the paper left. Have a definate scheme of design i in view. Study eachdesign produced, repeat and perfect its details and critically judge the balance of the whole, and make it again or - ies \\ wor Aerial suspension The caldron illusion When writing toadvertisers. kindly mention MAGIC

Page 142

THE MAGICAL MATINEE 25 and again until perfected. With the accumulated knowledge of experience and practice, creditable designs can be made right away, just as an accom- plished drauglitsman can set down, sketch or design with facility. Paper tearing is itself a form of graphic art, and as with otherarts the early at- tempts of the learner must naturally be labored and faulty. NOTE—An example of acircular design by Mr. Louis Nikola was given in our last issue. —Editor MAGIC. The Magical Matinee News and Notes About The Magic Show ‘‘Albini, the incomparable,’’ played the Empress theatre, Kansas City, Oct. 16-22. He yave an entertaining show with sume good illusions done on a bare stage without scenery and with the theatre's back brick wall asa drop. His small sleight of hand work was exceptionally good and he ‘got away’’ with his manner of ‘‘cussing up"’ the spectators. Friday night's show was devoted to an expose of spiritualistic tricks. Some of the darling secrets 7 the medium business were yviven away to the yreat delight of the au- lence. Donald Holmes, the magical specialist of San Angelo, Texas, reports an increased business with excellent prospects for the coming winter. He has just issued a new catalogue. 9? ‘*Knarf, the Mysterious,’’ has been running the ‘‘Palace of Mystery’’ at Electric Park, Baltimore, all summer with great success. It is to be greatly regretted that ‘‘The Wizard,"’ that excellent) English monthly, has been discontinued. Some say it was the bestof all the magic papers. Mr. Max Sterling announces a new periodical to be called ‘‘The Magical World,’’ an illustrated 16 page weekly at 2d. Mr. Sterling says his paper will be more of a newspaper than a technical journal, although there will be magical problems in addition. The first number will be issued the last week in October and will be looked for with great interest all over the world. Richard Nadrage, ventriloquist, introduced a novelty in his dancing clowns at the Orpheum, Kansas City, Oct. 23-29. The Century Co., New York, announce a new magic book by Henry Hat- ton and Adrain Plate entitled, ‘‘Magician's Tricks.’’ It is illustrated with over 250 pictures. 12 mo, 350 pages. A. Sundaramurthi, 86, Avadanam Papier Road, Choolay, Madras, India, would liketo have someone recommend tohim ‘‘one ofthe best publications in English that lucidly treats Magic in the form of a drama for two or more characters and inone ortwo acts. The characters must be more mysterious than funny.” Joseffy, the Chicago magical artist, has issued a very artistic announce- mentinthe form of a little booklet containing an appreciation by Charles Sandburg. The entire effect of the little book is artistic and a refreshing de- parture from the unrestrained broadsides sent out to announce some our mag- ical friends. 4 NOVEMBER 1910 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 143

26 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS $25.00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A $25 course in ‘‘Expert Billiard Ball Manipulation, leading New York Mazyical Studiv. 100 Tricks and Sleights. 200 Beautiful Photographic Illustrations. 56 Original Tricks. 35,000 Words of Expert Instruction. Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lizard Skin Finish Art Covers, Gold Titles, Silk Bound. Most beautiful, unique and ar- tistic Mystery Volume yet produced. Price $1.00, postpaid. BURLING HULL CO., 393 4th St., Brooklyn, N. Y. The Leading British Magical Monthly Maga- THI H E VW IZA RD zine. Now in the fifth year of its success, FEA- TURES—A guinea trick in every number. Bright chatty gossip. Humorous patter. Valuable articles and interesting news itemsfrom all parts of the world. Profusely illustrated. Official organ of the “Magic Circle.”’ 6d (2c), postpaid to any partof the world. Subscription. 5] - ($1.20) per annum. or 2 | 6(60c) for 6 months. WIZARD PUBLISHING COMPANY ANY, 4, Duke Street. Adelphi. London, W.C.,, England. ‘Something Different’’ This is the question invariably asked by the modern magician in his quest for new material in his chosen profession, His insatiable thirst for more knowledge (something new") is re- sponsible for the wonde rful advancement of the Art in recent years. If you really want something new, novel and practical you should order at once The Book of the Year. SOME MODERN CONJURING. by Donald Holmes. A Series of Original Ex- periments in the Magic Art. Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than any book twice its size. Not a single space filler. Tricks with Watches, Rings, Handkerchiefs, Flags, Dice, etc.. lucidly ex: plained. Of interest to professional or amateur alike. Printe d on fine paper. with ele vant half: tone cuts. Something ditterent in every respect. DONALD HOLMES Box 351, San Angelo, Texas. 9 Journal for Professional and Amateur L LI LL i S] ON IS Magicians. Theonly Magical Maga- zine printed in the French Language. Published Monthly. Illustrated, Annual subscriptions, 8 francs ($1.60), Sample copy, 75 centi- mes (15 cts. 5 Editor, CAROLY, AROLY, 20 Boule vard St. Ge rmain, Paris, Fr as given at the ‘Edited by Will Goldston. A e Mag ician M onth journal for all interested in Magic and Mystery. In its sixth year of success, “a8 subsoription, $1.15. Saniple copy, lOcts. Foreizp stamps not accepted in pavment. T HE M AGICI AN, Ltd... 6 Robin Hood Yard. London, Ecc, (Landen: Eng.) The pioneer of Coniunink Magazines. Its tenth successful year of publication, Oldest, brightest, best and most bana circulated monthly for magicians, The recognised Journal of the professional magician. Features every month—Original lessons in Magic. being itHustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage illusions. Ex- planatory programmes of prominent magicians, showing the order of tricks prese nted. with an explanation of each trick. ete. Sample copy, 6 t-2d (15 cts). Pwelve months. 5 | @ (S150), Table of Contents of the ten volumes mailed free, American stamps and Dollar netes ac- ce cepted, ST ANYON & CO. 76 Solent Road, West Hampstead, London, N. W., England. THE SPHINX A Monthly Magazine for Amateurand Professional Magicians. Tells you more about magic than any magazine published. News letters from = corres: pondents in all parts of the world areaspecial feature. $la year. Single copies. lec. A. M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher, 906 Main St., Kansas City, Mo. r ow — bad ms. \ 1 ee Aerial suspension The caldron illusion When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC eee et ee pe gg eee ae a

Page 144

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS a ETS Professionals of Note and Amateurs of Distinction Are Reading ‘‘Wrinkles’’ and Each is Discovering Suggestions of Value, as well as Innovations Which Open New Fields in Con- juring. There is No Padding—There is No Junk—There are No Dreamy Impossibilities. Can you afford to neglect your education when the sum which stands between you and enlightenment is 5Ucents. Ask any Reliable Dealer for ‘“Wrinkles’’ or the Publishers, The Bailey & Tripp Co. 16Inman St., Cambridge, Mass. We have for quick sale the outfit of ‘‘Baker.’’ This was once the property of “Charles Curtis Dunbar,’’ supposed to be the best private collection of Magical Apparatus in this coun- try. Also the entire stock of the Silvey and Budgen Co. Both lots, as they are, must be sold for cash at once. We offersame on our Bargain Sheet No. 28, which will be sent FREE. Catalogue No. 27 FREE. ‘The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of us. “If its Leroy’s, its the best.”’ ‘*Mavician Annual,’’ Nos. 1 or 2, each, $1.25; No. 3, $2. ‘‘Magician's Book of Patter,’’ 50c. ‘‘Red Demon's Fire Book,’’ 50c. Goldston'’s ‘“Pricks and IJIlusions,’’ $1.50. Selbit's ‘‘Books of Patter.’’ Nos. 1 and 2, each, 353c. ‘Some Modern Conjuring,’’ #1. Send $2 for our ‘Svengali’ Pack and ‘‘Mene-tekel’’ Pack. ‘These cards surpass anything ever put out. “T consider they surpass anything LT have ever seen and are easily worth $ a pack.” —Max HOLDEN, Send 10c for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50c for 212 page H- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Magicians When writing to advertisers. kindly mention M vtec NOVEMBER 1910 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 145

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Exploding matches The caldron illusion The water miracle LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and Illus- ions. We sell only the best Tricks and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill. All our directions are plain and in most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manu- facturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and Illusions in the world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station New Haven, Conn. Card levitation Anarchist (stink) Lombs Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC a - - fad The caldron illusion th) Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC oP a = (See ome es memes @ = ee enn & al.

Page 146

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER \ &§ 24 DESIRE a. re . ié he POR © . oa 2 i NIGHT ONLY! : = RS DAY, Nov. 22nd. ; BYE ©. GREAT ERSTE MAGIC! AN, And EXPERIWENTAL AN THE ASSEMBLY ROOM, 5.5, Be ' - as na Tavern Preston Strect. NOVEMBER 1910 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 147

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Hamley Bros., Ltd. Hamley’s Special Conjuring Table To mect the demand. we have just introduced a specially cheap dine in’ Tables, whieh we feel sare will give great satisfaction, The top measures inches in diameter, covered with splendid quality black cloth with border about 4 inches wide all round trimined with faney vold silk braid and fringe. The legs are nicely made and are telescopic. makings then very rile for traveling. The table can be raised or lowered toany he ‘ight tosuit the convenience of the performer, The legs when closed measure about 2b inches long. and for packing will lav that across the table, We are contident that these tables will bhawe a great ee lastiny sale. and we are oftering them to ourcustomers ata nominal cost. Price 8 | 6 682.04). Carriage to be paid on receipt, Ve have also a splendid selection of Table Legs without tops. as follows: Cheap Table Leus, 3] 6 (Sdel: Superior Nickel Phited Table Lees. S| 6 (82.040: Fancy Brass Table Legs. 15 | 6 (83,72) The Wandering Jacks The four Jacks are taken out of the pack. laid face upwards on the table; on each Jack three inditterent cards are dealt. the audience choose one pile. this is left on the table in’ full view of every bodv and the other three piles are returned to the pace k: the latter is now stre said outon the table. the Jacks have vanished. and on turning over what appeared to be one Jack and three inditterent cards, they are found to be the four Jacks. Price P| (24). Post free blot. LONDON BRANCHES 35, New Oxford Stree. London, W. C., England Sl0a and 512. Oxford Street. W. ). Ludgate Hill, F.C. 200 and 202. Regent Street. W. 54, Knightsbridge. S. W. SY and 87. High Holborn, W.C. Head Warehouse) WILLMANN’S MAGICAL WONDERS Evervthing that is NEW in Magic is his. His Goods stand alone. You cannet compare other apparatus with Willmann’s. They are the best made. Cost more, but worth more. When vou want (GOOD tricks, buy Willmann’s and you will see what WORKMANSHIP is. ‘The Bamberg Magic and Novelty Company 1193 Broadway, New York, U.S. A. ARE PROUD TO ANNOUNCE THAT THEY ARE WILLMANN’S SOLE AGENTS Send for our Professional Catalogue, 100 pages, Stage Tricks. Price, 50 cents. Send for our Amateur Catalogue, 90 paves, Parlor Tricks, Price, 10 cents, It will pay vou to visit our beautiful Magic Shop; finest in the world. We Have Everything that is New in Magical Construction When writing to advertisers, kindly mention Macic

Page 148

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME If NUMBERS CONTENTS FOR NOVEMBER, 1910 The cover illustration is from a rare poster in the Harry Houdini collection, oe TEN BEST BOOKS ON MAGIC A. M. Wirson, M. D. Pad) Hiustration from a photograph THE ENCHANTED TABLE KNIFE ERNEST EVNGELINE aD) IHustrations from photographs A NEW MAGICAL PERIODICAL 33 THE LIGHTNING ARTISTE 23 HYPEPNOTISM at PSYCHICAL PHENOMENA 34 NOVELTY ENTERTAINING Xb VENTRILOOUISM © THE SHADOW WORLD 57 THE MAGICAL MATINEE 3S MAGIC is published every month except: July and August by BF. TP. Singleton, 3ol9 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, G.s. \. Yearly subscriptions, 31.00. Foreign postage, 2 cents extra, Single copies, 10 cents. Copyright. 1910, by BF. ‘T. Singleton, FT. SINGLETON, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. Waa MARTINKA’S Byes | CATALOGUE Biggest and best catalogue of high grade mayvical goods sent postpaid for 25c. Maxi- cian’s Headquarters in America. Keliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship. being famous for solid quality. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will greatis please everyone. A heavy brass cap is given for thorough exami nation. In the cap is a small hole. go- ing right through it. Three coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im mediately, only two coins are left, Nosleighe of hand. Can be performed at once by any one. Price, complete, SI. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Siath Avenue. New York.

Page 149

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Publisher Says The Christmas number of Maaic will be mailed to subscribers on Dec. 17. Will be the best issue of a magi- ical paper ever published. The cover design will be in colors and gold, and many beautiful illustrations will appear throughout the text. Among the leading articles will be: ‘*The Romance of Magical Collecting,’’ by Harry Houdini; ‘‘The Hand,’”’ by Henry Ridgely Evans; ‘“The Flying Card Pips,’’ by Ernest Evangeline; “Our Next President,’’ a spectacular mind reading trick. ‘‘Recollections of Robert-Houdin’s Home.”’ News about the doings of magicians, ventriloquists, mind readers, shadow and picture artists and novelty entertainers of all kinds will hereafter be a regular fea- ture of Maaic. Many thanks to the kind friends who sent in news items for this issue. Four additional pages have been added to get them all in, and much valuable matter had to be omitted. I.et me, here on this page, ‘‘boost’’?’ Mr. Max Ster- ling’s new weekly, ‘“The Magical World,”’ the first is- sue of which I received Nov. 14. It sets a high stand- ard and cannot help but contribute largely to the rapid advancement of the art of magic. Mr. Sterling’s paper will attempt to record each progressive move while it is yet news rather than history, and endeavor to promote research and encourage originality by illustrated ex- ample. Address: The Magical World, 8, Lawson St., Moss Side, Manchester, England. Note that this number of Maaic is out earlier than usual. I hope to keep this up every month hereafter. Have an assistant in the printing shop now. If vou are not a regular subscriberto Macic, you had better send in your order for the Christmas number in advance. Price, 25 cents. Fr. T. SINGLETON — ee

Page 150

MAGIC VOLUME I] NOVEMBER, 1910 NUMBER 8 a. ae ; - Wy - = | aD ~ . Ne > "« F4 ~ « \ag % 7? NY TEN BEST BOOKS ON MAGIC TEN BEST BOOKS ON MAGIC SELECTED BY. A. M. WILSON, M...D. . MODERN MAGIC. By Professor Hoffmann. . MORE MAGIC, — By Professor Hoffmann. . LATER MAGIC. By Professor Hoffmann. . KING OF CONJURERS (Autobiography). By Robert-Houdin. . CONJURING ANID) MAGIC. By Robert-Houdin. Translated by Professor Hoffmann. . STAGE CONJURING. By Robert-Houdin. Translated by Pro- fessor Hoffmann. . SLEIGHT OF HAND. By Edwin ©. Sachs. . MAGIC MADE EASY. By David Devant. . THE OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC, By Henry R. Evans. . THE MODERN CONIURER. By C, Lang Neil;

Page 151

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Ten Best Bookson Magic By A. M. Wilson, M. D. Ve GOOD set of books—a well selected, but not neces- Sl sarily large, library of magical works -is as essen- Wi tial to the making of a real magician, either ama- -teur or professional, as is a solid foundation to the i support of a good building. The above list covers the entire ground of modern magic in both theory and practice as it relates to manipulative skill and the presentation of a programin the parlor or on the stage; and more, for in Houdin'’s datobrography and in Evan's 7he Old and The New Magee will be found historical matter pertaining to mag- ic that is of great value to the genuine student of the art. The lat- ter mentioned book also gives the explanation of a number of tricks and illusions not found in the others named. My advice, based on almost fifty years experience in magic, is: procure as many of the aboved named books as you can, but do not attempt to master them all at once. Hoffmann’ s .J/od- ern Magic and Sach’s Slereht of Hand ave best to begin with, as they give great attention to the foundation principles of sleight of hand. Iam well aware that many will take issue with me as to the selection here offered as the ten best books on the subject, but out of several hundred) which [have in my library Ido not know of any other ten complete works that come so near filling the bill as do these, especially for the beginner tn the art. EDIPORIAL NOTE—The above article was very kindly prepared last summer, by Dr. Wilson. but lack of space has prevented its publication before this. The Enchanted Table Knife By Ernest Evangeline acl HIS trick requires nothing but “nerve,’’ a copy of Pes NW the Saturday kovenmng Post, some gummed stickers, rea) a piece of thread and two table knives, not neces- sarily of sterling silver! The effect of the trick ts that a table knife is wrapped in a sheet of paper torn from a pertodical with the end of the blade protruding as In Fig. bo Vhe knife so wrapped is then held in plain view of the spectators and suddenly crushed into a small ball between the hands, showing the knife to have completely disappeared. The trick isin the sheet of paperin which the knife is wrapped. The paper should be the tnside double page sheet of a copy of

Page 152

MAGIC Sl Lhe Saturday kvening Post, or any other popular periodical that has an everyday look. Thissheet is prepared without separating from the paper, with a pocket made by pasting a quarter page advertisment, cut from anothercopy of the periodical, over a quarter page advertisement (lowerinside quarter of under- side) on the sheet to be used. The extra advertisement (se- lect one with a border) ts trimmed down neatly to the printed edge and pasted to the tull sheet along the top and two sides only, leaving an opening at the bottom with the central part forming a loose pocket. A duplicate knife blade end, witha small hole in the top, is fastened by a thread and gummed sticker within this pocket so as to allow the knife blade to pro- trude about three inches when it is dropped to its utmost length. Fig. 2 shows a portion of the full sheet to be used with the duplicate knife blade end attached by a thread and FIG. 1. gummed sticker to the center of a quarter page advertisement as it will appear before pasting on a duplicate quarter page advertisement. In presenting the experiment, the performer must take the knife, and, after letting it be demonstrated that it is quite the usual thing, it should be laid on the table while looking about for something to wrap It in. The faked copy of 7he Saturday -vening Post, thank you, 1s conveniently near at hand. This is opened out at the middle with the pocket side away from the audience. The knife is then wrapped up and held with the mouth of the paper pocket point- ing upwards. If introduced as a dinner table trick the performer may now lower the parcel to the level of the table and allow the genuine knife to slide out on his knees. If given as a parlor trick the khife must be conjured into a convenient pocket during the process of turning to someone to feel that the knife is still in the package. Directly the real knife has been transterred, the hand is turned a —— ee

Page 153

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS oz MAGIC over and the duplicate blade end permitted to fall to the end of its tether. The action of showing the blade end is illustrated in Fig. 1. No one not a conjurer himself will dispute the presence of the knife in the paper. It only remains for the conjurer to push the blade end quickly back into the pocket, crush the paper be- tween the hands and toss it carelessly to one side to furnish suf- ficient proot to the average human that it has disap- peared. The original knife may now be reproduced trom any place the entertainer may choose—from an old gentle- man’s sleeve to the chande- lier. In another version of this trick in which a napkin Is used prepared in a similar manner to the sheet of paper, the use of a ‘body bag’’ is recom- mended. This is a cloth bag held in the performer's back between his coat and vest by means of elastic cordfastened to his coat collar. The elastic must be of a length to enable the performer, while seated FIG, 2. at table, to hold the bag between his knees. When standing up the elastic cord draws the bag up under the coat so that it 1s not noticeable. The conjurer is thus enabled, when seated ata table, to make all sorts of things disappear by letting them fall in the bag on his lap, held in position with his knees. The bag has only to be let free and the articles with the bag immediately fly up behind him under his coat. This bag plays a most important role in this trick, as the per- former, when enclosing the original knife in the cloth, makes it slip into the bag. This is not noticeable, the more so as the per- former, Just at the moment when the knife is slipping into the bag, allows the faked blade contained in the cloth to be seen. The spectators, of course, think that they are seeing the real knife. Once the blade has been put inside, it is an easy matter for the performer to bring the trick to a close. When the napkin is used, the knife blade end ts arranged to disappear up in the cloth pocket when the napkin 1s shaken. NOT E—Credit for invention of the above trick is due Mr. Fullam McGlade. Some of the details of the explanations are from “The Wizard,” Aug., 1807, and “The Magician Annual,’ 1909 10. Digitized by Google

Page 154

MAGIC A New Magical Periodical we wey HE first number of 7he Magical World, the new Eng- lish weekly, was received in Kansas City on Novy, 14. The price of single copies is given as 2d. The annual subscription price, however, is not stated, So es OVhe principal articles are devoted to a description (not explanatory) of Mr. Oswald Williams big act, a new card levitation by Dr. A. C. Lindsay Smith and “°A Japanese Floral kan-cy'’ by Max Sterling. A feature of interest to English readers is *"Whereabouts This Week,” giving the location of the leading performers for the week. Advertisements of the leading dealers are present in gener- ous proportions, and the paper has a prosperous, he althy, come- to-stay appearance that is very promising. The Lightning Artist ; Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Lightning Sketches, Cartoons, and Smoke, Sandand Ray Pictures. etc. Articles, illustrations. notes and items of interest so licited. After a busy season, FRANK LEwts, lightning artist, is spending a few weeks at his home in Pittsburg. R. L. GOLDBURG, cartoonist, at Proctor’s, Newark, N. J. Oct. 24-29. Rossi ASHTON, who does not like to be billed as a *‘Lightning Cartoonist, "’ but whose black and white work is none the less one of the popular features of London vaudeville, is doing some fine studies of music hall life and char- acter for the London ‘* Music Hall.’ LIEUT. ELDRIDGE, ““The Sand Man,’ opened the show recently at Ham- merstein’s, New York. He made a sinking ship of sand, a snowbound cot- tage and set San Francisco on fire with red flames made of colored sand. Kk DWARD Topp, cartoonist, at the Savoy, Baltimore, Oct. 24-29. ALFRED JACKSON, poster Cartoonist, substituted at Hammerstein's Vic- toria, New York, fortwo performances, Oct. 23. Is adecided novelty. Booked for return Nov. 28. ‘THE TRILLERS, rag artists, at the Grand, Nashville, Tenn., Oct. 17-22. FRANK PALMER, Cartoonist, at the Thirty-first Street theatre, Chicago, Oct. 17-22. A newcomer. Not quite at home on the stage but will improve and be bes liked. Has a string of talk and pictures. New jokes. Draws on sheets of paper which are turned over, making an awkward reach. Improved way is to have the paper roll up like window curtains. KR EOUBLE SIMS, cartaonist and ‘‘the thinnest thing in vaudeville,’” will shortly go onthe S. & C. circuit. Digitized by Google

Page 155

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS sf MAGIC Hypnotism Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Hy pnotism and Mesmerism, Crystal Gazing and allied kindred interests. Articles, photographs, itlustrations. notes and items uf interest solicited, VERNON, hypnotist, at Aurora, Mo., Oct. 31l-Nov. 5, HERBERT L. FLINT, hypnotist, at Rock Island, [H., Oct. 31-Nov. 6. FRANK J. Powers, hypnotist, at Beeville, Tex., Oct. 24-29. PAULINE was at the American, Chicago, Oct. 24-29. As usual the end of his act found the house in tempests of merriment and applause. Psychical Phenomena Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Mind Reading. Second Sight, Telepa: thy, Muscle Reading. Thought Transmission and kindred subjects. Articles. photographs. illustrations, notes and items of interest solicited. COUNT AND COUNTESS CHEILO, thought transmission, at the American, New Orleans, Oct. 24-29. Critics sav that the act is different from anything of the kind ever done. ANNA EVA FAY I —— AND WER CABINET {ps x “PUszLER Ne » Nar y 1 EO HER WANDS BE MIND HER for THE AvolréNnCca’ ANNA EVA FAY'S CABINET MYSTERY From “The Kansas Citv Post.” Nov. 3, 1910, ANNA EVA Fay was the big feature at the Empress, Kansas City, Oct. 31-Nov. 5. She did look the mystic in hersimple white dress and quite man- her. As usual, she was carried off the stage to recover from her trance after reading the questions from the audience. Entire performance was convincing. MLLE. WARRN, cabinet mystery, at the New Nickleodeon, Boston, Oct. 3l-Nov. 5, THE SHARROCKS, in lightning mental suggestion, at the New Cozv, Hous- ton, Pex., Oct. 17-22.

Page 156

MAGIC 35 At the Coronet theatre, London, a psvehic play, ‘Behind the Veil," will be produced immediately. LItLiAN Boon, mind: reader, was featured at the Globe, Kansas City, Nove 7-12. CHESTER TY AMON, mind reader, at the Orpheom, Schenectady, No Y., Oct. 24-9. At the Union Square, New York, Oct. 24-29, ALETHEIA AND ALEKO of- fered their mind reading act. Aletheia, in Onental grab, blindfolded, sits in the center of the stage, while Aleko, a big broad-shouldered Greek in his native attire, approaches different persons. After a whispered conversation he asks Aletheia to tell the first name, initial and wish of the person in ques- tion. This the woman proceeds to do in a loud, clear voice. Another ‘Eva Fay’ was in the olio with ‘“Dhe Knickerbockers’’ at the Star and Garter, Chicago, Oct. 24-29, Made a big hit with her mystic work. Voted the best entertainer, showman and comedian of all the mystic ladies. THE GREAT BENEDICT, master of mental telepathy and second sight, at the New National, Cleveland. Answers questions written in any language, the question being placed inside an envelope and not opened, HAGAN was on the bill, Oct. 24-29, at Hammerstein's Roof, New York. Kemoved his clothes while enclosed in a big ball-shaped contrivance and followed it up with some quick straight jacket releases. Closed by crawling in a long steel tude, 14 inches in diameter at one end and twice as large at the other, again removing his clothes and appearing at the finishin a bathing Suit. Jack ARK, Diabloist, appeared for the first time in America at the Amer- ican, New York, Oct. 24-29, Although the novelty of this form of entertain- ment has worn off, Ark handles the spools in aninteresting manner and has a well devised routine of tricks with them, some of which called forth hearty applause. He had the full stage for about eleven minutes. ADELAIDE HERRMANN is working up a newact in which she will nnoper- sonate Cagliostro and work several new illusions, Shortly to appear in) New York, : Talk ofa magical theatre for New York after the pattern of the old Lon- don Egyptian Hall is going the rounds. It should prove a big money maker, Anew book on magic is being looked for from MASKELINE AND DAVANT, the St. George's Hall (London) producers. It will probably be published in January. [LAWRENCE CRANE acted as stave manaver for the concert held on the ship on his way to Europe. He opened at the Palace, London, Oct. 31. The famous Maskelyne automaton, Psycnuo, recently revived after many vears of retirement, met with an accident the other day in a collision with a scene shifter. It will be laid up for repairs for some time to come. GARCIA, the great European shadowgraphist, has arrived. He opened at the Fulton Street theater, Brooklvu, Nov. 7. ”

Page 157

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 36 MAGIC Novelty Entertaining Contributions under this heading will be devoted to all kinds of unique forms of entertain: ing such as Hoop Rolling. Plate Spinning. Bubble Blowing. Fire \cts. Handecutt and Straight Jacket Escapes, Ponch and Judy. ete... Articles. photographs, Wlastrations. notes and items of interest solicited, — og q it - et eds, oe GALLANDO, clay modeling, at the American, Chicago, Oct, 24-29, Micseé, bre king, recently appeared at the Princess, San Diego, Calill Atthe Trevett theatre, Chicago, “THE KINALDOS presented their novelty hoop act, “The Dawn of Day in Flowerland."” They carry two cars of special scenery and made good. SAM RUSSELL, plate spinner, LIONETTE, paper king, and PROF. LYNCH'S Punch and Judy were all on the bill at the New Nicklelodeon, Boston, Oct., 24-29. THE STELLINGS, hat spinners, at the Star, Chicago, Oct. 24-29, HARDEEN, handcutf king, headliner at) Pantages, Spokane, Wash., Oct. 17-22. OLLIE YOUNG AND APRIL, diablo and = svap-bubble manipulators, at Shea's, Toronto, Can., recently. Very interesting act. JACK KELLY, .an Australian whip expert, was at the Temple, Rochester, Oct. 24-29. BEAL’S Punch and Judy is meeting with success all along the line. Ventriloquism Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Practical Votce Throwing and Vocal Mimicev. Articles, thhustrations. notes and ttems of interest solicited. THE GREAT HOWARD, ventriloquist, at the Majestic, Chicago, Nov. 7- 12. Billed as “Phe Prenner Ventrloquist of Scotland.’’ Dresses in Highland costume. He is supposed to be a physician. The rising curtain shows him toying with a violin, The talk that follows makes it plain that he is a doctor without patients. He is wishing that someone would require his services when the bell rings. He meets his visitor at the the door and manipulates the figure so that a stuttering boy walks in and explains that he is in search of another voung fellow whe “has toothache and was headed for the physician's office when last seen. Another ringing of the belland the second dummy, in Scotch costume like the ventriloquist, is broughtin. He has his jaw w rapped up and the physician removes the molar, aclever bit of comedy. The Great Howard displays skill as a ventriloquist and makes lis dummies talk entertainingly, and by using a telephone to introduce e the \ coice of a girl singing (itis’* Cen- tral”) presents three different singing voices besides his own. The finish in one is where he takes the dummy into the auditorium and has it address some folks in the audience and carry on a conversation with an assistant dressed as an usher.

Page 158

MAGIC ar kK RED NEIMAN, the popular English ventriloquist and agent was given a benefit performance recently on the occasion of his hftieth birthday. At the President, Chicago, Oct. 24-26, McCormick and Wallace made good with a really funny ventriloquial sketch. Edward F. Reynard, clever ventriloquist. A whole show in himself. At Silica s, Turonto, Can:, Oct. I7-22. PROVOL, experiments in ventriloquism, at the Majestic, Chicago, Oct. 24- 29. Minneapolis and St. Paul to follow. BINGHAM, ventriloquist, at the Scenic, Hartford, Conn., Oct. 24-29. JOHNSON CLARK, called by the critics, ‘A ventriloquist above the ordi- hary,’’ was at the American, Chicago, Oct. 24-29, DAN HARRINGTON’'S ventriloquial act made a big hit recently at Kenney’s ‘Third Avenue theatre, New York. CHARLIER, foreign ventriloquist, billed to open at the American, New York, Oet. 31, had not arrived up to Oct. 27. CORAM has an elaborate military setting for his ventriloquial sketch now running in London. W. FE. Waitrr.te was on the bill recently at the Princess, St. Louis, with his ‘*Peddy"’ ventriloquial specialty. At the American Music Hall, Chicago, Oct. 24-29. LANDER, ventriloquist, at the Lyric, St. Jolin, Can., Oct. 17-19. GREAT HOWARD, ventriloquist, at the Majestic, Milwaukee, Oct. 24-29. The Shadow World Contributions under this heading will be devoted to Shadowgraphy, Silhouette Shows, and Shadow Plays and Entertainments. Articles, illustrations and items of interest solicited. Hippovira 1)’ HELLAS appeared at the Palace, London, Oct. 17, in ‘*The Silhouette Dance.’’ ‘The dancing is done behind a screen with the shadow only visible. Certainly a novelty. Mr. AND Mrs. STUART DARROW were at the Colonial, New York, Oct. 24-29, Theirartistic sand and shadow pictures were executed in a most ex- cellent fashion. FREVOLI has a shadow novelty. He worksin front ofthe sheet. His finger work shows up to good advantage and gets appreciation. He wears a won- derful hat. At the Trevitt, Chicago, Oct 24-29. HOLDEN AND LECLAIR, ‘‘Shadowgraphs That Are Different,’’ at the Victoria, Baltimore, Oct. 24-29. GARCIA, shadow maker, at the Alhambra, Paris. Will come to America soon to open on Morris time. Bee eee ee ee q = q Digitized by NIA OE

Page 159

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 38 MAGIC The Magical Matinee | News and Notes About The Magic Show CARTER, illusionist, just finishing a world’s tour, is in London, May go on at the halls. HERR BOWMANN and LA ZOLA were in Chicago recently. THE VANDER Koors and their mind reading duck, Felix, were at Polli's, Hartford, Conn., Oct. 24-29. They will work in the East this season. RISMER, illusionist, will play several Chicago houses this month. THE SOCIETY OF AMERICAN MAGICIANS will hold their big show January 14, 1911. A handsome souvenir programme will be issued for the occasion. Particulars regarding it canbe had of the President, Mr. Elmore P. Ransom, 224 St. James Place, Brooklyn, N.Y. RAMESES, clever magician, at the Garrick, San Diego, Oct. 24-29. HOWARD THURSTON packed the Lyceum, Paterson, N. J., Oct. 24-26; Jersey City, Oct. 27-29. HENRY CLIVE made his first appearance at Hammerstein's Victoria theatre, New York, Oct. 24-29, scoring a big hit in a take-off on mental telepathy and sleight of hand. He was assisted by MAl SruRGiIs WALKER. A trunk mystery was shown at Keith's Fourteenth Street, New York. HARRY Bovuron AND Co., played New Rochelle, N. Y., recently. Marshall, mystic, at the Gem, Philadelphia, Oct. 24-29. C. PORTER NORTON at the Grand, Knoxville, Tenn., Oct. 24-29. ‘THE GREAT RAYMOND has a new illusion, ‘“Phe Boy Scout's Dream.”’ All the scouts turn out to see it. He opened the new Empire, Kingston-ou- Thames, England, Oct. 24. Thirty-five people in company, twenty tons of baggage, Soon in London for indefinite period. VAN HOVEN, comedy magician, on the bill at Hammerstein's Victoria, New York, Oct. 31-Novw. 5. Avon, at the New Nickelodeon, Boston, Oct. 31-Nov. 5. LE Roy, TALMA AND Bosco are one of the big features at the Alham- bra, Paris, doing mavic and illusions. Alberto, conjurer, and VALLI, another one, recently sailed for America froin Australia. Chris Krispen tried to break into magic at a recent Bush ‘Temple (Chic- ago) tryout. Could not be heard over the footlgxhts. Tricks were poor, But keep at it, old man, you can beat ’em vet. Professor Hoffmann, dean of the magical writers, has just finished a new book, ‘Magical Tit-Bits."" The book will contain twelve tricks, carefully explained, giving the author's methods of doing them.

Page 160

THE MAGICAL MATINEE 39 MARVELOUS WALKER recently opened one of the Bush Temple weekly tryouts (Chicago) with a magic act, but did not score a big hit with the critics. ADOLPHE BLIND, ‘‘Le Professeur Magicus,’’ Villa Elizabette a Chemin des Chalets 1, Petit Saconnex, Geneva, Switzerland, is making a unique col- lection of magical folk's autographs on the card index plan. The idea is a very good one from the collector's Stand point. THE LINGERMANS (Samuel and Lucy) are back home in Philadelphia for the winter They will present their act of Ventriloquism and magic at local church and society entertainments. THE VANISHING CAROS j = Ah i SS AY Gnicisn) GEORGE REUSCHLING },) ss oh | nd Roo ime Tr A RUSH LING TOY & CO. IN “A NIGHT IN THE ORIENT" Cartoon from “The Show World.” Chicago, Nov. 5, 1910. = \ ) iN The mystic creation, ‘‘A Night in the Orient,’’ presented by GEORGE REUSCHLING as ‘‘Rush Ling Toy & Co.,"’ was atthe Kedzie, Chicago, Oct. 24- 29. Favorable comment was made of the act by the Chicago papers. The audi- ence does not know that a Chinese magician is not entertaining until the necro- mancer removes his wig fora final how. Sufficient comedy is introduced to get away froma straight act. ‘Vhe comedy tricks are old but introduced in a new way. The magician appears froma Sedan chair carried on the stage by his two assistants. The chairis smallerthan has previously beenseenin magic acts and does not appear to be sustaining any weight. A double production of a fire bowl and a water bowl discloses the nature of the offering and it is followed by a presentation of ducks and other tricks along usual lines. A box mystery, a frame vanish and a departure from the usual cabinet trick, which is billed as ‘Yor Koi Yoi,"" are presented in such a manner as to reflect credit on the artists. At the last the magician appears in the audience when he is thought to be snugly boxed up on the stave

Page 161

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 4) MAGIC MAURICE, the new English Hlusionist, claims to have no fewer than three thousand tricks. HORNMANN put on a new act of magicat Reenev’s Third Avenue theatre, New York. HERR JANSEN, of the magical firm of Halton, Jansen & Le Roy Co., played at the Lyric, Terre Haute, Ind., Oct. 24-29. He had six people mn his show, five big illusions and the usual small stuff. Jansen’s work withthe billiard balls is extra fine. He is booking himself right over the managers’ heads, but will only be outa few wecks, returning to Chicagoin time for his firm's busy season. “Mavicians’ ‘Tricks,’’ the new book by HENRY Hatrron and ADRIAN PLATE, is receiving some good notices from the press. KARL GERMAIN was at the Princess Theatre, Brandon, Man., Oct. 20-22, LoLo, mystic, at the Maryland, Baltimore, Oct. 24-29. Held over. MAHATMA, a new mystery act, at the Verdi, Chicago, Oct. 24-29, Lovers of magic in Phoenix, Ariz., recently had the pleasure of witnessing FREDERICK THE GREAT with his own magic and mystery show, Tuurstron’s big show will be in Cleveland, Nov. 21-26; Dayton, O., Nov. 28-30): Columbus, Dec. 1-3; Wheeling, Dec. 5-7; Youngstown, Dec. 8-10; Akron, Dec. 12-14; Ft. Wayne, Dec. 15-17. ADAMS AND MACK, quack tllusionists, atthe Majestic, Schenectady, N. Y., Oct. 17-22. That wonderful Japanese magical wateract of THE GREAT ASAHE was at the Orpheum, Spokane, Wash., Oct. 17-22. Lripzic returned to London on Oct. loth from: a provincial tour. He put in the week atthe Hippodrome, making his third appearance there this vear, and will shortly sail for South Africa and Australia. CLEMENT DE LION was at Keith's Columbia theatre, Cincinnati, Oet. 23-29. CLIVETTE was showy at the Orpheum atthe same tune. Clivette at) Prin- cess, St. Louis, Oct. 31-Nov. 5. JARROW'S clever palming and breezy patter wins his audiences. At Keith’ s, Philadelphia, a few weeks ayo, he worked his) famous * lemon? and coin shifting trick on a young man ina box. When the shift was made the voungster was so angry that he threw the coin in Jarrow's face while the house gave him the laugh. WALDEN & Co., magicians, at Mexico, N. Y., Nov. 5, HARRY EE. Tirursron, brother of Howard Thurston, will manage the Younes Butfalo Bill Wild West next season. He has had considerable ex- perience in the amusement world, rising from ticket seller to special agent for Adam Forepaugh and Sells Bros.” Shows. Later he was business mana- ver for lus brother on the latter's trip around the world. He controls the Chicago Museum and other places of amusement in Chicago. At the Vietoria, Philadelphia, SARTELLA was on the bill, Oct. 24-29, with magic and crayon sketching,

Page 162

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Back Numbers of MAGIC VOLUME ONE READY BOUND IN CLOTH The first volume of Maaic can now be had neatly bound in cloth with title page and index. It con- sists of the first six numbers, Jan- uary to June, 1910, including the February number, ,GHOsts. Price, $1.00. SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and May is- sues remain. They can be had, as long as the supply lasts, for LO cents each. Complete your file before they are out of print. A Few Copies of the Only Number of GHOSTS Issued The second issue (February, 1910) of Macic was given the title of Guosts. A few copies remain and can be had for 15 cents, while they last. CONTENTS- —The Sphinx Riddle of Humanity—-Spectral lusions—Thread- Ing the Mazes—An Afternoonin A Mag- ical Library—-How L Became A Spirit Medium. MAGIC _ THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER Cover in four colors. Colored frontis- piece and 19 illustrations. Most unique mavazine ever issued. F.’T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3619 Thompson Avenue Kansas City, Mo.

Page 163

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 42 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS $25.00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A ¥25 course in *'Expert Billiard Ball Manipulation,’ as given at the ieading New York Magical Studio. 100 Tricks and Sleights. 200) Beautiful Photographie Hlustrations, 56 Original Tricks. 35,00) Words of Expert Instruction. Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lesard Shin Linish Art Covers, Gold Titles, SUR Bound. Most beautiful, untque and. ar- tistic Mystery Volume yet produced. Price $1.00, postpaid. BURLING HULL CO., 393 4th St., Brooklyn, N.Y. The Leading British Magical Monthly Maga: I H E WIZA RD vine. Now in the fifth vear of its success. PRA- TURES—\ guinea trick inevery number. Bright chatty gossip. Humorous patter, Valuable article ‘sand interesting news itemsfrom all parts of the world. Profusely ilustrated. Official organ of th: OMagie Circle.” 6d 2c). postpaid to any partol the world. Subscription. 5 | - 68.20) per annum. or 2 | ote! for 6 months. WIZARD PUBLISHING COMPANY, 4, Duke S.reet. Adelphi. London, W.C.. England, ‘Something Different’’ This is the question invariably asked bs the modern magician in his quest for new material In his chosen profession, His insatiable thirst for more Knowledge Csomething: new) iso re: sponsible for the wonderful advancement of the Artin recent vears. Hi vou really want somethings new, novel and practical vou should orde ‘rat once The Book of the Year, SOME MODERN (¢ “ONIJURING. by Donald Holmes. A Series of Original Fx- pernments in the Magic Art. Contains the explanations of more REAL TRICKS than ans book twice its size. Not a single space filler. Tricks with Watches. Rings. Elan dkerehiels. Flags. Dice, ete.. lucidiy ex platned. Ob interest to prote ssional or amateur alike. Printed on fine paper, with elegant harlt- tone cuts. Something different in every respect. DONALI) HOLMES Box 3251, San Angelo, Texas. 9 T eet for Professional and Amateur . | L L U S | O N | S Magicians. Theonly Magical Miaua- ane printed in the French Language. Published Monthtyv. Tlustrated. Nonual subscriptions, 8 franes tSt.60). Sample copy. 75 centi- mes (15 cts.) Editor, CAROLY. 20 Boulevard St. Germain, Paris. Fr. Edited bv Will Goldston. A I he Magician Monthly journal forall interested in Mavic and Mystery. In its sinth year of success. Vanual subsoription., SE05. Sample copy. fects. Foreien stamps not accepted in payment. THE MAGICIAN. Ltd... 6 Robin Hood Yard. London, E. C. ™~ (London, Eng.) The pioneer of Conjuring Magazines. Its tenth stccessiul vearol publication, Oldest, brightest. best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians, The recognised Journal of the professional magician. Features every month—Original lessons in) Magic. being iNustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage tHusions, Fx planatory programmes of prominent magicians, showing the order of tricks presented. with ap explanation of cach trick. ete. Sample cops. 6 F 2d 5 cts’ Pwelve months. 5 [6 (St 50, Table of Contents of the ten volumes mailed free. American stamps and Dollar netes ac- cepted, NSPANYON & CO... 76 Solent Road. West Hampstead. London, NW... England. THE SPHINX A Monthly Magazine for Amateurand Professional Magicians. Tells vou more about magic than any magazine published. News letters from corres pondents in oall parts of the world areaspeciil feature. Sta vear. Single copies. 1c, ALM. WILSON, MDL. Publisher, 906 Main St.. Kansas Citv, Mo.

Page 164

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Professionals of Note and Amateurs of Distinction Are Reading “Wrinkles” and Each is Discovering Suggestions of Value, as well as Innovations Which Open New Fields in Con- juring, There is No Padding ~TFhere is No Junk—-There are No Dreamy Impossibilittes. Can you afford to neglect your education when the sum which stands between you and enlightenment is 50 cents. Ask - any Reliable Dealer for “Wrinkles” or the Publishers, The Bailey & Tripp Co. 16 Inman St., Cambridge, Mass. We have for quick sale the outfit of “Baker.” This was once the property of “Charles Curtis Dunbar,’” supposed to be the best private collection of Magical Apparatus in this coun- try. Also the entire stock of the Silvey and Budgen Co. Both lots, as they are, must be sold for cash at once. We offersame on our Bargain Sheet No. 28, which will be sent FREE. Catalogue No. 27 FREE, The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 years) Always exclusive features, to be had only of us. e¢ ad , : , If its Leroy’s, its the best.’ “Magician Annual,’’ Nos. | or 2, each, $1.25: No. 3, #2. “‘Mayician’s Book of Patter,’’ 50ce. ‘‘Red Demon's Fire Book,’’ 50c. Goldston’s ‘“Tricks and [llusions,’’ $1.50. Selbit’s ‘‘Books of Patter,’’ Nos. |} and 2, each, 35c. “Some Modern Conjuring,” 31. Send *2 for our ‘‘Svenyalt’ Pack and ‘‘Mene-tekel’’ Pack. These cards surpass anything ever put out. “T consider they surpass anvthing T have ever seen and are easily worth 35 a pack.’ —Max HoLpen. Send 10c for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists: 50c¢ for 212 pave II- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Mawicians When writing to advertisers. kindiy mention M vGic

Page 165

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS LEARN TO KN TERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. lire eater Results yuaranteed with our Magic Tricks and IHus- ions. We sell only the best Tricks and the ones. that are easy to perform, and that require no- skill. All our directions are plain and Exploding matches In most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manu- facturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and [Hlusions in the aa world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station New [laven, Conn, Anarchist (stink) hombs Card Jevititton Neral stuspenston Vhe caldronm ilision When writing to advertisers, Kindly mention Macc

Page 166

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER : ‘3 v4 oa 4 “ee 7S JF CHRISTMAS 1910 PRICE 25 CENTS _ Eze ee JANUARY ILYIT PRICE 10 CENTS 4 ;

Page 167

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Hamley Bros., Ltd. Hamley’s Special Conjuring Table To meet the demand. we have just introduced a specially cheap line in Tables. which we feel sure will give great satisfaction, The top measures inehes in diameter, covered with splendid quality black cloth with border about 4 inches wide all round trimnmed with fanes gold silk braid and fringe. Phe legs are nicely made and are telescopic, making them very portable for traveling. Phe table can be raised or lowered toany height to suit the convenience i the performer. The legs when closed measure about 2) inches long. and for packing will las flat across the table. We are confident that these tables will have a great and lasting sale. and we are oftering Chem to ourcustomers ata nominal cost. Price S | 6 (82.04), Carriage to be paid on receipt. We have also a splendid selection of Table Legs without tops, as follows: Cheap Table Leys. 3] 6 (Sdet: Superior Nickel Plated Table Legs. Sf 082.040: Fancy Brass Table Leys. 15 | 6 tS3.724, The Wandering Jacks The four Jacks are taken out of the pack. laid fice upwards on the table: on each Jack three inditterent cards are dealt. the audience choose one pile, this is lefton the table in’ full view of everybody and the other three piles are returned to the pack: the latter Is now spread outon the table. the Jacks have vanished. and on turning over what appeared to be one Jack and three inditterent cards, thes are tound to be the four Jacks. Price 1] (240). Post free 1) |. LONDON BRANCHES 45. New Oxford Street. London. W. C.. England Sloa and 512. Oxford Street. W, 29, Ludwate Hill, BoC. 2AWand 202. Regent Street. W. 59. Knivhtsbridge. S. W. SY and 87. High Holborn, W.C. CHead Warehouse) ENTERTAIN YOUR FRIENDS AT HOME There is no greater gift on earth than to be able to entertains How many times have you seen aclever Magician, and was mystified with his perform- ance cand the thought came to you, how | wish that I was clever! We offer the solution, You can be as clever. We offer the Greatest. Card) Pack for performing clever tricks ever invented. You require no skill at all. Kull in- structions are sent for performing an entire evening, No sleight of hand manipulation necessary, vou get the pack of cards, read the instructions, and in five minutes you will be able to entertain as clever as a professional Mavieian, THE LANIGIRO CARD PACK Price complete with all tastructions, S100, Cards can be told) by mind reading, Cards are made to rise at command. Cards selected appear in vour pocket. Cards placed in pack are made to appear at top of pack at will of the performer, A COMPLETE ENTERTAIN MEN EOF MYSTERY, SEND ORDERS TO Bamberg Magic Company 1193 Broadway, New York Send for our big Catalogue. 600 Tricks, 10 cents. When writthg to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC es ; . Serial Suspension The catldron ilusion ' When writing to advertisers, Kind) mention Mace

Page 168

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 43 MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Bigyest and best catalogue of high Kradc magical goods sent postpaid for 25c, Maxi cian’s Headquarters in America. Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship, being famous for solid quality The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will wreaths please everyone, A heavy brass cap is given for thoroughexami nation. In the cap is a small hole, go inw right through it. Three See be coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im mediately, only two coins are left. Nosleight of hand, Can be performed at once by any- one, Price, complete, $1. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue. New York. Learn Stunts in MAGIC You don’t know what you are missing if you are not in the Magic Game. A few GOOD mice with Cards, Coins, etc., carefully practiced and rehearsed, will af- ford a lot of entertainment, and the cost is small. Better send for my new “‘loose-leaf’’ Catalog of HIGH CLASS CONJURING TRICKS Practical tricks only. It’s free. Special attention paid to Amateurs. Satisfaction guaranteed. DONALD HOLMES Box 315, San Angelo, Texas “Only Magic-Craft Shop in the Great Southwest When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MaGcic JANUARY IYII PRICE 10 CENTS er

Page 169

44 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Boston _ School of Magic (Established over QQ) vears) The “Invisible Aeroplane,’’? Handkerchief Trick, complete, $10.00, Finest Nickel Pedestal, to appear a silk in glass tum- bler, complete, $7.00. Hatton and Plate’s “Magicians Tricks,” S175. Tlalley’s “Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ $1.00 and SI. 15. Goldston’s “Young Conjuror,”’ $50 and SL.00. Goldston’s More Tricks and Puzzles,” $.60. Expert Billiard Ball Manipu- lation, St.00. Medrington’s “Magician's Book of Patter, $50. Barnello’s ““Red Demons,’ Fire King Book, $.50. “Satan Out- done,” New Marvelous Card Principle, $1.00, Leroy's “"Cag- hostro’” Card Trick, any pack used, $.50. Send l0c for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50c for 212 page H- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Magicians One Hundred Best Tricks For Amateurs The January number of MaGcic will contain) the first installment of ten of aoseries of one hundred of the world’s Lest tricks for amateur magicians, to run every: month during the vear, This first ten will be viven over to card tricks that can be done witheut sleight of hand, and will be profusely dlustrated by reproductions from: phote- vraphs. Many of the tricks te appear in this series are new and have never been printed before. At all the leading newstands, or of the publisher, for LO cents When weitine to advertisers, Kindly mention Maaie - se ig : ACTION SUS eH STON Phe caldron iilusion When writting to advertisers. Kindly tention Mavc@e

Page 170

MAGIC THRE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 9 CONTENTS FOR DECEMBER, 1910 Magical Sunthower design on cover used by courtesy of United Ransas Porthind Cement Company. manufacturers of Suntlower Porthand Cement, TIE ROMANCE OF MAGICAL COLLECTING Hlagkry Plouptin 47 Hlustrations from old bills, programmes and lithographs in the collection of the author, OUR NENT PRESIDENT (ROBERTSON- KEENE) 33 iustrations from photovraphs. Tllk ITAND }ienry Ripgeny Evans 355 Iustration from a photograph. THE FLYING CARD PIPS ERNEST EVANGELINE 38 Ilustrations from photographs. — A MONTH OF MAGIC (2 ADELAIDE HERRVANN'S NEW ACE THE NOVELEY EN PERTAINERS THRE VENTRILOOUISES THE LIGHTENING ARTISTS LONDON PROGRAMME OF CARTER THE GREAT PROGRAMME OF RAMESES THE SHADOW WORLD WHEE THE BRAINSTPORMERS Copyright. P10, by BoP. Sinwleton, MaGie is published on the first of every month except July and August by bk. PT. Singleton, 3619 Phompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S.A, VEARLY SUBSCRIPTIONS, S1.00, Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single Copies, TO cents, ADVERTISING, 35.00 a page: smaller space proportionately. ADDRESS all business and editorial communteations to KF. oT. SINGLETON PUBLISHER Aly THOMPSON AVENUE, KANSAS CITY. MISsOURL Uos. A. JANUARY IYI PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 171

The Publisher Says The premier magical journal of the world! Going some, isn’t it? The best magical paper ever published, and out ahead of time, too! With this number Macic completes its first year. Ten numbers have been published, including the first and only issue of Guosts, the publisher being compelled to take a vacation in July and August. These two months will be skipped again next year, with another big spe- cial Christmas number thrown in for good measure. Of the ten numbers published during 1910, the best was reserved for the last, somewhat reversing the usual course of most new periodicals. This ought to augur well for the future of this one. Hereafter, Macic will contain 32 pages, or more, every month. Referring to the very complete magical news service now a regular feature of this paper, attention is called to the fact that I endeavor to give ALLthe news, with- out prejudice or personal criticism. Merit alone will get performers’ notices and pictures in the news pages. If you like this number, write what you think of it ona postal card and send it to me. Is it worth a cent? The January number will contain the world’s best card tricks for amateurs under the title, ‘“Ten Good Card Tricks Without Sleight of Hand.’’ Fully illus- trated. Other articles will be: ‘‘What Every Conjurer Should Know,”’’ the first of a series on standard sleight of hand; ‘tA First Lesson in Shadowgraphy;’’ ‘‘A Geometrical Jag,’’ a new and novel lightning sketch entertainment. Macic 1s coming into its own! FT. SINGLETON — ne ACTH SHSpCESTON Phe caldron tlusion When writing to advertisers, kind). mention Miva

Page 172

MAGIC VOLUME. I DECEMBER, 1910 NUMBER 9 The Romance of Magical Collecting By Harry Houdini HENRY EVANS EVANION From a lithograph in the collection of Harry Houdini JANUARY IVIL PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 173

48 MAGIC tainer from IS49 to the year of his death. For fifty years he spent every spare hour at the British Museum collecting: data bearing on his marvelous collection, and his interest the history HT ONLY! ' THURSDAY, Nov. 22nd. EVANS, | THE CABALISTIC PRESTIGITATOR, GREAT MODERN | AGICIAN, And EXPERIMENTAL >HILOSOP IN THE ASSEMBLY ROOM, ©...51 @hecquers Tavern Preston Street. > commence at SEVEN o’Clock.—Admittance, Is. > +, 2... | zs — - = . ‘ —- gq ONE OF EVANS EARLY POSTERS. 1849 From the only one in existence, Harrys Houdini collection, of magic was shared by his excellent wife, who conducted a “Sveet shop’? near one of London's public schools. While playing at the London Hippodrome in 1904 Twas con- fined to my room by orders of my physician. During this illness ie : 2 JeCCHH SOS DenSTOn Phe caldron idasion , When writing to advertisers. kindy mention Miva¢ie

Page 174

MAGIC 49 I was interviewed by a reporter who, noticing the clippings and bills with which my room was strewn, made some reference to my collection in the course of his article, The very day on which this interview appeared, I received from Henry Evanion a mere scrawl stating that he, too, col- lected programmes, bills, ete., 10 which I might be interested. I wrote at once asking him to call at one o'clock the next after- noon, but as the hour passed and he did not appear, I decided that, like many others who asked for interviews, he had felt but a pass- ing whim. That afternoon about four o'clock my physician sug- gested that, as the day was mild, I walk once around the block. As I stepped from the lift, the hotel porter informed me that since one o'clock an old man had been wait- ing to see me, but so shabby was his appearance, they had not dared send him up to my room. He pointed to a bent figure, clad in rusty raiment. When I ap- proached the old man he rose and informed me that he had brought some clippings, bills, etc., for me to see. ] asked him to be as expe- ditious as possible, for I was too weak to stand long and my head was a-whirl from the effects of la grippe. With some hesitancy of speech but the loving touch of a collector he opened his parcel. “T have brought you, sir, only a few of my treasures, sir, but if you will call-—" I heard no more. I remember only raising my hands before my eyes, as if I had been dazzled by a sudden shower of dia- monds. In his trembling hands lay priceless treasures for which I had sought in vain—original programmes and bills of Robert- Houdin, Phillippe, Anderson, Breslaw, Pinetti, Katterfelto, Boaz, ‘n fact all the conjuring celebrities of the eighteenth century, together with lithographs long considered unobtainable, and apts mood bm ane 1aep . THURSDAY and FRIDA *. p + eet * » Ss $ .. * } aoe I AN EVANION POSTER OF 1868 From the Harry Houdini collection “JAN UARY IYIL- PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 175

50 MAGIC EVANION ENTERTAINING A JUVENILE PARTY AT THE MANSION HOUSE, 1861 From a woodcut in The Tlustrated London News. Feb. 9, 184t. In the accompanying text the paper said: “On the evening of Tuesday week the Lady Mayoress entertained a juvenile partyat the Mansion House...) From half-past six till eight there was an exhibition of con: jJuring. in the Fgyptian Hall, by M. Evanion, followed by one of Marionettes in the saloon at intervals, and at nine Mr. Hilton aniused the company with a display of ventriloquism. Reproduced from a copy of the paper inthe collection of Harry Houdini. newspapers to be found only in the files of national libraries. I felt as if the King of England stood before me and I must do him homage. Physician or no physician, I made an engagement with him for the next morning, when I was bundled into acab and went as fast as the driver could urge his horse to Evanion’s home, a musty room in the basement of No. 12 Methley Street, Ken- nington Park Road, S. E. In the presence of his collection I lost all track of time. Oc- casionally we paused in our work to drink tea which he made for us on his pathetically small stove. The drops of the first tea which we drank together can yet be found on certain papers in my collection. His wife, asympathetic soul, did not offer to dis- turb us, and it was 3.30 the next morning, or very nearly twenty- four hours after my arrival at his home, when my brother, Theodore Weiss (Hardeen), and a thoroughly disgusted phy- siclan appeared on the scene and dragged me, an unwilling vic- tim, back to my hotel and medical care. a Ah ACTED SUSPOeCRSION The ealdron iitiasion When writting to advertisers. Kind) y mention M varie

Page 176

MAGIC 5] ~ 4 = & I a ee 6 Ft i a ee 2 +2 . Pas. *,. 2 ee ONE COLOR (BLACK) LITHOGRAPH USED BY EV ANION Size of original, ISNI5 inches. From the Harry Houdini collection Such was the beginning of my friendship with Evanion. In time I learned that some of his collection had been left to him by James Savren, an English barber, who was so interested in magic that at frequent intervals he dropped his trade to work without pay for famous magicians, including Dobler, Anderson, Compars Herrmann, De Liska, Wellington Young, Cornillot, and Gyngell. Krom these men he had secured a marvelous col- lection, which was the envy of his friendly rival, Evanion. Sav- ren bequeathed his collection to Evanion, and bit by bit I bought it from the latter, now poverty stricken, too old to work and physically: failing. These purchases I made at intervals when- ever IT played in London, and on June 7th, 1905, while playing at Wigan, I received word that Evanion was dying at Lambeth Infirmary. After the show, I jumped to London, only to find that cancer of the throat made it almost impossible for him to speak intel- ligibly. 1 soon discovered, however, that his chief anxiety was for the future of his wife and then for his own decent burial. When these sad offices had been provided for, he be- JANUARY IYIL- PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 177

52 MAGIC came more peaceful, and when I rose to leave him, knowing that we had met probably for the last time, he drew forth his chiefest treasure,a superb book of Robert-Houdin’s programs, his one legacy, which is now the central jewel in my collec- tion. Evanion died ten days later, June 17th, and within a short time his good wife fol- lowed him into the Great Un- nown. EpIroRIAL NOTE—The foregoing contribution is one of the most inter- esting chapters in| Harry Houdini's famous book, ‘’The Unmasking of RK obert-Houdin.”"” We are permitted to reprint it here through the courtesy of the publishers, Messrs. Geo. Rout- ledge & Sons, New York. Houdini very kindly loaned the original post- ers, programmes, etc., from = which the illustrations were made and they appear here for the first time. Mr. Houdini practically supported Mr. and Mrs. Evanion the last few vears of their lives, and raising a fund for Mrs. Evanionafterher husband's death, doubled out of his own pocket the total amount raised. Among the other contributers to this fund were: Harry Davy, Hardeen, Phil Doreto, Hackenschmidt, Maskelvne & De- vant, Max Sterling. Mrs. Evanion did not long survive her husband, and both are sleeping peacefully togetherin the quiet Lam- beth Cemetery, Tooting. Mrs. Evan- ion died March 10, 1906. One of Mr. Houdini's most valued treasures is a letter from Mr. R. Evans, nephew of Mr. and Mrs. Evanion, written just after her death. At the close of this letter to Mr. Hou- din, Mr. Evans says: ‘I enclose a memorial card and thank you once more for all vour kindness to the poor old couple, and feel assured that you will receive the reward which alwavs in) some = indetinable GREENWICH SOCIETY For the Acquisition and Diffusion of Usefal Kaowiedgs, ROYAL HILI. GREENWICH. WUVYENILE NiuGut. On TUESDAY EVENING, JAN. 3, 1882, M. EVANION BWald your, om the Latl Of the abc Bi evety. Ade unique Eolertasnavat, eater: Ta which be will introduce »ome wonderful Expenments in NATURAL MAGIC. ——_~s§e THIS NOVEL PROGRALUIE Ie asraaged with 5 sine bo tnberet ani anus all with ul setraleciag anything bo whub the nset fastehuus prreme could yeh inte: -1ecag — Inimitable Recreations, Magical Illusions, Enchantments, Cabalistic Surprises, Singular Developments, Amazing Deceptions and Transformations. & OELECTioN WILL BA OIVEN PROM THK FOLiV WINGO — PRESTIDIGITATION, THE WONDERFUL GOLDPIM ILLUSION. LES CARTES SYMPATHIQUES. THE ARABIAN SWORD FEAT. THE NOVEL AUTOMATON, OR ANIMATED FIGURE. VEN TRILOQU ISM iptredecing a Laughable tatertade of the Mesmeric Bead. FHE FELEGRAPHIC BACCHUS, MODEKN MYSTICISM. The National Standard. A CBLEBRATEBD HINDOO FBAT Bineteenth Century Boromotion. NOVEL LEGERDEMAIN. AROUN -EL- RASHID’S WATCH. Lz Gant Voracrur anv Farturct. Restitution. EVANION here, EVANION thee, and EVANION cverywhere! EVANION'S Souvenirs to his Patrons. The WONDERS OF ALADDIN,. and CHRISTMAS TRE Non-Memberu Gd. ON TUESDAY, JANUABY THE iota, The CREMONA MUSICAL UNION Wil) give o VOCAL AND INSTRUMENTAL OORCERT @ 8 @erhcreen, Girem Preating Worts, Gvemrsich AN EVANION BILL OF (882 From the Harry Floudini collection Members Free. way seenis to follow the performance of a good action and vice versa.”" Magic needs more men like Harry Houdini! The bill shown on page 48 is a programme of the first date Evanion ever plaved. He wrote the date on it himself. “Pwo other programmes of Evan- ions in the collection of Mr. Houdini, not shown, are dated [867 and 1874. The caldron iiluaston SETI SUS eS On When writing to advertisers. Kindly mmention MaAaGgie

Page 178

MAGIC Our Next President A Sensational ‘Thought Reading ‘Trick wallLL magic seems to be divided into three parts; card | tricks, handkerchief tricks and billiard ball tricks. wi Fora ‘change let us get on the magical merry-go- #t round and see what old stunt we can dish up for our ¥ Christmas entertainment. Running rapidly through some of the books in our magical library for an inspiration, our glance falls on Mr. Robertson- Keene's explanation of his brilliant version of the following ex- cellent trick. That itis a good one we have Mr. Keene's word that he has found it a trump card on many occa- sions. The effect 1s great and difficult to fathom. EFFECT— Performer comes forward with a sheet of paper which is quite unprepared and may be even supplied by audience. This he clivides in- to six strips, and requests the spectators to give him the names of six likely candi- dates for our next President. As they are called performer writes them down one on each slip. These slips being duly folded and mixed up are laid upon a tray ina heap, and one is selected by a member of the audience, who retains it without opening it. An ordinary envelope is now shown, and freely examined. A length of tape, having at right angles to it a similar length of tape, is now placed under the flap of the empty envelope, which ts then fastened down by audience —1n the manner shown in Fig. 1—with the central tape hanging from point of flap, The two ends of tape on either side are tied upon hooks, or in the case of a drawing-room performance, the backs of two chairs may be used, thus suspending the envelope in the atr. Meanwhile the remaining five slips are destroyed beyond re- call, by being torn into shreds and burnt up. This of course pre- cludes any possibility of performer learning name of candidate chosen from the remaining five slips. He now requests several of the spectators to come forward, and giving the loose end of the hanging tape to the one who wv we FIG, 1 JANUARY IYI1 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 179

fa MAGIC chose the slip, he requests the remaining spectators who have volunteered to join hands round, he himself completing the circle by taking the disengaged hand of the gentleman who ts holding the tape. I said completing the circle, but this is scarcely correct, as the circle is broken by the aforesaid gentleman who holds the tape and only joins the circle with one hand. FIG. 2 Nothing taking place, this latter gentleman ts requested to complete the circuit by jomning his hand to that of the person next him, still holding the tape. No sooner has he done so than a violent shiver convulses the performer, who drops the hands which he is holding, and rapidly rolling up his sleeve he shows written in thick red letters upon his arm the name of the candi- date selected (Fig. 2). The hanging envelope is cut down by one of the spectators, and upon being opened, it is found to contain a photograph of the identical candidate whose name is upon performer's arm, and when the chooser unrolls his slip of paper this is found to be exactly the man selected, EXPLANATION-—Readers acquainted with the ‘dodge’? will of course know at once that instead of writing the names given by audience, the performer cheerfully scribbles on each slip alike the name of the man whose name he has arranged to appear, so that whatever slip is taken the result is precisely the same. Very little difficulty will be found in getting the correct name pe ! aa "3 a oe re’ Os | DUS PERSO The caldron tlusion When writing to advertisers. Kind)y mention M vie = i \ | | '

Page 180

MAGIC 55 given. Itaus almost a certainty that the name of Roosevelt or Gaynor willsooner or later be given by someone in the audience. One of the shps betng selected, the remainder are torn up and burnt, ostensibly for destroying the last chance of the per- former discovering the candidate selected; really it prevents anyone, by accident, discovering that all the names were alike. All the operations with the envelope are quite dona tide, ex- amination, sealing, ete., except that in going to take the envel- ope from audience the tape is coiled up in the lett hand with the sealed envelope on top, in turning round to affix it to hooks or chairs the free hand takes from vest another envelope pre- pared in exactly the same manner, and with the proper photo- graph inside: this envelope is kept well in’ front of the body, until the hand, which ts holding the legitimate envelope in full view of the spectators all the time performer's back is turned, during his return to table or stage, crosses to the front of the body, ostensibly placing it tn the other hand, which tn turn holds it out from body in full view of the audience. Phis ts made necessary, apparently, to allow of the pertormer moving away achatr, ete., upon that side of hin, or to arrange chairs for attaching envelope to. What really happens is that the legitimate envelope is vested, Immediately it comes in front of the body, the dupheate being extended in opposite hand, and then, later oh, hung ino mid- air, this being the reason for coiling the tape. The rest of the trick is simply a matter of Veffect,”” and act- ing, except for the writing upon the arm, which is of course produced by the prosaic means of writing it there beforehand with red ink or paint. To understand and appreciate the effect of this trick, it needs actually to be witnessed. The Hand By Henry Ridgely Evans “Ttis to the band. that uastrament of instruments. that man owes all his dexterity.’ — Ropert- Houbpin, i Wik hand is the most perfect instrument of the will. Fortune tellers regard it as an index of character, and claim to read in the lines of the palm, the char- 4 acteristics and temperament of a person, aye, even Eo eS events in one’s past lite! Among the ancient Eevptians the hand was the symbol of strength. The Romans regarded it as an emblem of honor and justice. We speak of the Hand of Justice, the Hand of Fate, ete. Among the philosophi- JANUARY 1YI1 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 181

Ab MAGIC cal Greeks, the open hand was the symbol of cloquence, and the closed hand that of argument. Phe Pope blesses the tarthtul by extending over them the thumb, the tndex and second fin- gers, thus representing the LLoly Trinity. Students of the occult hike Kliphas Levi, have shown that the very same symbol also re- presents devil Principle, or the Goat of Mendes, according as the back or front of the hand is exhibited. No observation is more frequent on the tongue of the uniiti- ated than the following: 7" Phe quickness of the hand deceives the eve.” This as tor the most part a fallacy, asevery mayician knows, Ttis not the swiftness of the hand that leads the eye astray, but the perfect imitation of some natural movement that brings about the deception, and that movement may be as slow - ly executed as the pace of a snail or the tortuous locomotion of a tortoise, Forexample: the conjurer takes a dollar i= his neht hand and to all appearance places it tn his left hand, the fAnvers of which close over the comm. Tle then blows upon the left hand, or pronounces some mystic word like léracadabra, and upon opening the hand, the astonished spectators discover that the money has melted away inte thin aw.’ The opera- tion has been performed with the most extreme deliberateness; no hurry; no shuttle-cock business: no fantastic parade of dex- terity on the art of the prestidigitator, Simply a natural move- ment, and the eve is completely deceived. What really takes place is the following subtle sleight: the magician only pretends to place the dollar ino his lett hand. In the movement of the right hand towards the left, he presses the coin in the palm of the right hand, holding it securely between the thenar and hypothenar muscles. During the passage his ttogers naturally turn over, and the back of his right hand masks the sletght from the spectators The performer follows the movement with his eves, Which adds to the dluston, and) after sufficient time has elapsed, shows that the com has vanished. So much tor the tal- lacy that the hand ws quicker than the eye in conjuring tricks. As Robert-Houdin says, and he was the past master of the psy- chology of legerdemain: “Prestidievtation seems toimply, from its etymology, that itis necessary to have nimble tlagers in or- der to produce the ilustons of magic, which is by no means true. A conjurer is not a jugeler; he i anactor playing the part of amavtetans; anartist whose fingers have more need to move with deftness than with speed. Pmay even add that where sleight of hand is involved, the quicter the movement of the performer, the more readily will the spectators be decetved. The conjurer claims to possess supernatural powers: he holds im his hand aowand the might of which nothing can resist. Why then should he need, in order to work his wonders, to exaggerate the oe SS 2 a ae 0s ee The ealdron iluston Wien writing to advertisers. Kindly tnenmtion M vie

Page 182

MAGIC BY] quickness of his movements 7 Such a mode of proceeding: ts logical and inconsistent. Ino view of gestures of unusual rapidity, the spectators will be generally bewildered, puzzled, but not convinced, while, on the other hand, an easy, quiet A taf HOWARD THURSPTON'S HANDS manner will always induce confidence, and) so promote tl- fusion.” There is another observation made by Houdin, which isa facet, although I have seen many exceptions to this rule. But “‘the exception always proves the rule ois an old adage. Fo quote Houdin: “It has been remarked by a celebrated observer that ‘the dexterity of the fingers is in) inverse proportion — to therr length.” Notice, my dear reader, henceforth all the fin- gers of your acquaintance; sce how they accord with the say- ing I have just quoted, and you will admit that it ts strictly correct.’ Short fingers mean a large palm, as a rule. It would be an in- teresting study to collect pictures of the hands of celebrated performers. ] give illustrations of the hands of Robert-Houdin, Alexander Hermann, Vo Nelson Downs, and I. Trewey. Trewey excells in shadowgraphy —easting silhouettes of animals and hu- man facesupon an illuminated screen. In this art, “dexterity is largely dependent upon the formation of the hand; one of the particular characteristics of skillfulness being the faculty of JANUARY IYI PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 183

58 MAGIC reversing the metacarpal phalanges of the fingers, so that when the hand isextended it is convex.” Trewey possesses this facul- ty. Another peculiarity of his hands ts the formation of the fingers: they differ very much in length. Phe middle finger ex- ceeds the ring-finger by nearly an inch, The hands of Alexan- der Herrmann were aristocratic and gracctul, and he was proud of them. The fingers were long, forming an exception to the rule laid down by Houdin. Harry KRellar's hands are the hands of “a worker in brass and other metals’ like Tubal Cain. Without exception Kellar has the strongest hands and wrists ] have ever seen. Insome former incarnation he was doubt- less a gladiator. Ino setting-up his idlustons he could do the work of two stage assistants. [Lis powerful wrists enabled him to stand a tremendous strain in the rope-tying tricks of the Davenport) Brothers. Houdini, the handcuff king, has powerful hands and wrists, but with all he possesses a delicate touch and handles cards beautifully. “TL Nelson Downs has wonderful hands. As a manipulator of coins he is the peer of the profession. Says Chicot: “Herrmann was once considered the most skillful palmist, but in his particular line Downs tar exceeds himin point of skill and artistic finish.’ Fpirortan NoTeE—Owing to the fact that this numberof MAGIC was out somewhat carer than was orivinally planned. several photographs intended tor Mr. Evans’ article bad toe be lett out. not baving been recemved. Phev will appear in future issues, The Flying Card Pips By Ernest Evangeline PPE problem in this trick is to paste a blank playing yy] card on a slate, have several cards, freely drawn by @s the spectators, put into an envelope and retained feby one of them, and then invisibly transpose some é of the pips on the cards to the blank card on the slate, which is held by another spectator, wrapped ino a news- paper, A toreing pack of four different cards will be required to in- sure the selection of the foureards to be used. One set of these four cards must have some of the pips caretully cut out with sharp knife as shown in Fig. tb. The large ace of spades was originally printed in open work destyn on the cards but Linked all in the forcing pack solid black to heighten the effect. The choice of cards and pips for this trick depends on those con- tamedin the forcing pack, unless they are assorted to order. A trick slate with a flap will also be required. IT used the frame of a small single slate, substituting rather heavy black cardboard for the slate, and a black cardboard flap, covered a SUB echh SUR grt ba macans ae The ca'dron iilhusion When writtne to advertisers, kindly. mention Mvaie —_

Page 184

MAGIC et, with newspaper on one side, to just fit snugly inside the frame. The slate is prepared by pasting (by the corners only, to avotd warping) a blank card in the center of one side, on which the cut out card pips have been pasted in scattered fashion. The black cardboard flap is fitted Gt should fit just snug enough to BIG. 1 prevent it from falling out easily, but so that a slight rap will dislodge it) in over the prepared card with the black side ex- posed, and the slate is ready for use. Fig. 2 shows the slate, prepared card and the flap with a duplicate blank card pasted on. This duplicate blank card is not pasted on, however, till later in the trick. The set of cards from which the several pips. have been cut must be placed in a dup- licate of the envelope to be used, sealed, and placed on top of several sheets of news- paper lying on the table. A piece of newspaper, cut just a trifle larger than the envel- Ope, 1s now put on top of the prepared envelope, conceal- ing it from view. The pre- pared slate can be also placed on the newspapers, just in front of the envelope. An empty envelope and a blank playing card are left lying on the table where they can be seen by the audience. The four cards are now selected by the spectators. A good way to use the forcing pack with safety is to have the sides. of all the cards but three shaved off slightly. The three wide cards FIG. 2 JANUARY IYI PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 185

60 | MAGIC ean then be put back in the pack between each of the four different lots. The pack can then be fanned out in sections easily marked by the wide cards, which are just wide enough to be felt, but not seen. The first spectator 1s of- fered acard from the first sec- tion, and the fourth man gets one from the bottom, ete. The four cards are left fora moment in the possession of the spectators while the per- former retires to the table, places the rest of the pack on itand advances with the emp- ty envelope. The four cards selected are collected and placed deliberately in the en- velope by the performer, who returns to the table and lays the envelope right on top of the piece of newspaper cov- ering the other envelope con- taining the prepared cards. The slate is then picked up with the blank card which ts pasted on the slate (on the flap) in plain view of the spectators. The slate is wrapped up in a sheet of the newspaper on the table. In) clearing the table preparatory to doing this, the envelope is moved to one. side, and in the doing of this both envelopes and the piece of news- paper between them are picked up and put aside on another part of the newspaper, reversed, with the the prepared envelope uppermost. Before wrapping the slate the flap must be dropped off on one of the extra sheets of newspaper. The underside of the flap being covered with newspaper, it will not be detected if care has been taken in pasting to extend the newspaper over so that it will completely conceal the black edges of the card- board. The slate can be tied with cord after wrapping, and it Is just as well to do this to prevent any premature exposure of the slate beforetime. Giving the slate to a spectator to hold up ino plain sight, the envelope (the prepared one now being visible on the table) is handed to another. The rest of the newspaper on the table can be folded up and put away with the slate flap and original envelope safe inside. The trick can be concluded to suit. A pistol shot can be used, or some saner and more modern substitute, to mark the mo- FIG, 3 ~ UU Reh k SURE U TEC The caldron tilusion When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGic

Page 186

MAGIC Ol ment of transposition, When the wrapping on the slate is torn off and the envelope opened, the card pips scattered over the previously blank card are found missing from the four cards in the envelope. Fpirortan Nork—The original suggestion for the foregoing trick came from “Some New Maggies by J. BF. Burrows, Magicians’ Tricks: How They Are Done © A Valuable New Conjuring Book MAGICIANS’ “PRICKS: How THEY ARE DONE. By Henry Hatton and Adrian Plate. Over 250 illustrations, Price, 31.60 net: postage, 12 cents. “The Century Co., New York. SHIS is the best of books for amateur magicians, and Wi) indeed tor any person, young orold, who wants to ‘| entertain a company in a novel and ‘dehehent fash- ie j ion. Here are instructions, clear, simple, definite ae 4 —-telling how to perform successfully tricks with- out number, tricks with cards, tricks with handkerchiets, tricks with coins, with balls and eges, paper tearing, and so on; de- scribing fully many kinds of ‘passes’? and “changes; "’ telling all about shuffling, dealing, and forcing cards, and all about palming, ete., ete. Nothing ts left to chance or guess work. The amateur ts told how to provide his clothes with the necessary secret pockets, how to manage the servante, the use of the wand, and, in fullest detain, the equipment for every trick and just how the finished result is to be obtained tothe complete mystification of the on- looker. The secrets of many old favorites are revealed; and there are many new and novel effects, gathered by the authors, Henry Hlatton and Adrian Plate, through their years of amateur and professional experience, in this country and abroad. There are scores of illustrations making the clear, helpful text clearer and more helptul. Young folks—and folks not so young ~will find a great fund of pleasure tn tits book, From the authors’ foreword: “Phere is a distinet fasemation about conjuring not easy tounderstand. In the many years that we, the writers of these papers, have practiced the art, we have known many men and some women, who took it up for pleas- ure or money, or both, and we have never known one to lose Interest m it. That ‘the hand j Is Ss quic ker than the e ye, is one of those ac- JANUARY IYLI PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 187

62 MAGIC cepted Sayings invented by someone who knew nothing of con- juring —or, as is more likely, by some cunning conjurer who aimed still further to hoodwink a gullible public. The fact. 1s, that the best conjurer seldom makes a rapid) motion, for that attracts attention, even though it be not understood. The true artist in this line is deliberate ino every movement, and it is mainly by his actions that he leads his audience to look not where they ought, but in an entirely different direction. Mr David Devant ... . has said: “The conjurer must: be an actor, By the expression of his face, by his gestures, by the tone of his voice, tn short, by his acting, he must produce his effects. 7" A MONTH OF MAGIC All the Magical Iintertaining News Without Prejudice or Personal Criticism ACKNOWLEDGEMENT — Besides regular and special correspondents at New York, London, Boston, Philadelphia, Chicago and San Francisco, and occasional correspondents atbover dhe world. MAGIC S news service is obtained from the leading daily newspapers. and the theatrical and vaudeville press as represented by Phe Billboard. The New York Clipper, Variety. Phe Player and The Show World. Vad last. but pot least. from ourestecned contenmporary, Phe Mawical World. ACCURACY—The Publisher desires to make this magical news service dependable. and will be wrateful when his attention ts called to any misstatement of fact or errors of any kind. Abppress ALE CORRESPONDENCE to FB. TP. Sineleton. Pablisher, 36019 Phomipson Ave. Kansas City. Mow U.S. 4. ADELAIDE HERRMANN’S NEW ACT By Samuel Ro Schneider, MavGie’s Chief of Correspondents Those who imagine that magic is dead would change their views after having withessed the new act presented by Adelaide Herrmann, week of November 28, in New York, at the Vietoria theater. Hler act was the third on the program, reading: ADELAIDE THRERR MANN (Widow of Hlerrmann the Great) AS UCCAGLIOST RO THE MASTER OF MYNTPERTES Introducing her Latest and Greatest Plbustoms: “Phe Mvstie Tea Chest” “Elee trocution. Phe Phantom Bride and niany others, Unique Special Seeners and Light Ettects, She presented nearly an entirely new aet of illusions and magic, given ina very claborate stage setting, with her shapely self costumed as the modern "Cachostro” Mine. Herrmann made her appearance in male costume, and her departure scored an undoubted hit. The stage setting represents a carnival scone with beauty: predominating Po od 2 en red Chee eee ee) The caldron tilusion When writing to advertisers, Kind). mention MvGie

Page 188

MAGIC 63 everywhere. The two female attendants represent natives of China, and the two male attendants represent the famous Pierrots of the Old World. The four attendants enter the stage holding lanterns and take places in’ the cor- ners of the stage. Then comes Mme. Herrmann carrying a closed umbrella, accompanied by the usual orchestra fanfare. Artiste swings umbrella and it suddenly turns into a small table supported by an iron stand. ‘Then she throws a handkerchief over an apparently empty plate, and upon removing handkerchief, two pigeons fy frou the plate over the stave. The male attendants then bring ina large tea chest which is shown to be empty. Small cases of tea are poured into the large chest. “Lhe chest is then removed to rear of stave center, and closed. After do- Ing the usual magical passes with her wand, the lid of the chest. is opened and out comes a handsome young woman, This illusion is known as the ‘Mystic Tea Chest,’ and is a dandy. Next, a huge armchairis placed in the center ofstage. A lady takes a seat on chair and is strapped to it, and) covered with a= four-fold screen. Upon touching the bottom of the screen with her wand, Mine. Herrmann produces a great elec- tric flash, and when the screen ts opened to view, the chair is found vacant. “This illusion is ‘'Flectro- cution.,”” A small dummy, dressed, representing ‘‘Baby Mine,"" is then brought out and placed tn standing position on a chair. She undresses the dummy and places its clothes ona screen erected on back of stage, anda wind-mill, water, land and houses are produced on this screen by the arrangement of these clothes. Then, a lady dressed as a bride comes on the stage. She re- MME. HERRMANN AS “CAGLIOSTRO" moves her bridal veil, and lays down on what resembles a shelf which is situated on back of stage center. Mme. Herrmann then places a white sheet over her entire body. Slowly the covered form is seen rising into the air, without any means of suspen- sion, and remains there for a few seconds. She is then slowly lowered. Upon removing sheet, she has vanished. This illusion, ‘“Phe Phantom Bride,” is one of the greatest, if not the greatest, presented on the stage. After the act, [interviewed Mme. Herrmann, and asked her if she would sav just a few words to the magicians of the world, through the pages of ‘“MaGic.”’ To this she rephed, ‘‘l send them my compliments, and wish each and every one of them success for the coming new year."' Let me say here that credit for the act is also duc to her clever assistant, Mary Rolta.r, widow of the famous illusionist and creator of ‘'Creation,”’ which closed lately its sixth successful season at Dreamland, Coney Island. In conclusion, let me say, that her act was a big success and that she well deserves the title, ‘Queen of Magic * JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 189

64 MAGIC COUNT AND COUNTESS CHILO, mind readers, at the Princess, St. Louis, Oct. 3l-Nov. 5, LOLO, ‘‘manifestations of occult: power,” seems to be creating quite a sensation everywhere she goes. She is presented by her father, J. L. Cotton, and has been held over for a second week several times lately. ANNIE ABBOTT, mysterious act, atthe Wilson, Baltimore, Md., Oct. 31- Nov. 5. ANNA Eva Fay will be at Keith's Mary Anderson, Dec. 5-10. “Eva Fay,’’ mindreader, at the Arcade, Toledo, Nov. 7-12. I) AMON, mind reader at the State Street theater, Trenton, N. J., Nov. 7-12. ANNA Eva Fay opened the New Eimpress theater (formerly Avenue), East St. Louts, as the headliner, Nov. 6. THE NOVELTY ENTERTAINERS VALAZZI, a juggler who ts rapidly making his way up on the English music hall bills, returnedto the Empire, London, Oct. 31. ALBURTUS, jugyling, at the Majestic, Kalamazoo, Mich., Nov. 7-12. KASHIMA, Juggler, at Young's Pier, Atlantic City, Nov. 14-19, JACK ARK, diabolist, at the American, New Orleans, La., Nov. 14-19. Mrs. LERRY, formerly Carrie Monroe, the original paper tearing queen, recently entertained THE AHERNs, novelty equilibrists, when they were in Phocbus, Vt., recently. FRED ROWLAND is a European heavyweight juggler who works with every- thing thats loose on the stage. W. C. FIELps, famous comic juggler, is at the Circus Variety, Copen- haven, for a month. Hitpa, handcuff queen, at the Family, Elmira, N. Y., Nov. 14-19. THE GREGORYS' hoop rooling act was at the Palace, London, Oct. 31- Nov. 3. After finishing twenty weeks on S. & C. time, BoyLE Bros. will show their club juggling and hoop rolling act around Chicago for afew weeks. THE Ozavs, burlesque jugglers, opened at the Family, Buffalo, Nov 13. They will do twenty weeks onthe Loew time. THE Four MULLErs, jugglers and hoop rollers, put on a very strony act at the Lyric, Terre Haute, Ind., Nov. 21-20. JOHN ToMBLIN, Otterville, Ont., Canada, wants to know where he can get the figures for ‘‘Phe Babes in the Woods,’” a marionette show. The GREAT VENTO, handcuff expert, is in New York. GEO. TALLMAN succeeded in making a good act out of his exhibition pool playing at the American, New York, Nov. 14-19. Mirrors show the shots to cvery spectator mn the house. Pe eS red Cred CA Eee oa de) The caldron ilusion When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAaGic a ae ee eet

Page 190

MAGIC 65 BERTINI, handcuff king, at the Lyric, Dover, N. H., Nov. 7-12. KARLAND, handcuff king, at the Opera House, Palinvra, N. Y., Nov. 5. ZENTO, handcutf and escape expert, with his own company is: playing through Louisana and Texas. CUNNING, handcuff expert, at the Rapides, Alexandria, La., Nov. 5-6. ‘THE BRAMSONS, hoop rollers, at the Majestic, Chicayo, Nov. 7-12. THE ALPHAS, hoop rollers, atthe Orpheum, Denver, Nov. 7-12. FRANCIS Woob, hoop rolling and juggling, was on one of the recent twenty-two act bills at the American Music Hall, New York. IRWIN'S Punch and Judy atthe Ninth and Arch Street Museum, Phila- delplia, Nov. 21-26. THE CROMWELLS THE CROMWELLS, novelty jugglers from England, opened at the Presi- dent, Chicago, Nov. 21. Work done by a young lady with a lad as an assist- ant. Starts juggling with shuttlecocks and battledores and works up to heavier objects. At the finish, a bucket, a wash bowl, a mop, a plate and a shovel are kept in the air at one time. Expert diabolo spinner. Catches the Wheel from behind while skipping the rope. Balances a billiard cue on chin with two balls on top of it, and keeps a dust pan spinning on the handle of a duster with one hand and four ball going in the other. “Phe Jad helps out with the fun. Phey do lightning club work, too. The girl juggles two clubs with one hand and manipulates one club with the other, THE VENTRILOQUISTS GRACE WALLACE, ventriloquist, at the American, Davenport, Ia., Nov. 7-12. MARSHALL MONTGOMERY, ventriloquist, at Shea's, Buffalo, N. Y., Nov. 14-19. TROVOLLO, ventriloquist, at the American Music Hall, New York, Nov. 7-12. TRAVIS, ventriloquist, arrived back in England last month from Australia. NAN ACKER, ventriloquial sketch, at the Bijou, Bayonne, N. J., Oct. 3t- Nov. 35. THhk GREAT LESTER is back in New York from England. BARROW, ventriloquist, at the TPheato, Houston, Tex., Nov. 14-19, THE GREAT HOWARD rehearsed a new act with five people during his recent Chicago engavement. GREAT BARRINGTON, ventriloquist, at the Hopkins, Louisville, Ky., Nov. 7-12. Ep REYNARD, ventriloquist, at the Alhambra, New York, Nov. 14-18. GRACE DEWINTERS, ventriloquist, at the Majestic, Montgomery, Ala., Nov. 14-19. JANUARY IYI PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 191

6 MAGIC ALEX WILSON, ventriloquist, at Opera House, Rutland, Vt., Nov. 21-26. HILDA HAWTHORNE, ventriloquist, started around the Orpheum circuit at Spokane, Nov. 20, PROF. BROOKS, ventriloquist, at the Ninth and Arch Street Museum, Phil- adelphia, Nov. 21-26. A. O. DUNCAN, ventriloquist, at the Grand, Evansville, Ind., Oct. 3I- Nov 5, THe GREAT BURTON has had a new ventriloquial act written for him. Tht GREAT MORAN, ventriloquist, recently in Schenectady, N.Y. WILL ADAMS, musical ventriloquist, at the Maryland, Cumberland, Md., Nov. 7-12. The Silhouette dance promises to become the rage. First produced at the Palace, London, last month, it is on in New York and will soon be seen on all the big time soon. It makes a very novel act, weird but artistic. The dancer appears as a silhouctte—just) a black, mysterious figure in) flowing robes —and uses her arms with great effect. MAXINE WELLS, ventriloquist, at the Orpheum, Alliance, O., Nov. 14-19. Les F. Wibtson, at the Globe, Kansas City, Nov. 7-12.) Does re- markably well-executed poster car- toonsin colors upside down at light- ning speed. Also does a complete ail painting in full colors in’ three minutes. Made a big hit Saturday night by caricaturing a light haired “cut-up'’ who was leading acrowd of college boys in general merri- ment, at the expense of the au- dience, ina lower front box. Will certainly vet on the ‘“‘bhig) time™’ soon. CHARLES CREGIER, Chicago, has Invented a ventriloquial device that causes music to float about a thea- ter auditorium ina most mysterious manner. RIGOLE'PTO BROTHERS Now appeanny for the first time inAmerica. At the Majestic, Chi- cago, Nov, 14-19, They do musical juggling, Chinese magic and big LES FE. WILSON lusions, plastic poses and acroha- tic work. Conclude with work ona revolving ladder. Pronounced a wonderful act. Three assistants required to keep props moving. “On the Farm,” DAVE RAFAEL’S ventriloquial offering, is booked solid for the rest of the season. The caldron iilusion = ae Pee Ee 0 ed 5 Ped Ee Eee When writing to advertisers, Kindly mention Maar

Page 192

MAGIC 67 HORNMANN appeared on Hammerstein's Roof Nov. 14-19. Received fa- vorable mention in the ““New Acts’ reviews. Shows particular skill in palim- ing. Has a special drop. Good flag trick for close. Mrs. IMRO FOX now resides at 450 High Street, Newark, N. J. She will he pleased to see any of her late husband's friends, THe GREAT BARNELLI, black art act, at the Marvland, Cumberland Md., Now. 7-12. HORACE GOLDIN has a new illusion, Four bowls of water are placed on a stand and covered with a cloth. Vhey disappear when the stand is lifted and shaken. BeEston and his mayic stick at the New Nickelodeon, Boston, Nov. 24-26. HARRY Bouron AND Co., comedy magic, atthe Congress, Portland, Me., Nov. 7-12. ; MILDRED AND ROUCLERE in ‘“The Flyeht of the Princess I[ris,"’ at the Baldwin, Wellsville, Ne. ¥., Now. 4. BRUSH, magician, atthe Calumet theatre, Calumet, Mich., Nov. 4. THE GREAT ALBINI was at the Princess, Ft. Worth, Tex., Nov. 7-12. HERR JANSEN AND Co., tricks and illusions, at the Plaza, Nov. 14-16. Van Camp, burlesque mayic, at the Crescent, Schenectady, Nov. 21-26. THE LIGHTNING ARTISTS ALFRED JACKSON, poster cartoonist, will appearagainat Hammerstein's, New York, Dec. 12. ‘THE LELANDS, transparent paintings, at the Lyda, Chicago, Nov., 21-23. OLSON, Cartoonist, tried out at the Bush Temple, Chicago, Nov. 5. REOUBLE SIMS, comedy cartoonist, at the Walnut, Louisville, Ky., Nov. 21-26, JOHN ZAUBOULAKIS, Clay modeling, at the Orpheum, Newark, O., Nov. 14-19, LEO CARRILLO, Cartoonist, at the Bronx, New York, Thanksgiving week. HOWARD Dorson, clay modeling and smoke fantasies, at Rutland, Vt., Nov. 7-12. Mr. AND MS. STUART DARROW, artistic sand and shadow pictures, at the Orpheum, Brooklyn, Nov. 7-12. CHALK SAUNDERS, cravon drawings, at the Colonial, New York, Nov. 21-26, BE. A. BUSHNELL, cartoonist, at the Orpheum, Cincinnati, Nov. 21-26. First appearance in vaudeville. Hi GREENWAY closed the bill at the Lvda, Chicago, a few weeks ayo, with Ins juyyling and lightning sketch act. JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 193

OS MAGIC BERT LEvy, the famous cartoonist, arrived back in New York Nov. 20, from London. He appeared at Hammerstein's in his famous specialty. the following dav. He also assisted Mr. Hammerstein in arranging the artistic features of a silhouette dance at the Victoria. Mime. Heloise did the dancing. SARTELLE, at the Empire, Bridgeport, Conn., Nov. 7-12. LONDON PROGRAMME OF CARTER TITE GREAT CARTER THE GREAT appeared for the first time in’ England at the Pal- ace theater, Manchester, Nov. 7. Stave setting of green and crimson plush, five sinall tables and a center vlass-topped stand with small properties on them. Enters regular, without mystery or music. Commenced by taking up one of two decanters and a red silk handkerchief. Moving down to the foot- liehts he places the handkerchiel in the decanter he holds and without cover- inv, it vanishes to appear filling the decanter left: standing upon a distant table. From bran, sawdust, and paper cuttings he proceeded to extract coffee, cream, and sugar, poured out steaming hot and sweetened to taste. Stace then cleared and a trunk, traveling on a small isolated platform, was introduced. ‘The front was opened, the lid raised, glass sides and panels fixed within by atterdants, the whole closed up again acd wheeled entirely round. When the front is ayain allowed to fall, a lady is discovered within. The ‘spirit hand’ forms his next item. Then the back tableau curtains parted to disclose the distant stage draped in a dull setting of Indian striped pattern extending to the stage itself to form a partial carpet. In front of this lav a couch, Lady assistant nesmerised and carried rigid to the couch, From there she rises up bevond the height of the performer. Couch removed, Car- ter gets on chair to pass hoop over body. ‘The back curtains partially close again, and a trellis garden cloth fills the opening. A stand cabinet partly erected is wheeled toward the back and the remaining doors and roof are added. It is shown empty, but manifests the usual spiritualisic phenomena the instant the front panels are closed. Fora second the stave is in half-lights and a materialised ‘spirit’ face protrudes from an opening of the cabinet. Once more the curtains are drawn aside to reveal a cave cabinet, dis- plaved open on each side and shown empty. \ lady enters, gates closed and curtains drawn, A soldier opens the cabinet and steps out, while the lady is discovered in the audience. Cage is suspended in the air: she enters a duplicate cabinet and at command is transposed invisibly to suspended cage, The final item is a cleverly worked version ofthe familiar illusion, “Gone.” HANLON Bros., illusionists, at the Orpheum, Lincoln, Neb., Nov. 7-12. PRINCE ALBENE AND LEBRANDY, mnvstifving act. at the Family, Pitts- bureh, Now 7-12. ZISKA AND SANDERS were seen last month at Keenev’s Third Avenue theatre, New York. Cari HERTZ may return from Europe to tour this country after an) ab- sence of several vears. MYSTERICUS MOORE was recently tried out in New York for the United Booking Office. Presented about seven minutes of card tricks and. finished up with trunk mystery, Comedy patter while working. TO NEnSON Downs, “Ring of Coins,” at the National, San) Francisco, Nov. 14-19. The caldron tilusion When writing te advertisers, kind). mention M vate Ue EDGE ENP resets = ee ah ace

Page 194

MAGIC ‘) Rest Ling Toy, Chinese ilusionist, will work overthe Western Assoctia- tion tine antil next fully. Take KUMA FAMILY, magic, mystery and balancing, at the Maryland, Baltimore, Now. 7-12. WILSON AND WARNER, stoging, dancing and funny magic, at the Cres- cent, Schenectady, N.Y... Now. 10-12, THe GREAT ASAHE AND Co., Japanese magical water act, at the Orpheum, San Francisco, Nov. 21-26. The Four LA DELLS, Inagicians, are resting at their hame in Deeatur, Ind. Frederic La Delle is meeting with great success with his new book, ‘How to Footer Vaudeville.’ He ais conducting a correspondence course in connec- tion with the book. - FREDERIC ELMORE, magictan, is home in Lowell, Mass., fora few davs. POWELL AND COMPANY, magic and dlusions, at the Plaza, New York, Nov, 21-26, Wintiam Bo CatnK, the well known magical collector, enthusiast and correspondent of Terre Haute, Ind., is back in harness avaing He has lis date sheet well tiled with club, lodve and church contracts for the season. TWIN CVPY MAGICIANS At their last meeting, Phe Society of Pwin City: Mavicians elected the following officers for the coming year: DAVID B. STiFRT, president: F. EL. FoRD, Ist vice-president; ALC. Borsk, 2nd vice-president; FE. A. Me- CHESNEY, treasurer: J. J. BROWN, secretary. A banquet will be held at. an early date at the Rovers Hotel. ‘Piis lively society, organized about two vears avo in Minneapolis, holds monthly meetings which are verv successful. The president's address is 240) Lyndale Ave., Minneapolis, Minn. HENRY CLIVE AND MAL SreUrGis, are still making good with their funny magic around New York. They were atthe Orpheam, Brooklyn, Nov. 21-26, KUSSELL, comedy magician, was in New York a week ortwo age arrang- Inv fora new act. MANNIKINS IN A BLACK ART ACT At Hlamimerstein’s, New York, Nov. 21-26, SCHICHTLER'S MANNIKINS appeared tor the first time in Amenea. Phe artistic manipulation of the little fivures, and the beautiful miniature scenic effects and transformations won heavy applause. This act has no opentime in America until 19P2. A miniature “hlack art’ act was one of the features, introducing a skeleton nuannikin,. HARRY Moor, paper tearing, and ViILLiERS DE GASTON, magician, were among the newcomers on the bill at the Holborn Empire, London, Nove T4. THE STANLEYS, shadowgraphls, at the Savoy, Atlantic Citv, Nov. 21-26, KHALDAH, from the land of the lotus eaters, will soon puton a Svengali- Trilby mustery act. Mysto, at the Girard, Philadelphia, Now. 7-12. JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 195

70) MAGIC Last month, HARRY HoUupINI visited the old men at Muste Hall Home. England, and passed around tobacco, CHEFALO AND CAPRETTO, illusionists, will do the Enylish halls for the next few monthis. The Albany Club, of Albany, N. Y., were recently entertained by CARL STEVENSON, a wizard from Great Britian. HARRY SELLMANN ARRESTED HARRY SELLMANN complains that he was arrested for improper use of hypnotism while presenting his new levitation a few weeks ago at the Idle Hour, Grand Rapids, Mich., and imprisoned fortwo weeks. After inv estiva- tion he was found to be innocent and released. He is presenting a travesty on modern magic and mind reading, closing with the levitation. ALLAN SHAW, expert coin manipulator, Is doing some nice work out on the coast this month, Rusu Ling Toy Anp Co., magic and illusions, at Waukegan theater, Waukeean, Ih, Nov. 14-16. HoRACE GOLDIN was at the Palace, Hull, England, Oct. 31-Now.5. JARROW, mavical jester, at Hammerstein's, New York, Nov. 7-12. Very popular around the big: Eastern towns. Is a master at mayical fun making. HARRY CLARK, CHARLES CARTER and THE GREAT RAYMOND had a “‘yrand blow-out’ at the Savoy Hotel, London, one Sunday night last month. “Lasted til 2.30 a. mt” NEWS FROM PHE GREAT NICOLO Letters from Gey PD. LUuNbY, in advance of THE GREAT NICOLO, Magician and illusionist, touring China, have been received in New York. Mat sheds with seating capacity of 2500 were crected in some of the towns under the personal direction of Mri. undy. In Peking, a big sign, 14x35 feet, was put up over one of the principal gates to the city on the ancient wall of China. On it was the word, ‘‘Nicola,’’ in big letters. It was the talk of the town but the citv officials ordered it torn down. It had done its duty, however, and helped to pack the house. Nicolo’s company includes: NADOLY, comedy juy- vler; AL Von ARX, Hlusionist:; MARGUERITE SUTTON, hypnotic subject. After visitng Manila, India and the Straights Settlements, the company will pro- ceed to Australia. That popular wizard, NATE LEIPZIG, on the eve of his departure from London for a South African and Australian tour, was given a dinner at the German Club by American and English friends. He sailed for Cape Town Nov. & He was also presented a silver magiqan’s cabinet from his many ad- mirers. THE GREAT LAFAYETTE was at the Empire, Liverpool, England, Oct. 3hieNov, >) HakRY HoubpINi was at the Palace, Hammersmith, England, Oct. 31- Nov. 3. Loto, mystic, at the Shubert, Utiea, N. ¥., Now. 7-12. =) eS SS 4a To - STU Tats SUS mien The caldron clusion When writin te advertisers. kindly mention M varie

Page 196

MAGIC 7 GARCIA, SPANISH SHADOW PROJECTOR GARCIA, the Spanish shadowgraphist, appeared last month in New York for the first time in America. His work is done in front of the screen, in full view of the audience. He gets many laughable hyures and situations with his manipulations, including two monks, who pravely seratch themselves and each other. Does a pantomime of a man visiting his lady love and the dog's objection, Shows two figures jugeling a ball on their heads and noses. Has a Romeo and Juliet scene. He kept the audience in good humor and got) on the “‘All-star’’ bill, week of Nov. 14. P,P. SELBIF COMING OVER P. CT. Secsrr, formerly editor of The Wizard and oneof England's clever- est and most skillful conjurers, will shortly arrive in this country to do twen- tv-four weeks on the Orpheum circuit, beginning Christmas. Mr. Selbit has lately been featuring Dr. Wilmar'’s spirit pictures, finished oil paintings that seem to come on the canvas from nowhere according to the free selection of the audience. PROGRAMME OF RAMESES RAMESES, Egyptian Wonder Worker, was at the Orpheum, Kansas City, Nov. 28-Dec. 3. Act entitled, ‘The Femple of Mvsteries.”’ Stave setting mystical, awe-inspiring, superb, The performer is assisted by a company of men and women who wear rich, showy Eyvptian costumes. “They are as solemn and peculiar as Rameses himself. He keeps his audience guessing and yasping from the start. The act is completely silent. Curtain rises with stage set for the appear- ance of Kameses from space. At the back is an altar approached by a short Hisht of steps. Behind this, across the back, is a drop with paintingsof the sphinx and pyramids. At the sides of the altar, guarding the steps, two bronze lions support large flaming urns. Clusters of purple lights abound. ‘Po the left, in front, are two oddly designed small tables or stands holding a few properties, and immediately back of them a decorated oblong box (af- terwards shown to be full of paper cuttings) supported on a light pedestal table. To the right, front, is a light stand holding a lighted globe. In the center is a movable, curtained cabinet, with the curtains drawn open on all sides. “wo assistants stand at the sides. They quickly close the empty cabi- net and as quickly pull aside the curtains again. Rameses is discovered in- side. Stepping down he picks up a glass cvlinder and a handkerchief which is placed in the evlinder, ‘Phis, inturn, is placed on one of the stands. Sud- denly the ght in the globe on the right goes out, and the handkerchief fills it. “Phe glass cvlinder is found to be empty. Then a coppergoblet is tilled with paper cuttings and the paperturned to water. A small pyramid is now erected on the floor of the cabinet. A door in the front of the litthe pyramid is closed and when opened again a woman steps out followed by a big white goose. A stand is brought to the front and what looks like a large chating dish is placed on it. Eyys and water are put in and a fire lighted underneath. Rameses eats a few spoonfuls of the fire. Evys and water changed to three pigeons. A woman is then bound and led, screaming, to the altar where a cloth cone ts lowered over her. Fire is ap- plied and the cloth falls. Woman has vanished and is discovered in the cab- inet after curtains are drawn and opened. Several other disappearances and reappearances in the cabinet conclude the shaw, THE TREWEY BROTHERS, hand shadows with battle and electrical effects in new form. Recently seen in Philadelphia. JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 197

72 MAGIC PROF. CARL GRossSI Is now touring the Phillipine provinces with magic and illusions. MORTON AND MooORE, chalk comedians, now have a hlindoo valet whe does mavic. THE GREAT ALBINE will start his tenth consecutive season on the S. & C. circuit Feb. 26 with a new act, carrving tive assistants, LAUREYNS recently gave a magical entertainment at the Bedford Ave- nue ¥. M. GC, AL, Brooklvn, N.Y. IN THE SHADOW WORLD Marcus, shadowgraphs, at the Garrick, Burlington, Iowa, Oct. 3l-Now. 2. Ho mpEN AND CLAIRE, shadowgraphs, at the Palace, Philadelphia, Now, 7-12. RAZEE S SHADOWGRAPHS, at the Family, Pittsburg, Nov. 7-12. CHASSINO, Shadowyraphist, at Keith's, Columbus, O., Nov. 7-12. Makes figures with hands and feet. M. BARNULS offered a new act at the Olympia, Paris, last month, Draw- ings made on blackened glass in view of the audience were thrown on a screen, throwing the design out in strony relief. OLIVETTE, veteran shadowgrapher, at the Princess, St. Louis, Oct. 31- Nov, 3, SHADOW ACT STOLEN ? LEWIS BRAHAM complains that “TirE StLVENOS are using his) original Phantographs act, or shadowgraphs with dluminated scenery. Mr. Braham first produced his act March 28, 1910, at whichtime Phe Silvenos were doing straight shadowyraphs on a plain sheet. WITH THE BRAINSPORMERS Spiritualism has been utilized with some litthe success in ‘“The Seventh daughter,” a play by Richard Harding Davis, now at the Cort) theater, Chicago. “Phe story coneerns Vera, a medium, who is surrounded by a band of toekster spiritualists. Many of the usual manifestations seen at Seances are offered on the stage with thrilling effect. CARL S. LOWREY, the necromantic comedian, writes: “Tam taking a much necded rest at my home, 50 Garheld St., Davton, O. Twill play vaudeville time again after the Holidays, presenting my new comedy novelty magic. act twenty nunutes incone, which was framed up by H. Helms of Mailwau- kee, Wis.’ PowrrRS Hypnotic Srow, Columbus, Gas, Now. 16-26. The psvelie play, “Behind the Veil" was withdrawn atthe Coronet thea- ter, London, Now, 12. THE GREAT POWERS, Dypnotist, at Rutland. Vt., recently. The caldron tilaston When writing to advertisers, Kindly. mention Mage Oe Le 2 ree 9 Ped Ee ee a — ee ia —_———-|

Page 198

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 10 $25.00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A 225 course in SE xpert Billard Ball Manipulation,’ “as viven at the reading New York Magical Studio, 1) ‘Tricks and Sleights. 200° Beautiful Photographic Hlustrations, 36 Orivinal ‘Tricks. 35,00) Words of Expert Tnstroction. Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lisard Skin Finish cirt Covers, Gold Titles, Sk Bound. Most beautiful, unique and ar- tistic Mystery Volume yet produced. Price S100, postpaid. BURLING HULL CO., 393 4th St., Brooklyn, N. Y. Paper Cut-Out forthe Changing Die The March number of Macic contains a gen- uine novelty in the form ofa paper cut-out apparatus for tae Changing Die. With oa pair of scissors and a little vlue, a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that will enable anyone to perform this charming il- lusion, Complete instructions wiven. A few copies left. 10 cents each, while they last. FF. T. SINGLETON, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. 9 TQ Las mm Journal for Professional and Amateur I | LL U S | QO N | S] Magicians. The only Mawzical Maga zine printed in the Kreneh Language. Published Monthly. [Hustrated. Annual subse riptions. 8 francs (SL60), Sample copy, 75 centi: mes ats cts.!. Editor, CA\ROLY, 20 Boulevard St. Germain. Paris. Fr. Edited by Will Goldston. A "7 he Magician Monthly journal for all) interested = in Maxic and Mystery. In its sixth year of success. Annual subsoription, $L15. Sample copy. l0cts. Foreign Sane not accepted in pavinent. THE MAGICIAN, Lid. 6 Robin Hood Yard. London. E. a ae asndiee Eng.’ The pioneer of Conjuring Magazines. [ts tenth successful year of publication, Oldest, brightest, best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians. The recognised Journal of the professional magician. Features every month—Original lessons in Magic. being Ulustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage illusions. Ex planatory programmes of prominent magicians, showing the order of tricks presented, with an explanation of each trick, ete. Sample copy, @ b2d 5 cts!) Twelve months. 5] 6 81500, Table of Contents of the ten volumes matled free. American stamps and Dolbk er notes ac ce pie “ed. ST ADS & CO... 76 Solent Road. West Hampstead, London, N. W., England. | THE SPHINX A Monthly Magazine for Amateurand) Professional Magicians. ‘Tells vou more about magic than any magazine published. News letters from.) corres pondents in all parts of the world area special feature. Sba vear. Stnwle copies, 1c. A. M. WILSON, M. D., Publisher, 906 Main St., Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers. Kind! tention Maca JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 199

74 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Back Numbers of MAGIC VOLUME ONE READY MAGIC BOUND IN CLOTH The first volume of Macic can now be had neatly bound in cloth with title page and index. It con- sists of the first six numbers, Jan- uary to June, 1910, including the February number, Guosts. Price, $1.00. SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and May is- sues remain. They can be had, as long as the supply lasts, for 10 cents each. Complete your file before they are out of print. A Few Copies of the Only Number of GHOSTS Issued The second issue (February, 1910) of Magic was give nthe title of Guostrs. A few copies remain and can be had for 15 cents, w while cH they last. JANUARY 1410 PRICE 6 CENTS What A Conjurer Can Do Pe Cet Onew nee The Marvelous Rising Cs Cards of Josefty Py te f CONTENTS—The Sphinx Riddle of Y! IMANCE AND Fi Humanity—-Spectral Hlusions—Thread- ing the Mazes—An Afternoonin A Mag- ical Library -How Lb Became A Spirit Medium. Cover in four colors. Colored frontis- piece and 19 illustrations. Most unique magazine ever issued. Fr. oT. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3619 Thompson Avenue Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers. Kindly mention Macic 2 Jette dae — A iyene C deen ete on = = a a a ole — Bae: a «TS EVs an a rrr © When writing to advertisers, Kindly mention M vie

Page 200

” subject every week. Sit down tonight and write for a sample copy. TIHIE MAGICAL WORLD PUBLISHING COMPANY &, Lawson Steet, Moss Side, Manchester, England. Whom writing to advertisers. kindly mention Miaaie JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 201

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS exploding matehbes Vhe cauldron tlusion The water opiracle LEARN TO ENTERTAIN lnstructive, cntertaining and amusing. Results guaranteed with our Masic Tricks and IHlus- ions. We sell only the best Tricks and the ones that are casy to perform, and that require ‘no skill. 7 All our directions are plain and in most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manu- facturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and Ulusions inthe world, Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station New Haven, Conn. Card levitation Anarchist tsfink) bombs Fadeawav card EF Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention M varie —a The ea'dron ilusion When writing to advertisers. Kindly mention Mi vase

Page 202

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER Ven Good Card ‘Tricks Without Sleight of Hand An Invisible Lemon Flight JANUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 203

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Entertain Your Friends Your Homes There is no vreater vift on earth than to be able to entertain. How many times have vou seen aclever Magician, and was mystified with his perfornt- ance -and the thought came to vou, how E wish He Twas clever! We otfer the solution. You can be as clever. We offer the Greatest Card) Pack for performing clever tricks ever invented. You require no skill at all Full in- structions are sent for performing an entire evening. No sleight of hand Inanipulation necessary, you get the pack of cards, read the instructions, and in five minutes you will be able te entertain as clever as a professional mavician, THE LANIGIRO CARD PACK Price complete with all instructions, “1.00, Cards can be told) by mind reading. Cards are made to rise at command. Cards selected appear in vour pocket. Cards placed in pack are made to appear at top of pack at will of the performer, A COMPLETE EN PERTAIN MENPE OR MYSTERY, SEND ORDERS FO BAMBERG MAGIC COMPANY 1193 Broadway, New York Send tor our bie Catalowue. 6000 Tricks. 1 cents, Paper Cut-Out forthe Changing Die The March number of MaGic contains a gen- wine novelty in the form oft paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a little vlue. a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that will enable anvone to perform this charming j- lusion., Complete instructions etven. A few copies left 10 cents cach, while they last. FOL. SINGLETON, Publ sher, 3619 Fhompson Ave., Kansas City, Mao, » ) a VT ZS Journal tor Professtonal and Vinatear N Mates. Phe onty Magical Masa Anne printed: ta the bromeh Latmeuiae, Published Monthiv. Tlustrared. Vital subseriptions. S frames oS) a, Sample copy. 73 cent nes Tscts.. Rditer, CAROLY 20 Boulevard St. Gera, Parts. br. The Magician Monthly ! pana ag all iter vearat suceess. Vata, a subsoription. SEES. Soanmiple ep, ieee ts. In are ti mi preys 10d wee apoter “d Py peat bere. LH MAGICIAN. Lite 6G Robto Pbood Yard. Iondon. B.C, When owritte te advertisers. Kindly aientioan MaAGie

Page 204

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS oe MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Binge stand best catalogue of high grade magical goods sent postpaid for 25c. Magi: clan's Headquarters in America. Re liable and trustworthy. Qur goods are of the best workmanship, being famous for solid quality. Phe New Vanishing Coin A prone ket trick that will wreatls please evervone, A heavy brass cap is given tor thorough exami Nation, In the cap is a small hole, yu ing right through it. Three —" <a coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im mediately, only two coins are left. Nosleizht of hand. Can be performed at once by any: one, Price, complete, S1. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Learn Stunts in MAGIC You don’t know what you are missing 1f vou are not in the Magic Game. A few good tricks with Cards, Coins, etc., carefully practiced and rehearsed, will af- ford a lot of entertainment, and the cost is small. Better send for my new ‘‘loose-leat’’ Catalog of HIGH CLASS CONJURING TRICKS Practical tricks only. It's free. Special attention paid to Amateurs. Satisfaction guaranteed. DONALD HOLMES Box 315, San Angelo, ‘Texas “Only Magic-Cratt Shop in the Great Southwest’ When writing te advertisers. Kindly mention Magic

Page 205

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 9 > ae 76 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS A NIGHT WITH THE MOON A PARLOR PRESENTATION OF “A NIGHT WITH THE MOON" A Practical Lightning “*Chalk-Talk’’ for Amateurs By P. T. SELBIT The June, 1910, number of Macic, containing P. T. Selbit’s splendid “‘chalk talk,’ ‘“A Night With The Moon,”’ being now out of print, the publisher has reprinted the sketch in attrac- tive pamphlet form. In this unique entertainment, Mr. Selbit presents a practical form of lightning sketch work that anyone, be he or she never so ignorant of the art of sketching, may produce without much practice, and provoke considerable merriment. Price LU cents, postpaid. F. TV. SINGLETON, Publisher 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 206

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 10 CONTENTS FOR JANUARY, 1911 ‘The itHustration on the cover is a reproduction ofa retouched photograph of the hands of the late Charles Bertram, PAGE AN INVISIBLE LEMON FLIGHT Doxatp HoLmes 79 Illustrations fron photographs. A SHORT HISTORY OF VENTRILOQUISM (FRED RussELL) &2 ONE HUNDRED GOOD TRICKS WITITOUT SLEIGHT OF HAND. L. 85 INustrations from photographs. A PHENOMENAL MANIPULATING SCREEN Max STERLING 89 Illustrations from drawings. A MAN FROM A COFFIN (P. T. SEvsrr) 9] Illustrations from drawings. AN X-RAY PHOTOGRAPII OF KELLAR’S RIGHT HAND 91 Ilustration from a photograph. WHAT EVERY CONJURER SHOULD KNOW. I. 92 Illustrations from photographs. A MONTH OF MAGIC 94 DR. WILMAR’S SPIRIT PAINTINGS A BRILLIANT SEASON FOR HOWARD FHURSTON PROGRAMME OF GUSTAVE FASOLA & CO. PROGRAMME OF SATANI Copyright. 1911, by F.T. Singleton, MAGIC is published on the first of every month except July and August bd rye ‘ | a i “ bd ae y “ .” . i by F. T. Singleton, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missour, U.S. A. YEARLY SUBSCRIPTIONS, 1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. ADVERTISING, $5.00 a page; smaller space proportionately. ADDPRESs all business and editorial communications to F. T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3419 THOMPSON AVENUE, KANSAS CITY, MISSOURE. U.S. A.

Page 207

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Publisher Says Your magazine has made giant strides during the past three months. ‘The October number of Macic con- tained 12 pages. This January number has 32 pages in- side the cover. The February number will also require 32 pages to hold all the good things in store. This will be welcome news to the many friends the publisher has made during the past year, many of whom have already renewed their yearly subscriptions, although the pub- lisher’s contract to guarantee twelve numbers for a dollar will not expire until February. A very valuable ‘‘First Lesson in Shadowgraphy,”’ announced last month has been crowded out of this num- ber. It will appear later. A veritable shower of manu- scripts has fallen upon Macic during the past few weeks, including a splendid article by Mr. Henry Ridgely Evans, ‘‘A Master of Magic,’’ being some new facts on Cagliostro. THlustrations are now being gathered for this article and it will appear soon. Other articles in hand for early publication are: ‘‘A Disappearing Bird Cage,’ by Ernest Evangeline; ‘‘A New Telepathic Card Mystery,’’ by ‘T. C. Bonney; “Improved Dove Pan,’’ by Wilford Hutchinson; ‘A New Card Frame,’’ by M. C. Waketeld, and ‘*The Severed Apples’? by W. H. H. Pugh. The publisher acknowledges with grateful thanks the receipt of a beautiful letter from Mr. P. N. Ganguly, Calcutta, India. Mr. Ganguly expresses his apprecia- tion of this litthe magazine in terms of highest praise, and offers his firm conviction that MaGcic will someday “top the list.”’ [tis the many letters of this nature, re- ceived by the publisher that encourage him to constant- lv renewed efforts, and the writers will some day see their bright hopes and substantial appreciation bear fruit of real value.

Page 208

i ws aie 7" wie ah BT M. MAGIC. MAGIC VOLUME 11 JANUARY, 1901 NUMBER 10 A Magician’s New Year’s Resolution Resonvep: That 1 will try to add one ortwo tricks to my programme this year that are unusual and somewhat different: from that other fel- low's, good though his are. 1 will acknowledge his cleverness but try to excelhim. If | do this, | will tell him how much he has helped me and thank him. If l can not excel him f will think more of him than ever. I will try to control my mind so that every unkind or evil thought) will be killed Ike a disease-bearing rat before it has time to eat at my heart and clo within me the wheels of mercy and justice. I will try to live correctly and simply so that my body will stand by me, strong to the end, pumping red blood to my head that my brain will ever be on thealert for good ideas and my lips: firstto moutha gentle word of praise and cncouragement to my fellow conjurers. —ERNEST EVANGELINE. An Invisible Lemon Flight By Donald Holmes KRE isa clever littl transposition trick that any wide-awake amateur can easily master. In effect, an unprepared lemon is dropped into a borrowed hat, which is then covered with a man’s handker- 4 chief. Phe performer next borrows a lady’s hand- oer hiet f, and, retiring to some distance from the hat, mysteri- ously changes the handkerchief to a lemon; and upon uncov- ering the hat the lady's handkerchiefis found therein instead of the lemon. All the articles used in the trick can be exam- ined, as they are really quite unprepared. You will need for this trick two lemons, as near alike as pos- sible: also a piece of black silk thread about twelve-inehes in length. To one end of the thread attach a pin, bent into the shape of a hook, and to the other cnd fasten a black button— a trouser button, for tastance. Have one of the lemons in view on your table. As the com- pany are to have knowledge of but one im the trick, put) the second lemon under your vest. Drop the ‘button’ end of the thread into your outside coat pocket on the right hand side, and stick the bent pin, on the opposite end of the thread, just

Page 209

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS SO MAGIC inside the flap of the coat on the same side. Have a cigar-box, ora thick book, on your table. Begin operations by bringing forward the lemon for examina- tion, When it is returned to you, ask for the loan of astiff hat. A little pause always fol- lows such a request, and you make the most of it by secretly getting pos- sesston of the bent pin, in the right hand, which you press into one end of the lemon. The hat will be forthcoming by this time, and you re- ceive it in left hand, the nght hand holding the JTemon., | Walk over toe your table, at the same time shyhtly extending rhe arms away from the body, which suffices to draw the button on the | thread from the pocket, Bice. permitting it to dangle, unseen, fromthe lemon, behind the hat in opposite hand. Place the hat mouth upwards on the cigar-box (or book), and, holding the lemon about a foot above, drop the fruit visibly into the hat. The opposite hand should steady the hat) slightly, at the same time preventing the button on the thread from betng jerked into view when the lemon falls. This operation leaves the lemon tn the hat, with the button on the thread dangling just behind the brim of the hat. Borrow a gentleman's handkerchiet (or use yourown), and cover the hat with same. Borrowing a lady’s handkerchiet (a plain one is best for the trick), you walk over to the other side of the room, holding the handkerchief well up in view. This enables you to get secret possession of the second lemon from your vest, which is easily accomplished without detection, as the hand that goes to the vestison the side forthe time being turned away from the specta- tors, Race your table, withyour right side to those present, at the same time bringing the hands together, permitting the handker- chief to cover the lemon, Betore going farther with the trick you should impress upon

Page 210

- pe] ee i ee ~ a . : a = MAGIC MAGIC SI the minds of your auditors the precise status of affairs. The lemon has been visibly deposited in the hat, and covered with a gentleman's handkerchief. The lady’s handkerchief is in your possession in view of everyone. Now under cover of a slight up and down motion with the arms you cause the handkerchief to grow smaller and smaller between the palms. ‘Fhis is accomplished by rolling the material Into a compact parcel, under cover of the night hand whose back Is turned towards the company. Leave the resulting parcel “palmed™ (that is, retained) in the bend of the fingers of right hand, taking care that no corners protude in view. Just as the corners of the handkerchief are drawn into the palms, you per- mit the lemon to come into view at the hnger tips, the effect to the spectators being, that the lady's handkerchief has sud- dently transformed itself into the lemon. Immediately toss out the lemon for examination: walk over to the hat on the table, still retaining the borrowed hand- kerchief in the bend of the fin- gers, and with the opposite hand remove the large handkerchief, with an upward movement. from the hat. At the same time this hand vrasps the button dangling on the thread behind the hat, and lemon No, | is) therefore drawn out of the hat under cov- er of the handkerchief. The in- stant the handkerchief clears the hat, you lower it to the table behind the hat, releasing your hold on the button, and thus per- mitting the lemon to slip noise- lessly onto the table dedind the cigar-box, Meanwhile, your right hand has performed the neces- sary operation of misdirection by dipping into the hat, quickly releasing the lady's handker- chief from the palm, and seizing toby one corner, draws it dain- ily from the hat at the finger tips. The left hand, which re- tains its hold on the large handkerchief, seizes the hat. and the two borrowed) handkerchiefs and hat are brought forward for another round of inspection, There are many similar so-called “transposition tricks in Bl€s,.2:

Page 211

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS S2 MAGIC the magician’s repertoire, but for a clean litthe mystery in the drawing room T have found the above a prime favorite, both from the standpoint of the performer and his audience. | first made its acquaintance some twelve years ago in’ Roterberg’s Vodtern Wiesard, now out of print. A Short History of Ventriloquism (Fred Russell ) ey FENTRILOQUISM can be traced back 3000 years, p27 /) and was utilized by the expert among our early fore- ~/48& fathers for purposes altogether different and more ‘4%; reprehensible than its professors would dream of AA now, Where ignorance or superstition reigned al- most supreme, the man who mastered the secrets of Ventrilo- quism had an excellent chance of acquiring an abundance of this world’s goods —to say nothing of ““kudos,’’ which was al- most as valuable tn those days --at the expense of people not so wide awake as himself. It is generally conceded that the various kinds of °‘divina- tron” exercised by the ancients, and which were stated by the spiritual pastors and masters to be by a ‘‘familiar spirit,’” were really atfected by means of Ventriloquism., In his book on the Art published in 1772, Myr. V Abbe la Chapelle, Censor-roval at Parts, tells us that the responses of the Greek and Roman Or- acles in reality emanated from the priests in attendance. Apol- lontus Pyanieus, a philosopher born at Tyana, the Capital of Cappadocia, shortly before the Christian era, professed to work miracles, and is said to have gained some of his most startling effects by addressing himself, ventriloquitally, from the branches ofa tree. The ancient Greeks believed in what is called gastro- mancy, the priest replying to questions put to him without moving his lips, so that the enquirer was led to beheve that a “Minister of the tntertor,” was actually enlightening him from the region of the priest's diaphragm. In the Middle Aves Ventriloquism appears to have been a source of greater danger to its professors than to anyone else, for itis recorded that many persons who practiced it were ac- cused of witeheraft, and put to death in consequence. Early in the Seventecnth Century, however, people became wiser, or at least more tolerant, and permitted themselves to be amused by that which had before filled them with superstitious awe. Louts Brabant, valet to Francis I, King of France, is the first Ventriloquist of whom we have any definite knowledge, and,

Page 212

MAGIC S3 according: to all accounts, he was a wondertully expert operator, Jtas related of him that by the exercise of his Ventriloquial powers he obtained a very desirable wite, although he had failed to satisfy the ladys parents as to his fitness to become their son-in-law by the ordinary procedure im these matters, In the bygone days Ventriloquists were called ““whisperers,’ and Charles I. had attached to his Court one Henry King, a native of Oxford who was styled, ““The King’s Whisperer.’ Cardinal Richelieu, the proud, ambitious, and unscrupulous statesman of France, who died in lo42, is said to have pressed a Ventriloquist into his service to help him in one of his many political difficulties. A female “whisperer” named Jacobi as- tontshed the natives at Haarlem, the capital of the province of North Plolland, about P6oS0O, Then we have a long interval of stlence In respect to the Art and its professors; and the next exponent we hear of ts a blacksmith named Tloneyman, who resided in London, and commenced operarations im the early pirt of the ereatesoth century, PLoneyman was) nicknamed The Valktng Smith.” About 1750 Ventriloquism became very popular, and its most noted English exponents at this period were Macleroy and Moore. Twenty years later two Continental Ventriloquists cre- ated sensations in Paris and Vienna respectively by reason. of their extraordinary powers. Phe Austrian representative, Baron Mengen, made use of a hgure’’ to dlustrate the Art, and his humorous conversations with a wooden doll gained for him a creat measure of popularity. Ele was also very expert in the imi- tation of animals, and is said to have been the first to reveal the secrets of Ventriloquism, which hitherto had been very jeal- ously guarded by its professors. Vhe Paristan Ventriloquist, whose name was St. Gille, fol- lowed the occupation of a grocer at St. Germaine-en-Laye, until he discovered that fame and fortune awaited him as a public entertainer, Krom descriptions given of this artiste’s pertorm- ance he appears to have brought the art to the highest pitch of excellence, and in the presence of a Board of Comimmisstoners of the Royal Academy of Sctences he did some wonderful things. In the memoirs of Empress Josephine there ts mentioned one Tinemet, a Ventriloquist and Factal Artist, satd to have been aereat favorite with the Lkmperor Napoleon. Pe visited Ton- don in L7N6, James Burns, an Trishman, attained great) popularity in the North of England about E790. The usually performed with a wooden doll, but was also an expert “Distant Voice’ Ventrile- quist and bmitator of Musical Instruments. Among other stories told of this person mone whieh relates to a vistt he ts sar to y

Page 213

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS S4 MAGIC have paid to the Sheffield Fish Market, where he astonished the stall attendants by making the fish talk. Sugg, another famous Ventriloquist, was a contemporary of Burns, and practiced the Art for many years. He died in 1831, having attained the age of SO years. Sugg was a man of resource, as will be gathered by the following story. He had arranged to give a series of entertainments in one of the suburbs of London, but the good folks of the neighborhood being rather “backward a comin’ forward,’’as the showman says, the Ventriloquist de- cided to try asensation as a means of advertisement. He dressed a doll in baby clothes, and at the busiest hour of the day ran through the streets, the child’ in his arms apparently scream- ing lustily. Stopping ata baker's shop Sugg entered, seemingly with the intention of purchasing a cake for the infant. The cry- ing still continued, however, and Sugg, apparently at his wits’ end, rushed from the shop to abakehouse in the rear, and threw the doll into the furnace. He was at once arrested and taken before a magistrate, and it was with the utmost difficulty that he convinced ** his worship’ it was all a joke. itz James, “’Val,’’ and Professor Charles all minstered to the amusement and astonishement of our great grandfathers at the beginning of the nineteenth century, About 1820 two Continen- tal Ventriloquists became known to fame—one a Swiss doctor named Compti, and the othera famous Frenchman, Mons. Nicho- las Marte Alexandre, generally conceded to be the finest Ven triloguist who, up to that time, had appeared in public. Alex- andre visited London in 1823. He quickly became a great public favorite, and was patronized by Royalty. Alexandre’s success led to a boom in Ventrniloquism, and the number of professors increased by leaps and bounds. His most notable successors were W. Nightingale, who lived until 1840; Jacobs, a clever Ventril- oquist and Mimic, flourtshing in the early fitties; Law, Askins, Sutton, Gallagher, Fritz Renard, and Joel. Macmillan attained front rank, and Thurton, the monologue entertainer was alsoa Ventrnloquist. Mr. W. EF. Love comes next in order and he was undoubtedly a great “distant voice’’ exponent. He died on the loth of March, 1867, at the age of 62 years. We now arrive at what may be termed the ‘‘hgure’’ era. Prior to 1860, Ventriloquists seldom availed themselves of the assist- ance of mechanical dolls to tlustrate the Art, but for the most part, were content to amuse and astonish with distant voice 1l- lusions and polyphonism. One of the first tomake use of figures was Professor James. Tle was followed by Charles Young, Pro- fessor Grant, Frank Mordaunt, Jester, E. D. Davis and Lieu- tenant Walter Cole, who first carried out the idea of working with a group of life-sized figures. Cole made his initial appear- oe A Ba ae ee

Page 214

MAGIC SS ance In London in L870, and for over 30 years remained a great favorite. He divided public esteem with Fred Maccabe, a fine “distant voice’? Ventriloquist. The art has many clever repre- sentatives before the public today whose names will readily re- cur to those who take an interest in the subject. One Hundred Good Tricks With- out Sleight of Hand Part I. ‘Ven Good Card ‘Tricks Selected and Edited by Ernest Evangeline I THE AEFROPLANECARDS. (Henry Harron anp ApRI- AN PiLare.)—A Queen of hearts is forced on some lady specta- tor by means of a pack consisting of all Queens, or otherwise. When it Is returned the pack is shuffled and a rubber band is put around it lengthwise. It is then momentarily placed aside while the performer explains the situation. “‘[ noticed,’’ he says “that in replacing the Queen of hearts, which was drawn, the lady took no pains to put her side by side with the King. That is wrong. They should — _ Ss be together, and we must try 9 aera to remedy the wrong.’’ He 2 turns now to get the pack, but instead of taking the one just used he substitutes for it a prepared pack. From this the King and Queen of hearts have been removed, after that a fine, small rubber band 1s placed, lengthwise, about the pack. The pack is then stood on one end ona table, opened in the middle, bookwise, and laid flat as shown in Fig. |. The King and Queen are now laid, faces down, over the rubber band, and the part with the faces upward ts folded over. Two or three cards are placed top and bottom of the pack and another rubber band 1s put around it, lengthwise, tokeep the cards in place. Turning to his audience with this pack, he says, “Let us hope that their exalted high- nesses have met. Will your Majesties kindly make your ap- pearance?’ Removing the outside rubber band, but holding the pack tightly pressed together, the performer slightly re- laxes his hold, when the two cards will rise slowly from the pack. ‘‘Ah, that is well,’’ exclaims the conjurer. “‘And now —— cet - FIG. 1

Page 215

. = MAGIC ADVERTISEMEN SDS @) 86 MAGIC v9 fora trip in an aeroplane,’’ saying which he relaxes the pres- sure entirely when the two cards will go soaring in the air. Il. ADIAMOND ACE OF HEARTS. (1rrcat)-—-You show the ace of diamonds, the ace of spades, and the ace of clubs, and lay them face down on the table. You pick up one ace, which you place in the middle of the pack; the second ace at the bottom, and the third ace at the topof the pack. Youthen ask a spectator to cut the pack wherever he orshe may like, and no matter where the pack is cut the three aces 3 _ will be found together. You commence by withdrawing the four aces from the pack; the ace of diamonds you se- cretly place on the top of the pack, and arrange the other three aces fan-wise, as fol- lows: The ace of hearts must be inverted, and with the oth- er two cards you hide the lower part of the heart and the small heart in the indica- tor, leaving the point of the large heart In view and cov- ering the small heart in the indicator (Fig. 2). Show the three cards thus arranged quickly, and no one will im- agine that the centre card is not the ace of diamonds. Lay the three aces faces down on the table, still arranged fan- wise, pick up the centre card, which is really the ace of hearts, and without letting any one see its face slipit anywhere in the pack; place the second ace at the bottom of the pack and the third, after showing it, on top, of course covering the ace of diamonds which ts already there. It does not signify in which place the pack is cut, the three aces will be found together when the two parts of the pack are rejoined. Ill. ACE OR NINE? (Hercatr)—Take the ace, four, six, and nine of diamonds; conceal the nine behind the four, and very deliberately (so that all can see what you are doing) place the ace between the four and the six so that the pip is visible. Then turn the cards over, without disturbing their relative pos- itions, and, presenting them faces down, say, ‘"You will find it impossible to lft the ace from the centre; try!’?’ Some one FIG, 2

Page 216

MAGIC SS will lift up the ace, and naturally look at it, whereupon you ex- claim, ““Ah! but you mustn't look at it. Just lift up the card and then lay it with the face down on the table, and then I'll tell you whether you have taken the ace off or not.’’ You then pick up the ace, and holding the faces of the cards to you— this time not letting the others see what you are doing—you substitute the nine for the ace, covering up the four pips on each side of the card with the four and six, leaving only the centre pip visible. You then show the faces of the cards so ar- ranged, and your audience will naturally think the ace is still in the centre. Turn the cards over as before, and when the cen- tre card is lifted and laid face down on the table you say, The ace isnow on the table, and I challenge any one to dispute ite The person who placed the card on the table will agree with you, and say he knows it is the ace. Whereupon you turn the card up, and show it Is the nine. IV. TO INSTANTLY NAME A CHOSEN CARD. (EL is Sranyon)—The performer holds the pack as shown in Fig. 3, and with the second finger of the right hand draws back the top cdrds, one by one, in- . 7 viting the bystanders to stop) |~7— = San ¥ ig 3 Sa him at any card they please. EGE se | i: se %? Te When requested to stop, he i ia ame Be ay a removes the upper portionof — Bee ti 7 the cards, with the one se- __ " lected, ostensibly, at the bot- ; tom; in reality, howerer, in manipulating the top cards, the thumb of the right hand quietly draws out the bottom one, which is thus brought away at the bottom of the upper portion, and appears to the onlookers to be that selected. As the performer had previously made himselt acquainted with the bottom card, h® may at once name it; or the two portions may be placed together, due note hav- ing been taken of the card, and the pack handed to be shutfled. When returned, the performer may at once pick out the cho- sen card. V. THE WIDE MARGIN.—In most packs, the white mar- gins at the edges of the court cards are of different width at top and bottom, and also at the sides. Select the court cards, and arrange them with the broad margins all the same way. FIG. 3

Page 217

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 88 MAGIC Ask a person to pick out and note a card, and then watch closely whether he turns it. Hold forward the pack for the card to be replaced in such a way that it goes back with the broad margin reversed from those in hand. Shuffle the cards, and then display the card that ts disarranged. | VI. THE CHANGING ACES. (HERcat.)—F1ix on the ace of diamonds, with soap, a heart, cut from another card, and on the ace of hearts a club, in such a manner that they will easily slip off. Show these two aces to the company; then taking the ace of diamonds, desire a person to put his foot on it, and as you place it on the ground draw away the heart. In like man- ner place the seeming ace of hearts under the foot of another person. Then command the two cards to change their places. VII. THE TWO HEAP CATCH. (Henry Hattron anp Ap- RIAN PLaTe.)—The four sevens are sorted out of a pack and placed in a heap on the table. Then seven indifferent cards are placed in a heap along side the first, and some one is asked to come forward and assist the performer. Looking the man earn- estly in the eyes for a moment, the conjurer writes on a slip of paper: “You will select the seven heap.’’ This is folded and handed to the assistant with the request that he put it in his pocket. He is then asked to select one of the heaps of cards. When this 1s done he is requested to read what is written on the paper. When he has done so, he ts told to turn over the heap. No matter which heap is selected the prediction is veri- fied. Should it be the heap with the four sevens, the conjurer turns over the other heap with the remark, ““You see these are all different cards.’’ On the other hand should the heap of seven cards be selected, the performer merely counts them out one by one, without showing the faces of the other heap, mere- ly spreading the cards apart to prove that there are only four cards there. VII. THE INSEPARABLE CARDS.—Display the four Jacks fanned in the hands, hiding three other cards behind the Jack at the back of the set. Close the cards together, and place them on the top of the pack, informing the company that the Jacks are the four top cards, as they have seen. Then take the top card, and without exposing it place it in the center of the pack, and then place the second and third cards in other parts of the pack, keeping up a running commentary that the com- pany are sure the Jacks are being properly separated. Then ask some one to cut the cards, 7. e¢. placing those removed beneath the others, and the four Jacks will be discovered togetherin the center of the pack. IX. THE MAGNETIC ACES. —Divide the pack into three piles, and lay them face downwards upon the table. Exhibit ne

Page 218

MAGIC S9 the two red aces and lay one ontop of the first pile (the top ecard of which you will have previously noted) and the other on the second pile. Then place the second pileon top of the first, and cover with the third pile so that the aces are in different parts of the pack. Plold the cards face downwards inthe left hand, and with the right hand draw the cards one at a time from the bottom of the pack, and expose them on the table. When the card that was at the top of the pack is brought forth, draw back and retain the next card, which ts, of course, the first ace, and proceed to draw the other cards. When the sec- ond ace is produced, the first can be brought forth as the next card, and the effect of the two aces having come together 1s produced. X. A SILLY’ ONE. (Hercar.) —Here ts a little trick, al- most absurd in its simplicity, and yet it frequently causes won- derment. It requires the atid of three persons Take three cards, and, holding them in front of the first person, request him to choose one and think of it. Then lay the three cards, faces down, ina row on the table, and take three more cards, which show to the second person, and tell him to remember one of them. Place these cards on top of the other three, and ask the third person to think of one of a third lot, which you show him; then lay the last three cards on top of the others. You now have three packs of three cards cach. You lift one pack ata time, and request each of the three persons to inform you which pack contains the card he thought of. Of course, you know that the first person's card must be at the bottom of one of the packs, the second person's card in the middle, and the third person's card on top. IT have frequently seen sharp-witted people completely puzzled by this silly little trick. A Phenomenal Manipulating Screen By Max Sterling a) GREAT deal of the finer manipulations of the mod- Hern prestidigitateur is necessarily lost upon the spec- tator by reason of its very minuteness, especially in thimble and coin work. It was at the suggestion of fo NE an exceptionally skilled magician of Leeds, that this screen has been devised, and now offered as a practical means of saving the beauty of genuine dexterity, as well as to render posstble a sertes of remarkable effects Limited only by the ingenuity of the performer. ““Black art’ is the principle utilised, consisting of a back curtain of black velvet drapery, - ss

Page 219

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS HW) MAGIC innocent of any preparation. So much cannot be clammed for the plated ring, mounted on a telescopic music-stand. It is in this the secret lies. The diagrams and sketches are practically self-explana- tory. The upper half of the hoop carries a hooded cur- tain, of black velvet, supplied with such hooks, pockets, slots, ete., as the nature of the production may require. All articles are so fixed as to be readily received and clip- ped by the first and little fin- gers When the hand is placed within the circle, palm out- ward to the audience. Fora production, the hand is first placed through the lower half of the ring from behind, and waved entirely around to con- vey an idea of a vacant space; withdraw the hand, and re- peat the movement from the front, slowly turning the back and front with fingers fully ex- tended and open; close the fingers very deliberately, at) the same time chipping the object desired from the velvet, and produce. To vanish any- thing itis only necessary to drop into the init UO ih servante attached to the lower part of the tng hoop. Every article must be black backed Ridden objects with velvet. Billiard balls in) black shells or pockets, watches lengthwise in. slots, thimbles in supports opening outward with the linings blacked dead. Handkerchiets rest in pockets with black beads protrud- Ing, ete. Such a screen is portable, cheap, casy to construct, and entirely obviates the confusion of hand movement which Is too frequently associated with manipulating acts. There are tricks in hundreds lying on our shelves only wait- Ing newer costumes, tricks unknown to the majority of the present generation, The egg bag was forgotten and thought beneath the dignity of many until one man had courage to in- troduce it and show what a bag of mystery it really was.

Page 220

MAGIC 9] An X-Ray Photograph of Kellar’s Right Hand | EUIS very interesting reproduction of an X-ray pho- BP) tograph of Harry Kellar’ s right hand was intended Gx toaccompany the Moarticle on “'The PS Hand,’ by Mr. dgely Evans, which appeared in the last number of Macic. It was received too late forinsertion in that issue and is now published through the courtesy of Messrs. Mar- tinka & Co., New York, who very kindly loaned the origi- nal photograph. Mr. Evans said: “‘Harry Kellar’s hands are the hands of “a worker in brass and other metals’ like Tubal Cain. Without exception Kellar has quite the strongest hands and wrists I have ever seen. In some former incarnation he was doubtless a gladiator. In setting-up his illusions he could do the work of two stage as- sistants. His powerful wrists enabled him to stand a tremen- dous strain in the rope tying tricks of the Davenport Brothers, ”’ A Man From a Coffin (P. ‘TT. Selbit) learn to execute rapidly on a blackboard with chalk, or with charcoal on a sheet of drawing paper. The basis takes the form of the curious shape shown in 2&3) the figure to the extreme left, which bears a near enough resemblance to a coffin for the performer to represent It as such. A dividing line is brought down the center of the figure and continued some distance below it. To each side of the shape are added sleeve lines within the outline, then leg

Page 221

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Y? MAGIC strokes, seams and coat collar as is made clear in the diagram. A head and then hands are fitted to the slowly-developing DIAGRAM OF “A MAN FROM AV COFFIN" sketch, and lastly, ears, hair, buttons and a suggestion of fect, when we have the finished drawing—the performer making his bow. Try it. You will be surprised to see how easy 1t goes. EDITORIAL NOTE —This delightful sketch is from ‘“The Magic Art of Entertaining,’ by P. PT. Selbit. Published by G. Ornum & Co., London. What Every Conjurer Should Know 66 : I. How to “‘Palm’’ a Coin Selected and edited by Ernest Evanveline. EpIroRIAL Novre.—-This is the first of a series of ten articles on standard sleight of hand for beginners. The instructions of the masters of the art will be illustrated by modern photographic illustrations. NIE aspirant to magical fame should possess fair in- telligence, the usual number of fingers and thumbs, and a sufficiency of perseverance, and he shall be Be ar d to develop into a very respectable conjur- ae aU) . Of course it will be understood that mere read- ing will be of little avail without practice; but the amount of practice need not not be very formidable. An hour, or even a half an hour a day, well employed, will soon give the beginner very considerable skill in sleight of hand. The first power which the novice must seek to acquire is that of “palming,”’ and this once thoroughly mastered, he ts already half a conjurer. The word “‘palming,’’ is used in two senses-——first, as mean-

Page 222

\VA MAGIC 93 ing the mere holding of a given object concealed in the palm, and secondly as mean- ing the act of placing it in that position, To acquire the power of palming, take any good-sized coin, say a halt-dollar, lay it on the palm of the right hand, slightly contract the palm, and let the hand tall to the side. At first you will prob- ably drop the coin, but after a few attempts you will find that it is retained, its edges being clipped between the ball of the thumb and the op- - posite portion of the palm. Holding a small coin, say a quarter ora dime, in the same manner, is less easy, but will quickly follow. When you find that you can carry the coin in this manner with ease, keeping the hand easy and natural, and only. slightly closed, proceed to lesson two. Take the coin between the thumb on the one side and the second and third fingers on the other. With these two fingers draw the coin along the thumb into the palm of the hand, fixing it there by a smart pressure; then open the hand again. The four figures in the illustration show these movements. When you can do this neatly and quickly with the hand at rest, prac- tice doing the same thing with the hand in motion towards the left hand, which should come up to receive it, and should close as if the coin had been transferred thereto. HOW TO PALM A COIN

Page 223

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 94 MAGIC A MONTH OF MAGIC All the Magical Entertaining News Without Prejudice or Personal Criticism _ ACKNOWLEDGEMENT—Besides regular and special correspondents in New York, London, Boston, Philadelphia. Chicago and San Francisco, and occasional correspondents all over the world, MAGIC’S news service is obtained from the leading daily newspapers, and the theatrical and vaudeville press as represented by The Billboard. The New York Clipper, Variety, The Player and The Show World. And last, but not least. from our esteemed contemporary. The Mawical World. AccurAcy—The Publisher desires to make this magical news service dependable, and will be grateful when his attention is called to any misstatement of fact or errors of any kind. _ ADDRESS ALL CORRESPONDENCE to F. T. Singleton, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Ave.. Kansas City. Mo., U.S. A. DR. WILMAR’S SPIRIT PAINTINGS By Wiiliam R. Grace. Special Correspondent Mr. P. T. Selbit presented Dr. Wilmar’s Spirit Satay for the first time in America at Keith's Columbia theater, Cincinnati, Dec. 25. The act created considerable interest and was pronounced the avetine plicable mys- tery ever brought to Cincinnati. It is comparatively easy to produce spirit pictures in a darkened, silent room, where a collection of highly nervous and excitable people are gathered together, under depressing and uncomfortable circumstances, to wait for something they cannot very well define, but it requires mag- ic of a different sort to produce on blank canvasses in the glare of full light, celebrated paintings chosen by the audience. This beautiful mystery act is the Invention of Dr. Wilmar (William Marriot) and is presented hy P. T. Selbit, one of England's cleverest conjurers, and formerly editorofThe Wizard. Selbit has been presenting the pictures with great success in England and on the Continent for the} past sevenor eight months. The picture reproduced here is from a \ SPIRIT PAINTING photograph of a= spirit painting made at a press performance at the London Pavilion last summer. A newspaper representative asked for the fa- mous Rokeby Venus to be materialized. A blank canvas was chosen, placed ina frame with a brilhant light behind, and the beautiful picture shown here slowly made its appearance. Ina play ful mood, the “‘spirits’” had added the portrait of the artist, Velasquez. in the corner. The secret of this beautiful effect is simple, like all good magic, but it is not my intention to reveal it. Selbit steps on the stage in the full glare ofthe limelight and invites anybody in front to come onthe stage and examine the

Page 224

MAGIC 95 blank canvasses. They can select and mark them as they choose, and can remain on the stage until the end of the act. The audience is then asked Whether they desire any particular picture to be produced, or whether they would prefer an example of any artist, living or dead. To help them in the Selection, screens are exhibited containing the names of many well-known painters and the titles of their favorite works. The audience is not tied down to this list. They can come prepared with special requests. Everything being ready, the ‘‘seance’’ starts, and in full public view the desired picture begins to appear, and in from fiftv to sixty seconds is com- pleted. There is always something weird and uncanny connected with slow music as a stage adjunct, and sure enough, a creepy feeling pervades the auditorium as the picture begins to materialize in obedience to Mr. Selbit’s command, The pictures are finished with a wealth of color, shade and detail that is most astounding. The voluntary inspectors pass beneath the easel and hold their hand behind the canvas during the period of operation—keeping It in sight all the time -but nothing suspicious can be observed. A powerful are light illumines the canvas from the back all the time. TREBOR (Mr. J. J. Brown, Secretary of the Society of Twin City Magici- ans), contributed his act of manipulation and standard magic to the big en- tertainment given for the benetit of the Newsboy's Club, St. Paul, Dec. 10. He has been kept busy all season plaving club and society dates. The Christmas week New York All-star Bill contained the following acts: Silhouette Harlequinade, Pewitt, Bert Levy, Kara. CLIVETTE, the Man in Black, is planning a trip around the world to last two years. Ele willbe accompanied by Mme. Clivette, the Veiled Prophetess, and a clever supporting company who will introduce magic, mind reading and shadowgraphy. A HARLEQUINADE IN BLACK AND WHITE, being an old-style pantomine silhouetted on a screen, was one of the Christmas week novelties in New York at the American, The Clown, Pantaloon, Harlequin and Columbine, in ex- travaygant make up and funny actions, were all there. Amusing effects were obtained by jumping over the light. The diversion proved a seasonable one. Produced by Karno'’s English Comedians. RAMESES, one afternoon during his recent Minneapolis engagement, pro- duced a living Santa Claus from his magic cabinet. All the children present were invited on the stage to receive a gift. The banquet given by the SOCIETY OF TWin Crry MAGICIANS at Rogers Hotel, Dec. 20, was attended by over forty members and invited guests. A brilliant program of magic was run off, HakRY Hovubuini stirred up a lot of excitement at the Holborn Empire, London, last month, by protesting on the stage against the effort ofthe thea- ter management to intimidate him by refusing to let him appear after being announced. Patt LA CrRoIXx, juggler, at the Majestic. Milwaukee, Dec. 12-17. HENRY YONKERS, juyyler, at Cumberland, Md., last month. CAFFREY AND GALLEY, jugglers, at the Majestic, Toronto, Nov. 28- Dec. 3. THe WHEELERS, novelty jugglers, at the Colonial, St. Louis, Dee. 5-10, RHOAD'S MARIONETTS were touring cities in Maine last month.

Page 225

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 96 MAGIC A BRILLIANT SEASON FOR HOWARD THURSTON HOWARD THURSTON and his big magic show played the twin cities of St. Paul and Minneapolis to crowded houses nightly, Dec. 26-Jan. 7. The famous Rellar-Thurston *'Mantle’’ poster used by Thurston since Kellar’s. retire- Ment is reproduced on this page. It will soon become as fa- miliar to the theater- going public as the famous *'Mephisto’* hthograph used by the late Alexander Herrmann, which a- dorned the cover of MAGIC'S first issue. It is a pleasure to see the enthusiastic appreciation which greets Thurston ev- erywhere. His) ven- tlemanly | manners, and engaging stave presence carries an appeal with it) that makes a great many friends for him. Kel- lars prediction that Phurston will be the yvreatest maygi- cian the world has ever known,'’ bids fair to become a fact in so far that he is rapidly becoming the most) popular one. Dates for January are as follows: Indi- anapolis, 9-14; Peo- ria, Illinois, 16-18: ee) pe ELLER eave. Springteld, Ih, 19- EE wate width Sroete 21; St. Louis, 23-2s; do ee Cineinnati, 30- Feb. 4. Mr. A. C. Boese, THE KELLAR- THURSTON UMANELE® POSTER Frebor,”” sends us the following account of Thurston's show, seen by him ‘Tuesday evening during Christmas week In St. Paul: ‘‘His opening is as last vear, “*Magicuns Past and Present: "’ alter this his inimitable card passes. ‘Vhe changing ducks and the Diogenes tub or barrel were put on, finishing with that illusion of beauty, ‘The Levi- tation of Princess Karnac.’* ‘This to my mind the prettiest of allacts in mag- IC and put on as he puts it on, it is grand. His first part closes as follows: The fortune telling ball, the spirit cabinet, the crystal cage and the amus- ing effect ofa person's hair raising: then the final production of a large duck from his coat. ' Uhe Lady and the Lion’ was the opening hit of the second half, and received merited applause. ‘Pheo, Bamberg then presented about filtcen minutes of as clever shadowgraphy as it has been my good fortune to (Coneluded om pase LO)

Page 226

MAGIC 97 WITH THE NOVELTY ENTERTAINERS Taur, handcuff and milk can escape expert, says she was restrained from going on with her performance by the police of Wallaceburg, Ont., after making ap announcement regarding the dangerous nature of her act. SEVERUS SCHAFFER, juggler, a new one, at the Coliseum, London. He will co over the Moss-Stoll tour. AUSTRALIAN WHEELERS, hoop manipulators, at the Orpheum, Denver, Dec. 5-10. POLLARD, comedy juggler, at the Yong Street, Toronto, Can., Dec. 5- 10. JACK and VIoLeET KELLY, Australian whip manipulators, at Shea's, Tor- onto, Can., Dee. 5-10. Joun H. CocGhnisx, human dynamo, at Richmond, Ind., Dec., 5-10, Gives scientific exhibition of the electric chair and does an electric lighted club-swinging: act. GLOCKEN NOVELTY JUGGLERS at the Colonial, Lawrence, Mass., Nov. 28-Dec. 3. KARA, juggling, at the American Music Hall, Chicago, Nov. 21-26. THE ALPHAS, hoop rollers, at the Orphem, Kansas City, Dec. 5-10. They are soon due in the East where their sensational act will surprise. Voura, electric marvel, extra attraction with The Midnight Maidens, at the Gayety, Detroit, Dec. 5-10. BRINDAMOUR, handcuff expert, at the Nickel, Lawrence, Mass., Dec. 5-10, SAM RUSSELL, plate spinner, at the Ninth and Arch Street) Museum, Philadelphia, Pa. SELMA BRAAYTZ, who has added soap bubbles to her juggling act, will sail for Europe Jan. 31. HARDEEN at the Chutes, San Francisco, Dec. 5-10. Path Spapont, jugyler, at Keith's, Philadelphia, Dec. 5-10. THE ARVI Mystery, a Paris novelty, at the American, New York, Nov. 21-26, It represents the latest developments in living pictures. Pictures grow from nothing, coming and going without apparent chanye of scenery or per- sonages. The effect suggests Kellar’s ‘‘Blue Room."’ IRWIN'S PUNCH AND JUDY at the Ninth and Arch Street Museum, Phila- delphia, last month. GEORGE Moore, juggler, at the Avenue Grand, Washington, 1D. C., Nov. 28- Dec. 3. Boyer BROTHERS, Hoop Rolling and Juggling, atthe Erie, Chicago, Nov. 2s- Dec. 3. One works straight and the other makes up as a tramp. The co- median yuveles cannon balls and catches them at the back of his neck. Both manipulate hoops and clubs skillfully.

Page 227

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS QS MAGIC A SPECTACULAR HOOP ROLLING ACT THE RINADLOS, spectacular transformation, ‘“Phe Dawn of Davin Flower- land," at the Hamlin, Chicago, Dec. 12-17. Pheir first seenie production was “The Vineyard of Dreams.’” which was followed by a series: of beautifully laid: pictures, including ‘Phe Nivhtingale’s Paradise,” ‘Birth of Spring,” “Rairviand,’” and finally, ‘'The Dawn of Dav in Flowerland.” ‘Phese ple- tures consist of voreeous scenic effects, which are brought out beautifully by colored lights, Phe hoop-rolling was very well executed, and the ditticult feats were well applauded. At Fargo, ND. Dec. 19-24. Winniper to follow. ROLAND ‘TRAVERS, illusionist extraordinary, at the American, Chicago, Dec. 19-24, i GARDO, mavician, at the Casino, Washington, Dee. 12-17, T. NELSON Dowss is working his way East on the Orpheum Circuit with his ‘Cotn King’ act. The New York magical colony will soon see RAMESES. He is just: finish- Ing a wonderful trip on the Orpheum Circuit. ZISKA AND SAUNDERS, at the National, New York, Dee. 5-7. SUREN, European prestidigitatenr, ato the American, Chicazo, Nov. 2S- ’ Dec. 3. PROF, HAWE,magician, is the mystery man with Bailey's Southern Speci- alty Company. AtOnconta, Alas, Dee. E> BAR THOLINE isalso with the show, doing cartoons, A LIFELIKE MANIKIN During one of the performances of FEWELL'S MANTKINS at the Orpheum, Oakland, last month, a cord operating one of the manikins broke, allowing the figure to fall to the floor with a resounding crack. Seated in a box with her mother, a little girl, who lad been an admiring and interested Spectator, ho doubt thinking the figure was a live personage, and that it had been se- verely injured, burst into tears, which were found impossible to stop. Mrs. Jewell, hearing of the litthe one’s grief, had her brought behind the scenes and showed her that the tteure was wood, which sufficed to assuage the child's grief, Mrs. Jewell considered it one of the greatest compliments she ever received for the lifelike work of her manikins. Kus Ling Poy, illusionist, has in preparation anew act ofmystery, The Man of a Hundred Faces,"" which he will present at the end of his present bookines, which run to July 2. Bight people, special scenic and electrical ef- feets will be used. Cakh Her rz, iusion show, at the Canterbury Musie Hall, London. Does The Bridal Chamber, a good vanishing bird cage, and “‘Stoombaika.’’ the vlass hat, where the assistant appears. CHESTER, mitvician, in Chicago during the holidays, is Justin the middle of forty weeks of wood time throuweh the Central Stages in his plavlet, ‘the Dashtnetons. PRok BRATAWS EDtcarep FLEAS are being exhibited in the lobbies of some bie Rastern vaudeville houses. At Keith's, Boston, Dec. 1-17. 4 pri- vate press extibition is given on Sundays. Opera classes are supplied

Page 228

a me 8 MAGIC. MAGIC Q9 JUPITER BROTHERS, cowboy magicians, On opening bill at the just com- pleted New theater, Baltimore, Dee. bO-24. Mrs. |. M., Verret wife of Prof, J. Mo Vertelli, a magician, died Nov. 20. She had been an assistant to her husband. Phe son, Pharry, was a marion- cette worker and tire king. Te GREE BEboN, in lis protraval of famous macicians, at the Family theater, Biuittalo, NooY., Dee. 3-10, VAN LEAR AND Rowe cet some extra laughs fortheir macie with a roost- er and duck, At the Palaee, Philadelphia, Nov. 28-Deec. 3. Orro. TPRISSPMAN, inventor of the ‘Neal’ ihusion, will come to America soon With a new alusion, THE GREAT SAHERA, Hlusionist, at the Orpheum, Newark, O., Now, 2S- Dee. 3. JOouUNNY WOLLEAMS, Chinese magical act, at the Manhattan theater, New York, Dec. 12-17. Llowakb VHURSTON cave a benefit: performance for the Santa Claus As- sochition While playing Akron, O). Tht GReEArY CLIVERTE, magician and shadoweraphist, atthe New Amert- can, Davenport, Lowa, Dee. 19-24. Path Poon, magician, atthe Victoria Roof Garden, New York, Dec. 19-2-4, ADELAIDE HERRMANN, as “Cachostro, the Masterof Mysteries,” at the Pol, Scranton, Par, dec. LO-24. A HUMAN ADDING MACHINE MARVELOUS GRIFFITH, human adding machine, at the Orpheum, San Fransisco, Dee. 1o-24 Vlas act seems tobe a decided novelty. Griffith CAr- thur Grittithy multiples a row of nine figures with a row of nine figures in- stantancously without pencil or paper. Looks like William Jennings Bryan, only younger. All talking is done by an assistant, an immaculate young man who emits mild badinage withan air of supernal wisdom. Grittith has a good system of telling the number of children ina family, and gets a great ‘deal of merriment out of it. bells ina flash the dav of the week upon which any date eiven by the audience fell. Is the real thing, being well known to math- comaticans throughout the country, Datas, the memory man, is back in London from Australia. Loto rik Mysric, mental suge¢estion, at Polis, Bridgeport, Conn., Dee. 19-24, ‘The Zanctzs open fan. Oat the Willard theater, Clicage, They will put yao month around the Windy City. Lora, encased ina biv parrot frame, answered questions and deseribed articles placedin a small box taken around the audience at the City theater, New York, Dee. 12-17. Ciavssino produced his new subjects, worked out with his hands and feet, at the Vietoriat, Dee. a- bo.

Page 229

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Loo MAGIC THE “EVA FAYS CLASH IN CHICAGO ANNA Eva Fay and Eva Fay clashed last month in Chicago, An inypune- tion was obtained by Anna Eva Fay's manager, who was appearing at Hain- lin's,preventing Eva lav from using the hilling of Anna Eva Fay. Eva bay was atthe Casino at the time and the billing apnounced Anna Eva Fay. After the injunction was served, this was changed te plain ‘Eva Fay," and ‘Mysterious Eva Fay.’ PROGRAMME OF GUSTAVE FASOLA & CO. At the New Cross Empire, London, Nov. 7, l9t0. Po Oriental music rise of curtain shows stage set with Eastern scenery. A model of a balloon and car is suspended at rear in recess hung with black cloth. Pwo Hindoo cools ap- proach bearing a palanquin. Fasola steps out of it closing door behind him. .\t- tendant then shows all sides of the palanquin. At the sound of a gong, a lady suddenly jumps out. She is then strapped to a board standing on four small rollers, and lifted into a cabinet standing to one side. Curtains of cabinet are drawn, the gong sounds again, and one of the assistants is discovered strapped to the board in place of the lady. A darge bowl of water is then produced on atable from under a silk cloth. The balloon comes next. A voung lady gets into the carofthe airship and suddenly vanishes, the car falling to the Moor simultaneously. A vase is filled with water and a number of small flags, quite dry, are taken out and placed ona small table. The flags are then gathered together and a large silk ban- ner produced, which is hung across the stage. Performer next transforms a soup plate Into a small pagoda from which a lot of paper ribbon is pulled and thrown into a tub on a small stool. The gong again, and instantly three ducks appear through the paper in the tub. Ona low, elevated platform, a small tent is erected. From this a young lady appears wearing a black hat of enormous size. The ‘“Pwentieth Cen- tury Handkerchief comes next and then a lady is magically produced from a box, previously shown empty and lined with glass in front of the audience. An assistant brings forward an oblony elass case hlled with cloth balls. “Phese are all shot into a cviindrical metal case in hands of Fasola. Suddenly the balls are seen to be back in the glass box, which is held by an assistant, while two large bird caves are taken from the evlinder. Next, a skeleton cabinet, on four legs clear of the table, is introduced, proved empty and covered up by curtains. When the inside is again shown, a big cage is discovered suspended from the top with a young lady within. Then two small birds are taken from a cage and put into a paper bag. The cage is taken to pieces and put together again, Without covering, a pistol shot blows the bag to pieces and apparently transports the birds back to the cae. The orthodox ‘‘bridalchamber™” is next presented. Fasola steps into the chamber and does a conple of small tricks. Performer borrows a hat and pro- ceeds to catch money from the air. He also finds money in caps of members of the audience, ete. Coming back to the stage, he appears to throw handfuls of coms inte the air, Before returning hat to owner he removes a few small alarmclocks, and tuadly a solid cannon ball. His concluding cffort is tiring a lady from a cannon intothe inner of three boxes, which had been suspended from fies right through the performance. Ik ANK Hlewes was at the Eden Musee, New York, recently, featuring the target trick, SYLVESTER was at the Bismarck Garden, Brooklwn, Nov. 28-Dee, 3. nen st fer — oe ee

Page 230

MAGIC 101 JACK ARK IN CHICAGO JACK ARK reached Chicago with his diabolo spinning act. Had a prominent position on a bill at the American Music Hall, Nov, 28-Dec. 3. Has excel- lent control of the spools and shows something new in having them ‘loop the loop,’ doa ‘seven loop loop” and make one run from the stage toa position in the rear of the auditorium near the spotlight. THe GREAT Mysro is touring Canada with his company of novelty enter- tainers, FRANK Bairrz, son of the famous SIGNOR BLirz, a noted magician of his day, died in New Orleans, Nov, 22. Mrs. Blitz will continue to reside in New Orleans at 121 South Johnson Street. HoLDEN AND LE CLAIRE, comedy magic and shadowgraphy, at the Co- lonial, Philadelphia, Nov. 28-Dec. 3. Miks. ROSALIE HERRMANN, wife of Carl Herrmann, died Oct. 9, at Dresden, Saxony, after a bricf illness. THe GREAT SAVANT is back in New York from a Brazilian tour. FRANK M. Linpscey, of thimble manipulating fame, is filling a respon- sible position with the Proctor & Gamble Co., Cincinnati, O. A commercial line nav pay better than magic, but Frank is sure to return to the fold. KvROGA AND His Mystics at the Victoria, Baltimore, Dec. 5-10. THE GREAT NiICoLo broke all records for box receipts and length of en- vayement at the Lyceum, Shanghai China, during his engagement there. Hongkong follows, with Manila later, at the Grand Opera House. LAWRENCE CRANE was among the Americans whe contributed tothe suc- cess of a Vaudeville Club smoking concert several weeks ago in London. DARIO, Spanish magician, at the Opera House, Palmyra, N. Y., Dec. 12. I ] , EXPOSING MAGIC IN THE PHILLIPINES PROF. GRossI, magican, received much publicity in the Manila papers for his expose of the mystifving masterpieces s of the Great Nicola, who has met with great success in all the erties he has shown in the Orient. Grossi beyan a three nights’ engagement at the close of Nicolo’sseason. A leading Manila paper of Nov. 4 said: ‘*Woe betide the next Natasa who makes his appearance in Manila soon, after the expose of the Great Nicola by Prof. Grossi, Who opened athree nights’ engagement at the Grand Opera House, Oct. 3t. Grossi notonly showed up some of Nicola’s tricks, which mystified everyone in Manila, but he showed sone brand ue ones of his own. ‘The principal trick exposed was the milk canescape. Grossi, assisted by Mlle. Renee, per- formed the same stunt and then leas how it was done. The Chinese ring trick also appeared simple, also the trunk mystery, which was performed by Grossi in less time than it took Nicola and was exposed in full view of the audience. Phis was followed by an expose of the packing case trick, Grossi escaping after being nailed inside the case.” Grossi has been touring the provinces of the Phillippine Islands ander the direction of Louis M. Levy, formerly owner and manager of the Orpheum theater, in Manila, The tour has been a successful one and Grossi will visit China and Japan early in the New Year.

Page 231

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 102 MAGIC HENKELA, comedy magician, at the Bijou, Bavonne, N. J., Dee. 19-24. TED PETERS, comedy magician, at the Lyric, Bavonne, N. J. Dee. 19-2-4. GERMAIN Is Now plaving dates in Florida. VANDER Roors at Hathway's, New Bedford, Mass., Dec. 19-24. CREO puzzled them at the Park, Younystown, O., Nov, 28-Dec. 3. ““PHe WoMAN IN THE CASE," an illusion, at the American, New York, Dec. 12-17. ALLAN SHAW finally landed in New York after his Western tour, and was at the American Dec. 12-17. MARTIN AND MAXMILIAN were at the Orpheum, Denver, several weeks avo, THE GREAT BARNETTI AND CO., black art act, at the Colonial, Richmond, Va., Nov. 28-Dee. 3. JARROW worked his famous lemon trick at the Columbia theater, St. Louis, Nov, 28-Dec. 3. ALBINI voton the Chicago, All-star Vaudeville Bill Dee. 19-24. He was at the Trevett for the week. VAN HoOvEN at Keith's, Columbus, O., Dec. 5-10, THE GREAT ASAHI, Japanese water act, at the Orpheum, Los Angeles, Dec. 12-17. The fourth annual dinner of Tae MaGie CIRCLE, London, was held Now, 26, KOBERTS AND Co., mavicians, at Grand Island, Nebr., Dec. 22-24. Vicrork, magician, at Bardolph, Hl Dec. 24. DANIEL, magician, at Greenwood, S. C., Dec. 20-21. CRAWFORD, mavician, at Marinette, S. C., Dee. 22-23. RAMESES, “Fyevptian Temple of Mystery,” atthe Orpheum, Des Moines, Dee. 5-10, JAMES HARRINGTON, magician, opened his season at Clyde, N. Y., on Dec. 16. HeENELLA, magic and dluaions, on Shea and Shay Circuit. Path KLEIST at Star, Chicagco, Dec. 5-10, Htrkbtn, dlustonist, with the Gladys Klark Co. HlORNMANN at the Whitney, Fitchburg, Mass., recently. FRIZZO, Ttahan magician, now in Cuba, will return to New York in January. HERBERT Brooks, trunk mystery, at the Grand, New York, recently. KAGO, wonder worker, atthe Victoria Roof Garden, New York, Dec, 5-10. HeNRY CLIVE at Keith's Hippodrome, Cleveland, O., Dee. 12-17.

Page 232

MAGIC lo3 PROGRAMME OF SATANI From The Magical World. by courtesy of Max Sterling At the Oxford Hall, London, Nov. 19, 1910. “This act is introduced ina very novel manner by Satani, attired in conv entional evening dress, coming through the front curtain and explaining the mise-en-scene of his act. Ina few well-chosen words he explains that the show is the interior of a conyjur- ing depot, and the hour midnight. He, accompanied by an uncouth eompan- Ion, breaks into the premises with intent to commit burglary, but being an old magician he determines to have a little amusement amony the various pieces of paraphernalia instead. He, in conclusion, asks the audience to take his word of honor that he duplicates hone of the characters used in his sketch, there being really but one monkey, one burglar, one policeman, one lady, and himself. Retiring through the curtain, a few seconds later the setting of the sketch is revealed to us, on a partly-lighted stage. A taut rope, in front centre of staye, is provided to enable a ‘man monkey" to perform upon, and standing beside this rope we see a liveried attendant. After performing a few very clever feats on the rope, the monkey descends to stage and executes a fine bit of pantomime with a roll of paper, after which he again climbs the rope. The hour of midnight chimes whilst the monkey performs, Suddenly lights go out, and Rattles and his assistant come upon scene. Raftles has donned mustache, beard, and a half-mask, and makes his entrance as a swell cracks- man in silk hat and opera cloak. Lights are turned on, and assistant pets straightway to work on an iron safe standing in wings on left side of stage. Sundry notes are rifled from safe and handed to Satani, but he disdains them altogether. At this instant the pair are surprised by a police whistle. Going tothe front of a skeleton cabinet, surrounded by a vauze-like curtain, he sets fire to some chemical device and waits the entrance of the policeman. Immediately the policeman sights Raffles, he says ‘‘thands up,’’ but Satani hastens to the front of cabinet and stands between it and gauze. Policeman advances to take him, but is prevented by a blinding flash of light, which, although instantaneous, has enabled Raffles to vanish. Before the police- man has recovered his surprise, Satani steps out of a cage on. opposite side of stage. A struyule ensues between policeman and Satani, the policeman being finally forced into the cage just vacated by Satan. The monkey now rolls out of safe, and seeing Raffles’ assistant, the two struggle. Raffles opening the door of cage reveals a pretty young lady in place of policeman. Satini, hearing the approach of policeman closes himself in the cage, but the policeman sees him go in and makes sure he has his man this time. On opening the cage door, however, he realises that the cracksman has again eluded him. No sooner has policeman turned to search for the missing Raf- fles, than we see the latter open the door of cage and shake his fst at the constable. .A second later Satani ayain steps fromthe cage, and picking po- iceman up in hisarms, he proceeds with the aid of his assistant to force dhe “limb of law’ into a barrel and close both ends with paper. Despite these precautions, monkey breaks through paper in place of constable. Monkey is now placed in cabinet on opposite side of stage and curtains lowered round him. This cabinet is about two feet off the stage, and monkey shows he is there to last second by placing his head through opening in curtain, vet a pistol shot causes curtains to fall and show cabinet empty. “To prove the monkey is really non est, the cabinet is taken to pieces, A large ornamental! star which has been suspended in air right thtough act is next lowered to stave. Constable and Raftles now struggle. Raftles finally hypnotises the policeman and determines to make short work of him by firing him from a larve cannon. Picking the constable bodily up, le thrusts him into the muz- we ofthe cannon, leaving his arms protruding. Monkey again appears from

Page 233

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS an a e s core ] Zz wer 1o4 MAGIC safe, and is invited by Raftles to accept a cup of tea, whichis poured out bw the cracksman,. ‘The tea, however, turns to dour, which is smeared all over the monkey's mouth. Phis is a most ingenious incident, as will be noted a a few moments. Door in star is opened and monkey stands inside. Rattle shakes constables hand and then applies match to ‘touch hole, meredron aloud report is heard. Immediately star is opened, and there stands the po- iceman, Another struvele between the pair, and monkey steps out of can- non, still with four on head, proving no duplicate is used. Another pistol shot at star, and out steps Rattles’ assistant, and star ayain pulled into: mid air. Rattles, burglar, monkey, and policeman joi hands and take curtain. As a last effect, Rattles fires at star and mmediately itepenand reveals the young lady. ‘This act, from beginning to end, IS exe epuionally wood, both from audience’ s and technical point of view. Phe setting is in perfect harmony with the plot, and the various transpositions are accomplished with wonderful rapiditv. The act is distinctly original, and has this advantaye itleaves the audience thor- oughly bewildered, so smartly is it worked, A BRILLIANT SEASON FOR HOWARD THURSTON, Concluded from page see. “Phe Auto Mystery’’ is a quick change and a substitution, but it takes well and is well put on. The third part is his big illusion stuff, and the following effects were pre- sented: The glass trunk, ‘Prmsonerof Canton, “Phe Pterciny Arrow,’ the water from the cocoanut, “Phe Lady and the Boy.’ and the triple trunk mystery. His entire show was well received and the etfeets of the boy and girl with the egys, and the scared assistants were well worked and were a scream from start to finish.”” THe I Eotumons, handcutf and mystery, at Lubin’s, Baltimore, Md., Nov. 28- bec. 3. JAMES HARRIGAN ts still putting over the old) civar-box stunts with great success. He was on the bill at the Manhattan Opera House, New York, Dec. 5-10, De Lise, hehtuing juggler, at the Orpheum, Salt Lake City, Nov, 28- Dec. 3. THe Liserrs, a new European novelty jugging act is in] New York ar- ranging for time. LEE’S MARIONETTES at the Monticello, Jersey City, N. J., Dec. 12-17. THE PossinG AUSYTINS at the Bijou, Bavonne, N. J., Dee. 19-24, Hy Mack at the Orpheum, San Francisco, Dec. 19-24, Tom HEARNEIS domg a quick change act, introducing a little juggling at the Coltseum, London. WILL CAMPBELL, juggler, is filling a ten weeks engayementin England. SCHICHTLERS MARIONETTES at the Temple, Rochester, N. Y., Dec. 19-24, THE JUGGLING JOHNSONS at Loern'’s Seventh Ave., No Y., Nov. 27-30, JUGGLING JEWELS at the Manhattan Opera House, N.Y., Nov. 28-Dec.3. os ——— a

Page 234

-? © « MAGIC MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 105 ‘The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 vears) The “Invisible Aeroplane,’’ Handkerchief Trick, complete, $10.00. Finest Nickel Pedestal, to appear a silk in glass tum- bler, complete, $7.00. Hatton and Plate’s ‘“Magicians Tricks,”’ $1.75. Halley’s “‘Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ $1.00 and $1.15. Goldston’s “Young Conjuror,’’ $50 and $1.00. Goldston’s “More Tricks and Puzzles,’’ $.60. Expert Billiard Ball Manipu- lation, $1.00.) Medrington’s ‘‘Magician’s Book of Patter, $.50. Barnello’s ““Red Demons,’’ Fire King Book, $.50. “‘Satan Out- done,’’ New Marvelous Card Principle, $1.00. Leroy’s “‘Cag- liostro’’ Card Trick, any pack used, 4.50. Send 10c for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists: 50c for 212 page Il- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Magicians (London, Eng.) The pioneer of Conjuring Magazines. Its tenth successful year of publication, Oldest, brightest, best and most widely circulated monthly for magicians. The recognised Journal of the professional magician. Features every month—Original lessons in Magic, being illustrated explanations of all the latest tricks and stage illusions, Ex- planatory programmes of prominent magicians, showing the order of tricks eee with an explanation of each trick, etc. Sample copy. 6 1-2d (5 cts). Twelve months. 5 | 6 ($1.50). Table of Contents of the ten volumes maile free. American stamps and Dollar notes ac- cepted. STANYON & CO.. 76 Solent Road. West Hampstead. London, N. W., England. $25. 00 VALUE FOR $1.00 A $25 course in ‘‘Expert Billiard Ball Manipulation, as given at the leading New York Magical Studio. 100 Tricks and Sleights. 200 Beautiful Photographic Illustrations. 56 Original Tricks. 35,000 Words of Expert Instruction. Studio Edition, Enameled Art Paper, Lizard Shin Finish Art Covers, Gold Titles, Silk Bound. Most beautiful, unique and ar- tistic Mystery Volume yet produced. Price $1.00, postpaid. BURLING HULL CO., 393 4th St., Brooklyn, N. Y. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MaGic

Page 235

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS he MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Back Numbersof MAGIC “THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER JANUARY 1910 PRCT CENTS What A Conjurer Can Do By Oneal Sere The Marvelous Kiuing Canis of Josetfy Be tes PF Ahere VOLUME ONE READY BOUND IN CLOTH The first volume of Magie can now be had neatly bound in cloth with tithe page and index. bt con- sists of the frst six numbers, Jan- uary to June, [9LO, including the February number, Guosts, Price, SIO. SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and) May is- sues remain. They can be had. as long as the supply lasts, for 1a cents each. Complete vour tile before they are out of print. “A Few Copies of the Only Number of GHOSTS Issued The second issue l9TO) of MaGie was KIVe nthe title of Guosts. A few copies remain and can be had for lS cents, while they last, (february, [ee pr ies nati “The WS GHOSTS A MACAUSL OF CONTENTS ‘The Sphinx Riddle of — yet s AND REASON Hamanitv. Spectral Hhisions rn Medtaunns. Cover in four colors, Colored trontis- prece and 19 illustrations, Whteazine ever issued. oT. SINGLETON PUBLISHER Most unique “Vhread- ing the Mazes An Afternoonin A Miae- eal Library How - Became A Spirit — a FERROARY 1910" pore i. ig PRICT CENTS . E> Fis, Threading the: Mase’ oes i = 3619 ‘Thompson Avenue As Kansas City, Mo. The Vertigo of Sorcery saad Dota Se, - x Sone em se. sa,

Page 236

WC MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Special Limited Offer “Magician Annual” for 1907-08, 1908-09, 1909-10. The set of three, cloth bound, regular price $4.50, while they last $3.00. Down's ‘Art of Magic,” regular price $5.00, while stock lasts, $2.50. “Wrinkles” still selling at 50c the copy. ‘Magicians’ Tricks,’’ By Hatton & Plate, $1.60 Net, postage 12c extra. Catalogue 27 FREE Bargain sheet 3 The Bailey & Tripp Co. 24 Inman Street, Cambridge, A, Boston, Mass. The Magical World A WEEKLY REVIEW OF INTER- NATIONAL MAGIC AND KINDRED ARES —_ ) EDITED BY MAX STERLING Published every Wednesday. Yearly subscriptions, 2.00; single copies, 4 cents. All the magical news while it is hews, Kegular departments of ‘'Whiat Others are Dome,” * Practical Mavic,’ “Whereabouts, 7 ete. New tricks of merit ineverv number, Oulv weekly pa- perin the world devoted to the inter- ests of the miargielan and the macie art. Picker eee ele Will sineer up your interest im the ' subjeet every week. Sit down tenet and write for a sample copy. THe MAGICAL WORLD PUBLISHING COMPANY SX, Lawson Steet, Moss Stde, Manchester, Eneland. WWhictowertting teoadvertisers. Kindiv nrentien Movare

Page 237

The water miracle LEARN TO ENTERTAIN Instructive, entertaining and amusing. Kesults guaranteed with our Magic Tricks and Hlus- ions. We sell only the best Tricks and the ones that are easy to perform, and that require no skill, AU our directions are plain and in most cases illustrated. No Practice Required Send 2 cts. in stamps for our Free Supplementary Catalogue. Largest manu- facturers of Magic Tricks, Puzzles and Hlusions in the world. Mysto Mfg. Co. Factories: Westville Station New Haven, Conn, Card levitation MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Palladiny’s spirits “a ‘ . 1 x EA . ge ee we é Anarchist tstink) bombs af aw - aw oh . Aerial suspension Vhe caldron illusion When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Macte

Page 238

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER A FAIR, SQUARE, CLEAN MONTHLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ART AND CRAFT OF CONJURING “VISIONS” A SELBIT SPIRIT PAINTING FEBRUARY 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 239

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Entertain Your Friends at Your Homes There is no greater gift on carth than to be able to entertain. How many times have vou seen aclever Magician, and was mystified with his perform- ance—and the thought came to you, how | wish that I was clever! We offer the solution, You can be as clever. We offer the Greatest Card Pack for performing clever tricks ever invented. You require no skill at all. Full in- structions are sent for performing an entire evening. No sleight of hand manipulation necessary, vou get the pack of cards, read the instructions, and in five minutes vou will be able to entertain as clever as a professional mavician, THE LANIGIRO CARD PACK Price complete with all instructions, 31.00. Cards can be told) by mind reading. Carcs are ace to mse at con mand. Carcs selected appear in ve ur pocket. Cards placed in pack are mace to appear at top of pack at will cf the performer, A COMPLETE EN'LERTAINMENT OF MYSTERY. SEND ORDERS TO BAMBERG MAGIC COMPANY 1193 Broadway, New York Send for our bir Catalogue, 6000 Tricks. 10 cents, The Magical World A WEEKLY REVIEW OF INTER- ir: THe HES 7 siete reared — ' . é La AIN GS mace < EDITED BY ome MAX STERLING Published every Wednesday. Yearly subscriptions, $2.00; single copies, 4 cents. All the magical news while it is news. Reyular departments of ‘‘What j: _tovreere. o~ SS Others are Doing,’ ‘*Practical Mawic,"’ = eisai \ “Whereabouts, "ete. New tricks of | | ment inevery number. Only weekly pa- per in the world devoted to the inter- | ests of the magician and the magic art. ea aS Will ‘‘ginger up"’ vour interest) in the ‘ subject everv week. Sit down tonight and write for a sample copy. THE MAGICAL WORLD PUBLISHING COMPANY 8, Lawson Steet, Moss Side, Manchester, England. When writtns te advertisers Kindly mention Magic Mw The cauldron allusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers, Kindly mention Mace _—_—_s»s VT

Page 240

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 107 MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Biegest and best catalozue of high grade avical goods semt postpatd for 25. Magi clan's: Eleadquarters ino America. Reliable and trustworthy, Our woods are of the best workinapship. being famous for solid quality. oon ‘ . . . ee: The New Vantshing: Coin \ pocket trick that will wreaths please everyone, A heavy § lrass cap 1s wiven tor thorough exami- § nation, In the cap is a small hole, WO ing right through => it. Three <= coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them, Lifting the same im mediately. only twocoins are left. Nosleiuht of hand. Can be performed at once by any one. Price, complete, $1. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue, New York Learn Stunts in MAGIC You don’t know what you are missing if you are not in the Magic Game. A few good tricks with Cards, Coins, etc., carefully practiced and rehearsed, will af- ford a lot of entertainment, and the cost is small. Better send for my new ‘‘loose-leaf’’ Catalog of HIGH CLASS CONJURING TRICKS Practical tricks only. It’s free. Special attention paid to Amateurs. Satisfaction guaranteed. DONALD HOLMES Box 32+, Kansas City, Missour1 When writing to advertisers kindly mention M vac MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 241

10S MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS “" Night with the Moon \ PARLOR PRESENTATION OF “A NIGHDP WETH THE MOON” } wi oan is ; : COs °L, k ; 99 A Practical Lightning “*Chalk- Falk for Amateurs By 1 SELBIT The Jane, 110, number of Masre, containing P. T. Selbit’s splendid ‘chalk talk,’ ““A Night With The Moon,”’ being now out of print, the publisker has reprinted the sketch in attrac- tive pamphlet form. In this unique entertainment, Mr. Selbit presents a practical form of lightning sketch work that anyone, be he or she never so ignorant of the art of sketching, may produce without much practice, and provoke considerable merriment. Price 10 cents, postpaid. F. T. SINGLETON, Publisher 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. w The ealdron tlhusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC oe eee Digitized by \aO ‘@) pe le --—s FF |

Page 242

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 11 CONTENTS FOR FEBRUARY, 1911 A DISAPPEARING BIRD CAGE Davip DEVANT 111 Ilustrations from photographs. THE MAGIC OF SPIRITUALISM 113 Hlustrations from photographs. A TELEPATHIC CARD T. C. Bonnety 11s A CIGAR BOX SERVANTE MAX STERLING 119 Illustration from a drawing. AN EFFECTIVE ROPE RELEASE = A. E. Broom 121 Iustrations from drawings. By A. E. Bloom. ONE HUNDRED TRICKS WITHOUT SLEIGHT OF HAND. II. [22 Hlustrations from photographs. WHAT EVERY CONJURER SHOULD KNOW, II. 125 Hlustrations from photographs. SECOND SIGHT CARD DIVINATION M. MicHEL 126 A MONTH OF MAGIC | 127 HORACE GOLDIN'S NEW MAGICAL PLAY S. A. M. MAGICAL CARNIVAL : THURSTON'S COMPLETE PROGRAMME Copyright. 19th. by FE. T. Singleton. MAaGic is published on the first of every month except July and August by F. T. Singleton, 4619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. YEARLY SUBSCRIPTIONS, 31.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. ADVERTISING, $5.00 a pave; smaller space proportionately. ADDRESS all business and editorial communications to F. T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER Wwi9 THOMPSON AVENUE, KANSAS CITY, MISSOURL U.S.A.

Page 243

The Publisher Says Still growing. 36 pages this month. Three times the size of the October number. At its present rate of growth, Maaic will soon double its present size. Compare this number with the first number issued a year ago. Then try to see what this paper will be in 1912 if the improvement is as great during the present vear. This number completes the publisher’s original con- tract to supply 12 numbers for a dollar. Therefore all the original subscribers who have not already renewed will please note that this will be the last number they will receive. For the first time the publisher is obliged to apoligize for the presswork on his paper, this number being marred by poor printing on some of the pages. This was due to the phenomenal weather conditions effect- ing the ink rollers of his press before he could obtain new ones. Although several additional pages were added to this number it was found necessary at the last moment to omit some of the very best features, including much late magical entertaining news and illustrated department of ‘‘New Tricks from the Dealers.’? Room will be found next mouth for this last feature. F. T. SINGLETON ww The caldron allusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers, kindly mention Mage —— tee eer x= ry

Page 244

MAGIC VOLUME II FEBRUARY, 181 NUMBER 11 A Disappearing Bird Cage EpDiroRIAL Nore. ‘This splendid parlor illusion has been the star item on the editor's programme for several years. If it looks difficult to you, or imperfect in any way, please bear in mind that your editor has performed itmany times right under people's noses in a crowded room, and has never failed to make ita convincing demonstration of his mayical powers, and has always receiveda great round of applause. Let me add here that few tricks appear in MaGic that have not been tried out and actually performed before spectators. Credit for the invention of the trick goes to Mr. David Devant, and the following description is mostly in his own words. PIG. WRAPPIAG UPOLHE GAGE Hilt conjurer brings forward a litthe wooden bird cage with a living bird init. He hands the cage round y for inspection, Opens out a copy of She Saturday W Avene Post on the top of his table, tears out some 2 SS of the sheets and carefully wraps up the cage in one of them. Holding the cage thus, in both hands, he advances (i eer eS

Page 245

112 MAGIC towards the spectators, and asks two persons, one on either side of him, to hold his wrists. In spite of the difficulty of the feat which he has set for himself the conjurer once more tri- umphs, for he suddenly squashes the paper into a ball and throws it into the air. The cage has absolutely disappeared, and, with a polite bow to his audience, the conjurer follows suit. A copy of Che Saturday Hvening Post, or any large popular periodical, is pre- pared in the following man- ner: [wo or three of the mid- dle sheets are removed with- out disturbing the wire bind- ing: staples. These are after- wards laid in loosely and used in Wrapping up the cage. Now another double page shéet is taken out and backed up with white linen to strengthen it. (ffor a single performance of the trick the linen reinforcing could possibly be dispensed with.) In the center of one page a stiff plece of cardboard about nine inches square 1s glued on the linen, and another double sheet 1s taken out of the middle of the paper and pasted over the linen and cardboard. The conjurer now has two double sheets from the Jest pasted together with a piece of linen between them and a piece of card- board between them on one side. The edges of the linen should be trimmed neatly to the size of the paper sheets. Another piece of cardboard, about nine by seven inches, 1s covered on both sides by odd pieces from the pages of the Post and fastened to the first piece by gluing on a hinge of strong linen at the bot- tom edge. Now, when the paper is held up, this piece of card- board falls down by its own weight. Two white tapes are then FIG. 2. CAGE ON SHELF. passed through it, and attached to the cardboard tn the paper. so that the flap is held out at right angles to the paper. Thus, when the paper interleaved with linen is placed on a table so the part prepared with cardboard hangs over the edge, the flap of cardboard talls down and torms a little shelf (See Fig. 2.) This prepared sheet of paper is folded again with the shelf flap inside, and bound back in the center of the /’os¢, The wire staples can be bent out for this purpose and then bent back securely. The several loose sheets of double pages are then laid in’ be- tween the prepared sheets without being secured by the staples. Along the top edge of the prepared paper, several sheets back The ealdron itusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MaGic —_—se “SF ww

Page 246

MLAGIC 113 from the cover, astrip of cardboard about nine tnches long 1s glued, ana ve the extreme ends of this strip of cardboard two drawing pins, or thumb tacks, must be placed. A small wooden bird cage ie a bird in it will be required, In laving the Jes? on the table for the performance of the trick, the thumb tacks must be pressed firmly into the table, and the periodical placed so that the hinge of the paper will be ay cust the edge of the table. “Twill show you a little experment,” says the conjurer, “with an ordinary bird, a canary. Tkeep him in this cage, so that he mav not fly away, but LT can assure you that it would be quite a simple matter to do the trick without the cage. Per- haps you would tke to ¢xamine the cage.” (llere the conjurer passes it round for examination.) “Now, Lam going to wrap the cage in this ptece of paper, because the bird won't do what I want him to unless he is in the dark.’’ (ilere he pulls out one of the inner loose sheets which vou will remember are im our prepared Jost, Tle takes it out in such a way that the prepared side of the paper which is fixed with drawing-pins drops over at the back of the table. Ifthe cardboard shelt has been fixed properly, it stands out by its own weight directly the paper falls down.) Phe conjurer makes a great show of wrapping the eage tn the loose paper (hig. 2), and takes an opportunity of letting the cage drop on to the shelf. Tf the sheet of paper has been nicely pressed round the cage beforehand, it will retain the shape of the cage. Tfolding the paper thus, the conjurer goes down to the audience and asks two members to hold his wrists. Tle then calls attention to the difficulttes ander which he has placed himself, aneb with a rapid movement of the hands, squashes the paper together, and throws rt away. Phe cage and bird have vanished instantaneously. Phe audience should now be dnastate of great bewilderment. The conjurer returns to the stage, bows, and retires, peli - ; Re pe, oot. ak : Phe Magic of Spiritualism [lke study of spiritualism is a fascinating pursuit, no matter from which pomt of view you start mnvesti- ee cations. In many circles mecdiumistic phenomena ( eh has of course been acce pted as an absolute fact, and = Ur It is impossible to dismiss the sworn testimony of eminent men with a wave of the hand. So long ago as L869 pa- pers were read betord the Dialectical Society on the possi ality of obtatming written communications from beyond. This carries us past the region of dabbling with a toy, or plaything, Wheth- MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 247

11-4 MAGIC er the agency by which such things are accomplished is natural or supernatural, itis certain that trustworthy, sclentifiC men-~— “cranks,’’ perhaps, upon this one subject—-have certified to the phenomena happening. VTheretore, when we were contronted with the announcement that Mr. P. T. Selbit proposed to materialize spirit paintings in the full glare of the toothghts upon the stage of the Or- PART PARLOR’ OF THE BANGS SISTERS. SPIRIT PICTURE MEDIUMS pheum Theater, Kansas City, we thought the opportunity for an interesting and unbiased investigation had arrived. Let us say right here that we were not mistaken. The more you probe this subject the more interesting does it become. To start with, you are face to tace with a mystery. The detection of crime ts not halt so absorbing as the attempt to pierce the veil between the known and the unknown. Moreover, the sordidness of the furmeris unhealthy, and in the latter, the environment charms. In Mr. Selbit’s mystery you see the thing happen betore your eyes. [hen you are invited to solve the riddle. The pertor- mance does not end there, for the whole thing is repeated de- tail tor detail, and, if you desire it, you may impose your own The cauldron dlusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Magi

Page 248

MAGIC Lio conditions. All the evidence and every clue that 1s possible ts right there under your nose. You do not have to go searching for something that a criminal may have tried to hide with hendish cunning. On the other hand you have a polite, urbane and interesting individual in the person of the performer to as- sist your Investigation, an entertainer Whom you may cross ex- amine to your heart's content. We started out with the full in- ‘+ SELBED SPIRIT PAINTING SBAACE, tention of discovering how it was possible to take an unpre- pared canvas, and in full view, cause a beautiful reproduction of any old masterpiece to appear in lasting colors on its sur- face. Perhaps we tried Mr. Selbit with the impertinence of our questions and the length of our interview. If we did, he has an elegant manner of concealing his impatience. If we did not, he has acquired the philosophy of Job. Our investigations began at the matinee. They continued in Mr. Selbit's dressing-room, were prolonged at the night show, and they are not yet com-- pleted. If you think the canvases are prepared Mr. Selbit begs you to help yourself to as many as you please and have them an-

Page 249

116 MAGIC alysed If you find any preparation of any kind you will be rewarded for your trouble with S500 for each canvas that will not stand the test. We were asked to Inspect SIX Canvases and see them carried on to the stage for the show. To make sure they were not go- ing to be changed we asked permission to mark them and this was cheerfully granted. Then came the call for Mr. Selbit's turn. We were invited to watch the setting of the stage, and we even assisted to the extent of carrying on the canvases just marked. We stood in the wings while the performer introduced himself and, a committee being in- vited on the stage, we walked on with all the assurance of a chorus lady. We were asked to choose the blank for the first subject; we indicated one at random, and another in- vestigator selected a second canvas. These were placed face to face on an artist's ea- sel that we had carefully in- spected at the outset. Then MR. P.T.SELBIT a strong electric lamp was placed behind the two can- vases, and the light shining through them proved at once their absolute clearness of deception. Then we were asked what subjects we would like materalised. There was a list of famous artists and another schedule of well- known masterpieces exhibited for our guidance. We chose a pic- ture by Landseer. “Do you happen to be familiar with any of Landseer's works 7" enquired the demonstrator. Having primed ourselves with a little artistic lore for the occasion we truthfully said we should recognise a copy of Landreer’s “Dignity and Impu- ‘dence,’ Who would not ? “Well, I never guarantee which subject Landseer will incline to produce, but there is no harm in you mentally desiring that work.” explained the professor. w The caldron iHusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC —_—o« We 7

Page 250

MAGIC 117 So to the best of our belief we hoped that we would catch the artist In the right mood to supply the subject we should recog- nise. We sat quite close to the canvas, and, sure enough, pres- ently a faint color became discernable. We were asked to touch the canvas to see that it was neither hot nor wet. It was neither. We walked behind, looked underneath, overhead, round behind the scenery at the back, and no clue to the trick was apparent. By the time we returned to the front of the easel the picture was all but complete. Here and there a little detail remained unfinished, but these were soon supplied, and there was the finished picture. It was in- deed Landseer’s “Dignity and Impudence.’’ And we pledge our faith no better copy of the original seemed possible. According to the en- tertainer the whole operation had taken but sixty-five sec- onds. We did not time the performance but are quite willing to concede this point, which is interesting but quite inmaterial. Then the = can- vases were separated. On the front one was our subject. The other was free from any sug- gestion of color. We verified our marks, tested the canvas, and found that a slight pow- dery substance adhered to the finger when you rubbed a patch of color. The effect was inexpli- cable. No indication of any kind remained as to the cause, but here was the result. Here was art if you like. Perhaps it might be described as a triumph of artistery. Yousee an elegant, refined perform- ance of which you can carry away a pleasurable remem- brance. But something more MRS. P. ‘IT. SELBITY. remains— something beauti- fulandeminently tangible—one of the world’s greatest pictures -—all done on the vaudeville stage in sixty-five seconds! ort * a“ ts ne ak

Page 251

Its MAGIC A Telepathic Card By T. C. Bonney Wk tollowtng little trick when presented either as a ) feat of magic or an experiment in mental telepathy, will be found very mystifying and has the advantage of being casily mastered. It can be preformed any- where, the only accessory needed bemg a pack of aying cards. Iwill give my method of presenting it as “an exhibition of thought transferanee, in the hope that some of the many readers of Mr. Singleton’s excellent magazine will flud it use- ful when they are unexpectedly called upon to’ “doa few tricks.”’ The cards are thoroughly shuffled and someone requested to draw one, note what itis and allow the other members of the audience to do the same. No “forcing” is required, the spectator being really allowed free choice of the cards. When the card ts returned to the pack, insert the tip of the left little finger under it, and square up pack. Turn the pack in position for shuffling, remove all the cards from under the tip of little finger and shuffle them onto the top of balance of cards held in left hand. The chosen card is now on the bottom. Again grasp lower half of pack in right hand and do over- hand shuffle, betng careful towards the last to run the cards one at a time till you come to the last (chosen card,) which you place on top. Now do any false shuffle or riffle that will leave the chosen card at its position on top of the pack and continue “patter- ing’ something to the following effect: “You will observe that the cards have been thoroughly shuffled and the chosen one lost to view. It is not on the bot- tom (showing the bottom of the pack.) nor on top.’’ (Here you lift the swe top cards by grasping them with the fingers at one end and the thumb at the other, and exhibit them as one.) Replace them on the top of pack and continue: “T have shown you the top and the bottom cards to prove beyond any question of doubt that I have made no effort to keep track of the chosen card, and I now desire to prove the truth of my former statements regarding the transmission of thought, by having the audience themselves locate the card for mes” Youthen mvite some one to step forward and cut the deck into four little heaps, keeping in view the chosen card which, you remember, ts still on top of the pack. C3 ~ es | — J —_ _ ed —_ ~~ ~ — —_ — _ — Vhe ectldron illusion Aerial stispension When writing te advertisers. kindly mention Mace

Page 252

MAGIC 119 Then “‘force’’ the heap containing the chosen card upon the audience by the well known method of ‘Choose two of the heaps, please, .. . one of the remaining heaps, thank you, "and place the heap containing the chosen card in the inner coat pocket of some member of the audience, at the same time re- questing all who saw the card to think of nothing else for the time being. After a few moments, during which you pretend to be think- lug deeply, reach quickly into the pocket and remove the top card from heap contained therein, and the trick is done. It you glance at the bottom card of upper half of pack when you first commence shuffling, you can easily see the chosen card and if you wish to add effect to the trick, name it before taking it from pocket. You may vary the shuffling if you wish, by inserting the tip of little finger under eve card beneath chosen card, and when the shuffle is fhorshed it will be the first card below the top one, and you can then really lift the top card @/ove when you reach that pomnt of the trick. The only objection I find to the latter methed is, that one cannot produce card from pocket so quickly, which, in my opinion, detracts somewhat from the effect. A Cigar Box Servante By Max Sterling P smoking concerts, or other entertainments where difficulty of setting tables Is experienced, a cigar box 7] (providing a reasonable ex- = cuse is advanced for its in- troduction) may be readily converted Into one of the most illusive servantes ever constructed, The spectal advantage claimed for the design now submitted is that at any mMoment—before and after use—it conveys the impression of absolute in- nocence. It is therefore suitable foruse I oir 8 “ on a glass-topped table or any inv- Mlle promptu support the place of entertain- ment may offer where a special table is not available. The drawing practically reveals the secret and its details. First, a portion of the back is cut out by a fret-saw, to follow

Page 253

arr 10 MAGIC the lines of the usual paper jinding. This is supplied with two side supports, cut as illustrated, and mounted on pivots of wire anged at the base to allow of a free swinging movement. vA iY eo —_ ee i SRG v2 => x > epee ‘gor ° aif re e* -e«r-a- be NASD WASSEBSSV SAL yh eee em, AN EFFECTIVE ROPE RELEASE stop piece on the inner side of the box prevents it falling too far outward. The box can then be lined with any soft material to deaden the sound of anything falhng within it. A shell, re- Phe caldron dlusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGE eV e

Page 254

MAGIC 121 presenting cigars, with a small well at cach end to contain the simon pure, should be fixed so that on opening the lid the ap- parently genuine article is visible and actually taken from) the box. This can be done with the servante “‘up’’ or closed, and on placing on the table quietly “let down’’ without raising the slightest suspicion, After use, at the finish of the show, the fin- gers naturally close it again, and the ‘‘clever ones’ are left wondering. An Effective Rope Release By A. E. Bloom Fea following rope trick ts about as good as any you BW can wish for, when called upon to do something A i mystertous— an advantageous feature being that the rat necessary paraphernalia can usually be borrowed 4 from the aucience. First borrow two pieces of rope or clothes line—one of which should be several yards in length, the other long enough to al- low your wrists to be tied in the manner depicted by Fig. 2. Instruct someone to place the long rope, which we will call A, behind the rope B, which ts tied between the wrists. Then tell him to grasp the ends of A and pull as hard as he can. You NOW explain that you will cause him to pull rope A through rope B, without injury to either of the ropes. This seemingly impossible experiment Is accomplished by the following procedure: While your assistant is pulling rope A, move your hands backwards and forwards, so as to slightly loosen the ropes around the wrists. While continuing this motion the fingers of the right hand are given an opportunity to bring rope A, up under the rope B, which is tied around the left hand C. (Consult Fig. 3 of the accompanying illustration.) The fin- gers of the right hand D continue to pull rope A up over the back of hand C, (Fig. 4). A hard pull on the ends of rope A will now dislodge it, and the release has been accomplished. Presuming that you are doing a card trick and that a lady will not select the card you are attempting to force, do not swear at her, Sweartng is not considered polite in society. If you bungle a trick, and the audience notice it, do not ex- plain the mistake by saying that you must be a fool, Possibly they might fallin with your belief. MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS —

Page 255

tw MAGIC fa Hundred Good Tricks Ci Slews Sleight of Hand Part II. Ten Good Coin Tricks Selected and edited by Ernest Evanveline I COIN AND CARD. —Balance a playing card on the tip of the second finger of the left hand, and on the center of the card, 2. e. immediately over the finger, lay a penny. Flick the corner edge of the card sharply with the second finger of the right hand, taking care to strike quite straight. The card will spin away and leave the penny balanced on the finger. I]. VANISHING COINS ON A PLATE. —tHlalt a dozen coins are swept from the table into a plate, on which they are heard to clatter. Vhe plate is immediately displayed empty. Llalt a dozen pennies and two plates are necessary. One of the plates is secreted tn the servante, and the other laid upon the table. Lay the coins on the table. Vake up a position behind it, hold the plate just below the edge of the table and-—appar- ently sweep the coms into it. They will be heard to clatter on the plate (for they really fall into the plate previously se- creted in the servante,) and the empty one is then produced with all possible alacrity. Ill, BALANCING COINS.—Use three comms with thick edves, and a thin strip of w aod, shightly longer than the three coins placed on end.» Lay the three coins edge too edge tna row in the left hand, and upon them place the wood that has been concealedin the palm of the mght hand. Grip the ends of the stick between the thumb and second finger of the right hand, at the same time holding the top and bottom coins tight- ly. Phe coins can then be raised perpendicularly, and shown as if self-supported upon their own edges. IV. THE WALKING COEN, (Win GoLpstron)—A borrowed coin is placed at the end of the table nearest the performer. At command the coin will slowly move to the other end when the conjurer walks away. A length of tine black thread Is lata across the table: one end is fastened on to the performer s vest button, and the other, which contains a small pellet of wax, 1s on the end of the table near the conjurer. The borrowed coin is placed over the wax; the thread, it will be seen, is carried under the table. When the performer walks backwards the coin is made to go in the opposite direction. After the trick has been repeated the coin is taken off the table and handed to owner. V. COIN AND TANDAKERCH TER. (Witt Gorpsrox) -~A The eaidron dlusion Acrial suspension When writing to advertisers. kind) mention Mave

Page 256

MAGIC 123 borrowed coin and handkerchief are handed around for exami- nation. The performer places the coin in the center of hand- kerchief so that the movement can be followed by the entire company. Everybody 1s quite satished that the handkerchict contains the coin, until the conjurer opens it out, shaking it thoroughly. The only requisite required for this startling yet simple trick is a small fine rubber band. When the coin ts shown the conjurer slowly pushes it into the center of the handker- chiet; the rubber band, which is at the back of the handker- chief, grips the coin and holds it securely, enabling the per- former to shake the handkerchief, proving that the coin has completly disappeared. VI. COIN THROUGH A HAT INTO GLASS. —Three coins are thrown into a borrowed hat, which has been stood upon a glass, and one of the cotns passes right through the hat into the ILLUSTRATIONS FOR CARD TRICKS glass. A derby hat, a tumbler, and four coins are necessary, The bow] of the hat is laid on the rim of the tumbler, and just underneath it acoin is wedged half-way in the glass. Pwo coins are then dropped into the hat, and the third one thrown at the side of the hat, so that it releases the coin, which falls into the glass. Take the coins out of the hat with the right hand, palm one by holding it against the inside of the hat with the thumb, and display two. (Fig. 2.) VII. COIN INTO A MATCH BOX. (ELLIS Sranyon) —Pre- pare a match box as follows: push open the sliding portion

Page 257

124 MAGIC about one inch. Then fix between the top of the slide and the back end of the box, a coin, the greater part of which is over- hanging the box, the whole being out of sight of the casual observer. Arranged thus, give the box to someone to hold with instructions that when you count three the box is to be closed smartly. This will have the effect of jerking the coin into the box. You now take a duplicate coin and vanish it by means of any convenient method, counting “One! two! three!’’ when, upon acting according to your instructions, the person who is holding the box will close it and the coin will be heard to fall inside. VIII DISAPPEARING COIN. (Witt Go_pstox)—A dime is dropped into performer's open hand, then closed. Without his hand touching any part of his body, it 1s opened, and the coin is nowhere to be seen. Before commencing the trick se- cretly cover the third finger nail of the left hand with soft soap. Place the small coin in the hand, near the ball of the thumb. Instantly the hand is closed the coin will adhere to the finger- nail. When opening the hand, take care the finger-nail holding the coin should not be seen. IX. HEADS OR TAILS. (Davip Devant)--This is an easy catch. The performer takes a coin, spins it on the table, and without looking at 1t announces to the audience whether it has fallen head or tail uppermost. He repeats this trick over and over again, and is always able to tell which way the coin has fallen. All you have to do is to get a quarter or half-dollar, notch a little place out, and then raise it up. The notched side will always sound quite differently from the other when the coin falls on the table. The audience must not be allowed to suspect that you do the trick by listening to the fall of the coin. Keep them in suspense for a little time before you tell them the result, and ask them to look at the coin and to think of it. Remember that this trick must be performed on a bare table. ; X. A GOOD CATCH. (Davin Devanr. )—This is only a catch, but it will puzzle any any one who does not know it. Put three coins on the table, and pick them up one at a time, counting “One, two, three.’’ Put them down again, one at atime, count- ing, ‘Four, five,six.’’ Pick them up again, counting ‘‘Seven, eight, nine;’” but when you get to “‘nine,’’ hold up the coin quickly, and put tt down again. Then put the other two down, counting ‘Ten, eleven.’” You appear to have altered the multi- plication table, and made four times three eleven. Now give the coins into anyone's hands, and ask them to do it. They will assur- edly fail, even if they partly see through the trick, because the coins must be on the table at the beginning of the trick. Vhe culdron ilusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Macie 1 ee

Page 258

MAGIC 125 What Every Conjurer Should Know IT. How to **Palm’’ a Card Selected and edited by Ernest Evangeline = HE card which you desire to palm should be brought py to the back of the pack, which should be held face downwards in the left hand. The right hand ap- proaches the pack to cover it and at the same time is J the left thumb pushes the top card up a little (Fig. 1 is slightly exaggerated). The right hand, half closed (Fig. 2), covers the pack with the fingers pressing down on the projecting card. A slight pressure on this card will force the other end up TT. os > roi. ft ae *. & £2 8 a 7 is . . > ; : - .' ” . Ss; < 7 ea i i. lg... . . ~~. = a Ra < aoe, ar £ ‘4 “. ey HOW TO PALM A CARD into the palm of the hand when it can be gripped as in Fig. 3, which ts a back view. Another method is to push the top card to the side. towards the fingers of the left hand. With the third finger of the left hand, which is now immediately below the card, press it up- ward into the right hand, which should half close over it. You must not mind about bending the card, which will lie

Page 259

126 MAGIC curled up against the inside of the hand. You may either let the hand drop negligently to your side, of, still better, take the pack between the fingers and thumb of the same hand and offer it to be shuffled. This will give you the opportunity, often very valuable, of seeing what the card in question ts. When it becomes necessary to return the card to the pack the mere motion of taking the pack in the right hand, whether from the left hand or from the table, will effect that object in the most natural manner. Second Sight Card Divination By M. Michel From The Masical World. by courtesy of Max Sterhing HIS effect must be worked by two persons, one of | whom retires from the room during the selection of acard from an ordinary pack offered to the audience by the second party. When the card has been chosen (not forced) it is placed within any ordinary box, which in turn is covered with a black cloth, and leftin full view of the spectators. The absent “thought reader’ is now invited into the room, blindfolded, and led to the platform, Teas then seated upon a chair and his hands are allowed to rest upon the wrapped up box. Without a word being spoken he is now able to describe the face value and suite of the card chosen, after some little pretence of mental exertion, Meruop.--The trick is worked by a prearranged serics of sig- nals given by the second performer, consisting of barely per- ceptible flicks with the nail of his second finger upon the thumb of the same hand, which can eastly be done without the audi- ence being any the wiser, if a careless atitude is assumed with the hands behind. The code ts, diamonds one flick, hearts two Hicks, spades three flicks, clubs four flicks. A second’s pause after the suite is indicated, then ace one flick, and so on up to the jack, which receives eleven flicks, the queen twelve, and the king thirteen. Suppose, for example, that the seven of dia- monds has been selected, one flick would convey the suite, and after the shig shtest pause, seven flicks in quick succession give the “‘pips.’’ All that is necessary for the satisfactory perform- ance of this trick 1s a pair of sharp ears. T believe that there would be more amateur conjurers if the old method of teaching conjuring could be swept away." —Davip Dervanr. The eudron tlusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Mage ae

Page 260

MAGIC }27 A MONTH OF MAGIC All the Magical Entertaining News Without Prejudice or Personal Criticism ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Besides reguhic and special correspondents in New York, London, Boston. Phal idelphia, Chicage mand San Francisco. and oecasopal correspondents allover the world. MAGIC Ss news service is obtained from the ie ding daily newspapers, and the theatrrecal apd vaudeville press as represented bv Phe Billbourd. Phe New York Clipper, Variety. The Piaver and Phe Show World. Vod last. but mot Jeast. from ourestecmed contemporary. Phe Magical World, ACCURACY The Publisher destres tomake this magical mews service dependable, al will be vrateful when his attention is called to any misstatement of fact or errors of any hind. _ AbbpREsS ALL Cor RESPONDENCE to BOT. Singleton, Publisher, 3919 Thompson Ave . Kansas City. Mo. Ul s. A. HORACE GOLDIN’S NEW MAGICAL PLAY Mr. Horace Goldin, the famous ‘‘illusionist,’’ has now detemnined= to cross the Rubicon which separates the variety fromthe theatrical stage. Some little time ago Mr. Goldin was struck by the idea that a play in which dra- matic action and magic were neatly blended would prove to the liking of a public. A newspaper paragraph provided him with the ground-work for i plot, and that he at once set himself to elaborate. Having finished his ne of the task, he soueht the assistance of a collaborator, ‘Lhe net result isa three-act play, entitled ‘The Tiger and the Pretender,” for which a short provincial tour, beginning in March, has been beoked by Mr. Wentworth Croke, and which, if a suttable theater can be obtained, will be seen in the West- End of Londontwo months later. In conversation with a representative of the ‘Daily Pelegraph,’’ Mr. Gol- din hitnself gave some details of the piece. “Phe plot he said ‘tis based upon actual events which occured some two or three vears ago. The story opens in the courtyard of a Moorish palace in) Mekinez, a town in Morocco, The principal characters are the Pretender, whose aim it is to recover the throne from the usurping Sultan, and a beautiful youny girl, called Satia, who has a powerful rival ino the fascinating Leila, a spy in the pav of the Sultan. Among the visitors to Mekinez is Horace Goldin, at the moment con- siderably perturbed because he is due in Paris to fultl an important envage- ment. Events lead up tothe capture of the Pretender by the Sultan's sol- diers, and Goldin is called upon to effect the release ofthe former, by means of lis magical powers, whereof he has already given substantial proofs. He urges, In reply, that time presses and he must at once set forth for Paris. Thereupon an attempt is made to seize hin, but eluding the guard he slips Into an empty box, Whenthat is opencd—well, vou can imagine the sur- prise andthe bewilderment of the soldiers on discovering that itis, as before, full of nothtngness ! “Net 200° continued Mr. Goldin, ‘is divided into two scenes, the first representing the exterior of the “Vheatre Lboudin in Paris, the second the stave of that plaviouse. There [shall give an entertainment ranging over six centuries. In world’s yreatest conjurers: Blitz of the fifteenth century, Houdin of the sixteenth, Dekolta of the seventeenth, Ching Ling Foo of the eivhteenth, THermann Picktet of the nineteenth, and -~ here vou must make alittle allowance for my natural modesty~-Horace Goldin of the twentieth. That finished, away we yo to Moroceo again, which, of course, is the easi- est thing in the world for a magician. “Phere, | can tell vou, matters have

Page 261

128 MAGIC arrived at a pretty pass. “The Sultan's triumph is complete. By lis orders the Pretender is to be put to death by by means that declare his persecutor to be a master of the art of regned cruelty. The prince is to be thrown inte aden of a ferocious tiger and there torn to pieces. Confined in a dungeon he is even now awaiting bis awful fate. The Sultan, however, has reconed without the arrival of Horace Goldin, to whom the difficulties of time and space are es nothing. To penetrate through the solid walls of the Preten- der’s p4ison-house is but the work of a moment; to change places with the Prinee an act of becoming magnanimity. Then comes the last scene of all. It is laid in the city square. In the cen- ter of the stave stands the tiger's cave, with the tiger-—mind vou, areal, live tiger -pacing about ta it. The square 1s crowded with people. A) proces- sion enters, headed by the Sultan and Leila. Goldin, disguised as the Pre- tender, is introduced. Three pistol shots will be the signal for the opening of the cage into which the prisoner is to be thrown. But somehow a mistake is made and the door of the cage opens before the attendants are ready. Profiting by the chance the tiger springs out. The magician eatches him in mid-air, carries him downto the foothehts, and rends him in twain, The people madly acclaim the Pretender’s triumph, the Sultan and Leila are promptly dispatched, and--quick curtain. Ss. A. M. MAGICAL CARNIVAL The S. A. M. Mayie Vaudeville was given at Carnegie Lyceum, Satur- dav night, January I4th. The house was well filled with members of the or- ganization, and lovers of the magic art. The following well known magi- Clans took part: - Ziska and Saunders (vaudeville’s classiest magicians), magic singing comedy. Kobb, a bit of patriotic magic. Krank PDucrot, novelty act. The trickiest trickster in tricks is Hendrickson (of Hendrickson and Ros- ani), anentertainment of pure sleight-of-hand—-some old tricks newly dressed. Hewes, the white Yogi (assisted by Miss Frances Frizonette), ‘‘The art of mauice.’ Dante (courtesy of New York Hippodrome). Challenge handcuff escape. Famous mail bag escape. Marvelous escape from sealed milk can, The smart entertainer, Henry Clive, assisted by Miss Mai Sturgis Walker. Mine. Adeliade Herrmann and Co., mysterious entertainment. Ziska and Saunders made a phenomenal hit. Ziska’s work is clean, lis humor is not overdone, and he is without a doubt, an ideal-looking magi- cian. His talenled wife sang one dithcult number, and scored a hit. Kobb presented a bit of patriotic magic, assisted by a draw-box well tilled with American and foreiyn flags. The turn showed class, and was well re- ceived. Frank Duerot and his ray pictures scored the usual hit, his) paper tearing stunts were also done well. Fd. Hendrickson did 30 minutes of rapid magic, cach experiment well exccuted: by minany he was the ‘hit’ ofthe bill. Hewes, the white Yogi. surprised the audience with his clever work. He is an old showman and knows a lot about magic. He was ablv assisted by Miss Frizonette. The tarvet trick was a lit. Henry Clive and Mat Sturgis Walkerdid a clever bit. Clive is very good, and his humor most excellent. He burlesques mavic without exposing the secrets, The act is classy, Mime. Adelaide Herrmann and company were the real headliners of the The eddron clusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAG

Page 262

MAGIC 129 bill. “Phe act made its usual hit, and was received with reund after round of applause. Charles Roltare tilled a few minutes with some cleverhandkerchief work. He has wonderful stave presence and is a clever magician. Dante, the handculf expert, closed the well-balanced programme, and myst fied the audience with his marvelous escapes. Many out-of-town magicians were in attendance, The eatire programme was arranged by Charles Roltare, and reflected great credit on his ability as a purveyor for entertainments. The S.A. M. show was the best entertainment of its kind ever given in New York. It willbe very hard to equal. ~- A SHADOW SHOW At the American Music Hall, New York, the ‘“Phree Maids of Sais," an Hlusory living shadow show made a hit. “Phe shadow elfects were executed by three graceful girls and are very attractive and artistic. “Phe act is in three parts, cach requiring special scenery. The tinal effect representing a Grecian frieze, on a red back ground received merited applause. The act was brought over fromthe London Hippodrome by Otto Heimeman. KakaA, jugeler, left for Germany Jan. 28.) THe will return to America the latter part ol the summer and open at the American Roof Garden, New York, THE GREAT Mysro is touring Canada with lis company, DUNNINGER, the mysterious, and EUGENE FREUND gave a program of mavic, mvstery and spiritualism at ths Broadway Central Hotel on briday, Jan. 13. Eugene Freund's work consisted of feats in spiritualism and thaum- aturgy. Dunninger entertained with magic and illusions, tle is traly a king of cards and ranks with the best and he introduced many new tricks and mystifving illusions. CHARLES CARTER, illusionist, is having a very successful tour in the En- vlish provinces, MELVILLE presented lis mystery of the Moto girl at the Majestic theater, Montgomery, Ala. It was well receis ed. There are no less than. tifteen magic acts shown at the various halls in London. “Pwo Americans, Goldin and Lafayette are among the favored mia- CICS, Hiweks, ‘The White Yooo,’” is at the Eden Musee, New York. JARROW, the comical trickster, has an imitator who copies both Jarrow's trcks and patter. Phe ‘copy act showed forthree days in New York, but was not very well received. ADAMS AND MACK at the Nemo, New York. They expose many of the tricks they do but have toned this feature of ther act down somewhat. PROF, SURIANT, illusionist, has returned from) Europe and is plaving on the Western coast. HHle has brought numerous new material home with hum and willbuse this im his aet. MARVELOUS GRIFFITH at the Orpheum, Los Angeles, Jan. 2-7. MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 263

130) MAGIC THURSTONS COMPLETE PROGRAMME By ALC. Boese, Minneapolis. Special Correspondent ParToNE: In opening of performance, curtain rises on dimly lighted stage, draped with heavy, dark red plush. Large book of magicians in cen- terof stage, opencd by two assistants, showing past and present masters of the art. “Phurston steps out of book, walks to front, producing a large bowl of fire, one of water and a large bouquet of flowers from which a number of doves appear. ‘bhen follows: orig}ial card passes and his fa;nous msing cards “Phe changing ducks “The tub of Diogenes fhe crowning achievement of Mr. Kel- lar, ‘“Vhe Levitation of Princess Karnac.’ -~Phe fortune telling ball Nellar’s well known spirit: cabi- net ~The crystal cage dlus’on-- Phe wandering | handkerchief —Hand- herclief disappears from hand and is reproduced from collar of: spec- tator - Rabbits and duck also) pro- duced from collar) concluding the first part with acomedy experiment entitled, ‘CA Bit of Fun.’ Parr rwo; Mr. “Ehurston’s lat- est creation “"Phe Lady and the Lion.’ Curtain rises oOo: stave sct with two large cabinets which sect two feet from floor. Lady is placed invone cabinet, curtatns drawn on both, shot ts fired, curtail. s ralsed and Fon appears in iron cage in place of lady. Lady is seen swing- Ing Miron cage in other cabinet. The Lady and Lion is a master- pece oof sensational mystery Theodore Bamberg, who does some very clever shacow work-—The sreat automobile surprise,or ‘'Mys- tery of the Abhott-Detroit "300 7° Thurston accompanied by a lady appears on scene in an automobile, and stops forrefreshments. “Phurs- MR. HOWARD THURSTON ton goes ins'de the wavs'de inn, leaving the lady inthe auto. No sooner isthe out of sight than robbers appear and attempt to rob the lady. She screams aod “Phurstoa rushes back to her aid and grapples with the robbers. “Phe next moment an officer appears and the robbers surrender, then the dHuscon is shown. One of the robbers unmasks and is shown to be the lady thought to be in the car Phe other robber proves tobe Mr. Phurs- ton. “Phen the ladv proves it was she who arrested the robbers as the sheriff. PART THREE: Pigeon pie beeding the baby “Phe ladv’s hat. Hat is borrowed, placed in cannon, lady assistant gots in wav of cannon when cannon Is fired, hat appears fully restored, on ass’stants head -an appointment: eves extraordinary “Phe lass trank ‘Phe Prisoner of Canton” or the The caldron iusion Aerial SHS pension When writing fo advertisers, kindly mention MAacrie

Page 264

MAGIC Lol upside down illusion -—The piercing arrow ~The inexhaustible cocoanut: The lady and the bov. In which a trunk and cabinet are used. (Cabinet in mud air.) Several unexplainable changes taking place—closing the enter: tainmenti with, “* Phe Priple Mystery.’ Two light boxes standing on. ele- vated platform are shown empty. Large trunk suspended from ceiling of theater, Boxes are nested and lady appears. Lady is placed in) Fyeyptian Mummy casket which is then hoisted inair. Shotis fired ane lady disappeass from casket. Suspended trunk is brought down, placed on elevated) stand from which two smaller trunks are taken. Lady appears in last trunk. THE GREAT WILBER AND Co., who offer novelties in ventriloqaism atthe Virginia theater, Clicago, in Jan. The act has recently completed a tour of the Pantages circuit and is now booked up by agents who are members of the Vheatrical and Vaudeville Agents’ Assoctation of America. ALETHEDA AND ALEKO at the New Broadway theater, Camden, N. J, Jan. 9-14. SHERMAN, magic act, at the 3tst St., theater, Clieavo. His magic is of first quality, his personality pleasing, talk good and lis act was the lit) of the bull. FRANK PALMER, Cartoo vst, IS appearing at vanoas theaters around Chi- cavo, His offering is really creditable and the comedy is both amusing and Interesting, LA FaAyerre at the Coliseum, London, is in his second vearly engaye- ment. Elis performance lasts one hour. He is still using the big finish with the lags and guns, Vicror, ventriloquist, at the Union Square, New York, Jan. 9-14. He uses but one “‘dumimy.’’ He walks through the audicnce singing, thus giv- ing therm a chance to inspect his votce deception at close ranye. KALKRATUS, Juggler and hoop roller, who has been il of pneumonia, in Cleavland, died Dec. 28. Jack ARK, diabolo expert, at the Plaza, New York, Jan. 9-14. Howarkb Dotson, clay modeler, at the Plaza, New York, Jan. 9-14. THE FRANK L. GREGORY TROUPE introduced a new hoop-rolling trick that made a hit at the Palladium, London. RED NEIMAN died in London Christmas day, very suddenly. He was a ventriloquist Of much merit, and he appeared ino America for three years. Of late he has been an agent. He was amember of several lodges. Van LEAR AND ROME, burlesque magicians, at the Armory, Binghapmton , N.Y¥., Jan. 9-44. Lambs MANIKINS at the American, New York, Jan. 9-14. They have improved their stage setting somewhat and their act was well rceeived. BRAHAM S PHANTAGRAPHS at the Oak, Chicago, Jan. 9-14. GREAT ELVERTON, jugeler, gave an excellent performance at Young's . Pier, Atlantic City.

Page 265

132 MAGIC Duncan Hypnotic COMEDY Co. opened to a large audience at the Audi- torium, Hot Springs, Ark., Dec. 26-31. WALTER J. KEENE AND Co., mayical entertainers, at Polis, New Lon- don, Conn., Dec. 28-31. The GREAT RUNTONS, in a good novelty juggling aet, appeared at the Lyric, Rome, N. ¥., Dec. Dec. 22-24. Van LEAR AND Co., burlesque magical act, at the Lyric, Rome, N.Y. Dec. 22-24. MiLpDRED AND ROUCLERE at the Darling, Gloversville, N. Y¥., Dee., 26. W. C. FIevps, juggler, is plaving a month's engagement at the Apollo, Vienna, PAUL VALADON AND Co.,, at the Crystal, Chicayo, Jan. 2-7. THE VAN DE Koors at Keith's, Boston, Jan. 2-7. FRANK HARTLEY, Juggler, at the American, New York. He works alone, introdneing bits of humor himself. Most of his tricks have been seen but Hartley's execution of them is very creditible. He shows particular skill in a cup, saucer, and spoon trick, in which each article is thrown from his toe to his forehead one at a time, each setting in place without a miss. NORMAN, Magician, at the Ninth and Arch Street Museum, Philadelphia, Pa. Jan. 2-7. RAMESES, at the Majestic, Milwaukee. Mar. HERRMANN at Poli's, Hartford, Conn., Jan. 2-9. BoSWORTH AND Oro, jugglers, atthe Linden, Chicago, Jan. 2-7. EDWIN GEORGE, billed as “Phe Juggling Jester,’ was at the Empress, Chicago, Jan. 2-7. His act consists of juggling stunts and an amusing line of talk. LAKOLA AND LORAINE opened the show at the American, Chicago, with some good juggding, Jan. 2-7. W. EF. WHITTLE, ventriloquist, at the Circle, Chicago. Rts Linc Toy was at the Verdi, Chicago, Jan. 4-8. He produced anew European illusion, a Chinese triple mystery. entitled ‘The ‘Transmission of Souls. "" GEORGE S. LANDER, Australian ventriloquist, is plaving the Loew. cir- cuit. RIFFNER AND CookE, comedy jugglers, were on the billatthe Princess, St. Paul, Christmas week. NED Mac, clav modeler, at the Orpheum, Lima, 0. THe GREAT LESTER, ventriloquist, at Poli’s, Scranton, Pa. PHASMA, electrical act, at the Victoria, Wheeling, W.Va. SCHECHTL’S MANIKINS, at the Orphcum, Montreal. The culdroo dlusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Maggie

Page 266

MAGIC ' 4 LAROLA, Jugeler, at the American, Music Hall, Chicago. ve hd RANDALL, sand pictures, was on the bill at the American, Chicayo. FivE JUGGLING JEWELS were at Hammerstein's Victoria, New York, dunngy the holidays, Am Goza, fire eater at the Ninth and Arch St., Museum, Philadelphia, Jan, 9-14. FREVOLI, at the Orpheum, Savannah, Ga., Jan. 2-7. VAN Hoven, the mad magician, who has been plaving the Inter-State and United time is back in Chicago. While in the East he played Hammer- stents three times and several return dates on the Keith time. BOLAND PFRAVERS AND Co., magician, presented his illusions as the Or- pheum, Cinemoati O., Jan. 9-14. “CHINESE JOHNNY WUELLIAMS at the Casino, Providence, R. 1, Jan. 9- 14. He has recovered from his illness and was assisted in his act by his wife and their talking dog, ‘‘l oolish.”’ MYSPERIOUS MOORE AND BILLY WALDRON DO A “STUNT” Mysterious Moore and Billy Waldron of the Waldron Bros., pulled off a funny stunt at the Scamper, Philadelphia, Pa., Jan. 9-14, just after El Gor- do, the magician presented his lemon trick. Waldron was introduced by Moore as the world’s greatest magician and out popped our little Billiken Billy. Instead of using the lemon, the produced a huge pumpkin, cut it open w.th a butcher cleaver and to the astonishment ofthe audience, out fell hun- dreds of ten dollar bills, with the advertisement of Dad Frazier’s Hotel on the back. ‘The two wonderful magicians received large applause and took an encore, Ep Russ, magician, at the winter garden, New Orleans. CLIVETTE, ‘‘The Man in Black,’’ has engayed A. H. McKechnie to drrect his world tour. The Company will leave Chicago in March. ‘THe Lisserrs, equilil rists, at the New theater Balt'more, Md. Jan. 9-14. Tur GREAT ASAHI at the Orpheum, Salt Lake City, Jan. 9-14. LIGHTNING HOPPER is a crayon artist of considerable merit. He appeared at the Victoria theater, New York, week of Jan. 9-14. CHassino, shadowgraphist, at the Manhattan Opera House, New York, Jan, 9-14. AL Fin Foo, Chinese mavician, with the Boheman Burlesquers made a big tit recently in Cincinnati. PAUL CINQUEVALLI, Juggler, at the Argyll theater, Birkenhead, Eng. He assisted on an impromptu, benefit performance for the relief of the im- poverished shipbuilders of that district. THE ‘ToMSONS, mystery act, appeared at the Casino, Harrisburg, Pa. Owing to the Natlonal theater Co.'s canceling their lease to the theater, their engagement lasted but three days.

Page 267

13-4 MAGIC KESTERSON BROS, are on the Webster time. Their act of singing danc- Ing and novelty. paper tearing has more than made good in the Chicago houses, THE ZANCIGS at the Willard, Chicago. They have disposed of their mov- ing picture interests in New York. THE GREAT LEON, Hindoe illusionist, at the Citv Opera House, Water- town, N.Y. HENELLA, with his novelty mystery, “The Singing Tlead,’* Gloversville, Na 3 HEsskF, Juggling comedian, has just closed on Fisher time. He will re- turn to his home in Los Angeles. TROVOLLO AND Co., ventriloquists, were on the bill at the American Music Hall, Chicavo. ‘Vhev presented ‘“Phe Boston Road Inn.’ “Pheir act was a decided novelty in the ventriloquial line, the comedy bright and clean and even the “dummies” were above the ordinary, PrRoF. GRAHAM'S EDUCATED FLEAS were at at Reith’s, Providence, R. I. These little insects perform really wonderful feats and make quite a sen- sation Wherever shown, HARRY LAMORE at the Alhambra, Paris, Christmas week. [lis act was a parody on the conjurer and juggler and caused much laughter. SELMA Bratz, juggler, at the Colonial, Akron, ©. Pewrirr, the man with many faces, at the American Music Hall, N. Y., Dec. 26-31, is really novel. A gigantic head, a perfect copy of hisown Pier- rot face, at the word of command duplicates Pewitt's changing facial ex- pressions, tragic or comic —all given with extreme skilland truly marvelous. KARA, the jugeler, at the American Music Hall, N. Y¥., Dee. 26-30, in- troduced new features in his already clever act. Entertaining in full dress, he didthe regular work, umbrella and hat, but sheds his coat by somersault- ing his valet over dus back. Miauipulatiny oranges and knives, he halved and qaartered the fruit in the air, A clever bit was the jueeling of a score of billiard balls as they rolled down an inclined rack, balanced on his chin on a bilhard cue. Berr Levy, the cartoonist, at the Flfth Avenuetheater, New York, Dec. 26-31, presented his original picture idea in full stage setting, showing an artists studio, He drew his) cartoons in lampblack upon a glass plate about four inches in diameter, and projected them on a colossal screen through a stereopticon, Mark ‘Pwain, an Indian, and a twentieth century girl were some of the subjects displaved, and Mr. Levy interjected written comedy between, whisthnye as he sketched. PoLLARD, the juggler, Opened at the Fifth Avenue, New York. His tricks are effective and begins them with rapidity. Ele excells in the jug- vling of billlard cues, keeping four of them in the air at once. He balances a cue on dis chin, catches a socket In the end of this cue, then tosses a large ball into the socket) | In dus work with balls and plates, he keeps five plates inthe ar atone time. His ‘shooting’ a couple of objects on the table with a cue, and ‘scoring’ on the rings of a portier caused laughter. He concluded with the spinning of a long stick by the means of two small Ones, Vhe ealdron tilusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers. Kindly mention MAvgic

Page 268

MAGIC 159 MARTINI AND MAXIMILLIAN At the Empress, Kansas City, Jan. 16-21. They get laughs and applause for their funny magic, making up as a youthful magician and a comic old mah. The youngster wins with his charming self confidence and the old man is a splendid subject fur the boy's fun making, accidently exposing sume of the better known tricks in the most innocent manner. Good fun is obtained with a red plush chair or throne seat mounted on four pedestals against one side of the back drop. The old man runs off stage after some comedy acci- dent, with the boy and a big knife in pursuit. The youngster returns bear- ing something covered with a cloth and announces that he has cut off the old man’s head, which he proceeds to place on the chair. The cloth is with- drawn and, sure enough, there is the old gentleman’s head, being stuck through the back drop and chair by the oldman himself, the seat of the chair being on a level with his head when standingup. For the last a good comedy disappearance illusion is worked with a cage and curtains. ‘THOMPSON'S ‘TURKISH TROUBADOURS opened the New Palace theater, Lowell, Mass, Dec. 24. Their program consisted of singing, dancing and magic. THE Van DE Koors at Manchester, N. H., Dec. 26-28. THE Koppes, hoop rolling experts, at the Victoria Roof Garden, New York, last month. LAFAYETTE atthe Coliseum and HORACE GOLDIN, Hippodrome, the week before Christmas nade quite a gathering of conjuring folks around the west end of London. Goldin introduced a new illusion. An assistant is seated at a piano, covered with a large cloth, and Goldin fires a gun, wherefore both the pianu and lady disappear. His engagement at the Hippodrome will last tur seven weeks. HERR. JANSEN & Co., at the Majesti¢, Cedar Rapids, lowa, Dec. 26-31. PAUL POOLE, magician, has a very entertaining act cunsisting of good card tricks and the water changing illusion. THE Two VaUDELLs, clay modelers; CHARLIER, ventriloquist; WAL- TER BELLONINI, juggler, appeared on the opening programme of the Cas- ino de Paris last munth. SOME GOOD JUGGLING BUSINESS CHRISTY AND WILLIS were seen around New York last month in their ex- cellent juggling act. Christy has some very funny props and does some fine work with small objects. Miss Willis makes her appearance by bursting through a large paper hoop. Christy starts out with a grotesque miniature auto which blows up. He shoots a balloon as it goes up, ‘‘winging’’ it and bringing it down, fires at the rising muon and brings that down, and shvvts egys out of a duck that is flying across the stage. His hat tricks are a scream, and his work with the httle rubber balls is wonderful. ALLEN SHAW mystified the audience at the Fulton theater, Brooklyn, N. Y., Christmas week. His coin palming and card tricks gained him much ap- plause. THE BALZARS at the Majestic, Chicago, Dec. 26-31, offered an act of leyerdemain that scored heavily. The straight man proved uncommonly dett in the cuin manipulations and the comedian provoked much laughter.

Page 269

1.56 MAGIC Loto THe Mystic. mind reader, at Polis, Scranton, Pa., Dec. 26-31. THe GREAT LESTER, ventriloquist, at Polts, Wilkes-Barre, Dec, 26-31. PoLLARD, puevler, opened the show at the Fifth Ave., New York, Dee. 26-A1. JACK CARRIGAN AND EARL WL STANFIELD, have combined in producing an electrical sceme act catitled “The Phantom Maid.” Miss Daisy Brandon and Miss Viela Stanley are meluded in the cast. “Phe opening date is Jan. 15, at Chicago. CLEVER CONKEY, Juggler was substituted on the bill for Litdle Count Teddy at Robinson's, Cincinnati, Dee. 26-31. CURRENT PROGRAMME OF VILLIERS DE CASTON From Phe Magiteal World. by courtesy of Manx Steritmg Scen at the Greenwich Palaee. Pnstead of walkingon stage from Swings” as is customary, this artiste, after having lis stave setting discoverdd, pre- ferred to have all stave Hehts extinguished so that he might be revealed when they were switched on a moment later, For his first trick he introduced the mechanical version of the blower Growth trick. Showing a pot empty, he placed an ornamental cover over it and produced a darge ioral display in pot. Another dower trick followed this. An empty basket, on being covered with a large handkerchief, was tilled with spring flowers, Next, taking a large shawl, shown both sides, some- thing was scen to make ats appearance: this Vsomething’? proved to be a large basin of water when placed on a table. . A larger ctlect followed this. oN skeleton box was exhibited on oa lareve platform and sides of black velvet fitted in. On raising this inte mid-air, performer produced therefrom sundry flags and, finally, a voung lady. \s- sistant was next locked tna large wooden trunk, and the trunk taken to ex- treme rear of stage and pushed under back cloth so that only the front re- mained visible. A Targe bow that had been suspended trom ‘ihes’” throueh- out the act was next lowered, and whenopencd was found to contain anoth- er box. Vhis later, on being placed on te platform already alluded to, was opened and disclosed another box, which tn its tura being opened revealed the assistant who was supposcd to be ensconced tn the box peeping through back cloth. “Phis latter box, on being brought forward, was found to contam an entirely different assistant, Next came the ever-yreen Linking Rings trick, followed by the effect of instantly chanuwing the colors of two handkerchiets knotted together, by pass- ine hand over them, From the apparatus known as ‘oDhe Noalvs Ark’) performer produced a number of live animals and, finally, two voung dadies, An ceyg taken from table vanished tobe reproduced a few scconds later fromia large bag about a foot square. A piece of paper was then burnt and from the ashes afew tiny pieces of narrow ribbon were evelyved, whieh, on beme rolled in hands, apparently changed to a litthe Uimion fack flag about a foot square, His last trick was the production of a few small slik squares froma ‘‘dis- secting drawer box.” Vhis done, performer blew a whistle, and once again “out went the gas." When the lights were switched on they revealed atab- leau formed by assistants, one of whom was dressed as Britannia, posing mn front of a large cotton fice dropped from “thes.” Performer waved a fag handed to him from side, and te the stramsof patriotic music front the or- chestra curtain dropped to denote conclusion, The caldron tlusion ANertal suspension When writing to advertisers, kind! mention Mace

Page 270

MAGIC 137 KENNEDY AND ROONEY were at the Kedzie, Chicago, last month, with their “Happy Medium.” Phe actlon takes place in a spirit medium's office with a setting of skeletons and booes. Just nonsensical nonsense. T. Roy BARNES AND BESSLE CRAWFORD made them laugh around New York last month, Barnes puts over some clean cut comedy. Take Lissers, in ditheult ladder stunts, were at Keenev'’s Third Avenue, New York, recently, CLIVETTE at the American, Chicago, Dec. 26, added) variety to the pro- cram With his shadowgraphing. MABEL JOUNS ON, ventriloquist, will go abroadin February forher tirst ap- pearance on the other side. TRE RRATONS, hoop rollers, at Keith's, Boston, Dee. 26-31. MARSHALL MONTGOMERY, ventriloquist, has introduced some new ma- terialin his act which appeared at Keith's Philadelphia theater, Dec. 26-31. HowaRbD, ventriloquist, at the Orpheum, San Iransisco, Dee. 25-31. SaM BARRINGTON, ventriloquist, at the Majestic, Rock Island, Hl, Dec. 26-28. Patt WAGNER, comedy juggler, at the Garrick, Burlington, Towa, Dee. 26-28, THe Mysreriots HENELLA at the Arnory, Binghamton, No Y.. Dec. 26-28. NorktH, Puk SNow Man, who offers scientific deinonstrations, scattered ready-made snow balls throughout the audience at the William Penn thea- ter, Philadelphia, Dee. 26-31, NaN AKER AND Co., ventriloquial act, at the Plaza, Philadelphia, Dee. 26-31, TANNA, juggler, at the Happy Hour, Erie, Pa., Dec. 260-31. THE SIDONIAS, novelty cartoonists, at the Cozy, Houston, Pex., Dec. 26- 3l. THE GREAT COLonts, livpnotists, are doing big business tn the North. KALCRAITUS, juggler, is senously il at the City Hospital in Clevland, O. HENRY CLIVE, magical entertainer, will produce a new act before long. RAMBHUJ SUED BY AN ASSISTANT The necromancer Rambhuy was recently defendant in aldaw suit, brought avainst him by a girl who had been his assistant for awhile. She had been uscd in a water illusion, but one night when the trap weuld not) work, she vot her feet wet and took a severe cold which caused her to be unable to appearon the following evening. Ranbhuy gave her two weeks notice, but paid her only one weeks’ salary. Tfence the law suit, which was decided avainst the iHusionist, who was directed to pay the other weeks’ salary of S12.) He also had to pay the court costs of the suit. Rambhuy will be seen in Americain April, having been booked by Win. Morris MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 271

136 MAGIC LEWIS DAVENPORT, the well known Enelish dealer, was married Dec. 26 In London, Anew English comedy drama, ‘Phe Doctor's Experiment, announced for early production, will introduce illusions, PROGRAMME OF CAPRE DITA AND CHEFALO At Bedford Music Hall, London, Dec. 9, 1910. Billed as ‘“Phe Garden of Mystery.” Setting shows an ornamental wall about 6 ft. high, recessed in the center, two statuettes on each side, a small table, a nickeled frame and a black assistant standing in recess at back. Mile. Capretta attired as a fairy; Chefalo wore au old-fashioned court dress. The following tricks were executed in the order given: Wooden bowl of flow- er bouquets produced from shawl - Doves from the shawl —‘'Strip’’ change with two knotted handkerchiets— Dying tube- “Phree bandkercliefs passed through tube chanyed to a large one--—"*Honunge Bells *- About 12 cards pro- duced from air) Seven cards vanished, one by one, and reproduced at. tin- ger tips —Handkerchief placed on muzzle of a gun and reproduced on the point of a sword A handkerchief vanished between hands is discovered knotted between two others previously knotted and held by musician: -Show- er of spiked bouquets from a shawl-- Linking rings (brilliantly executed, mostly down in the audience) Capretta produced from three sided cabinet proved empty -Flowers from a paper cone Flowers from a bowl of hou- quets Paper coil from bouquet- Live ducks from a small tub. For the conclusion a large wooden drum was proved empty and both ends closed up with brown paper. This was raised on a table while Capretta drew a sketch of an imp'’s head on one side. Drum then suspended inmud-air and Hays of all nations produced when paper ends were broken. Chefalo tially revealed in drum made up as Jehu Bull. THE CROMWELES worked around New York last month, being at the American Music Hall early inthe month. Phe ‘eirl” in the act turns out to be a bow. He is astar in speedy and finished juggling and balancing. FRANK HARTLEY, the English boy juguler, has arrived in America. CARLTON, comedy magico, had a part inthe Birmingham, England, pantomime, He has a mysterious blackboard that materialises everything that-is drawn upon it. MASTERIOUS FpNA at the Colonial, Erie, Pa., last month. KELANDO, chav modeler, at) Plaza Music Hall, New York. Davin WARFIELD'S new play, ‘The Return of Peter Grimim,’" was pro- duced at the Hollis theater, toston, fan. 2. The play is based on the great riddle of the ages, ‘Is there life after death 2° The return of Peter Grimm to carth constitates the action of the play. EeuorkY MANLY, the entertaentog whistler, juguler, paper tearer and ac- robat, is working on the Gus Sun time. ALFRED JACKSON, cartoonist, was held over for another week during hits recent eneagement at Hammerstein's, New York, Miysrerious MoorkkE at the Avenue Grand, Washington, Eb. C., last month. The caldron ilusion Aerial suspension When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAaaie

Page 272

MAGIC 139 RIZAL AND ATIMA, jugglers, atthe Mission, Salt Lake City, THE CROMWELLS made such a big Tit on the Pantages circuit that they have been envaged fora return date, which begins when the first round is ended. This will be in St. Joseph, Mo, MARCUS, shadowgraphist, at the Empress, Milwaukee, Wis., Feb. 6-11. GREAT WEAVER, handcutf king, was at the Clark, Chicago, Keb. 6-11. THE GREAr RUSSELL, with the Chauncey Kieffer Stock Co., is meeting with success. His mind reading act is sensational. THE GREAT RAYMOND opened at Vieo, Spain, Oct. 29. The big reception which was planned for him at the landing was a great success. “The show was to open at Madrid Dec. 8 but owing to washouts on the railroads the route was changed. The Colyvseu dos Recreios, Lishon, at which the Great Kavmond appeared Dec. 11, has the largest stage of any amusement house excepting the New York Hippodrome. The show was at Lisbon until after the holidays, then played in Oporto, and Southern Spain, and will arrive in Madrid next April. Hovupint, while at Newcastle, Eng., proved his skill. A special case was made by the men employed at the Elswick Engineering works which they believed would baffle the handcuff king, but much to their surprise he es- caped, NATE Litesiz, touring in South Africa, had brilliant success. ALBINE at the American Music Hall, New York. He presented his regu- lar line of work. While he exposed many popular tricks of other magicians, he exposed none of his own. He gave way, fully, the entire act of Eva Fay: handculf escapes, slate tricks, second sight, ete. PROGRAM OF CARTER THE MYSTERIOUS Carter the mysterious, is viving his full show at the Rotunda, in Glasgow. The entertainment is divided into four parts, as follows: Modern miracles, consisting of eight very clever sleight of hand effects and new = tricks; the seance of Simla, similar to the tlusion of the same name shown here by Prof. Kellar; Corinne Carter, presenting psychic phenomena; ‘‘A Night in China,’ where Carter shows his versaulity by impersonating the famous Ching Ling Foo, dupheating the Chinaman’s most difficult tricks: the Magi- cal Divorce, a clever disappearing tllusion--new levitation, the most astound- ing of its kind. Needless to say his act, wherever shown, fills the theaters. THE MEXICAN HERRMANN, makes a feature of the coin ladder. He was recently at Proctor’s, Utica, N.Y. GREAT POWERS, hypnotist, at the Apollo, Atlantic Citv, Jan. 23-24. Fle advertised as *‘Pauline’s Only Rival.’ Ira, the Mentalist, atthe Gennett, Richmond, Ind., Jan. 12-14, ANNA EVA Fay at the Miles, Minneapolis, Minn., Jan. 16-21. ALLEN SHAW atthe Orpheum, Cincinnati, O., Jan. 16-21. CANARIS, illusionist, at the Clintes, San Francisco, Jan. 23-28. MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 273

140 MAGIC THE GREAT ALVIN at the Palace, Philadelphia, Jan. 23-28. His act is a very showy one and his handcuff escape work is well received. McCoRMACK AND WALLACE produced a new ventriloquial act at the Hudson, Union Hill, N. J., Jan. 30. HiL.DA HAWTHORN, ventriloquist, at the Orpheum, Lincoln Neb., Jan. 9-14, GRIFF, the English juggler, arrived in New York Feb. 1. He will appear at the American Feb. 6-11. ; CLAUDE GOLDIN, the Australian card king at the American, Chicago, Jan. 23-28. SOCIETY OF TWIN CIPY MAGICIANS By David E. Stittt. Special Correspondent. : We had a rattling good meeting of the S. T. C. M. Feb. 7th, with an en- thusiastic number of Magicians present. The Society is) growing stronger with each meeting, and is in good financial condition. After a most appetiz- ing lunch, the Social Session began. Count De Boese led off, as usual, with a few choice selections in Card Tricks. Trebor, Chas. Wavy, Huey, and Krawezvk kept the crowd interested to a high pitch with their own select I- lusions and Sleights. Letters were read from Bros. Roterberg, of Chicago, Harry Kellar, Los Angeles, and fF. T. Singleton, Publisher of Magic. THE ROBERT-HOUDIN CLUB The Robert-Houdin Club, Kansas City’s new magical society, 1s now fair- ly organized. Frequent meetings will be held for the next mooth or so until the complete success of the society is assured. Dr. ‘TT. S. Blakeseley is Pres- ident, and Donald Holmes is Secretary, 311 Hall Building, Kansas City, Mo. CHESTER, magician, at Center Junction, la., Jan. 19-20. Van CAMP at the Music Hall, Chicago, Jan. 30-Feb. 4. His act consists of light magic and comedy patter. His act pleased. HONA AND PRICE, comedy cartoonists, at the Colonial, New York, Jan. oon ; d30-Leb. 4. I, REYNARD, ventriloquist, at the Colonial, New York, Jan. 30-Feb. 4. e MERCEDES, mind reader, at the Family, Moline H., Jan. 30-Feb. 1. LAWRENCE JOHNSTON, ventriloquist, made his first New York appear- ance at the Greenpoint, Jan. 30-Feb. 4. He works witha single ‘‘dummy,”’ does the regular smoking and drinking while talking and adds eating. Per- haps the cleverest part of his offering is the quick talking where he and the dummy seem to) both be speaking at once. Aside from Arthur Prince no other venirioquist has heretofore used this feature. Johnston's manipulation of his dummiv is effective. CHESNO AND Co,, Magicians, at the Biyou, Bayonne, N. J. Jan. 30-Feb. 4. HARRY ROSE, ventriloquist, at the Bijou, Bayonne, N. J., Jan. 30-Feb. 4. ‘Timachilracalhicien Nerial stispenston When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MavG@i _-

Page 274

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS I. Back Numbers of MAGIC mg VOLUME ONE READY MAGIC BOUND IN CLOUH The first volume of MaGic can now be had neatly bound in cloth with title page and index. Tt con- sists of the first six numbers, Jan- uary to June, 190, including the February number, Guosts. Price, SL.OO., SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and May ts- sues remain. They can be had, as long as the supply lasts, for LO cenis each. Complete your file before they are out of print. A Few Copies of the Only Number of GUS hs Issued Lhe second issue (February, te Wonders ofthe Fob wha = lOlO) of Macte was given the title of Ghosts. A few copies remain and can be had for 15 cents, while me they last. Do ag A. ie) a A MAGAZING OF CONTENTS “Phe Sphinx Riddle of SKOMANCE AND REASON Humanity. Spectral Hlusions “Thread- ine the Mazes —An Afternoonin A Mag- . ical Lil rary—How ft Became A) Spirit “aly ae Needium, JANLARY 1910 PRILE HOCENTS Whar A Conjurer Can Do Py (awed [epwpes The Marv cious Rising Cards of Joseffy Laavts PAB See Cover tn four colors. Colored frontis- piece and 19 illustrations. Most unique macvazine ever issucd, FT. SINGLETON PUBLISITER FEPRUARY 1910 . MAICR CENTS» Threading the Mazes 3619 Thompson Avenue Wie Vextign Of Saltecy and Desk = Kansas City, Mo. MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 275

142 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Magical Books PROFESSOR HOFFMANN’S BOOKS MODERN MAGIC. For many years Professor Hoffmann has held the field as the standard writer upon the fascinating subject of natural magic, and his two books, J/odern Magic and More Mag- ic cover almost the whole range of known tricks up to the date of pub- lication of the latter 1889, 578 pages, 318 illustrations. Flandsomely bound in cloth. Price, $1.50. MORE MAGIC. Uniform with the above, 457 pages, 140 illustrations. Price $2.00. LATER MAGIC. Professor Hoff- mann’s latest book. Most up-to-date book on magic. Explanation of the latest tricks. 557 pages, 221 illustra- tions. Price $2.00. BOOKS BY HENRY R. EVANS MAGIC AND ITS PROFESSORS. The life stories of many famous magicians. 220 pages, fully illustrated. Price $1.25. THE OLD AND THE NEW MAGIC. Introduced by Paul Carus. With numerous illustrations and programmes of enter- tainments of leading magicians of all times. 383 pages. Price S150. Ee D. P. ABBOTT'S BOOKS BEHIND THE SCENES WITH THE MEDIUMS. The best work on this subject ever printed. 328 pages. Price 51.70. THE MARVELOUS CREATIONS OF JOSEFFY. 25 pages, 15 illustrations. Price 15 cents. Any of the above books wiil be sent on receipt of price by F. TT. SINGLETON 3019 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. “e . Aerial suspension Nhe caldron tlusion 4 When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGic Digitized

Page 276

The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 vears) The ‘Invisible Aeroplane,’ Handkerchief Trick, complete, $10.00, Finest Nickel Pedestal, to appear a silk in glass tum- bler, complete, $7.00. Hatton and Plate’s “Magicians Tricks,”’ SL.75. Halley’s “‘Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ $1.00 and $1.15. Goldston’s “Young Conjuror,’’ $3.50 and $1.00. Goldston’s ‘*More Tricks and Puzzles,’’ $.60. Expert Billiard Ball Manipu- lation, SLOO. Medrington’s “‘Magician’s Book of Patter, $.50. Barnello’s ““Red Demons,’’ Fire King Book, $8.50. ““Satan Out- done,’’ New Marvelous Card ae $1.00. Leroy’s “"Cag- liostro’’ Card Trick, any pack used, 3.50. Send 10c¢ for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists: 50c for 212 page II- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Magicians Paper Cut-Out for the Changing Die The March number of Magic contains a gen- uine novelty in the form ofa paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a little ylue, a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that will enable anyone to perform this charming: il- lusion, Complete instructions given. A few copies left. 10 cents each, while they last. KF. T. SINGLETON, Publisher, 3019 Thompson Ave., Kansas City, Mo. 9 N ‘N Journal for Professional and Amateur L | L, L U S | O N | S I Magicians. The only Magical Maga vine printed in the French Language. Published Monthly. Tlustrated. Annual subscriptions, 8 franes SLO, Sample copy, 75 centr mes Lces.. Editor, CNROLY, 20 Boulevard St. Germain, Paris, Fr. r i a) Edited by Will Goldston. A he Magician Monthly journal for all interested in Magic and Mystery. In tts sixth year of success. Annual subsoription, StS. Sample copy. tects. Foreign stamps not accepted In payment, THE MAGICIAN, Ltd.. 6 Robin Hood Yard, London, E. C When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAaGic MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 277

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card The very latest and most popular card experiment, involving a clever effect in ‘‘Spiritualism.’’ A spectator selects a card from any pack, makes a memo. of it, and then replaces the card and shuffles the pack. A piece of blank pa- per isnext examined and sealed in an en- velope, after which the cards are cut by anyone,and the seal- ed envelope inserted between the twoparts of the pack, which 1s now tightly held by a spectator. Upon opening the envelope afew monents later, it isfound that anin- | visible ‘spirit’? artist has made a perfect reproduction of the chosen card upon the enclosed slip of paper. ‘The cnvelepe ts freely shown, and the “Spirit-Photo™ presented as a souvenir to the person who selected the card, No prepared cards or con- federates. A most weird and startling problem, easily learned by anyone. Prive, 5‘) cents, LL LLL LL You Can Learn all about the unusual tricks I am offering this season by en- closing six cents in stamps for complete lists. DONALD HOLMES Originator and manufacturer of PRACTICAL MAGICAL NOVELTIES AND CONJURING EXPERIMENTS P. O. Box 324, Kansas City, Mo. The ealdron illusion Aerial suspension f When writink to advertisers. kindly mention Maagtie ‘ 1

Page 278

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER A FAIR, SOUARE, CLEAN MONTHLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ART AND CRAFT OF CONJURING A PRETTY THIMBLE VANISH (See page 5) FROM A PHOTOGRAPH OF THE HANDS OF THEO, BAMBERG MARCH 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS

Page 279

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card The very latest and most popular card experiment, involving a clever effect in “‘Spiitualism.’” A spectator selects a card from any pack, makes a memo of it, and then replaces the card and shuffles the pack. A piece of blank pa- ( per isnext examined : , and sealed tn an en- ; | velope, after which | the cards are cut by r anyone,and the seal- | ed envelope inserted between the two parts of the pack, which 1s now tightly held by | a spectator. Upon | opening the envelope afew monents later, it is found that an in- | visible “spirit” artist has made a perfect reproduction of the chosen card upon the enclosed slip of paper. The cnvelepe ts | freely shown, and the “Spirit-Photo” presented as a souvenir to the person who selected the card. No prepared cards or con- | federates. AA most weird and starthoag problem, easily learned by anyone. Priee, 3!) cents. A You Can Learn all about the unusual tricks I am offering this season by en- closing six cents in stamps for complete lists. Y Ww @ DONALD HOLMES Originator and manufacturer of PRACTICAL MAGICAL NOVELTIES AND CONJURING EXPERIMENTS P. O. Box 324, Kansas City, Mo. ‘hewidon Wisin Aerial suspension y When writing to advertisers, kindly mention Mac

Page 280

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS ENTERTAIN YOUR FRIENDS AT HOME There is no greater gift on earth than to be able to entertain. How many times have you seen aclever Magician, and was mystified with his perform- ance—and the thought came to you, how [ wish that | was clever! We offer the solution. You can be as clever. We offer the Greatest Card Pack for performing clever tricks ever invented. You require no skill at all. Full in- structions are sent for performing an entire evening. No sleight of hand manipulation necessary, you get the pack of cards, read the instructions, and in five minutes you will be able to entertain as clever as a professional mavician. THE LANIGIRO CARD PACK Price complete with all instructions, $1.00. Cards can be told by mind reading. Cards are made to rise at command. Cards selected appear in your pocket. Cards placed in pack are made to appear at top of pack at will of the performer. ACOMPLETE ENTERTAINMENT OF MYSTERY. SEND ORDERS TO Bamberg Magic Company 1193 Broadway, New York Send for our bie Catalogue, 00 Tricks. 10 cents. The Magical World A WEEKLY REVIEW OF INTER- NATIONAL MAGIC AND KINDRED) ARTS EDITED BY MAX STERLING Published every Wednesday. Yearly subscriptions, 32.50; single copies, 4 cents. All the magical news while it is news. Regular departments of ‘‘What Others are Doing,’’ ‘‘Practical Magic, "' ‘“Whereabouts,’” etc. New tricks of merit inevery number. Only weekly pa- per in the world devoted to the inter- ests of the magician and the magic art. a Neca a ec Will ‘‘vinger up’’ your interest in the i : subject every week. Sit down tonight oS and write for a sample copy. THE MAGICAL WORLD PUBLISHING COMPANY 8, Lawson Steet, Moss Side, Manchester, England. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MaGic

Page 281

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME II NUMBER 12 CONTENTS FOR MARCH, 1911 A PRETTY THIMBLE VANISH | Ernest EvanGeELine 5 Illustrations fron photographs. PAGE A MASTER OF MAGIC Henry RipGeEty Evans / Hlustration from old prints. | COMEDY PICTURE BUILDING “CHILTON”? 12 Hlustrations from drawings. A DECEPTIVE COIN PASS T. C. Boxsey 13 THE GHOSTLY SILK R. W. Reap 14 THE SEVERED APPLE W. HE. H. Puc 17 Illustrations from drawings. WHAT EVERY CONJURER SHOULD KNOW, IIL Is [Hustration from a photograph. ONE HUNDRED GOOD TRICKS WITHOUT SLEIGHT OF HAND. III 19 Hlustrations from photographs. THE MAGICAL REVIEW 22 AN ORIGINAL CHANGING CARD EFFECT THE IMPOSSIBLE POSSIBLE SUGGESTION FOR CARDS TACKEID TO CEILING THE PROPHETIC SILK THE MAGICAL MARKET . 24 Illustration from a photograph. A MONTH OF MAGIC Copyright. 191f, by F. T. Singleton, IN J MaGic is published on the first of every month except July and August by F. ‘T. Singleton, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri, U.S. A. YEARLY SUBSCRIPTIONS, 31.00, Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. ADVERTISING, 35.00 a pave; smaller space proportionately. ADDRESS all business and editorial communications to FF. T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3619 THOMPSON AVENUE, KANSAS CITY. MISSOURT. U. s. A.

Page 282

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card Ee MAGIC ALVERLISEMENIES MARTINKA’S w CATA IE LOGUE Biggest and best catalogue of high grade mayical goods sent postpaid for 25c. Magi cian’s Headquarters in America. Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship, being famous for solid quality. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will wreaths please everyone, A heavy = brass cap is yviven tor thorough exami: Nation. In the cap is a small hole, go- ing right through it, Three coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them, Lifting the same im- mediately, only two coins are left. Nosleizht of hand. Can be performed at onee by any one. Price. complete, SI. MARTINKA & COMPANY 4938 Sixth Avenue, New York PROFESSOR HOFFMAN’S BOOKS MODI-RN MAGIC. For many years Professor Hoffmann has held the field as the standard writer upon the fascinating subject of natural magic, and his two books, WJodern Magic and More Mae- tw cover almost the whole range of known tricks up to the date of pub- lication of the latter [$89,578 pages, StS ilustrations. Handsomely bound i cloth. Price, S1.50. MORK MAGIC. Uniform with the above, 457 pages, 140 ilustrations. Price $2.00, LATER MAGIC. Professor Hoff- mann’s latest book. Most up-to-date book on magic. Explanation of the latest tricks. 557 pages, 221 illustra- tions, Price $2.00. \ Se ae Pee wwe beers v Fob. SINGLETON, 3619 ‘Pho npson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention Macu Digitized by *

Page 283

The Publisher Says I was in Chicago recently. Saw Thurston’s magic show and met some of the leading magical lights of the town. The most enthusiastic magic ‘‘bug’’ I ever ran across is Harry O. Pearson, Secretary of the World’s Master Magicians, Chicago’s new society of conjurers. He is a splendid organizer with stick-to-it qualities. With my own eyes | saw him collect $3 apiece from Mr. A. Roterberg and R. W. Read, the well known Chi- cago dealers, for annual dues as charter members. Mr. Howard Thurston was also persuaded to add his name to the roll. This Chicago society is in a flourishing con- dition and a good example of what push and persistence will accomplish along any line of effort. I spent a pleasant hour with Mr. and Mrs. Roter- berg, famed the world over for their excellent conjur- ing apparatus. Mr. Roterberg was slightly indisposed, having just returned that morning from a age = Milwaukee, beer town. Mr. Roterberg is another organizer, but puts all hisenergy into his business, w ri is conducted along systematic lines that would put to shame the methods of some of the biggest businesses in the country. Roterberg is an independent cuss, too. No man can come into his place, lay a row of bright $20 bills down on the show case and expect to get away with anything he wants. Mr. Roterberg says: ‘‘Yes I will sell you anything—but there is the price—take it or leave it.”’ I spent some time in the establishment of Messrs. Read & Covert, withsome proft, too, for I got their signature to an advertisement contract. Their first ad- vertisement appears in this issue. Under pressure, and while enthusiastic about my magazine, Mr. Read con- tributed a splendid trick to this month’s issue, ‘*The

Page 284

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card Ghostly Silk,”’ after performing the trick in a most fin- ished manner for my pleasure. In time, however, I was badly ‘‘stung,’’ biting hard when Mr. Read in an adjacent room smashed his fin- ger badly and, after running water on it forsometime, came out with his finger bandaged in a blood stained rag,requesting me to tie a string around to hold it. Full of solicitude and sympathy, I did, to suddenly find a faked finger tip rag in my hands, his sound finger with- drawn and compelled to join in the riot of fun that en- sued. This novelty, an imported one, will soon be on the market as, ‘“The Bloody Finger.’’ Just a word, now, about the Society of Twin City Magi- clans, of which I have the honor to be a member. Although I have never met any of the members of this hustling club, face to face, I have been given some pretty good evidence of their caliber. A finer lot of fellows it 1s not possible to get together in any association. From Stifft (The Great Naicigam), the President, down, they all seem to be engaged in the occupa- tion of lessening the tragedy of existence. In their correspon- dence, hardly ever a word of themselves; always of the other fellow. A spirit of good fellowship prevades this society that can be emulated by any kind of an organization. The first installment of ‘Secrets’ of the Society of Twin City Magicians has just been sent to members. It is strictly limited in circulation and is put up in most unique format— — typewritten manuscript with gray cover tied with shoestring. A splendid souvenir, containing several excellent tricks and magical effects. Every magician in the West should join this society. Dues are moderate and real value is assured from a membership. Write to the Secretary, Mr. J. J. Brown, 595 Aurora Ave., St. Paul, Minn., or to the President, Mr. D. E. Stifft, 2400 Lyndale Ave. So., Minneapolis, Minn. The very excellent drawing accompaning the article on *’An Effective Rope Release,’’ tn last month’s Macic, should have been credited to the author, Mr. A. E. Bloom. Another trick by this well known writer will appear soon,

Page 285

MAGIC VOLUME Tl MARCH, 1911 NUMBER 12 Bunkum Conjuring Patter “Ladies and gentlemen, with vour kind and polite attention I shall commence my entertainment, which | have had the honour of per- forming before the King of the Cockatoo Islands, by turning up the sleeves of my coat and trousers (does so), not to) show you my arms and ankles, of which my mother tells me [ may justly feel proud, but to convince you before PT begin that: Thave nothing secreted in my sleeves nor in the legs of my trousers, nor do 1 resort to them to pro- duce articles used in my experiments. “The best professors inthe art of pres-ti-di-gi | pres-ti-di-gi -well, the best conjurors use very litthe apparatus, Louse none at all, nothing but the ordinary articles found in any dwelling-house. “T require,formy first experiment,asmall table--round, square, oc- tavonal, or oblong. T prefer borrowing it) from a member of the au - dience, as it looks less suspicious than if lb borrowed one of my own, “Is there no lady or gentleman present who will lend me a small table? To assure von that } will not injure it in any wav, and that 1 will return it. | would anuch prefer to borrow it than to have it lent tome. Any kind of table will do.” ROBERT GANTHONY A Pretty Thimble Vanish Bv Ernest Evangeline With Illustrations from Photographs of the Hands of Theo. Bamberg, the Man With the Mysterious Fingers, now Presenting Hand Shadows with Howard Thurston's Bie Macie Show Photographs posed by Mr. Bantbersy expressly for this article in’ Chicago. Feb. 28. 19nf, VI Flying Thimble, one of the prettiest sleight of WP) hand tricks ever devised, “in its original form, ‘says Pes Professor Hoffmann, “is the invention of Mr. David POW RSH Devant, but it has been expanded in half a dozen ee BAY directions. In its essence, it is simply the passage of an ordinary sewing thimble from the forefinger of one hand to that of the other, orelsewhere, but the amount of diversity which may be introduced even into so simple an effect is sur- prising. The beautiful thimble work performed recently for the writer 1) 4 —

Page 286

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 6 MAGIC A PRETTY THIMBLE VANISH From photographs posed by Theo. Bamberg. the Man With the Mysterious Fingers in private by Theo. Bam- berg, one of the best teach- ers of sleight of hand now living, is artistic to a de- gree, and would excite the admiration of the most blase magical fiend. Mr. Bamberg was kind enough to pose for several photo- graphs of a simple thimble move, which are presented herewith to the readers of Maaic. We advise them to get a redcelluloid thimble and start in to learn this charming vanish. You will become fascinated with this form of magical work. The thimble is placed on the tip of the right forefin- ger and apparently trans- ferred to the left hand, which closes as if contain- ing it. The thimble, how- ever, is thumb-palmed when covered by the left hand as shown in the sec- ond photograph. A little explanation of this thumb- palm will be necessary. The thimble is placed by the forefinger clear back into the fork of the thumb, as very clearly illustrated in Photo. No. 2. In this position the top of the thimble rests on the loose skin or ‘‘web’’ between the thumb and forefinger. The top of the thimble is push- ed down by the forefinger rather smartly against the loose skin and the base of the thumb pressed against the side. The thimble gripped in this

Page 287

MAGIC 7 manner, the forefinger can be withdrawn and the hand opened out. The thimble, securely nesting in the loose skin down in >the fork of the thumb, will be found when the hand 1s opened out, to have turned, mouth downwards or outwards, in the position shownin Photo No. 3 and, more clearly, in the photo- graph onthe front cover, which shows the move completed and hands opened out. When making this thimble move, Mr. Bamberg stood with his right side to the spectators, his hands slightly extended in front of him. The photographs were taken from the rear, the camera facing the audience. The thumb-palm once mastered, it will be an easy matter for the amateur to devise moves and passes for himself; though it will probably be some time before he is able to execute them with the ease and finish of Mr. Bamberg. Many surprising passes can be made with one thimble only, but for a complete trick two thimbles exactly alike are required. When the thumb-palm can be executed with equal facility with both hands, a thimble can be made to disappear from the fore- finger of the right hand and appear on the corresponding finger — of the left hand, or vice versa, without the hands approaching each other. Fora quite complete exposition of thimble sleights and tricks, the reader is referred to Prof. Hotfmann's Later Magic. There will be found a description of further possibilities of thimble magic, with a description of ‘““The Thimble and Paper Cone,’’ ‘The Patriotic Thimble,’’ “‘The Multiplying Thimble,’’ and “The Vanishing Thimbles.”’ A Master of Magic Some New Light on the Life of Cagliostro By Henry Ridgely Evans I 240 AGLIOSTRO! The name is one toconjure with. It Tey! has acabalistic sound. Who in reality was this in- | ¥ ii comparable master of magic and mystery, this Rosi- x bet crucian and arch necromancer of the Righteenth Dre AB, century, who suddenly emerged from profound ob- security, flashed like a meteor across the stage of life, and then vanished in darkness in the gloomy dungeons of the Castle of san Leon, Italy, charged by the Church with magic, heresy, and freemasonry 7 He hobnobbed with princes and potentates: ee oe a

Page 288

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 8 MAGIC he was the bosom friend of the Cardinal de Rohan, Grand Al- moner of the Court of France; and was mixed up in the Dia- mond Necklace Affair, which was the precursor of the French Revolution. Cagliostro was the founder of the Egyptian Rite of Free- masonary, an occult order, now defunct. He claimed to be able to evoke the spirits of the dead. In fact, he was the prototype of the modern spirit medium. Was he a knave or a martyr? The question is worthy of investigation. COUNT AND COUNTESS DE CAGLIOSTRO From rare portraits in the collection of Harry Houdini One hundred fifteen years have passed away since hisdeath. In drama, romance, and history his. personality has been ex- ploited. Alexander Dumas made him the hero of his novel, ‘The Memotrs of a Physician;’’ grim old Carlyle wrote anessay about him full of vituperation and condemnation; the great Goethe wrote a drama in five acts portraying his career,called ‘Der Gros Cophta;’’ and at this very moment, Madame Herrmann, the lady conjurer, is presenting a magical skit called, ‘‘Cagliostro,’’ in which she impersonates the celebrated sorcerer of the old regime. Perhaps there never was a character in modern history who has been so denounced and vilified as Cagliostro. Were there no good points about him?’ Was he simply a character preying on a credulous public; heartless and unscrupulous? Did he not have some redeeming traits; some ideals”

Page 289

MA MAGIC 9 Recently a voluminous book has been published in London, which treats the subject of the arch hierophant of the mysteries in an impartial manner. It is entitled ““Cagliostro, the Splendor and Misery of a Master of Magic,’’ by W. R. H. Trowbridge. The author has, in my optnton, partially lifted the black pall of evil which has rested upon the name of the sorcerer, for a century and more, and shown very clearly that Caghiostro was not gullty of the hundreds of crimes imputed to him, but on the contrary was in many respects a badly abused and _slan- dered man. As all readers of history know he was mixed up in the Diamond Necklace trial, which dragged the fair name of the beautiful and innocent queen of France, Marie Antoinette, in the mire. But the necromancer was acquitted, after having been imprisoned for over a year in the Bastille. He was after- wards banished from France. ‘The French Minister of Police then sought to blacken his reputation, by endeavoring to iden- tify him with an imposter, forger, and all-round rascal named Joseph Balsamo, who some years before the advent of Caglios- tro in Paris had made a criminal record for himself in’ France and other countries and then mysterously disappeared. A French Police-spy and editor of a newspaper in London, named Morande, an infamous blackmatler, published a series of vitriolic articles about the magician, claiming that he was Joseph Balsamo, but the evidence added was flimsy and tn- sufficient. A book was published at Rome in 1791, purporting to be an account of the trial of Caghostro by the Inquisition, It alsoidentifies him with Balsamo, but no dates are given, and it is to be taken with many grains of salt. Upon the letters of Morande and the Inquisition biography all subsequent authors have based their opinions that Caglhostro, the arch-enchanter and occulist, was Joseph Balsamo, blackmatler, forger, swind- ler, and panderer for his own wife, who was ‘‘wanted’’ by the police of France, Italy, Spain, and England. ‘‘But,’’ says Mr, Trowbridge, “‘there is another reason for doubting the identity of the two men. It isthe most powerful of all, and has hitherto apparently escaped the attention of those who have taken their singular theory of identification for granted. Nobody that had known Balsamo ever saw Caglhostro. ‘Again, one wonders why nobody who had known Balsamo ever made the least attempt to identify Cagliostro with him either at the time of the Diamond Necklace trial or when the articles were published in Morande’s paper brought him a sec- ond time prominently before the public. Now Balsamo was known to have lived in London tn 1771, when his conduct was sO suspicious to the police that he deemed it advisable to leave the country. He and his wife accordingly went to Paris, and it Bert rwer--_

Page 290

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 10 MAGIC was here that, in 1773,the events occurred which brought both prominently under the notice of the authorities. Six years after Balsamo’s disappearance from Jondon, Count Cagliostro ap- peared in that city. How is it, one asks, that the London po- lice, who ‘wanted’ Joseph Balsamo, utterly failed to recognise him in the notorious Cagliostro”’’ And so with his tdentifica- tion in Paris. The Balsamo legend seems to be punctured. But, after all is said, who was ‘‘Cagliostro’’’ He admitted that the name was an alias. Balsamo was devoid of education, or even the appearance of respectability; grasping, scheming, and ut- terly disreputable. Count Cagliostro was a highly accomplished charlatan and past-master in wonder-working, a chemist of no mean ability, an empiric, who made many remarkable cures. He was charitable and generous to a fault, and gave away im- mense sums of money to the poor. As head of the Egyptian Rite of Freemasonry he was fairly worshiped by his followers. How could Balsamo have transformed his character so com- pletely. As Trowbridge says: ‘‘Whoever Cagliostro may hav e been, he could certainly never have been Joseph Balsamo.’ Now let us turn “‘to the man whose career under the impene- tiable cvcognito of Count de Cagliostro’’ astonished all Europe. Il In July, 1776—the exact date 1s unknown—two foreigners ar- rived in London, and engaged a suite of rooms in Whitcombe Street, Leicester Fields. They called themselves Count and Countess Cagliostro. They were presumably of Italian origin, and possessed money and jewels in abundance. The Count turned one of the rooms he had rented into a laboratory. It was soon noised abroad that he was an alchemist and Rosicrucian. To please some people whom he met, he foretold the lucky numbers in a lottery by cabalistic means. Refusing to be mixed up any further in such matters, he was persecuted by a gang of swindlers, and spent some months in the King’s Bench prison, on various technical charges. To avoid further troubles—and the evidence 1s conclusive that he was the innocent victim of sharpers—he left England. But before doing so, he was initiat- ed into a masonic lodge tn London. It was known as Esper- ance Lodge, No. 369, and was composed mainly of French and Italian residents in London, holding its sessions at the King’s Head Tavern (Gerard Street). It was attached to the Contin- ental Masonic order of the Higher Observance, which was sup- posed to be a continuation and perfection of the ancient asso- clation of Knights Templars. The date of the initiation of the 4

Page 291

MAGIC : Hl famous sorcerer was sometime in April, 1776. Immersed tn the dreams of Rosicrucians, Cagliostro determined to found an Egyp- tian Rite of Freemasonry upon the first three degrees of the Fraternity, where magical practices were to be perpetuated. Some claim that he originated the ritual of the new order him- self, others that he borrowed it from the writings of an obscure spiritist, George Caston, which he picked up in a bookstall, in London. He gave out that he had been initiated into the order in Egypt by the Grand Cophta, or High Priest of the Egyp- ‘tians. According to him, freemasonry was founded by Enoch and Elias. He declared Moses, Elias and Christ to be the Se- cret Superiors of the Order, because having ‘‘attained to such perfection in masonry (or occultism) that, exalted into higher spheres, they are able to create fresh worlds for the glory of the Lord. Each is still the head of a secret community. ’’ Power over the spirit-world was promised to those who became adepts in Egyptian masonry. The meetings of the Egyptian lodges were in reality spiritualistic seances. The medium was either a young boy (pupille) or young girl (colombe) in the stage of virgin innocence, ‘‘to whom power was given over the seven spirits that surround the throne of the divinity,and preside over the seven planets.’’ The boy or girl would kneel in front of a globe of clarified water, which was placed upon a table covered with a black cloth, and Cagliostro, making strange mystical passes, would summon the angels of the spheres to enter the globe, whereupon the youthful clairvoyant would behold the Vistons presented to his or her view, and often describe events transpiring at a distance. Many eminent people have testified to this fact. This is what is called Crystal Vision, though the object employed is usually a ball of rock crystal, and nota globe of water such as Cagliostro used. The Society for Psy- chical Research has shown that people in a state of hypnosis fre- quently develop clairvoyant powers. Undoubtedly Cagliostro was an accomplished mesmerizer. He possessed in a remark- able degree ‘psychic powers,’’ which he confessed that he did not understand. But lke many modern mediums, who have genuine psychic gifts, he often resorted totrickery and sleight of hand to accomplish results when power was not forthcoming. From England Cagliostro went to the Hague. Throughout Holland he was received by the lodges with masonic honors— beneath ‘arches of steel.’’ [le discoursed volubly upon mag- ic and masonry to enraptured thousands. Ile visited Milan and St. Peters in 1779. In May, 1780, he turned up at Warsaw. A leading prince lodged him in his palace. Here the necromancer ‘paraded himself in the white shoes and red heels of anoble.’’ (To be concluded in the April number)

Page 292

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS | The Spirit-Photo Card 12 MAGIC Comedy Picture Building. By ‘‘Chilton’’ al F you are provided | with some humor- ous patter on the ludicrous materi- als employed, this simple ‘‘sketch’’ will create uproarious fun even with a highly proper aristocratic au- dience. A basket or tray upon your table contains a stocking, a sock, three paint brushes, a piece of brown paper,a small flat tin, a piece of crepe hair, some hairpins, a length of black tape, and asmall teddy bear. An easel holding a white board-is used to work on,and is pierced in position to hold the tin (see diagram). To commence the drawing, the tape is twisted round pins or fine nails already fixed in the board, to form the face, and con- tinued down to bottom right-hand cor- ner of board, as in the sketch. Next the stocking is added—pins be- ing already fixed in it with cardboard stiffener—foot uppermost. Then the Soct: Yor eae newin Pins S StocrKin Shewin g posifion of card & fis

Page 293

MAGIC | 13 brown paper to form brim of hat, over which is placed the tin and brushes. Screw eyes hold the latter in position. The sock is next arranged toe uppermost, so that the leg portion forms the arm. A ready-made hand follows, and if cor- rectly gauged will appear to be holding the tape. Add the teddy bear to end of tape; paint in foot; fix crepe hair for her tresses and a trouser button for the eye, and the caricature 1s complete. A Deceptive Coin Pass By T. C. Bonney Pe BOUT the first thing a student of conjuring learns is i the art of palming a coin, for the reason that a pock- | et piece of some sort is carried by nearly everyone and one can always find a little time each day in 3 which to practice with it, something not always pos- sible with tricks and sleights of a different nature. In the Jan- uary number of MaGic appeared an excellent article, ‘‘How to Palm’ a Coin,’’ under the general title of ‘‘What Every Conjurer Should Know,’’ showing exactly how to do what ts sometimes spoken of as the ‘‘ordinary’’ palm, and it is this sleight which forms the foundation of the following pass or vanish which, while not new, is very effective and well worth mastering by anyone desirous of acquiring a passable skill in sleight of hand. The pass in question was shown me by my father nearly twenty years ago,and I have never happened to see any one do it besides himself and as it does not appear in any of the litera- ture I have at my command, I offer it to the readers of Macic in the hope that that they will derive as much pleasure in mas- tering it as I did, it being my first lesson in the interesting study of magic. — . The description follows: Roll up sleeves and take coin tin night hand ina position for ordinary palm. Apparently take coin in left hand but in reality palm it in right, which drops to side, with fingers spread apart in a natural manner. The coin isnow apparently placed in the mouth with lett hand which you at once open and show empty, at the same time lifting right hand (taking care not to expose coin palmed therein), and tap- ping on cheek with ends of fingers. By slightly inflating the cheeks and giving a few quick taps you can produce a sound very similar to that which would be produced if you really held a coin between your teeth and cheek.

Page 294

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card i4 MAGIC Again drop right hand to side, at the same time making a wry face and go through the act of swallowing as though with difficulty. If you have mastered the “‘palm’’ herein described you will find the rest of the trick is simply acting. The act of swallowing, like the other moves, should be done naturally, always remembering that you are trying to make your audience believe you are doing something more or less diff- cult. Do not produce coin too quickly, but give it time to ‘‘sravitate’’ and bring it to light from bottom of vest with fin- gers of right hand which, during the supposed act of swallowing coin, has been brought up to that position. The Ghostly Silk A Star Trick for An Amateur Programme - By | R. W. Read yy of a mechanical nature,and thereis, probably, no ex- FY y Periment with hankerchiefs any more effective. It ( 3) I possesses the advantages of being easily prepared we es without expense (except for the handkerchiefs) and can be presented under almost any circumstances. ErreEcT: —The operator states that many persons have men- tal delusions, in other words, are continually “seeing things.’’ These delusions, he explains, are phantoms of the mind. The ‘“ghosts’’ which they see are not material, in fact, do not ac- tually exist, although the impression is often so vivid and real- istic that the subject would swear he had really seen something. A small red handkerchief is introduced, and although quite tin- nocent in appearance, it is said to be composed of ‘‘Ethereal Silk.’’ This variety of handkerchief can quickly dematerialize itself, in which invisible condition its ‘‘Astral’’ form floats about creating ghostly impressions in the minds of certain people. To illustrate this fact, a glass goblet is borrowed, shown per- fectly empty and covered with a large handkerchief, being then placed on a side table. From a sheet of newspaper is formed a cone into which the small red silk is placed, the hand pressing itdown. As the hand 1s withdrawn, an impressionable specta- tor imagines he sees the ghostly form of the handkerchief re- moved as well. It is explained that the silk never assumes its spectral form at this stage of the experiment; however if the spectators insist, an Investigation will be made. The hand is shown to contain nothing, while the handkerchief is seen to be | a

Page 295

AAACCI MAGIC 15 still within the cone, its supposed absence being merely a de- lusion. The handkerchief is again thrust down into the cone which is laid upon the table. The operator announces that he will now cause the handkerchief to dissolve and _ pass invisibly into the covered goblet. Hardly has he made this statement than a spectator remarks that the handkerchief is already gone from the cone—he “‘actually saw it go—caught a flash of the red silk’’ as it left. This time he is quite positive, in fact, the entire company seem to have received the same impression and loudly proclaim the fact. The operator is openly accused of de- ception—the very idea! To prove his innocence, he once more shows the handkerchief still safely within the cone. To remove all further doubts and prevent the spectators from again‘ ‘seeing things,’ the handkerchief is thrust down into the cone by the aid of the wand and the mouth of the cone folded over. Being assured that no further suspicion exists, the operator lays the cone upon the table. A few passes are made over it and the silk commanded to invisibly pass from the cone to the goblet. He asks if anyone saw it go. ‘‘No? It is strange that you have previously seen it wandering around so many times when it had not moved at all. And this time, when it actually trav- elled from the cone to the goblet, some ten feet, you failed to observe its passage.’’ The goblet is uncovered and sure enough, there is the handkerchief. ‘‘Although the peculiar properties of ‘Etherial’ silk enable it to become invisible, it cannot oc- cupy two different places at the same time, as you have already discovered. The handkerchief has left the cone, and here it is.’ The performer is about to pass to the next experiment, when there seems to be a lingering doubt regarding the empti- ness of the cone. This doubt will exist, although the specta- tors at this point are not apt to express their belief as freely as before. The cone ts finally taken and unrolled while the paper is held by one corner, both sides being freely shown, and no trace of the handkerchief. PREPARATION—Three small colored silk handkerchiefs exact- ly alike and one large handkerchief, preferably of a color sim- ilar to the small ones. Also a double sheet of newspaper (four pages, folded once). This is prepared by pasting together the three open sides, except four inches on each side of one of the open corners. Roll this intoa cone of such size that when pressed flat, it will be exactly the width of the open corner at the top. If properly rolled, one pasted corner will come exactly oppo- site the open corner, both projecting an equal distance. With the cone pressed flat, it 1s imposssble to tell whether you ac- tually open the cone proper, or the inside compartment. Insert one of the small silks in the inner compartment pushing it fairly

Page 296

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 72 ANS er Es. 16 MAGIC ly well down and as flat as possible. Unroll the cone, fold the paper over once and lay. on your table with the open corner away from the audience. The second small handkerchief is rolled into a ball and concealed in a fold of the large handkerchief which is placed on a side table. The remaining small handker- chief is left in full view upon the center table. After showing the goblet, the large handkerchief is picked up, and with it the small concealed handkerchief, the large handkerchief being cas- ually shown and placed over the empty goblet. The small hand- kerchief is, of course, allowed to drop into the goblet during this operation. After the introductory remarks, the prepared newspaper is formed into a cone as described and the last outside corner Is pinned to make all secure. Stand with your left side to the au- dience holding the cone in the left hand. Take the small hand- kerchief from the table with the right hand which places it into the cone proper, pushing it to the bottom where it is left. The right hand is removed quickly and makes a feint as though get- ting rid of something in the back pocket. The movement of the coat tails adds suspicion and some one is sure to ‘‘discover’’ you. Of course you can show the same handkerchief still in the cone. This time you hold the handkerchief by one corner and simply allow tt to drop into the cone which is laid upon the table with the mouth away from the audience. While announc- ing his intention of causing the handkerchief to dissolve and pass from the cone to the empty goblet, the operator stands with his right hand near the mouth of the cone. With the left hand he indicates the goblet, at the same time quickly extract- ing the handkerchief from the cone with the right hand which drops it on the servante or upon a chair close to and behind the table. Loud will be the objection to this procedure. After protesting his innocence, the operator picks up the cone, press- ing it flat. He reaches into the cone (really into the inner com- partment) and shows the handkerchief to be still there. With the wand the handkerchief is pushed well down into the inner compartment, the mouth of the cone is folded over, being then placed upon the table. All that now remains to be done is to command the handkerchief to pass and show that it has appear- ed in the goblet. The by-play regarding the emptiness of the cone will be readily understood. In opening the cone, hold it by the open corner, extract the pin and cause the paper to un- roll with a shake. The paper can be rolled into a ball and thrown carelessly aside. In any event, see that the paper is out of reach of the audience. If you use an assistant, you can step close to the wings, or to your screen, and have him reach into the cone extracting the handkerchief instead of you jerking it from the

Page 297

MAGIC 17 open cone and dropping it upon the chair. The trick is not at. all difficult, but the patter should be well rehearsed. I have of- ten introduced the trick as an extra item in my program when I discovered my audience to contain one of those persons who ‘know it all."' As a means of taming such a person, this trick ranks almost with the well known and justly popular ‘‘Sliding Die Box.”’ The Severed Apple By W. H. H. Pugh EDITORIAL NotE-—Mr. W. H. H. Pugh is a veteran magician 70 years old, who long ago retired from the stage, after a successful career of 36 years. His home isin Burlington, N. J., where he is always glad to see and hear from the vounger generation of magicians. 4 T any party where apples are used for refreshments, et take two apples anda needle and strong thread, Vv sew around one apple as near the skin as possible, ve 4 putting the needle back in the same hole so as to ——<™ make no mark. After going all around as in picture, tie the thread as shown. Then pull on the knot until the thread comes out and your apple will be cut in two. Now take another THE SEVERED APPLE From an original drawing by W. H. H. Pugh apple and sew it two ways and you will have it cut into four parts and so on. If a little care is taken in sewing no one will see the needle holes. Take apple in left hand, give turn with the right hand and it will fall apart of itself. No one need see the movement of the hands.

Page 298

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 18 MAGIC What Every Conjurer Should Know Il] How to Throw a Card Selected and Edited by Ernest Evangeline =x] HIS sleight belongs rather to the ornamental than a yy) to the practical part of conjuring, but it is by no 2% means to be despised. It 1s a decided addition to a Gi card trick for the performer to be able to say, ““You MS Observe, ladies and gentlemen, that the cards I use perfectly ordinary character,’’ and by way of offer- ing them for examination, to send half-a-dozen in succession flying intothe remotest corners of the hall or theater. The card should be held lightly between the first and second fingers, in the position shown in the illustration. The hand should be curved in- ward toward wrist, and then straighten- ed with asucdden jerk, the arm being at the same time shot sharp- ly forward. The effect eee ee a a aes a. + tre ar + By yy body ks ae of this movement Is th that the card, as it way leaves the hand, re- Re volves in the plane of its surface in the di- rection indicated by the dotted line, and during the rest of its course Maintains such revolution. This spin- DIAGRAM FOR THROWING CARD ning motion IVES the flight of the card a strength and directness which itt would seem impossible to 1m- part to so small and light an object. A skilled performer will propel cards in this way toa dis- tance of sixty or eighty feet, each card travelling with the pre- cision, and well-nigh the speed, of an arrow shot from a bow. The movement, though perfectly simple in theory, ig by no means easy to acquire in practice. Indeed, we know no’sleight which, as a rule, gives more trouble at the outset; but, after a certain amount of labor with little or no result,the student sud- denly acquires the desired knack, and thenceforward finds no difficulty in the matter. eS © £46 = an ~~ 3S het, eile - sae ye ee ee ies ae ere ae Fy me oo! Beet ae ee oY Agi, ay” » eae wh ae f Digitized by Google

Page 299

MAGIC 19 One Hundred Good Tricks Without Sleight of Hand III- Ten Good Handkerchief Tricks Selected and Edited by Ernest Evangeline XXI. HANDKERCHIEF FROM COLLAR—Hold the wand under the left arm, take a small silk handkerchief, and roll it as small as possible between the hands. Clench the left hand tightly, and pretend to hold the handkerchief with it, but actually palm it in the right hand, holding it in position with the thumb, and well display the back of the hand with fingers open. At thesame time take the wand from under the left arm with the nght hand, which will enable you to clench the hand and effectually hide the palmed handkerchief. Now tap the clenched left hand with the wand, open it, and show that the handkerchief has vanished, put the left hand up to the collar, and produce the handkerchief which was secreted there before beginning the trick. XXII. HANDKERCHIEF THROUGH LEG (WiLL GoLp- sTON)—A borrowed silk handkerchief is tied around the per- former's ley, yet without untying a single knot he pulls the piece of silk through, and hands it for examination. Obtain a large soft silk handkerchief or muffler, twist it round and put it around the leg under the knee half way making a loop, then bring the ends back and tie them into three knots. Call the company’s attention to the secure manner tn which the hand- kerchief is tied, then pull forward by taking the silk double un- der the knots and hand it round for inspection. XXII. WATCH TITROUGH HANDKERCHIEF (Witt GoLpDston)—A borrowed watch ts placed in the center of a silk handkerchief, the four corners are pushed through the inside of a small ring and the corners are held by two members of the company. With all these precautions the performer removes the watch from the hnndkerchief without taking the ring off the latter or requesting the people to remove their hands. Slowly work out of the ring the center edge of the handkerchief (the four corners are firmly held); when you have sufficient space remove the watch. Phis is a most interesting trick and easy to perform, XXIV. A PUZZLING KNOT—The company are asked to let some one hold each end of a handkerchief, and tie a knot in the center without letting go. Roll the handkerchief rope- wise, and lay it flat uponthe table. Then cross the arms, catch

Page 300

—_— MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card 20) MAGIC hold of an end of the handkerchief with either hand, and on unfolding the arms, a knot will be tied, This is a very puzzling trick to one uninitiated (See illustration). XXV. THE BALANCING HANDKERCHIEF—A hand- kerchief is made to stand perpendicular on the finger. A hand- kerchief and a piece of stout wire about 20 inches long, onto the end of which fix avery sharp hook or point, will be required. Push the wire up the sleeve, leaving the hook to- wards the hand. Take a handkerchief by the corners diagonal- ly,twistitin the form of a rope, then at- tempt to balance it on a finger of the lett hand. In this you will be unsuccessful, and the handkerchief will collapse. Now take a corner of the hand- kerchief in the right hand, and hook it to the wire protruding fromyoursleeve; drag this through your left hand so that the wire is concealed by the handkerchief. Direct- ly the whole of the wire has been pulled out of the sleeve,and ILLUSTRATIONS FOR HANDKERCHIEF TRICKS you again twist the : handkerchief rope- wise with the wire inside. You can then quite easily balance the handkerchief on your finger. The hooked end, of course, must be at the top, to prevent the handkerchief from slipping down. XXXVI. TWO HANDKERCHIEFS KNOTTED (WILL GoLpsron)— Two borrowed silk handkerchiefs are thrown into mid-air, when they descend tied by the corners. This trick is highly recommended as an impromptu trick, and can be per-

Page 301

MAC MAGIC 21 formed almost anywhere. The performer only requires a small fine rubber band, which can be obtained at any high-class sta- tioners. The band is concealed over the conjurer’s coat button. When handkerchiefs have been borrowed the performer secret- ly obtains possession of the rubber band and holds it over his thumb and fingers. In the act of throwing the silks up he slips the band over the corners. XAVIT. HANDKERCHIEF AND APPLE—An apple is placed in the center of a handkerchief, the four corners of which are joined together, tied, and the bag then suspended by a cord from a rod or a hook. Take a saber or a strong knife with a thick blade but very sharp edge-—the thicker and sharper the blade, the more likely is the experiment to succeed. A clean upward cut must be made underneath the apple, without saw- ing, and perpendicularly to the point of suspension. The apple will jump up slightly, and the handkerchief will enter with the blade and be uncut. XXVIII. HANDKERCHIEF FROM MATCH BOX--A household matchbox and asmall silk handkerchief are required. Have matchbox lying half open on table, and the hancdkerchiet secreted inside the open end of the outside case. Take a match from the box, close it, and the handkerchief 1s pushed into the hand and produced when wanted (See illustration). XXIX. THE MYSTERIOUS KNOT—A handkerchief is wound round a stick, an assistant places his hand upon it, and the handkerchief is wound round both hand and stick; the ends are tied together, the stick is held at each end, the hand ts re- moved, and the handkerchief drawn away without the knot being untied. Ask two persons to hold a stick between them, twist a handkerchief ropewise, and wind it twice around the stick, leaving the ends hanging over the stick; let one of the persons lay a hand on the told, carry the ends of the handker- chief backwards, and wind again, this time around both stick and hand, but carrying the handkerchief the reverse way of other wind. Tie the ends of the handkerchief together, let the assistant show that he can hold stick unsupported, and then have his hand drawn away. Pull the knot sharply, and the handker- chief will come away from the stick. Care must be taken not to cross the handkerchief. XXX. BURNT HANDKERCHIEF RESTORED—Conceal in left palm a small piece of cambric. Borrow a white handker- chief; take it by the center with the same hand, and draw out between the thumb and forefinger about half way the piece of cambric you have concealed. Set the false piece on fire. When it has almost reached your fingers blow it out and rub it with the other hand, drawing the piece away.

Page 302

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS _ The Spirit-Photo Card ee ee es Te el _™ os eae | ‘ 22 MAGIC THE MAGICAL REVIEW Some of the Best Tricks From the Current Conjuring Periodicals 9 PUBLISHER'S NOTE—A_ man recently asked me why IT spent so much space ‘boosting’ other conjuring papers. He said: “Don't let your readers know that there are any magical papers in the world other than your own.’ AN ORIGINAL CHANGING CARD EFFECT From The Magic Wand. February, 1911 Prepare a Four of Diamonds by fastening on it an extra pip, ‘‘A,’’as shown in the illustration, with a small portion of wax so that the appearance will be a Five of Diamonds. On the end of the wand have WAX a small dab of wax as shown in the figure. The g back of the extra pip is the colour of the end of the wand. Bring the pack in with a duplicate Four of Dia- monds ready to force, and the Five (7) of Dia- monds the third card from, the bottom. Force the Four, and burn it, showing the hottom card asthe chosen one, and when it is told that this is wrong, lay aside, as also the second. Place around the yack two rubber bands, ‘‘B B,’’ and show Five t) of Diamonds. When told of mistake say you will make it the chosen card. Touch the pip with the waxed end of wand, but do not show change as yet. (As pip is same colour on back of end of wand it cannot be seen.) Holding face downwards, ask audience to hold it, pronounce any magical formula, showing that the card has changed. If only a little wax is used on the extra pip, the pack of cards may he examined. This effect is original with myself; have never seen it described in a book : or even performed by anyone but myself. Find it good for the ‘‘wise guy.’’ 4 ee “THE IMPOSSIBLE POSSIBLE”’ | Percy Naldrett, in The Magical Worid, February 22. 1911 Like many another “‘original’’ trick, this bewildering effect owes its in- ception to a familiar principle of earher origin—in the present case to the ‘*Drumhead Tube.”’ An ordinary glass tumbler, a piece of tissue paper, and a wide, strong, rubber band, are handed to the audience for thorough inspection and per- sonal treatment. Some one is respectfully requested to place the paper over the mouth of the glass, and secure it by means of the rubber band. As a further protection against any substitution of glasses a circular gummed _ pa- perticket is also handed out, to be attached anywhere on the outside of the glass itself, and marked in pencil or ink with any identifving initials or de- sign. In this sealed and secured condition it isshown to be perfectly empty, and then placed at some distance away within a borrowed hat. A handker- chief is vanished by any of the numerous ways, and is eventually discovered within the original sealed and covered glass, and the tissue-paper head has

Page 303

MAGIC 23 to be actually broken to get the silk out. This provesa ‘licker’ to the aver- aye audience. Procure from your dealer a tumbler neatly fitted with an inner shell of celluloid. Place a duplicate silk handkerchief in the celluloid lining, and hx a paper disc to the upper edge, with gum, to enclose the silk. This is secretly loaded into the borrowed hat while the real glass is under examina- tion, Tf left in the hat in an inverted position, the glass, after sealing, ete., is simply pressed over the fake, which pierces the paper head, replacing it with its own, while the torn edves are hidden by the rubber band around the outer zlass. ‘The rest is obvious. SUGGESTION FOR CARDS TACKEID TO CEILING Jobn Nelson. in The Sphinx, February. 19114 The trick of having a card taken from the pack and then throwing the pack to the ceiling and the chosen card sticks there, is certainly one good trick and will always be good. But to pick the cards up afterwards never did agree with me. Whenever | do the trick now | always have a rubber band. After bringing the card to the top and the tack has been placed, | take a rubber band and place around the pack, but net around the card that is to be stuck on the ceiling. In placing the rubber band around the cards, | have the tack card on the bottom and draw it back from the rest of the cards, and then it is an easy manner to place the band around the rest of the cards. Those wishing to do this trick will like it when they see no cards to pick up afterwards. THE PROPHETIC SILK RH. Townshend, in The Magical World. February 15. 1911 A member of the audience is asked to select a card and replace it in the pack, The performer, going to another member of the audience, asks per- mission to remove a portion of the lining of the victim's coat: this he does with a tearing noise. “Phe magician then produces magically a larye white handkerchief. In this he wraps the pieces of lining, wrapping the bundle up Ina piece of ordinary newspaper, previously shown both sides. The packet is then piven to a member of the audience to hold. After a magical incantation, the packet is opened by the performer, who finds that the pieces of coat lining have attached themselves to the white silk handkerchief, roughly forming an eight of spades, which was the card actually taken by the first person inthe audience. PREPARATION A pack of cards, with the ace of spades on the bottom, or a forcing pack, is placed in readiness on the table. A piece of black coat lining is put in the right profonde. A representation of the eight of spades ts made by cutting out eight spade pips, and sewing them on toa large white silk handkerchief, A plain sheet of newspaper is put flat on a table, and the silk eight of spades is placed flat over it and covered by a second piece of newspaper, and both sheets securely pasted together round the edges. This faked sheet of paper is also placed to hand on the table. In presenting the trick, the eight of spades is forced, then the lining and handkerchief are wrapped together in the prepared sheet of paper. ‘To ex- tract the silk eight of spades the outer piece of paper only is torn. — If it is found to difficult for the beginner to produce a handkerchief mavically, it may be previously arranged to ‘borrow'’ one. The February Sphinx contains a fine series of card shuttles by Surgeon Rell M. Woodward.

Page 304

Gee —EeEEE te = MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card =-- 24 MAGIC THE MAGICAL MARKET Latest Tricks, Sleights and Apparatus From the Conjuring Shops PUBLISHER'S NOTE—AII tricks, sleights and apparatus reviewed here will be considered strictly on their merits, no effects being described as being possible that cannot actually be obtained. The secrets involved in these new tricks. of course, cannot be given. THE LANIGIRO CARI) PACK From Bamberg Magic Co., 1193 Broadway, New York The principle involved inthis trick is one of the most interesting develop- ments in later day card magic, and is capable of application in many direc- tions. The secret alone is worth more thanthe price asked, although a pre- pared pack of beautiful ivory finished cards, with red plaid backs is provid- Posts ed. A dozen or more ef- > fective tricks can be per- formed with this deck without sleight of hand or much practice. One of the most important effects ob- tainable is that any spec- tator can insert a knife blade or finger in the pack at any place in the deck while the operator is run- ning over the cards from the end (See illustratoin), and the card on either side of the inserted blade can be withdrawn by the spectator; yet the card thus selected is instantly known to the operator. KNIFE BLADE FORCE WITH LANIGIRO DECK WV have made a hit with this pack by thus forcing a card, having it placed back in the pack anywhere, the pack placed in the hand of another specta- tor, or the same one who selected the card, and covered over with a hand- kerchief. After a great show of mental effort, we brought forth the selected card. All, be it remembered, without sleight of hand. The price of the pack is 31. Se ae. ~ a! Sos aA 4 f ole _ a Anu oe THE “GO ANT COME’ COIN TRICK From W. D. Leroy, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. This is one of Leroy’s latest coin effects. An examined, unprepared sil- ver quarter is placed on the open hand to vanish and appear at will. Hand can be shown front and back. No sleight of hand or spider used. No skill required, A most ingenious little piece of apparatus, easily worth the 25 cents asked for it. Good enough fora professional. If you do it in front of a amuirror you will deceive even vourself, a4 =

Page 305

MAGIC 25 A MONTH OF MAGIC All the Magical Entertaining News Without Prejudice or Personal Criticism ACKNOWLEDGEMENT—Besides regular and special correspondents in New York, London, Boston, Philade Iphia, C hicago and San Francisco. and occasional correspondents all over the world. MAGIC’S news service is obtained from the leading daily newspapers, and the theatrical and vaudeville press as represented by The Billboard, The New York Clipper. Variety, The Player and The Show World. And last, but not least, from ouresteemed contemporary, The Mawical World, AccurRAcy—The Publisher desires to make this magical news service dependable, and will be grateful when his attention is called to any misstatement of fact or errors of any kind, ADDRESS ALL Tn es to F. T. Singleton, Publisher, 3619 Thompson Ave.. Kansas City. Mo., U.S. ; QUEEN ALEXANDRIA ACCEPTS BERTRAM’S BOOK Her Majesty (Queen Alexandria has graciously accepted a copy of the late Charles Bertram’s bouk, ‘A Magician In Many Lands,’’ which deals in an interesting manner with his travels and experiences in various parts of the world. The book is profusely illustrated. Intending subscribers for the edition de luxe should communicate with Mrs. Bertram at 41, Christchurch Road, Streatham Hill, England. “ P. ‘T. Secsir will put on his “Spirit Paintings’’ at the Orpheum, Spok- ane, March 20-25; Seattle, March 27-April 1. HoWARD THURSTON will play the Haymarket, Chicago, March 20-25; Pittsburg, March 27-April 1. DAVID IDEVANT may come to America shortly for a trip around the big vaudeville houses. He is Enyland’s favorite conjurer, well known in this country through his popular writings on magic. One of the results of the recent controversy between Sir Hiram Maxim and Mr. Maskelyne will shortly be seen at St. George’s Hall, London, where Messrs. Maskelvne and Devant will present a series of spiritualistic mani- festations entitled ‘“lhe Maximum Miricles."’ HEWEs, the white Youyi, is still at the Eden Musee, New York. He its preparing a new illusion to be called, ‘“Vhe Bride."’ KINNARD submitted a puzzling and cleverly conceived magical act to the patrons of the Empire, Wakefield, England. MapGkE TEMPLE has arranged to exhibit in the foyer of a West End, London, halla magic mirror. When one looks at it, it appears to be an or- dinary looking glass, but every few seconds a picture of the lady appears mysteriously in the glass, vanishing no one can tell where. THE ZANCIGS have yone to England for a long stay. RUSSELL, Batavia, N. Y., has sent us a copy of an excellently arranged leaflet describing his original novelty magical acts: ‘“Vhe Mysterious Silks,’’ “A Night in Wonderland,’’ and ‘‘Russell, Master of Sealed Manacles.’’

Page 306

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card - @, Tere ee . . - 26 MAGIC CHRIS. VAN BERN: THE SURPRISE PACKET By Man Sterling. Special Correspondent Seen at the Oxford, London, February 17. This very novel act is not presented as a conjuring performance, the magical part being apparently in- troduced without design in the course of some smart patter. Attired ina grey frock suit, with gloves and tall hat of same colour, artiste enters, carrying bay and stick in left hand and white handkerchief in right. After a few pithy opening remarks, the white handkerchief suddenly changes into a crimson one. His walking stick next takes the liberty of setting at defiance the law of gravity by rising between his fingers. Asserting that stick possesses mag- ical virtues, one orien being that a mere tap with it suffices to produce anything desired, artiste demonstrates its properties by tapping the lapel of his coat, the appearance of a red flower being the immediate result. Picking up a box, which occupied a position on the stage prior to artiste’s appear- ance, it instantly transforms itself into a chair. Remarking that he has no- where to put his hat, performer picks up chair and transforms it into atable. ‘The box he originally entered with likewise changes into a table and occu- pies opposite side of stage. A particularly good effect was the next item which consisted of instantly changing a blue silk cloth into a full-size broom. Ex- plaining that he has a weakness for mislaying his gloves, performer places them for safety within his hat only to find a moment later they have again cluded him. A bottle, after having a drink poured out, istransformed into a black baby to the evident disgust of performer. A particularly neat version of the wine and water trick, using but one tumbler and glass jug of water, was the next surprise. , Explaining that professional singers might combine other items withtheir vocal efforts, Van Bern illustrates his theory by singing, ‘‘Love, could | only tell thee,’ and performing tricks at same time. In the twinkling of an eye, an umbrella is changed into a ght tripod table. Glass of wine is poured | into a vase from which, the next second, a host of coloured ribbons are pro- duced, leaving vase quite dry. After instantly changing a coloured silk hand- kerchief into a billiard ball, performer introducesa funny comedy ‘‘wheeze"' with a sheet of brown paper and a cigarette, which latter vanishes in a flash of flame on having a match applied to it. After’ proving his versatility by giving a mimetic banjo sketch, he proposes retiring to bed, and a mere turn of his body shows him ready attired in a pyjama sleeping suit. Advancing to a four legged table, which has done service throughout the act, it in turn becomes a “‘trunk,’’ which is carried off by artiste as conclusion to his act. The applause which was lavished on this unconventional act proved it was quite to the taste of a large audience. VALADON IN KANSAS CITY Week of Feb. 20, Kansas City magical “‘buys’’ had the pleasure of wit- nessing the performance of Valadon, a finished and painstaking performer. His ‘‘My next swindle-—I mean, trick,’’ will be remembered pleasantly for along time. He is doing a well-chosen selection of tricks, opening with tri- colored nibbon throw-outs from) colored tissue, producing an American flag from the gathered-up ribbon. The act closes with the levitation of a girl, covered with a sheet, from a table. When suspended in the air the table is removed, the sheet covered body lowered and suddenly vanished completely. R. L. Viras, the popular local manager of the Pluto Powder Company, Ishpeming, Mich., who is a clever magician, was an extra attraction at the Owl's minstrel performance recently held in thaf city.

Page 307

MAGIC oi. PHURSTON'S EXTRA CHICAGO BILLING We were in Chicago a few weeks ago and saw Thurston's big show. The city looked as though a fortune had heen Spent on extra billing, elght-sheet lithos of Thurston being put up lavishly all over town, The very first thing our eyes Caught as the train entered the city was one of these lithographs. Thurston is a believer in vood advertising and is insuring himself for the future. Thetwo big new illusions, ‘“The Lion and the Lady,’’ and ‘The Automobile Mystery,’’ are successes of the unusual kind, and are put ove! In a most convincing manner. A most artistic bit is ‘“The Piercing Arrow,’’ which is shot through a young girl to the target, with long red mbbons trail- ing through her body. Theo. Bamberg adds classto the show with his splen- did hand shadows done in view of the audience. PeoF. A. E. MATTRON gave a demonstration of mind-reading and thought transmission at the first: semi-annual banquet of the ‘Twin City) Freight Rate Clerks’ association, Minneapolis. GEORGE HUEY, who is one of the only two men in Minneapolis who could mystify Kellar, the magician, when that wizard was entertained by the local magi- cians’ association, was one of the headliners at a recent post- exam ‘Riot,’ at his college. Al- though he is a junior he had never before exercised his art in Campus circles, having given his entire leisure to practice and over-town engagements. W. H. H. PuGu, Burlington, N. J., writes that he used to do the rope release given in MAGIC last month with a handkerchief tied around his wrists in place of the pieces of rope. MIGHTY OAKS is: working on a new escape that he says will outclass anything in this line. It GEORGE HUEY is a large glass tank which, after being thoroughly examined, is filled to the brim with water. The can is transparent and will also be used for a water test. It sounds good, Oaks; may surpass the famous can mys- tery. CANARIS, the French magician, at Pantages, St Joseph, Mo., Feb. 27- March 4. T. NELSON DOWNS IN KANSAS CITY T. Nelson Downs, incomparable ‘‘King of Koins,’’ was at the Empress, Kansas City, Feb. 27-March 4. Few conjurers appear more often before the public than Downs. His superb manipulation 1s unsurpassed by any living man, and his bold patter helps him to hold his audiences. His act has be- come a vaudeville classic, and we hope will come around regularly for many years to come.

Page 308

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit- Photo Card = ee ee op wl 28 MAGIC HENRY CLIVE’S NEW ACT Henry Clive presented a new act at the Fifth Avenue, New York. He has left the magical comedy tricks, and does not walk into the audience. “Fo replace the former tatter, Mr. Clive hasa humorous travesty on lightning cal- culations, with Mai Sturgis Walker once again as his pretty assistant. Another new bit is a little skit on ventriloquism, with Clive wearing a drooping: mus- tache, holding a ‘‘dummy"’ on Ins knee. Wlnle speaking he makes a large jar of milk disappear ostensibly drinking it. “To conclude, a httle magic with handkerchief and bilhard ball is explained as the orchestra drowns out his voice through Joudly plaving ““Phe Glow Worm.’' Itis another act, with Clive still the easy going, pleasing entertainer. In an important spot at the Fifth Avenue, the house evinced so strong a liking that Mr. Clive and Miss Sturgis bowed many times. Clive is always laughable, and his present ma- terial is much preferable to the other. RECRENTP DATES PLAYED HAL MERRITT, poster caricaturist, at Keith and Proctor’s Fifth Avenue theater, New York—ToM EDWARDS, ventriloquist, at the Colomal, New Vork—-GRIFE, juggler, at American Music Hall, Chicago--PAuL SPADONI, jugyler, at the Orpheum, Brooklyn---MRrs. Eva FAY, mind reader, at the - Greenpoint, Brooklyn—McCoy, Mystic, at’ the Colonial, St. Lours—Law- RENCE JOUNSON, ventriloquist, at Keith's, Prov idence ~ MARSHALL. MONT- GOMERY at Hammerstein's, New York. VAN CAMP, mavician, will make a world tour with Vesta Victoria. Fanny RICE put over her novel cabinet entertainment at the Alhambra, New York. She has added a ‘“‘kid’™’ and a ‘‘Sutfrayette’’ character to her miniature bodies, for which she forms the head. She still leads all her imi- tators. SEARS produced “The Court of Mvysteria,’’ a new illusion, atthe Alham- bra, Glasgow, last month. It is on a big scale and was a success. PAULINE, hypnotist extraordinary, starts on a return trip over the Pan- tages circuit March 5. CLAUDE GOLDEN, card manipulator, opened at Omaha, Neb., for seven weeks of tine for Walter Keefe. THE INQUISITION: A DARING MYSTERY ACT We take great pleasure in presenting to the readers of MAGIC this month a description of Carlton's new mystical episode, ‘’ The Inquisition,’ a) bril- hant creation by Max Sterling. In arranging this daring subject for the stave the greatest delicacy has been exercised to avoid the slizhtest possibilitv of offence towards the his- torical associations of any Religious body, and that without sacrificing the powerful dramatic intensity of the blood-stirring spectacle of the ‘Torture Chamber itself. ‘Phis has been treated with such artistic skill that, however realistic the horrors of the situation may appear, subtle stagecraft relieves the momentary tension of anything ap proaching vulgar brutality. While the instruments and engines of torture used in the act are exact replicas of their terrible originals, the story is advanced as a mythical epi- sode under the regime of the ‘‘Fehrngericht,’’ a notorious secret. tribunal | - ee 4

Page 309

MAGIC 29 all-powerful throughout Westphalia during the 14th and 15th centuries; an influence which actually lingered far into the 18th century. THE ARGUMENT—A bewitching maiden accused by her spurned lover with traffic in the Black Arts (witchcraft), is arraigned before the Bloody Tribunal. The President of the Inquisition falls a victim to her beauty,and, in a stolen interview vows to save her fromthe wrath ofthe ‘‘Fehrngencht’’ in spite of torture and death, even though he sells his soul to Hades. The action covers the weirdly mysterious fulfilment of his oath. DETAILED SyNopsis—With the Tableaux held by two cowled inquisitors the performer steps forward to disclaim any religious inference in the strange title of the act, etc.; he is attired in ordinary evening dress, which instantly changes to German costume as the curtains rise on the stolen interview be- tween the President of the Inquisition and the fair victim, within the judge- ment hall or crypt. She points the way to her own liberation and calls for a certain book. By apparent occult force she is obeyed; a huge folio detaches itself from a num- ber of chained volumes in the wall,descends to a lectern, mysteriously opens and turns over leaf after leaf unaided until a blaze of fire illuminating the entire crypt indicates a passaye wherein lies an evil spell to aid him. Horror- struck and trembling he reads how he may accomplish his task—at the cost of his soul. The deep booming of a muffled bell announces the hour of trial and ap- proach of the councillors in torch-lit procession chanting a weird dirge. Hastily donning his robe of otice the President muunts the dais, and the trial proceeds. Condemned to torture and death the fair victim prostrates herself. in an. unavailing, impassioned appeal for mercy. Seized by halbardiers and stripped to the waist, she is secured to a column, while the torturer sears her ‘‘nak- ed’” back with a red hot instrument heated in an open brazier on the stage. The frightful realism of the scene is accentuated by the agonized screams of the sufferer, and the sizzling of the burning flesh under the steaming iron completes the awful illusion. | Unconscious, the girl is then placed within the yawning embrace of the ‘Iron Maiden,'’ whose fatal knite-studded gates close to fill the penalty de- manded. A terrific thunder-crash strikes consternation and confusion among the swaying ‘‘Freischoffen’’ (Free Judges) still droning their sombre mel- ody. A blinding column of light bursts from the ‘‘Iron Maiden’’ and the “Spirit of Evil’ leaps out over the heads of the Inquisitors. At a flash of the Satanic hand the chanting councillors are strangely vanished into noth- ingness, while the armed guarzds rushin abject frenzy for safety.In an attitude of protest, the President rises from the dais and the limelight concentrated upon him reveals an invisible and instantaneous transformation to the ori- ginal maiden none the worse for her tragic experience. His head-dress re- moved discloses the ‘‘Evil One’ to be the President himself who has thus fulfilled his vow. | Fifteen people are required for the act, which runs thirty minutes. HERR RICHARD A. BOLKE has an act that iscreating something of asen- Sation wherever shown. It is called ‘‘Creo,"’ and consists of the formation of a woman from wood, plaster and cloth. Special scenery, an artists studio, and electrical effects are included. HOWARD DOTSON put on an act of smoke pictures at the American, New York. He made two sketches ona smoked glass surface, to which a gilt frame was added after the picturers were completed. Very well done. Per- former makes a good appearance, dressing oddly, but attractively.

Page 310

el MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card SBS agnr tt ~ Sees 30 MAGIC SATANI, wonderful illusionist, was at the Palace, Bristol, England. PERRIER, a smart and very popular ventriloquist, was at the Hippodrome, Eastbourne, England. DAVID TOOLE, another smart ventriloquist with entertaining patter, was at the Empire, Edinburgh. TEDNAC, comedy magician, was at the Nickelodeon, Boston. JOSEFFY, the incompar- able,spent a Sunday even- RMIT ME TO RAISE ~~ (BBS iets THE 4 9 sas City recently. He is filling dates in the South and reports good business Qi we im >» “46 His ‘‘Talking Skull’’ still ie ES makes them sit up and © take notice, and his violin mm’ > Av ee to isas enchanting as ever. PALERMO AND CHAFA- LO, with their very pretty mayical act, were at the Rotherhithe Hippodrome (England). Miss Palermo is an accomplished magi- cian and = impersonator. Chafalo is known as the “King of the Magic Rings.’’ He certainly can do this mystifying tnck. MAUDE EpwWAkpDs, the famous English lady ven- triloquist, has a new act in preparation of a novel character. CHING LING FEE, an- other Chinese magician, was at the Aberdeen, Eng- land, Palace theater with smart conjuring tricks. ALBERT E. BODIE, 2 A JOSEFFY POSTER worthy son of a talented sire, proved himself a most dexterous wizard at the Blackpool, England, Hippodrome. IONIA: THE GODDESS OF MYSTERY By Max Sterling. Special Correspondent At the Hippodrome, Birmingham, England, Jan. 30. ‘Tonia’? (in whom we recognise the younger daughter of a famous Paris mavical dealer) is of charming presence and handsomely costumed in a mixed Egyptian-Oriental stvle. Her act is nicely staged in spectacular fashion and neatly performed. She is assisted by a troupe of some seven or eight attendants.

Page 311

MAGIC Sl Her opening effect introduces two decanters, one on either side of stave. A handkerchief putin one finds an invisible way tu its opposite neighbor ata pistol shot. A raised platform is then introduced, with a contrivance re- sembhing an uinbrella supported in the centre. The apparatus is brought forward and displayed empty. A curtain of draperies masks the vacant space for a moment— another shot—and curtains fall to disclose a lady wearing a gigantic ‘‘Merry Widow’ hat, with which she walks off. ‘The umbrella has disappeared. The production of a fish bowl forms the next effect, and living goldfish are secured from the atmosphere by the aid of a net similar in design to that used to ‘‘produce’’ pigeons. An Eyyptian mummy case, supported in an upright position on steps, is next displayed. A lady assistant is secured within and raised tu mid-air and steps removed. The coftin cabinet is spun around, and while still suspended, the lid is opened to apparently display the lady still within. ‘The revolver shot signals her disappearance, the cabinet is thrown open—empty, and the lady reappears from the auditorium. A version of the parasol trick was the next effect. In this, handkerchiefs placed in a paper bag vanish at revolver shot, andthe skeleton parasol, unwrapped from its matting, shows the hand- kerchiefs properly attached to the ribs, forming the conventional parti-colur- ed covering. For the final effect a large platform is placed in the centre of the stage. Uprights at each corner carry draperies to allow of enclosing. It is present- ed as empty: top, flooring, sides, etc., are thoroughly exhibited. The cur- tains are then drawn, and the revolver again brought into play. On the re- opening of the cabinet the ‘“‘chamber’’ is discovered containing two fair maids in picturesque attitude. ‘The show was well received, and should do well in England, as Ionia has practically the field of mystery to herself as far as her sex is concerned. PROGRAMME OF THE GREAT JUPITERS Seen at the American theater, New York, Feb. 20. The act is a comedy turn, pure and simple, with a litthke mystery attached. The Jupiters dress in the approved cowboy fashion and work in a wood set, employing horse blankets to frame up their tent for a sort of a black-art cabinet. One of the brothers calls for a committee from the audience. Among those answering are several ‘‘plants,’’ who help the laughs. The committee is seated on the stage. The comedy is gotten from a trick chair with a needle spring attach- ment. The other brother is seated on a high stool, his hands bound to his thighs and the shirt sewn to his trousers, and blindfolded. The front cover is then let down. Phere is an opening through which his face is shown. Sud- denly there is a hand waved above the covering, then it shows from another part of the impromptu cabinet. Just as suddenly two hands are shown, The play of palms and fingers goes on forsome few minutes. Although the trick may be meant for comedy the audience seemed too mystified to laugh. The hands are commanded to bring forth fresh flowers. ‘These are distributed in the audience. Finally a bouquet is brought forward and a ‘‘plant’ from the bal- cony comes down to receive it. This gives the man in the blanket time to return to his bondage and when the curtain is pulled aside, he is still tied and sewn. The act is one that can fill in on any bill and get laughs. CAPTAIN SPAULDING, the fire-proof man, found molten lead palatable at the Palace, Halifax. BER? LEvy, cartoonist extraordinary, at Keith's, Boston,

Page 312

—s MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card MAGIC A BRILLIANT ENGLISH MAGICAL SEASON By Max Sterling, Special Correspondent Go i) There is every indication that the present vear is destined to mark greater progress in the Art of Magic thanin any like period of the past. Never has there existed such public demand for good mystery, and never at any time has such strenuous energy been exerc ised by the professional mavician to meet the situation. Competition for originality and public favour stands almost at) breaking point. The competitors are not unknown, untried men. ‘They embrace the most famous names our modern stage history holds) -Chuny Ling Soo, Harry Houdini, Horace Goldin, Lafayette, Carter, Sears, and many others of no less renown, Chung Ling Soo for many months has been secretly concentrating his en- ergy upon a mammoth spectacular mystery symbolising “Che Dream of Wealth.’ Houdini, who demonstrates the impossible as being possible, has promised a new sensational escape from a solid block of ice. Goldin is to shine in mystical drama at an early date, in which the centuries of magic past will be revealed. Of the grand spectacular order, the most pretentious cffort yet made is that of the American wizard, Sears, who occupied the entire programme at a special Press performance given at the Peckham) Hippodrome recently. ‘The Blue Pearl," as the majestic spectacle is named, employs no less than 45 people in its action, while elephants, camels, horses, snakes, etc., help to create an atmosphere of Oriental realism. The show is good, and likely to prove a popular success, Another gigantic production, practically ready forthe stage, is that of Pic- itt and Lizette. This involves six special scenes and settings, with effects of a novel character. Of purely dramatic character is “The Inquisition,” to be produced in Mareh by ‘‘Carlton.’* fithis alegitimate story runs throughout, which the illusions only help to intensify. Of other acts, ‘‘Satani’’ has a broad comedy production well ins hand, with which he intends to follow up the successful ‘‘Mysterious Raffles.’’ Harry Lamore is stating new work in new settings, and Herbert Llovd, ‘“The Diamond King,’’ meditates a bur- lesque of cabinet illusions, Collins and Bretma are launching anew act, and from what we personally know of these voung creators of magic we are liable to have some brilliant novelties to record to their credit. In all this striving for place there is possible disappointment in store for some, and in some cases heavy loss. Of recent years the tendency has been to duplicate popular effects and illusions without regard to the rightful owner or originator, the consequence being a surfeit of similarity distasteful to the public and detrimental to the performer, Novelty and showmanship must eo hand in hand if success is to be won, and we sincerely trust to find nov- eltvin the forthcoming acts, for without question they are in the hands of perfect showmen, THE MAID OF THE MIST Mr. Max Sterling sends particulars of the new spectacular mystery he de- signed and produced for Lewis's Exhibition, Manchester. It is called ‘“The Maid of the Mist and Her Flaming Fountains of Fire.” A vision of enchant- ing beauty is scey. Inthe middle of a beautiful garden is a fairy fountain plaving jets of water and flames of fire, out of which is evolved a charming Maid, vradually materialising in full view, without the aid of mirrors, traps, or cabinets, SCHICHTLER'S MANIKINS were at Keith's, Philadelphia.

Page 313

MAGIC v4 ISI MILWAUKEE NOTES Bs Oras. Harmas, Special Correspondent Performers here recently: HilpbA HAWTHORNE, ventriloquist; RICHARD NADRAGE, ventriloquist; MORTON JEWELL TROUPE, club jugglers and baton spinners—CHAS. WEBER, Juggler, has just signed for 13 weeks on S. & C. time, to open in Butte, Mont. His act is full of comedy and skillful work. Recently played the Orpheum circuit—Although Milwaukee is a small town for its size, it boasts of 8000 people who are interested in magic, a magic shop where illusions and acts are built, and a retail magical store where one can buy anvthing from an ‘‘Imp'’s BRottle’’ to a stage dlusion. Drop in most any day and you will find ‘ ‘would- be Kellarsand Thurstons’’ adding to their stock of tricks—A magician’s impression of Milwaukee: Bounded on the East bv Blatz,on the West by Pabst,on the North by Jung and on the South by Miller. The Milwaukee river flows between and ‘'schooners’’ are con- stantly crossing the bar(oke). But) you can’t get a drink on Sunday—the saloons are too crowded. CRIS VAN BERN WRITES A BOOK Few people who have seen and appreciated the volatile and versatile Chris Van Bern on the stave, would imagine that he has written works on philoso- phic research and occult mysteries. He has, however, just been honored with the decoration of the Bronze Star of Merit and diploma from the Grand Chancery of Great Britain and Ireland A. P. R. for his services during the past eight vears in Masonic, occult and philosophic literature, His writings and essays which comprise two large volumes, will shortly be published by Win. Tait and Co., booksellers of Belfast. Mr Van Bern was one of the original pioneers of New ‘Thought in) England and is well-known) in many societies as a lecturer upon abtruse aes: BAMBERG STORK NOTE Mr. Theo. Bamberg informs us that the stork left a beautiful girl baby at his Brooklvu home, March 2, 1901. WinttraAM B. CAULK, Terre Haute, Ind., reports all time filled for rest of season with club, lodge and church engagements in his home town and nearby. Theo. Bamberg gets a lot of notices about his mysterious fingers. He is the representative of the sixth generation of magicians, and his hands show, if anything does, the result of application by successive children tothe same business. Bamberg says: ‘‘Magic is just ike music; there’s always some- thing to be learned and practiced. ”' GREAT Poor, stunts in magic, at the Lincoln Square, New York. HeENkY E. DIXEY introduced magic into his act at) Hammerstein's, New York. CHESANI, Russian magician, at the Dixie, Philadelphia. Produces large carp in glass bowl instead of goldfish, doing the trick in the midst of the audience. WILLIS AND ESTELLE made eood with a novelty and ventriloquial act at a recent Vhirty-first Street theater, Chicago, try-out. LIGHTNING HOOPER, Cartoonist, at the Majestic, Chicage.

Page 314

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card , 34 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Mysterious Discs A novel and clever trick suit- able fur parlor or stage. The performer introduces an oblong sheet of cardboard on which are printed different rows of figures. This cardboard is) stood up against some object so that it is at all times plainly visible. At- tention is next called to a num- ber of cardboard discs, on each of which are printed numbers, each disc heing different from the other. The discs are all thoroughly shuffled by a spec- tator who drops them into a bor- rowed hat. One of the discs is taken out and held in the per- former's hand, but with the back of the disc to the audience. Any- one is now asked to choose any one of the rows of figures on the cardboard (no forcing, etc. ). The moment the row is called out, the performer turns around the disc in his hand and shows that the numbers on his disc are ex- actly the same as those chosen, much to the astonishment of the spectators. Easily performed, no sleight of hand being required. Repeated as often as desired. Complete with neatly printed cardbvuard, discs and full instructions. Price, 25 cents We handle a complete line of tricks, magical apparatus and magician’s supplies. Amateurs supplied as well as Professionals Send four cents, stamps, today and receive the following FOUR CATALOGUES Superior Magical Apparatus Latest Supplements New Card Miracles Trick Novelties and Jokers: READ & COVERT 817-D East 43rd St., Chicago, II]. When writing to advertisers kindly mention MAGIC

Page 315

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 35 UA Night with the Moon A PARLOR PRESENTATION OF OA NIGHT WITH THE MOON" A Practical Lightning “*Chalk-Talk’’ for Amateurs By P. T. SELBIT The June, 190, number of Maaic, containing P. T. Selbit's splendid “chalk talk,” “A Night With The Moon,” being now out-of print, the publisher has reprinted the sketch in attrac- tive pamphlet form. In this unique entertainment, Mr. Selbit presents a practical form of lightning sketch work that anyone, be he or she never so ignorant of the art of sketching, may produce without much practice, and provoke considerable merriment. Price LO cents, postpaid. PP. SINGLETON, Publisher 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 316

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card © aa sa —_ 36 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Back Numbers of MAGIC VOLUME ONE READY MAGIC BOUND IN CLOTH THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER The first volume of Maaic can now be had neatly bound in cloth with title page and index. It con- sists of the first six numbers, Jan- uary to June, 19LO, including the February number, Guosts. Price, $1.00. SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and May 1s- sues remain. They can be had, as long as the supply lasts, for 10 cents each. Complete your file before they are out of print. A Few Copies of the Only Number of GHOSTS Issued The second issue (February, 1910) of MaGic was given the title of GHosts. A few copies remain GH ia saxuany 1910 Weak WCENTS | What & Conjurer Can Do : . he Marvelous Rig Cad of et and can be had for 15 cents, while they last. CONTENTS—The Sphinx Kiddle of oases Humanity- -Spectral Ilusions——Thread- ing the Mazes--An Afternoonin A Mag- ical Library—How | Became A Spirit Medium, Cover in four colors. Colored frontis- piece and 19 illustrations. Most unique mavazine ever issued. FF. T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3619 Thompson Avenue Kansas City, Mo.

Page 317

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 vears) The ‘‘Invisible Aeroplane,’’ Handkerchief Trick, complete, $10.00. Finest Nickel Pedestal, to appear a silk in glass tum- bler, complete, $7.00. Hatton and Plate’s ‘‘Magicians Tricks,’ $1.75. Halley’s ““Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ $1.00 and $1.15. Goldston’s “Young Conjuror,’’ $.50 and $1.00. Goldston’s ‘*More Tricks and Puzzles,’’ $.60. Expert Billiard Ball Manipu- lation, $1.00. Medrington’s ‘’Magician’s Book of Patter, $. 50. Barnello’s “*Red Demons,’’ Fire King Book, $.50. ‘Satan Out- done,’’ New Marvelous Card Principle, $1.00, Leroy’s ‘'Cag- liostro’’ Card Trick, any pack used, $.50. Send 10¢ for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists; 50c for 212 page II- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Masictans Paper Cut-Out for the Changing Die The March number of Macic contains a gen- uine novelty in the form ofa paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a little ylue, a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that will enable anyone to perform this charming il- lusion. Complete instructions viven. A few copies left. 10 cents each, while they last. F. T. SAN Publisher, 3619 LionetD Ave., Kansas City, Mo. 9 Journal for Professional and Amateur L | L L [ | SI O N | S ; Magicians, The only Magical Mayga- zine printed in the French Language, Published Monthly. Hlustrated. Annual subscriptions, 8 franes (86.60), Sample copy, 75 cent mes 13 cts.. Editer, CVNROLY, 20 Boulevard St. Germain. Paris. Fr. Edited by Will Goldston. A "7 he Mag iclan - Monthly & journal for all interested in Magic and Mystery. In its sixth year of success, Annual hg iription, SE05. Sample copy, lO cts. Foretgzn stamps not accepte “d in payment. THE MAGICIAN, Ltd... 6 Robin Hood Yard. London, E. C When writing to advertisers kindly mention MaGic

Page 318

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS _ The Spirit-Photo Card _ MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The Spirit-Photo Card . The very latest and most popular card experiment, involving aclever effect in) ““Spiritualism.’’ A spectator selects a card from any pack, makes a memo ot it, ancl then replaces the card and shuffles the pack. A piece of blank pa- per isnext examined and sealed ino an en- velope, after which | the cards are cut by } anvone, and the seal- - ed envelope tmserted between the two parts of the pack, which is now tightly held) by a spectator. Upon opening the envelope a few moments later, it isfound that an in- visible ‘spirit’? artist has made a perfect reproduction of the chosen card upon the enclosed slip of paper. The envelope is freely shown, and the ‘‘Spirit-Photo”™” presented as a souvenir to the person who selected the card. No prepared cards or con- federates. A most weird and startling problem, easily learned by anyone. Price, 50 cents. l(c You Can Learn ) all about the unusual tricks Iam offering this season by en- closing stx cents in stamps for complete lists. DONALD HOLMES Originator and manufacturer of PRACTICAL MAGICAL NOVELTIES AND CONJURING ENPERIMENTS P. O. Box 324, Kansas City, Mo. When writthgy to advertisers. kindly mention MAG

Page 319

THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER A FAIR, SQUARE, CLEAN MONTHLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ART AND CRAFT OF CONJURING LOADING THE HAT APRIL 1911 PRICE 10 CENTS | fA DCAULLIUIL LFallOl Bate LituUusiVuas

Page 320

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS ENTERTAIN YOUR FRIENDSAT HOME There is no greater gift on earth than to be able to entertain. How many times have you seen aclever Magician, and was mystified with his perform- ance-—and the thought came to you, how | wish that I was clever! We offer the solution. You can be as clever. We offer the Greatest Card Pack for performing clever tricks ever invented. You require no skill at all. Full in- structions are sent for performing an entire evening. No sleight of hand manipulation necessary, you get the pack of cards, read the instructions, and in five minutes you will be able to entertain as clever as a professional mavician. THE LANIGIRO CARD PACK Price complete with all instructions, #1.00, Cards can be told by mind reading. Cards are made to rise at command. Cards selected appear in your pocket. Cards placed in pack are made to appear at top of pack at will of the performer. ACOMPLETE ENTERTAINMENT OF MYSTERY. SEND ORDERS TO Bamberg Magic Company 1193 Broadway, New York Send for our bie Catalowue, 000 Tricks. 10 cents. — _—_- ~ —- - _ = se ee A Few Copies of the Only Number of GHOSTS Issued The second tssue (February, 1910) of Macic was given the title of GHosts. A few copies remain “Pe and can be had for 15 cents, while they last. CONTENTS-—The Sphinx Riddle of afar AND w inn? Humanity: -Spectral Hlusions Thread- ~ ing the Mazes -An Afternoonin A Mav- ical Library --How | Became A Spirit Medium. Cover in four colors, Colored frontus- piece and 19 illustrations. Most unique Mavazine ever issued. F. TV. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 3619 Thompson Avenue — | Kansas City, Mo. When writing to advertisers, Kindly mention Mace . '

Page 321

MAGIC THE MAGAZINE OF WONDER VOLUME III NUMBER 13 CONTENTS FOR APRIL, 1911 PAGE THE GREAT NEEDLE TRICK — Ros G. WILLiAMs 41 Illustration from) phorograshs A MASTER OF MAGIC Henry Ripcety Evans 42 A MATCH BOX SLEIGHT | © P. T. SELBIT 45 IHustations from photographs. THE TUMBLING COINS ERNEST EVANGELINE 46 Hlustration from photographs AN OLD CARD TRICK IMPROVED MT. C. Bonney 47 THREE GOOD TRICKS | Ora S. Harmas 48 Il. THE CHAMELEON THIMBLE Il. A MATCH TRICK HI. THE BLACK AND WHITE CHANGING CARD Illustrations from photographs . . LOADING THE HAT J). CaRoLy 51 Translated fiom L’ Hlioniste by CHAREOIT, CH. | INustrations froma drawing and a photograph A NOVEL CARD FRAME W. C. WAKEFIELD 53 Illustration from a photograph ONE HUNDRED GOOD TRICKS WITHOUT SLEIGHT OF HAND IV 54 Illustrations from photographs THE MAGICAL REVIEW 58 THE MAGICAL MARKET. 63 A MONTH OF MAGIC Copyright. 1911. by F. T. Singleton. MAGIC is published on the first of every month except July and August by F. T. Singleton, 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Missouri U.S. A. YEARLY SUBSCRIPTIONS, $1.00. Foreign postage, 25 cents extra. Single copies, 10 cents. ADVERTISING, $5.00 a page; smaller space proportionately. ADDRESS all business and editorial communications tu F. T. SINGLETON PUBLISHER 319 FHOMPSON AVENUE, KANSAS CITY, MISSOURT U.S. A.

Page 322

38 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS MARTINKA’S CATALOGUE Biggest and best catalogue of high grade mayical goods sent postpaid for 25c. Magi- cian’s Headquarters in America. Reliable and trustworthy. Our goods are of the best workmanship, being famous for solid quality. The New Vanishing Coin A pocket trick that will greatly please everyone. A) heavy” Lrass cap Is wiven tor thorough exami nation, In the cap is a small hole, go Ing right through at. Three coins are arranged on the back of the spectator’s hand and the cover put over them. Lifting the same im- mediately,only two coins are left. Nesleight of hand. Can be performed-at once by any one. Price, complete, $1. MARTINKA & COMPANY 493 Sixth Avenue, New York PROFESSOR HOFFMANN’S BOOKS MODERN MAGIC. For many years Professor Hoffmann has held the field as the standard writer upon the fascinating subject of natural magic, and his two books, Wodern Magicand More Mag- ic, cover almost the whole range of known tricks up to the date of pub- lication of the latter, 1889. 578 pages, 318 illustrations. Handsomely bound in cloth. Price, $1.50. W2isg Vol || MORE MAGIC. Uniform with the Boy YM | above, 457 pages, 140 illustrations. Price $2.00. LATER MAGIC. Professor Hoff- mann’s latest book. Most up-to-date book on magic. Explanation of the ete aS latest tricks. 557 pages, 221 illustra- <———— tions. Price $2.00. BoP. SINGLETON, 35919 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo. “% When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MAGIC A ae (on = ree | CVOrVOLCe igitized by NIWOT Pw - C }

Page 323

MAGIC VOLUME III APRIL, 1911 NUMBER 13 The Great Needle Trick Performed by Houdini and Clement De Lion By Rob G. Williams HE needle threading from the mouth is essentially J] 2. parlor or club room trick, and in the hands of A cifted operators like Harry Houdini. and Clement my cde Lion is a remarkable and startling deception. AS To tell the truth, I do not know just how these two eaeereonn do it, but I have succeeded several times lately in doing the trick myself before a good crowd and getting away with it. It is worth while to practice this trick. . = THE GREAT NEEDLE TRICK I first saw the trick explained in ‘Magicians’ Tricks,’’ by Henry Hatton and Adrian Plate. A number of needles ({ use twelve), and a piece of thread about cighteen inches long, are shown to the spectators. The thread is wound around the nee-° dles. A piece of bright colored sewing silk is selected by the audience from several pieces offered and tied to the end of

Page 324

42 MAGIC the thread with which the needles are bound. [The operator then puts the needles and thread into his mouth, leaving the short length of colored silk thread hanging out. After some fa- cial by-play and swallowing efforts, the operator pulls on the silk and brings out of his mouth the needles threaded (Kig.1). In the first place, the points of the needles must be rounded off by grinding, and then some little practice in private is nec- essary before attempting to perform the trick. A duplicate lot of needles already threaded is used; “‘the rest of the length of thread is wrapped around them, except about three inches. This bunch of needles is passed under a ring’’ of flesh colored thread ‘‘on the second finger of the performer's left hand, and is kept there concealed, as shown in Fig. I]. A similar num- ber of needles and a thread are now exhibited. The needles are bunched together and the thread ts wound around them except about three inches. Then they are put between the thumb and the first and second fingers of the left hand for a few moments, and the loose end is, apparently, run between the fingers and left hanging outside. We say, @pparent/y, for in fact it is dropped inside the hand and the end of the other bunch of needles ts allowed to show outside. One of the colored threads 1s now se- lected and tied to the loose end that belongs to the threaded bunch. When about to ‘swallow’ the needles, the performer takes them, seemingly, with his right hand, but drops them into the left hand and takes those that are under the thread. The au- dience have no suspicion that any change has been made, for they see the colored silk that they suppose was tied to the nee- dies first shown. The needles are put into the performer’s mouth, the silk thread dangling outside, and the trick is brought to a conclusion, as described.”’ A Master of Magic Some New Light on the Life of Cagliostro By Henry Ridgely Evans I] (Concluded) asi N September, 1780, he arrived in Strasburg, where he founded one of his Egyptian Lodges. He lavished money right and left, cured the poor without pay, VrOucicters) and treated the great with arrogance. The Cardinal [Sere SP de Rohan invited the sorcerer and his wife to live at the Episcopal palace. He presented the Cardinal with a dia- mond worth 20,000 francs which he pretended to have made,

Page 325

MAGIC 43 the churchman claiming to have been an eye-witness of the operation. A laboratory was fitted up in the palace for alchemical experiments. Cagliostro persuaded the Cardinal that he was able to make gold. The skeptical Baroness d’Oberkuch, in her memoirs, says that while at Strasburg, he successfully predicted the death of the Empress Maria Theresa. “‘He even foretold the hour at which she would expire,’’ relates the Baroness. ‘Cardinal de Rohan told it to me in the evening, and it was five days after that the news arrived.’’ What is the explanation of this feat ? A lucky guess, or psychic powers above the ordinary ? We leave it to the occultists. Inthe year 1785, we find him at Lyons, France, where he founded the world-famous Lodge of Triumphant Wisdom, and converted hundreds to his mystical doctrines. But his greatest triumph was achieved tn Paris. A gay and frivolous aristocracy, mad after new sensations, welcomed the magician with open arms. The way had been paved for him by Mesmer. He made his appearance in the French Capital, January 30, 1785. The Cardinal de Rohan selected and furnished a house for him. Prints, medallions, and marble busts of him decorated all the shop windows. There were neckties and hatsa la Cagliostro. His home was always thronged with noble guests, who came to wit- ness the strange seances, where ghosts were summoned from ‘the vasty deep.’’ How were these phantoms evoked ? Confed- erates, concave mirrors, and images cast upon the smoke aris- ing from burning incense explain many of the phenomena. We do not doubt the truth of the telepathic, hypnotic, and clair- voyant feats, for we have seen enough to warrant the genuine- ness of such, but the matertalizations were undoubtedly fraudu- lent. Says Trowbridge: “‘To enhance the effect of his phenom- ena he had recourse to artifices worthy of a mountebank. The room in which his seances were held contained statuettes of Isis, Annbis, and the ox Apis. The walls were covered with hieroglyphics, and two lacqueys, ‘clothed like Egyptian slaves as they are represented on the monuments at Thebes,’ were in attendance. To complete the muse en scene, Cagliostro wore a robe of black silk on which hieroglyphics were embroidered in red. His head was covered with an Arab turban of cloth of gold ornamented with jewels. A chain of emeralds hung en sautors upon his breast, to which scarabs and cabalistic symbols of all colors in metal were attached. A sword with a handle shaped like a cross was suspended from a belt of red silk.”’ On August 22, 1785, Cagliostro was arrested under a Jdettre ade cachet, and cast into the Bastille, charged with complicity in the affair of the diamond necklace, a cause celebre familiar to all readers of French history. He was acquitted by the Parli- A DeEAUTIIUL Farliol LFaAVIC_ Litusivuis

Page 326

44 MAGIC ament, but was banished from France by order of Louis XVI. He fled to England, where he was attached by the editor Morande, as previously explained. From England he went to various places on the Continent. But his reputation was ruined. In the year 1791, fate drew him like a lodestone to Rome, where he attempted to found a lodge of Egyptian masonry. He was arrested and condemned to death as a sorcerer and freemason, but Pope Pius VI commuted the punishment to life imprison- ment. In a subterranean dungeon in the Castle of San Leon, Urbino, he fretted away his. life in silence and in darkness until August, 1795, when the news of his deathleaked out. The cause of death and place of sepulchre of the famous sorcerer were never divulged. His wife died in a convent in Rome. Many theosophical writers declare that Cagliostro was a secret emissary of the Illuminati, an order devoted to the destruction of thrones, and the elevation of the people. Cagliostro’s house in Paris still remains. The cufious reader will find it at the corner of the Rue St. Claude and the Boulevard Beaumarchais. It is a gloomy old mansion, just the sort of abode for a wizard. It has a court yard with cordons of large stones blackened by time. Two summers ago | visited it, accompanied by my good old friend, Monsieur Trewey. I ascended the ghost haunted, time-worn staircase, feeling my way carefully along in the semi-darkness, and holding on to the forged-iron balus- trade, thinking all the while of the high-born seigneurs and ladies who once passed up and down that winding way. The place | seemed full of echoes. I climed to the very attic of the mansion. I slowly descended the stairs. A door on the landing below me noiselessly opened. I stopped. Was the phantom of the great necromancer coming out to greet me ? No, it was but the wind ! The laboratory and seance rooms have been cut up into smaller apartments. The present tenants of the house comprise a carpet dealer, a furniture manufacturer, a dealer in chains for motor cars, a furrier, and a keeper of a wineshop. Alas, how the glories of the place have departed, since Cag- liostro held his mystic seances in the Egyptian Room. Don’t Give It Away ‘‘How clever that is!"’ your friends will often say, as you conclude a trick. But, beware; if you desire to retain your prestige, don’t be tempted to reveal how the trick is done. If you do show the method by which the mysterious change is accomplished, the inevitable reply of the spectators will be: ‘‘Is that all ?’’ and your reputation for cleverness will have forever vanished. —F RANK DESMOND.

Page 327

MAGIC 45 A Match Box Sleight By P. T. Selbit TIHE following sleight with an ordinary match box is f] extremely deceptive, as will be ascertained if the movement is performed before a mirror. . Place the box in such a position that it protrudes Ke from between the thumb and first finger of the left Pande as in Fig. J. Then with the fingers of the right hand ap- parently place it fairly into the closed left hand by an upward push (Fig. 11). Really, the box is finger palmed in the right hand. Instead of pushing the box upward, the right hand remains stationery while the left moves down- ward, this action turning the box around on a pivot made by the base of the thumb and the tip of the first finger of the left hand. Fig. I1I is a back view of the position in Fig. II, showing the box half turned over. Fig. 1V shows the move completed, with the box finger palmed tn the right hand, and the left hand ready to apparently close over the match box and be withdrawn as though containing it. The performer's eyes must, of course, follow the imaginary box in the left hand. The box can now be rubbed away, or vanished from the left hand in any suitable man- ner, and the hand shown empty. The box can be pro- duced with the right hand from behind the right knee, or elsewhere. The continuous back and front hand palm can also be executed with a match box. A MATCH BOX SLEIGHT

Page 328

46 MAGIC The Tumbling Coins By Ernest Evangeline a HIS is merely a pretty bit of coin juggling, although after some practice it will enable you to pick up a stack of coins from a table and put them down im- mediately, without apparently changing them in any way, but with the bottom coin brought secretly Take several coins in the fingers as shown in Fig. J. Now press the thumb on the edge of the front coin and roll it up against the forefinger (Fig. II) until it hangs over the other coins. Then let it drop back in behind, guided by the thumb, which presses against it on the lower half as in Fig. III. THE TUMBLING COINS The entire move is made with the thumb, the hand and all the other fingers being held perfectly still, except for a slight upward turn of the entire hand made simultaneously with the movement of the thumb. The extent of this turn of the hand can be seen by comparing the three illustrations. The entire revolution of the coin is made against the forefinger. A very little practice will enable you to keep a stack of coins continuously tumbling over from front to back in this manner, one after the other in regular order, making a showy illustration of the saying, ‘The first shall be last.’”’ We have known many men, and some women, who took up magic for pleasure or money, or both, and we have never known one to lose interest in it.—HENRY HATTON AND ADRIAN PLATE.

Page 329

MAGIC 47 An Old Card Trick Improved _ By T. S. Bonney ul N the following trick you will need a pack of cards, "1 one of which (we will say the Jack of Clubs) must have a white back. This can be made by soak- ing a card in water until the back comes off, then =) drying the front (face) half and pasting a piece of medium weight white paper on. Two duplicate Jack of Clubs, and ten or fifteen pieces of plain white paper about the size of a playing card will also be required. The prepared card must have a trifle shaved off of one edge and be placed at the bottom of the pack, which ts laid on the table along with your wand | and the blank slips. The table thus set, and having one of the duplicate Jacks in the upper inner corner of each trouser pocket, you are ready to begin. Exhibit both trouser pockets empty (the position of the cards makes this an easy matter), and as you replace pockets push cards down to bottom where they remain till you are ready to produce either of them. Allow someone in the audience to chose one of the slips of paper, and throw the rest carelessly on the table, allowing them to‘scatter a little. Now write ‘‘The Jack of Clubs’’ on the chosen slip (without allowing the audience to know what you have written), fold and give it to some one to take care of till the end of the trick. Pick up pack and give it a false shuffle, leaving the prepared card at the bottom. Take pack in the left hand, with the fingers of the right above and the thumb below,’ and draw back the top cards a few at a time with the fingers of the right hand re- questing any one to stop you when they wish. When you have been requested to stop, draw off with the fingers of right hand all the cards you have drawn back, at the same time bringing away with the thumb the prepared card from the bottom, and exhibit 1t to the audience, calling attention to the fact that you have not seen it and request them to note what it is. Place cards in right hand on those in left, leaving the tip of left little finger under chosen (prepared) card. Turn pack in position for ordinary shuffle, remove all the cards from beneath little finger tip and shuffle them on to balance of pack in left hand. The chosen card is now on the bottom. Make any false shuffle that will leave the prepared card on the bottom, and lay pack on table on top of the scattered pieces of white paper. Show hands perfectly empty and ask some one-to choose the 1 See MAGIC, January, 1911, page 85, for description and illustration of this move.

Page 330

“48 MAGIC right or left hand empty (7) trouser pocket. We will assume the left 1s chosen. Pick up pack from table leaving the prepared card on slips of white paper, where it is absolutely unnoticed at the distance of even a few feet, on account of its white back. The prepared card having been slightly reduced in width renders it a very simple matter to carelessly pick up pack and leave it on the table. Touch pack with your wand and command chosen card to vanish. Pass pack for examination, reach into left trouser pocket and produce (duplicate) Jack of Clubs and request the party holding slip of paper to open same and _ see what is written thereon. The effect is all that you could desire and hile I do not claim originality for the trick, I find the added effect of having the name of the chosen card appear on slip of paper, a decided improvement, and I think also the method of using the blank slips an improvement over the old method of backing the card with newspaper and laying the pack down on a newspaper, which is on the table for no apparent reason. If the blank slips are thrown carelessly on the table and the pack laid down and picked up from them in a natural manner, the prepared card will be left free from detection even though the spectators are standing right around the table. Be sure to get your card smooth when preparing it, soit will lay flat on the blanks when balance of pack 1s picked up. The cards known as ‘‘Steamboats, No. 999,’’ you will find well suited for preparation, as by soaking them for a few mo- ments in warm water the colored backs can easily be removed, and drying and putting ona new back takes but a little time. If you are proficient enough, you may make the pass to get chosen card to bottom of pack, but I suggest the shuffle referred to. as an excellent substitute for that sleight, being easily learned and very natural both in execution and effect. Three Good Tricks By Ora S. Harmas I. The Chameleon Thimble. pal WHITE thimble on the forefinger of the right hand real Changes to black when covered by the left hand, which 1s at once shown empty. Covering the black thimble for an instant it is found to have returned % to its original color. Again the white thimble ts cov- ered and this time when the hand is removed no sign of the. thimble 1s seen, both hands being shown empty.

Page 331

MAGIC dy THE CHAMELEON THIMBLE Two thin metal thimbles fitting one within the other are needed. The outer one is painted white and the inner, or smaller one, black or any contrasting color you wish (Fig. I). The two thimbles are nested and placed on the forefinger of the right hand. The right forefinger approaches the left hand (Fig. 11) and is covered by it fora moment. The top or white thimble is then instantly thumb-palmed by bending the finger into the fork of the thumb, where it is gripped in the loose skin or ‘‘web’’ between the thumb and forefinger. When the left hand is removed the black thimble remaining on the right fore- finger is exposed (Fig. III). When the finger is once more covered by the left hand the white thimble 1s restored to its original position. For the final disappearance both thimbles are thumb-palmed when covered again by the left hand (Fig. 1V), and the hands shown empty by means of the ‘‘change over.’’ The white thimble can be re- produced from the elbow or from behind the arm, or from any- thing that will “‘cover’’ the insertion of the finger into the nested thimbles. I]. A Match Trick (That Can't Be Matched) Two ordinary flat paste- board matches (such as are used for cigar ads, and put up in ‘‘books’’) are shown and marked on one side with pencil or any distinguishing mark. Held by the ends, with the fingers of the left hand (Fig. I), the matches A MATCH TRICK are shown both sides. Then

Page 332

50 MAGIC taking them between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand (marked side up), they are deliberately and openly turned over, but on exposing the upper side to view the marked side is still up. This may be repeated as many times as desired without fear of detection, marked or plain side appearing up at will. I believe this to be the very best little impromptu trick in exist- ance. The matches are turned or rolled between the fingers (once over) in the act of turning them over to show the other side. Fig. I] shows the matches (end view) just half turned and held on edge. If the printing extends from end to end of the match it must be scratched off and the ends on both sides made to appear the same, so that no change will be noticed in the matches after turning them until after you have removed your fingers. IJ]. The Black-and-White Changing Card For a simple home- made changing card that makes them say, “That is all right, old man,’’ this changing four-spot is hard to beat. A fifth pip is cut out of the cen- Pee. ter of a four of spades CUT OUT after first being carefully outlined in the proper position with a pencil. The correct position can be obtained from a real five-spot. A piece of tis- sue or tracing paper can be used to get a perfect outline of a spade pip. rye BLACK-AND-WHITE CHANGING CARD A sharp pointed knife blade will be necessary to make a clean cut-out. Itis wise to be a little bit “‘fussy’’ about this. If this prepared four of spades 1s placed in tront of the two, and the pair held in front of the performer's black clothing or in front of any dark background, and the two-spot suddenly withdrawn, the four instantly changes to five. A perfect illusion. Cards without indexes may be used to good advantage, but not one personin a hundred will notice the corner indicators after the back card is withdrawn, the attention being drawn entirely to the additional pip in the center.

Page 333

MAGIC 51 Loading the Hat By J. Caroly Translated from L’Ilusionniste by Charpiot Ch. ee) 7TOWEVER pompous or barbaric may be the titles by ae: | which innovators have essayed to restore, at least by name, the classic experience, among all, of the 4 |4) inexhaustible hat, it is no less true that this trick, 2r2—) of a good old age, has always remained the same. So oer the trick may be effective, all magicians are unanimous in recognizing that one must be able to produce, as coming from the hat, a quantity of objects which will finally form on the scene an important and voluminous unloading. In effect, the first apparitions produce avery ordinary sur- prise to the public, which knows vaguely that all that is shown as coming from the hat could be bundled up and held in the head covering; but it no longer conceals its admiration when the quantity of objects which have appeared exceed what it estimates as the capacity of the hat. And when the load attains five or six times this dimension the applause becomes contagious. It is then necessary to the magician, anxious for success (and is it not the case with us all ?), to reload the hat several times under the eyes of the audience to whom this move of reloading must remain absolutely unperceived. Occasionally an artist (7) receives from a confederate, when itis not taken from a back table, a hat already loaded from which he proceeds to take in a cool way a few collapsible balls and a serpentine (paper roll) or two, after which he (the artist) passes to other tricks. Thisis a shabby trick, and under such conditions forbearance is preferable. Since we have spoken of serpentines (pa- per rolls), let us recognize that paper rib- bons coming in streams from the head cov- ering no longer surprises anyone, even though the magician tries vainly to return the muss to the hat. Well, as it is known that before its introduction into the hat, that these paper ribbons are tightly rolled and form a very small compass, there is always some of your audience who are amused and by contagion, the amusement spreads to the whole audience. FIG. 1

Page 334

52 MAGIC This virtue of the paper rolls would find no favor with me for its use, if it did not constitute one of the best “cover all’’ for the following load. When the mass of ribbons has formed a ‘‘real mountain’’ on the scene you show the hat saying, “At last, I have succeeded in emptying it,’’ and lifting the mass of paper to your table youcontinue, according tocustom, and say, ‘*]) will, sir, return your goods to you, not wishing to keep that which does not belong to me.’’ Un- der cover of the pa- per you take from a servante the load al- ready prepared which you place in the: hat while pretending to replace the mass of paper ribbons in _ or- der to return the whole to its owner. It is evident that the mass cannot go into the hat, as you have in it your second load, so addressing its owner you say, ° Jt won't all goin (making a pretense to force it in with your knee) so I will send it to the lobby where you may get it on leaving the theater. In the mean time, here is your hat, but hold, it is still full.’’ And you continue to unload. _ This method cannot be repeated without attracting attention to the system employed and killing the novelty of the surprise. By the aid of a small apparatus which I will now describe this inconvenience 1s wholly avoided, and the closest observer can- not detect the manner of your reload. I tried this trick before a confrere who is well known for his perspicacity (this one time was at sea) and J gave him the secret as I shall now do for you. Take a wire about 1-16 inch thick and bend it intoan eliptic shape about three inches long by one inch wide. Bend again in center to form a right angle (Fig. 1). The ring in this shape offers the peculiarity that placed on the table in any position it is always possible to slip into it your magic wand. Attach to the ring a strong thread about 14 or 16 inches long, to the other end of which ts attached the load you intend for the hat which reposes in your servante, the wire ring resting in FIG. 2 A white wire and thread were used to show in the photo.

Page 335

MAGIC 53 center of table. As you are about to execute the loading,slip your wand into the ring attached to thread, and having in hand the hat you turn to back of table holding hat in position shown in Fig. 2. Raising your wand, as you pronounce some appropriate words, the load comes up right back of hat, and by moving hand towards audience load naturally falls into hat, both hands visible to the audience at all times. _ This method also offers the advantage of loading without use of servante, in which case load is attached to table cover at back by means of a pin in such a manner that pin will pull out easily on raising load with the thread. It is up to you, my dear readers, to judge my small invention, and may it prove the means to make easier and doubly mar- velous the surprises that delight the small and mystify the big. A Novel Card Frame By W. C. Wakefield a card selected by one of the spectators 1s put into y an envelope from which it makes an invisible flight, : ! to appear a few seconds later in the card frame Ww vhile fie hanes is covered for a moment with a_ handkerchief. When the handkerchief is withdrawn the card is shown, but with the back facing the onlookers. The performer, not noticing this until the spectators call his attention to the matter, apolo- gizes for what is evidently a blunder, and covers the frame with the handkerchief fora second time. Upon instantly withdraw- ing it the selected card appears, this time with the proper side to the front. The frame and card are then given for examina- tion. The selection of the card can be forced by any method fa- miliar to the operator. The envelope ts faked by pasting the address side of two envelopes together. The chosen card is in- serted in one side right under the noses of the spectators, and in carrying it to the table the empty side 1s turned up. The frame is backed with thin black silk on which ts pasted a strip of white cardboard with a loose projection, or tongue, which serves as a clip to hold a duplicate of the forced card. This is shown in the center of the illustration. A narrow mat of thick paper is now placed over this, and a second piece of black silk inserted on which is a duplicate of the cardboard strip and acard reversed as shown in the right hand frame in the

Page 336

a4 MAGIC illustration. The playing card on this piece of silk is lightly pasted down so that it will not be pulled off. Another mat is now put in and another loose piece of black silk inserted, on which a triplicate of the cardboard strip is pasted as shown in the left hand frame. A third mat is then put in. outa Sipe ez A NOVEL CARD FRAME . Apparatus by Ernest Evangeline from specihcations and drawings by W.C. Wakefield. The card is first forced and put in the envelope. The frame is then covered with a handkerchief for a second and when pulled off the fingers also grip the first piece of loose black silk. This is dropped on the table behind some object. The next piece is also removed in the same manner at the proper time, showing the chosen card. After handing out the frame and card, and showing the card to have vanished (7) from the envelope, the trick is completed. One Hundred Good Tricks Without Sleight of Hand IV. Ten Good Anti-Spiritualistic Tricks Selected and edited by Ernest Evangeline XXXI. THE HYPNOTIC MATCH BOX.A match box is placed on the back of the performer's hand, and at the word of command it is made to rise or fall. One end of the box is opened slightly and pressed on the back of the hand, catching a bit of the skin when closed. Bend the fingers and box rises.

Page 337

MAGIC 55 XXXII. THE HYPNOTIC MATCH. Two common wooden matches are placed on the table crossed one over the other in the center. By means of a silver coin the operator apparently makes the top match move anyway he chooses. The coin has nothing to do with the moving of the match. The performer quietly blows the top match and passes the coin over it in the same direction. ILLUSTRATIONS FOR ANTISPIRITUALISTIC TRICKS XXXII. THE RAPPING WAND (See illustration). A wand and tray or plate are given for examination and placed on the table, the wand projecting over the side of the tray in the direction of the spectators. The performer stands quite away and puts questions, the wand replying by raising its forward enda couple of inches, and bringing it sharply down on the edge of the tray. It will rap out numbers in like manner. The secret lies in a fine black thread passing across the room overa door or shelf into the hands of an assistant. The wand and tray can be passed out for examination at any time. XXXIV. THE MAGNETIZED TUMBLER. An examined glass is made to adhere to performer's hand by apparent hypnotic passes made with the other hand. A glass with a smooth, hollow bottom must be used. Dampen the palm a little and place it on the bottom of the tumbler, twisting the palm until vou feel that the suction securely holds tt, when the fingers can be straightened out and the hand raised with the tumbler clinging to tt. | XXXV. THE MESMERISED RULER (See illustration). A

Page 338

56 MAGIC ruler is made to adhere to the palm of the hand, which ts held palm down. Hold the ruler in the palm of the right hand tightly clenched, and with the left hand hold the wrist of the hand containing the ruler. Then, while talking, extend the forefinger of the left hand, and hold the ruler in the palm of the right hand with it. Gradually open the fingers that clench the ruler, affecting great nervous tension the while, and the ruler will appear to be adhering to the palm of the hand. XXXVI. THE AERIAL WAND. A wand is exhibited and then made to hand in the air unsupported. Two pieces of thread 3 or 4 inches in length, with a loop at one end of each and a piece of conjurer’s wax at the other, are hung on waist- coat buttons with the waxed ends secreted underneath the bot- tom hem. The loops are slipped upon the first finger of either _ hand while securing the wand from the table. The waxed ends of the thread are attached to either end of the wand, when the hands can be gradually drawn away, leaving the wand appar- ently suspended in the air. XXXVII. THE CLIMBING RING. Another pretty experi- ' ment with a wand and ring. A lady’s ring is passed over end of the wand, which is held in a perpendicular position. The ring now commences to climb up the wand very slowly, stopping or descending at command, finally jumping off the wand. Another black thread is required, about twice the length of the wand. One end of the thread is attached to the top end of the wand and the other secured to a coat button, with the slack running down the side of the wand. When the ring is placed over the wand it can be stopped at any point by extending the hand holding the wand. XXXVIII. THE SPIRIT LIGHT. Performer takes a match and strikes it on the box, holding the burning match in his right hand. By blowing down his left sleeve the match is seen to go out. Use a wooden match, as this is the only kind the trick can be performed with. Hold the match upright, blow down the other sleeve, and at the same time strike the other end of match with some force with the third finger. XXXIX. THE JUMPING HANDKERCHIEF. The effect of this trick depends upon a black thread stretched across the room, one end being in the hands of an assistant. Several knots are tied in a handkerchief, one of them, towards the end, being tied right over the thread. The handkerchief is dropped to the floor, the thread being lowered with it. The thread can then be jerked by the assistant when the handkerchief will jump about in the most amusing manner. XL. THE MESMERIZED HAT. A piece ot black thread about 26 or 27 inches long 1s tied at the ends and placed over

Page 339

- MAGIC 57 the operator’s hand like a necklace, hanging down in front of him. If a stiff hat is passed through the loop of thread under- neath the hand, the hat can be pressed on the crown by the fingers, the thread supporting the hat. The effect is that the hat appears to adhere to the finger ave What Every Conjurer Should Know IV. How to Make a False Shuffle Selected and edited by Ernest Evangeline [= p= HE selected card is brought to the top of the pack <2 by any method. Take the pack in ‘the left hand, . holding it upright on its side, the edges of the cards &. j resting on the palm, the four fingers (which should re be slightly moistened) being at the back or top, and the thumb on the face of the pack. Now, with the thumb and middle finger of the right hand (see illustration) lift out edgeways that portion of the cards which now forms the middle of the pack, and drop them by packets of five or six at a time upon the face of the cards remaining in the left hand, moving aside the left thumb to allow of their passage. The pressure of the fin- gers will always keep the top card in its place, however many of the re- maining cards you lift out with the right hand; and as you only shuffle onto the face of the HOW TO MAKE A FALSE SHUFFLE pack, however often you repeat the process, this card will remain at the top. If there are three or four cards to be kept in view, it makes no difference in the mode of operation, save that you must treat those cards throughout as the single card, and keep them together.

Page 340

58 MAGIC THE MAGICAL REVIEW Current Tricks and Conjuring Methods for Busy Amateurs and Professionals HANDKERCHIEF. COLOR CHANGE IN GLASS | Mr. L. B. Burrow, in an American contemporary, develops a good idea as an aid to the 20th Century Flag and Handkerchief trick, or forthe change of color of handkerchiefs, etc. Use two tumblers (alike) and hav- ing perpendicular sides, a paper or cardboard cylinder through which the tumblers will slide easily but not too loose,and atable with a servante on hack. Place thetum- blers and cylinder as in illustra- tion, the tumbler on the little shelf containing a red handker- chief and the one on table a yel- low one. Show cylinder empty, grasping near the hottom with right hand. While still holding the cylinder, pick up glass on the ta- ble and pulling the handkerchief out show both to be unprepared. While holding up in left hand to show it, the right holding the cyl- inder is slowly lowered over glass on servante, which is grasped hy squeezing cylinder, thenthe hand rises and places cylinder contain- ing tumbler on the table. Right hand now grasps cylinder and with left hand the other glass is let into top of cylinder and allowed ; to slide down until it almost HANDKERCHIEF COLOR CHANGE touches the hidden one, where it | is stopped by a gentle squeeze and the cylinder lifted up, showing the yellow handkerchief having apparently turned red in the process of covering the glass. While the left hand picks up the tumbler to show that it contains a red handkerchief, the right hand lowers the cylinder (containing the exchanged tumbler) onto servante. Cylinder is then shown empty. THE POLE UN-‘‘COOK’’-ED Prof. Leslie, B.S. A. M., by courtesy of Max Sterling I will endeavor to describe a little improvement on the old pudding sauce pan which may prove useful to a fewof my magical confreres. | have worked the trick in the following manner for some time past, always with gratifying success. Requirements and cost are altogether small in proportion to the

Page 341

MAGIC 59 value of the effect. First procure a large tin saucepan or stewpan, about 25c. Take it to a tinsmith and get a tray 3 in. deep fitted in, with a little cup in ‘the center. A glance at Fig. 1 will convey the best idea of what is required. The pan itself is loaded with a quantity al oranges or other articles intended for distribution, and topped with hand- kerchiefs or flags, a coil, etc.,and inthe middle a giant ‘‘Barber's Pole,’’ suld by most dealers at 75c or $1 each. The upper tray is now fitted in the top, with a small quantity of ether, containing a piece of metal potassium placed in the center raised cup. All preparations are now complete, and the lid is rested cross- wise on the stewpan. After performing a general program, leave is asked to retire to allow of a change of costume, stating at the same time it is your intention to give a con- jurer’s idea of how Dr. Cook discovered the Pole. You then leave the platform, and in a few seconds return garbed as the conventional French cook in white jacket, apron cap, ar carrying stewpan in both hands. You now pro- ore : ceed with the regular ‘‘Pudding-in-the = holdemhcr and Sy eaauae © Wedy of : hat’’ process, placing the usual ingre- pan holding production. D. Lid. dients into the pan, mixing with water poured from a glass jug. When sufficient fun has been obtained from the humorous lesson in cookery, a further quantity of water is allowed to flow intu the center cup, and it bursts into fame. As a suitable extinguisher the lid now covers the pan, fitting closely into the tray containing the pudding mixture. The pistol is fired, and lid is removed, carrying with it the tray, and the Pole is produced several feet in height un-‘**Couk’’-ed. This is fol- lowed by the rest of the productions, and finished by distributing the fruit or bon-bons to the audience. Of course, the presentation must be made in a broadly humorous manner, with appropriate comical patter sugyested by the title given. As a rough guide, shape jokes in sequence around this skeleton: ‘A certain,or rather,uncertain cook went on a voyage of discovery. Appro- priated any materials, found himself in hot water, burned his fingers, but discovered a pole, if not the genuine, at least to his own satisfaction, and | trust it is illustrated, uncooked, to yours,"" etc. THE CAPTAIN CARD For a London paper The Great Maurice has prepared an original card trick called ‘‘“The Captain Card.’’ The conjurer has a card selected and re- turned to the pack. The pack is well shuffled and dropped into a hat. After that, the patter is as follows: ‘*Ladies and gentlemen, | am going to attempt rather a difficult trick, and it will help me if you kindly exercise your powers of imagination. | want you to imagine, if you will, that this hat is a ship at sea, and the cards are the ship's crew. Further, will you also imagine that the sea is rather rough—1 am sorry to call up any unpleasant memories of bad Channel crossings—per- haps it will assist you if I just show you how a ship dips and tosses in the waves,’' (Here the conjurer shakes the hat up and down in imitation of a ship at sea). ‘‘Now I] am going to ask you to imagine the sea isso rough that the crew decide to take to their only boat. We must imagine that the

Page 342

60 MAGIC table is the boat. The crew launch the boat and scramble intu it anyhow.’’ (Here the conjurer throws the cards out of the hat on to the table.) ‘‘But, of course, the captain of the ship, being a good captain, would not desert his ship, and therefore remained until the last moment, and you can see for yourselves that he is in the ship still. What card did you take, sir ? The three of spades ? Well, we must call that the captain card, and you will see that the three of spades is still in the hat.’’ (Shows it there, and then removes it, thus showing that it is the only card retained in the hat.) When the card is returned the conjurer brings it to the top of the pack and palms it off. The pack can then be given out for shuffling. When it is returned the conjurer holds the hat in his right hand and thus easily conceals the card which is inthat hand, and gets the chooser of the card to drop the cards into the hat and to shake the hat, so that the cards are obviously mixed up. It will be quite an easy matter to slip the palmed card into the hat directly the hat has been turned over and the other cards have fallen from it. A NEW RISING CARD EFFECT This exceptionally attractive sleight will appeal to all on account of its simplicity. It istaken from an English contemporary. Performer squares up the pack, and placing the forefinger of the right hand upon it the chosen card rises up clear of the pack, clinging to the fin- ger as though to a magnet. Left hand then re- moves the card, and hands it for examination. The secret is simple, and is revealed by the figure. The little finger of the right hand is slightly moistened and pressed on the back of the card, when the card will rise with ease. When the left hand is about to remove the card from the right, care must be taken to close the little finger, so as to give no clue. NEW WATER TO WINE TRICK This clever version of the ever popular water to wine illusion is the invention of Will G. Per- kins, and was published in an Australian paper. An ordinary letter envelope isshown empty. It is then sealed and held length way up, top cut off and glass of water (which performer drinks some) poured in envelope. One bottom corner of envelope is cut off and water allowed to run into glass changed to wine. Silk flags and flowers are then produced from the envelope. Get two envelopes, cut front off one and just tip the edges with gum and stick on front of a second envelope, previously placing in a few silk flags and spring flowers. In most envelopes the flaps are not gummed down tu the corners; if so, put a little gum right along flap and allow to dry, and when sealing up be sure todamp right along flap, corner to corner. Put a few grains of Condy’s Crystals in one corner of the envelope proper. Show envelope (apparently) empty, seal up. Hold end ways up, and cut top off (not end where crystals are). Show and sip glass of water, pour in envelope portion containing Condy’s Crystals. Place glass on table, wave hand or wand over envelope (this will allow crystals tomelt and discolor wa- ter). Hold envelope over glass and cut one corner of envelope to allow col- vred water to run into glass. Now produce silks and spring flowers.

Page 343

MAGIC 61 ANOTHER SUBSTITUTE FOR THE PISTOL SHOT Mr. Will Cook, a well-known magical artiste, introduced a motor horn as an effective substitute for the conventional pistol shot at a recent seance of the British Magical Society. Its use, however, is not recommended by any per- former less clever in handling comedy. A COLOR CHANGING WAND This very subtle and baffling color change of a wand is the invention of an Englishman, Mr. A. A. Alldrick, and was recently described ina London paper. A black wand is pushed through a paper tube, two and one-half in- ches shorter than itself, coming out at the other end white. An ordinary ‘‘disappearing’’ wand is used, made of atube of white glazed paper tu match your regular black wand in thickness and length, with solid wood for about an inch on each end, the glazed white paper being wrapped over the wood ends. A hullowtube of black glazed paper is made to fit neatly over the white wand, but two and one-half inches shorter. The white wand with the black shell over it, pushed tu one end, is put behind something on the table so that the white end cannot be seen. Your regutar black wand is placed in your inside coat pocket, or elsewhere. a BLACK SHELL WHITE WAND x PAPER _TUBE »-RUBBER RING A COLOR CHANGING WAND A piece of white paper a quarter of an inch longer than the black shell, is rolled up into a tuhe, in view of the audience and secured with a rubber ring. he wand is picked up so that the hand hides the white end. It ap- pears to be the performer's regular black wand. The wooden ends permit it to be struck against a plate or something to prove it solid. The papertube is held between the first finger and thumb of the left hand, with the little finger over one end. Insert the faked wand into the open end of the tube. AS soon as it iS inserted, the white wand inside the outer black shell can be allowed to slide through, the little finger over the end preventing it from coming out at the other end of the paper tube. The thumb and finger of the left hand can now grip the wand and shell, leaving about half of the black wand to remain vis.ble. Remove the right hand from the tube and draw at- tention to the fact that the solid wand has been pushed in about three parts of the way. With the right forefinger push the black shell slowly into the tube and allow the white wand to come out at the other end. ‘The wand will ap- pear to change color as it goes through the tube. Pull white wand out, show hands empty, pass the wand through the tube once more to prove tube empty and then crush tube (and black shell) and throw it out of sight and reach. Wrap white wand in newspaper and crush paper and paper wand to a small ball, which is in turn thrown aside. Solid black wand can now be produced from = pocket or in any manner desired with suitable patter and explanation.

Page 344

62 MAGIC RUSSELL’S HANDKERCHIEF VANISHING WAND W. A. Russell has originated a simple but effective handkerchief vanish- ing wand that deserves more than passing notice. It consists of thin brass tubing enameled black with open ends, and is described by the inventor in the current issue of an American contemporary. A B ——————— | Cc RUSSELL'S HANDKERCHIEF VANISHING WAND A and B are two small brass rings, soldered inside the tube. A cord elastic fastened securely to B runs freely through A and istied to C, asmall minnow fishook filed clean and smooth. A handkerchief can be vanished by merely passing the ‘‘loaded’’ end of the wand over it. Possibly the must artistic effect is to hold the handkerchief in plain view in the left hand, with the center drawn through the fingers to the back of the hand. The wand is ap- plied behind the hand and the handkerchief apparently vanishes through the palm. A COIN PRODUCING FAN By courtesy of Max Sterling In the first place allow me to give credit for this effective piece of appar- atus—as far as the central idea is concerned—to the ‘‘Cuins, Glass, and Fan,’’ described by Robertson-Keene in his ‘‘More Novel Notions.'’ I have tried the hinge for the coin which he suggests should he fastened to the fan, and found that if not given the necessary ‘‘jerk’’ would frequently fall behind the fan and make matters a bit uneasy. aside fubine.\ jn Thm tuboag : her side of fan lo cover. Finob fo push com up above fan with finger. A COIN PRODUCING FAN I, therefore, have made and used the improvement I now describe, and find it not only safe and sure, but possessed of other advantages, aSany num- ber of cuins could be produced, and, if desirable, left on top of the fan. The idea is this: | have a small cover of tin, made to exactly cover a penny or other coin to be used. This has one end upen, the sides are closed, and the bottom also clused, with the exception of a small hole in the center to hold the rod, which will be explained later. The cover is exactly the width of a penny, i. e., when placed over the penny. To this I have soldered a small thin tube exactly the length of a fan, and which is fastened at its lower extremity to the handle of the fan behind. So much for the fan. Now the

Page 345

MAGIC 603 coin. This is soldered to a thin wire rod, which will just work with ease within the tube, which is fastened to the cover. This rod with the coin is exactly the length of a penny in excess of the tube, so that its end will not: project more than the length of the fan, when open. I| fasten the cover and tube on the center of a fan lengthwise, and then paste over this another fan exactly the same as the first one, so that whichever way the fan is turned, either back or front, is alike. This, | may say, is not pasted over the top of cover which holds the coin. The coin fastened to the rod is then inserted, and will lay in position inside its cover until required. | may further say that at the end of the rod with the coin I have a minute knob to facilitate the working of the operation. It will be seen, therefore, that the fan can be practically closed and opened out and shown both sides, but with a little flicking or fan movements, the knob can be pushed up with the finger whicn is holding the fan handle behind and so produce the penny or coin on the edge of the fan. This can then be pushed down In the action of taking a coin off, and is so ready for the production of another coin. The coin is held on top of the fan until required to be pushed down again by the tip of one finger, which, as above stated, is holding the fan and fanning. I think this way is better than having a hinge to the coin, as the coin will keep a firm position until ever you wish to remove (7) it. THE MAGICAL MARKET Latest Tricks, Sleights and Apparatus From the Conjuring Shops PUBLISHFR'S NOTE—.AMII tricks. sleights and apparatus reviewed here will be considered strictly on their merits. no ettects being described as being possible that cannot actually be obtained. The secrets involved in these new tricks, of course, cannot be given. DELAND'S PERFECTION CHANGING CARD This latest production of the world’s greatest inventor of card tricks is the most perfect and artistic of all his wonderful creations. A ten of spades actually melts into a ten of clubs and back again while held by the performer at finger tips. An entirely new principle involved. No holes or flaps in card. Back can be shown at any time. Made of celluloid. One of the most satis- factory tricks ever offered to the public. Price 50 cents. ANOTHER CARD TRICK Another new trick from London is, ‘‘The Baftfler."" Two selected cards are covered with an empty hahdkerchief and given to a member of the company to hold. Then the performer takes any two cards from the pack and fixes them in a clip on the cork in a bottle. At command the two cards leave the handkerchief and appear in the place of the two cards onthe cork in the bottle. The handkerchief ts shaken and shown to be empty. The cards previously placed on the cork are nowhere to be seen. REAL EGGS FROM A NET BAG A new trick recently offered in London is named, ‘‘Materialization of Real Egys ina Net Bag.’’ The performer introduces a net bag having a measurement of 9 inches square. “Fhe hag may be handed to the audience »)

Page 346

64 MAGIC for examination since it is innocent of anything in the shape of preparation. Holding it in front of him, the performer gives the bag a gentle shake, when an egg is seen to appear in one of the bottom corners of the bag. This egg is removed, the bag shaken again, and another egg appears. The producing process is carried on until six or eight eggs have been obtained, when the bag is again given into the hands at the audience, who fail to discover the secret of the ‘‘mystery.’’ A MONTH OF MAGIC All the Magical Entertaining News Without Prejudice or Personal Criticism ACKNOWLEDGEMENT— Besides regular and special correspondents in New York, London, Boston, Philadelphia, Chicago and San Francisco. and occasional correspondents all over the world, MAGIC’'S news service is obtained from the leading daily newspapers, and the theatrical and vaudeville press as represented by The Billboard. The New York Clipper, Variety, The Plaver and The Show World. And last, but not least, from our esteemed contemporary, The Magical World, AccuRACY—The Publisher desires to make this magical news service dependable, and will be grateful when his attention is called to any misstatement of fact or errors of any kind. — ADDRESS ALL CORRESPONDENCE to F. T. Singleton, Publisher, 2619 Thompson Ave.. Kansas City. Mo.. U.S. A. MILWAUKEE NOTES By Ora S. Harmas. Special Correspondent MAGIC'S correspondent has just returned from a pilgrimage to the shrine of Louis C. Haley (at Madison), that veteran magician and author of the famous book, ‘“The Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ which was received so well. Mr. Haley is in very poor health, compelled to abandon his magic and music entirely for the present and is not looking on the bright side of life just as he might. . Madison has several magical enthusiasts, foremost among them being Emil Fauerbach, Ed. Swain and Walter Fischer, who are always on the lookout for something new in their line and were, of course, much impressed with the magazine of wonder, MAGIC. RusH LinG Toy AND Co. were at the Majestic (Madison) week of March 27, presenting their mystery act entitled, ‘‘A Night in the Orient.’ Many of the illusions are the invention of ‘‘Rush Ling’? (Mr. W. A. Randall), whose ‘‘upside down’’ is of an entirely new and novel principle. Mr. Kan- dall is a yentleman and if he comes your way don't fail to see his act and call on him. He will treat you more than right as he did the representative of MaGic. | Bortz, a product of Milwaukee and a magician who is making a name for himself, was at the Columbia recently, where he made a big hit with his pure sleight of hand, handkerchief work and flag production. HENDERSON, a_ wielder of the magic wand, kept them all guessing at a minstrel show given at the Y. M.C. A. A State ‘‘Brainstormer’s’’ Convention was held here recently. ‘‘The power of communication with the spirit world is scientific rather than religious, ”'

Page 347

MAGIC 65 says their leader. Some of the professional mediums have the ‘‘communica- tion’ business down to a science. The act of HAYMACK at the Majestic might be classed as one of the ‘allied arts’? of magic. It consisted of lightning changes, magical appear- ances and vanishes and a bewildering succession of surprises that kept the audience in a constant amazement. He works alone, using full stage with trick furniture and a complicated ‘break away'’ case which develops into a dummy while Haymack makes a complete change of costume during the few seconds that the attention of the audience is attracted by the opening of the trick case. McCormMac & WALLACE at the Orpheum house have a novel ventriloquil act using four figures, chief among them being an old man ‘‘who'’ keeps the audience in a constant uproar of laughter. The public Library here contains 20 volumes on magic including some very old and rare books, a donated volume of ‘“Pricks,”" a monthly maya- zine long since discontinued. CHAS. WEBER ADDS NEW FEATURE TO HIS ACT CHas. ID. WEBER made a tremendous hit with his eccentric juggling, being every bit as clever as that great juggler, W. C. Fields. He keeps everyone in splendid humor and does some difficult tricks wtth yreat case. He certainly has some act and deserved all the applause he received. He has just, added a harem skirt to his wardrode, which makes his act more of a ‘riot’? than ever, but not the kind of a riot that some of the first of these freaks of fashion received. a Se — ELMINA AND GREGOIRL at the Empire last half of the week of Marco 20, They doa novel balancing and juggling turn, using all the theater ‘‘props”’ lying around loose, featuring the balancing of an ordinary lounge while performing on a ladder. LA PETITE MAGICIENNE Grace Hazard, in her yreat opera hit at the Victoria Theater, New York, recently, introduced some very startling magical features in her act. She pro- duces several sensational transformations—a long staff is chanyed into a clothes rack, on which to hang the numerous costumes which are changed with lightning like rapidity. A fan changes to flowers. A basket of roses into kilt jacket of a Scotchman, and lastly, the sudden appearance of a drum from which she extraets as much noise as Fritzi Scheff from the real article. Hereafter she desires to be called ‘‘hLa Petit Mayician. THE GREAT LEON was recently atthe Odeon Theater, Y. N., duplicating some of Thurston's illusions. HAL MERTON, the magician and ventriloquist played recently in San Francisco. HORNMANN was at Proctor’s One Hundred and Twenty-ffth Street Theater N.Y. with a new program recently. WAGSTAFF, magician and illusionist, was at Mount Holly, N.C. recently with his mystery and illusion show. A Beautitul Parlor Lable illusion

Page 348

66 MAGIC GERMAIN performed before the Milwaukee Auto Ciub recently, and the fact that he had the undivided attention of the entire company of this ‘worldly wise’’ assembly ts proof enough of his ability to entertain. ‘‘His work was superb, his patter chosen and his appearance pleasing,’’ was said of his entertainment. NELLO, juggler, was at the S.& C. house, Milwaukee, week of March 19, His act pleased. MENETEKEL, THE MYSTERY OF BABYLON The bafthng European illusion, Menetekel, the mystery of Babylon, in- troduced by W Toei Bevol, was at the American Music Hall, Chicago. U pon a drawing board, hung in the middle of the stage, an ordinary tennis ball, covered with ink is placed. Any person in the audience may choose a name, and immediately the ball will write it. EARNEST HIPKINS, known to magic fame as ‘‘Earnesto,”’ is night clerk at the Reeves Hotel, New Philadelphia, O. He recently did some of his magic and handcutf work at the Band-EJk'’s minstrel show. MILDRED AND ROUCLERE will finish their most successful season April 29, They have leased their hotel at Ridgewood, N. J., and will be at their new home in Bogota, N. J. PROGRAMME OF CHUNG LING SOO By Max Sterling, Special Correspondent Seen at the Grand theater, Birmingham, England, February 25th, 1911. Chung Ling Soo, in his truly wondertul matinee performances, proves up to the hilt his title of the ‘‘Marvelous Chinese Conjurer."’ More than that, he has demonstrated by overflowing houses the popularity of the ‘Bigs Magic Show,’ at the same time drawing to the variety palaces throughout the land a class of public who have never previously entered a vaudeville theater. The lengthy programme performed entirely by himself and assistants de- mands more than an ordinary repertoire and comes as a revelation to those who believe a professional limited to a 15 minutes’ show. There is more real magic in this single entertainment (worked entirely in silence on Chung Ling Seo’s part) than in any dozen average programmes now before the public. It is impossible to detail all the effects in their respective perfection, but a small idea may be gleaned from the actual programine. The performance is given in the following order: Part il—The demon smoke-— Mystic change of water and ink—Enchanted knots and rope—The phantom egg and handkerchief—Witha piece of paper --The wandering milk and wine-- Where did it come from ¢—The charmed dove and bouquet —The rice of the mandarin- -Sun and moon--Mesmerised cards- Something from nothing —Unlucky finger rings A chainof handker- chiefs —The traveling cannon ball- -Aerial catching of gold tish---Misfortunes of a watch—A_ knotty problem—The creation of flowers—The girl who chanves to an orange tree. Parr 11.—The flving handkerchief-—The flags of all nations—Aladdin’s lamp—How to make cotfee —Fairv casket of balls “The fight of the canaries —The escape of a penny—A bottle of ale—The unfortunate sunshade—The drum of the Geni--Ege production extraordinary—The omelette-—Sword walking—The Chinese linking rings—The human volcano—aA living target —The bewitched dice— The birth of the pearl—The ervstal lamp of enchant- ment—The mystic cauldron.

Page 349

MAGIC 67 A FLOATING MAGIC THEATER Translated from Das Programme by Harry Houdini The idea of building a theater like a ship, independent of halls and per- manent buildings, has already been realised by the father of Willi Agoston; he acquired sucha vessel, in 1872, from the old Circus Lend, and he named it ‘Phe Floating Palace. "lt accumodated 1500 people. Later (1905) a similar ship was launched in Hamburg Yard of Blohm and Voss; it held 1200 persons and was destined for America. Now the Kheinische Ruhr Zeitung speaks of a tloating Magic theater, for the building of which the well known magician, bellachini, has already got interested parties. The ship, which will visit the larger towns on the Rhine, between Strassburg and Rotterdam, it is_ said, will be a large wooden building on irun pontoons, replete with every comfort of modern times. Outside of the space uccupied by the theater, there will be a first-class restaurant, which will be under separate management from the theater, and which is already let. ‘The constructional costs of the inter- esting Magical theater will amount to about one and a quarter million marks. The auditorium will seat 1000 people. According tothe paper above mentioned, a meeting of the interested parties, to further discuss the scheme, was held on the 13th instant, at Ruhr. A NEW SPECTACULAR MYSTERY ACT ‘*Satan’s Defeat and the Resurrection’’ is the name of a new mystery act just finished by William Schumacher. The act is claimed to be founded on the feats of the Oriental Hata Yogi, who were adepts in producing sponta- neous creations. It is the more mysterious from the fact that no glass or other illusions are used. It begins by showing the creation of a woman from nothing by his Satanic Majesty. He then places her upon the altar and cremates her before the eyes of the audience without concealing or lowering the lights, until nothing is left but a tray of ashes. An angel suddenly appears. ahd commands Satan to restore the woman to her original form and life. It is upon his failure to obey this command that brings about a series of brilliant happenings. This is the Resurrection. ‘“The end crowns the work,’ for the woman at the end appears full of life and beauty. \W. H. B. MAson, the well known Denver magician, says of the Selbit’s spirit paintings that it is “‘the greatest spint mystery ever shown in Denver —the best ever put on the public stage anywhere. ’’ MARTINELLE has a ‘‘Phroso”’ act. Was at the Palace, Philadelphia. Used two girl assistants. Emerges from a packing box and works through the au- dience. For the finish he is placed back in the box and ‘‘comes to life’’ be- fure the lid is put on. CLEOPATRA is an Egyptian enchantress and wonder worker presented by Professor Leanjyeant. Now playing dates from Chicago to New York. Will go to London in June. J. W. Cooper is presenting a novel ventriloquial sketch, ‘‘Fun in a Barber Shop.’’ Five dummies are used in a setting representing a barber shop. CHARLES CARTER, now touring Scotland, will pay a short visit home soon. FRED W. Morton, at the Victoria, Philadelphia, played the mouth harmonica and tore designs in paper.

Page 350

68 MAGIC A TRICK GAMBLING EXPOSE ACT J. P. Quinn, at the Grand, Hamilton, O., a reformed gambler, thoroughly exposed the various methods, tricks and deceptions practiced in gambling. He illustrated his statements with practical gambling devices of vanous sorts. The act, aside from its novelty, possessed educational and reform features which deserve approval. FANNY RICE, miniature mimic stage, at the Dominion, Ottawa, Canada. MORTON AND MORTON, lightning crayon artists, at the Savoy, New York. MYSTERIOUS MOORE, magician and illusionist, atthe Dominion, Ottawa, Canada. I). J. Powers, ventriloquist, ts featuring Paulina, whose impersonation of a big wax doll is letter perfect. An electrical sturm at sea is introduced in the act. Kecently at the Grand, Hamilton, O. LONDON NOTES From Correspondence of Harry Houdini, by permission CARL HEkTz, for the next six weeks, is playing the English provinces, with companies of his own, playing the music-halls on percentage. At the present time, there is a controversy on, between Williams and Hertz, as to who is the originator of the *‘Merry Widow’ illusion; perhaps the thing will be brought to an arbitration committee, and perhaps not. De BIERE is at the Athambra, Paris. ALEX WEYER, the Continental mayician, was over in London for 24 hours, and has gone back to Germany. He is booked for an opening, in June, in one of the prominent London Halls. Weyer is a wonderful magician and producer; he is assisted in his performance by his heautiful wife and two children. 1 am certain that he will make good in England. THE ZANCIGS have arrived in London; they are very busy advertising new material, but, up to date, have not appeared anywhere. I saw the opening of Maskelyne’s introducing his ‘‘Rope-tying Cabinet Mysterv,’’ which he presented during his controversies regarding the Dav- enport Brothers. 1 believe I was the most interested spectator In the audience, as you know the history of Magic appeals to me more than the tricks them- selves. | might mention that the world in general has been under the im- pression that both Davenport Brothers had died. I believe | amthe last man who has had a personal interview with Mr. Ira Davenport, as I was his yuest for a number Bee and spent all the time talking about his past battles. Mr. Fay 1s also very much alive, and has settled down, a very wealthy man, in Melbourne, Australia. HORACE GOLDIN is having very expensive scenery painted for his forth- coming production. CHEFALO AND CAPRETO, the Italian necromancers, are doing a very nice show and, | beheve, they have made good; they now call themselves Chefalo and Palmero, CARLTON, the card manipulator, who played a short engagement at Keith's in America, played Wolverhampton last week and, as a_ feature, exposed the *‘Mystenous Cross’’ trick. He did the trick for four nights, and then announced he would expose it for the Friday evening.

Page 351

MAGIC 6y NEW ZEALAND NOTES By William C. Talboys, Special Correspondent Hassan, Indian conjurer, is the star turn on the Fuller Circuit. FASLOA is the star turn at the Tivoli, Sydney, Australia. LEiPzic is a big draw at the Tivoli, Adelaide, Australia. When Fasola was in Melbourne, he caused a great sensation with his illusion, “*The Lion and the Lady.’’ One night when putting on this illusion, the lion escaped and took a walk along one of the main streets. They had a great hunt and captured the lion in a shop. HOLMES, comedy magician, has gone East for the rest of the season. W. E. WHITLE, ventriloquist, opens in England, June 12, at Southport. ANNA Eva Fay, the famous mind reader and cabinet expert, at the Hop- kins, Louisville, Ky. Anna has brought suit against Albint for exposing her act. HOWARD THURSTON finished athree weeks’ engagement around Chicago. Phenomenal business was reported, with every body well and happy. PAULINE, hypnotist, at Pantages, Seattle. PROF. HALL, magician, at the New Nickelodeon, Boston. THE MAXIMUM MIRACLES At St. George's Hall, Langham Place, London, Mr. J. N. Maskelyne has re-introduced a series uf so-called spirit manifestations entitled ‘‘Maximum Miracles,’’ with which he created considerable excitement forty years ago. He had no intention of ever introducing these mysteries again, but rhe con- troversy he had last year with Sir Hiram Maxim in the Strand Magazine has revived an interest in such tricks, and in compliance with numerous re- quests he has decided to show sume improvements he made in the cabinet manifestations of the Davenport Brothers, the secrets of which he has never explained and no one has ever discovered. Feeling himself hardly equal at his aze to the task of manipulating these illusions, he deputed the duty to his son. The manifestations are simply inexplicable and will, no doubt, puzzle the present generation quite as much as they did visitors to the Egyptian Hall forty years ago. The proprietors of the Strand Magazine have reprinted the articles showing the controversy between Sir Maxim and Mr. Maskelyne, in pamphlet form, OLD TIME MAGICAL APPARATUS W.H. H. Pueu, of Burlington, N. J., whose clever apple trick appeared in last month’s MAGIC, has been in magic over 50 years. His famous col- lection of old-time apparatus is known all over the country. A party of Philadelphia mayicians recently made a special trip to Mr. Pugh’s home to view this collection. It includes apparatus that was used by Anderson, Signor Blitz, Weymanand others. Some of his visitors have funny ideas about magic; one of them some time ago asked him how many tricks he could teach him for 50 cents! This reminded Mr. Pugh of the story of the fellow who asked the door-keeper of a show if he could have a ticket to go inthe show without paying. The showman said ‘‘No, but you can pay without going in."’ A Beautiful Parlor Lable_ Illusion ~~

Page 352

70. | / MAGIC THE Post CARD ALBUM is a new electrical novelty in the pusing line, consisting of a hugh frame resembling an album. The different poses are shown by the swinging of the door or cover. HyMACK at the Orpheum, St. Paul. FREVOLI, shadowist, at the Academy, Chicago. HERR JANSEN AND Co. at the President, Chicago. VAN HOVEN, ‘‘dippy’’ magician, at Keith's Philadelphia. NATE LEIpziG will reach San Francisco from Australia to start over the Orpheum Circuit. THE VAN DER Koors, comedy conjurers, with their famous mind-read- ing duck, were atthe Colonial, New York. HENRY CLIVE kept them laughing all the time at the Majestic, Chicago. T. NELSON Downs was at the Hamlin, Chicago. CHASSINO, shadowist, at the Prospect, Cleveland. MEPHISTO, THE MYSTERIOUS By Max Sterling, Special Correspondent Seen at the Alhambra, Glasgow, March 6th, 1911. In this elaborate act the curtains rise on a tableau disclosing Mephisto, attired in the costume hon- ored by his name, supported by several assistants. ‘The setting is entirely black, relieved only by sundry pieces of apparatus. Fire flies into the air from Mephisto's fingers, and atthe wave of his sword two braziers, mounted on graceful tripods, break intu flames. A young lady is introduced, and finds aerial support upon the point of a single iron’ bar. Defying all laws of gravity, she revolves in every direction, with her elbow for a fulcrum. Added draperies represent her as of various nationalities, and a casque, trident, and shield convert her into Britannia on her descent from her mystical voyage. This finished, a tambourine is constructed of loose rings and tissue paper, and a quantity of real flowers are produced from its appar- ently empty interior and distributed to the public. Standing in the center of the stave is a pillar-box painted in orthodox post-office red. A maiden rushes on to post a letter, followed by Mephisto, who opens the box. This allows it to clear itself ofa great quantity of post-cards automatically. These are thrown into the auditorium. A see-saw is constructed, upon one end of which the lady assistant stands, beneath a canopy of drapery. Mephisto, from the op- posite end, fires; the drapery falls; the lady gone, to be recovered from the post-box. In the next item three buckets are employed. ‘Fhese are full of water. They empty and refill themselves. Fans and birds are produced from them, etc. Two draped fans permit a third to be fired between them. Next in order is presented a particularly fine illusion, Several boxes are nested one within the other until a miniature case containing a doll completes the series. These are hoisted by chains from the stage, and ‘the lid opened in mid-air to show the contents intact. A pistol shot, and a ladv ‘‘doll’’ steps out in place of the vanished interior series. Lady possesses umbrella without a cover. Me- phisto produces one from an empty canister, also a quantity of parti-colored drapery. Mounted over the umbrella a cabinet is improvised, from which a ‘polar bear’’ breaks out, is caught and led off in chains. Anartist’s lay figure falls to pieces. The several limbs, etc., are collected and brought to life while laid upon atable undercover of a piece of drapery. A huge phonograph

Page 353

MAGIC 7\ horn is filled with colored balls, small and in great quantity. A cup of suit- able proportions contains a large sphere. The positions are effectively trans- posed. ‘Lhe best effect is reserved for the finale. In this a lady is cremated Without apparent covering, the Hames enveloping her full figure. The back draperies are then drawn aside to disclose a magnificent electrical butterfly. The body opens and discovers the lady none the worse. The brilliance of the final tableau is well worth seeing, for it is as unexpected as it is beautiful. THE GREAT FREDERICK at the Bijou, Savannah, Ga. ZOMAH presented an almost silent thought-reading act at the Alhambra, London. An assistant passes through the audience to obtain material for tests, and Zomah immediately describes with unerring accuracy the objects held by her assistant. KELLAR will open a theater to be devoted exclusively to magic, says New York gossip. SARTELLO at the Auditorium, Lynn, Mass. ZISKA AND SAUNDERS at the Colonial, Indianapolis, Ind. SALVAIL, ‘“The Card Sharp,’’ at the Star, Chicago. Few more clever with the cards. Does some wonderful things. PRONOL, ventriloquial whistler, at Sittner’s. Chicago. HENRY E, Dixey proved that he has not forgotten all he knew about magic at the Victoria, New York. In his sketch he burlesqued a mayician, but his coin and card paling and card throwing was real art. OwEN CLARKE, who has been on the bill at St. George’s Hall, London, for some time will shortly start out at the music halls. MORTON AND ELLIOTT, musical paper manipulators, will tour Europe for fifteen months, opening at The Hague, Holland. THE BLUE PEARL By Max Sterling. Special Correspondent Seen at Finsbury Park Empire, February 13, 1911. This stupendous and maynificent production, redolent of the Orient, with all its fabled mystery, is by far the tnost superb magical spectacle ever witnessed on the variety stage of Europe. ‘Fhe cost enormous; detail perfection; stage craft and setting be- yond praise. The ‘Blue Pearl’? is a mystical pantomine phantasy in five scenes. Scene | discloses a busy bazaar in the principal street of Benares. Merchants selling their wares, customers buying, Devotees, Fakirs, dancers, natives, guards, etc. The scene had an absolute scent of the East, it was so realistic. In this scene one of the natives gave imitations of animals, etc., very cleverly. Then came Indian dances, an Indian fakir stopped a crowd of Europeans and per- formed the Eye Bag trick and the Indian Basket trick. In this scene one of the snakes escapes and nearly bites one of the maids, who is saved by the priest, with whom she falls in love. Scene 2 is the interior of the temple of Siva, where priests and slaves are offering jewels, etc., to their god. The Rajah enters on a pilgrimage to see the ‘Blue Pearl,’’ the eve of the god Siva. He covets the pearl and determines to steal it. Two British soldiers blunder into the Temple and try to loot it, but they are surprised by the priests and slaves, who give chase to the soldiers. The Rajah, finding the A Beautiful Parlor Lable Illusion

Page 354

72 MAGIC Temple deserted, succeeds in stealing the pearl and escapes unseen. The priests returning notice its absence, and are distracted and appeal to their High Priest, who goes into a trance and sees in a vision the enactment of the theft. Then he instructs the priest to follow the Rajah, get into his ser- vice, and steal from him the pearl. In this scene a cauldron emits huge clouds of vapor and on this the vision is seen, as on a lantern slide. Scene 3: The road to Bahar (evening). In this scene there is a procession of animals and attendants, and the full strength of the company is seen, but there are no illusory effects. Scene 4: The borders of the Sacred Jungle (night). The Rajah enters at the head of his caravan, and, seeing as he supposes a road- side fakir, he demands to see his tricks. The fakir performs several tricks, including the rope trick. In this the boy climbs the rope with the rapidity of a monkey, and as soon as he is out of sight the rope falls to the ground and the boy comes running from the back of the crowd, who are watching the fakir. Then the Rajah wishes life brought back ty the skeleton of one of his favorite dancing girls. ‘Ihe skeleton at once becomes a beautiful girl, and executes a graceful dance.’Ihe Rajah is enraged and tries to kill the fakir, who in nis anger causes the Princess to disappear from a palanquin, and the priest snatches the pearl, but is iacavered: by the Rajah, who orders his execution by having his head crushed beneath an elephant’s foot. The slave girl who loves him pleads for his life, but to no purpose. The High Priest (the fakir) at the last moment gives convincing proof of his powers and saves the priest, and the Rajah, overcome with fear, gives up the pearl, which is restored to Siva’s eye. Scene 5: The King of Mysteria and his court are entertained in the palace of a famous illusionist, who also uses his wer to prevent the death of the King by a desperate anarchist, who forces his way into the throne room. In this scene Sears comes on in evening dress and performs his principal illusions. His first act is to produce a male assistant froma tub, now familiarised as that of ‘‘Diogenes.’’ Then three cylindrical cases are brought forward, each fitting within the other and provided with lids. All are shown empty, and raised in the air. A platform, about a yard square, standing on four legs, is next introduced. This supports four brass uprights and canopy. A fourfold screen is displayed, lifted, and placed completely around the uprights. From this improvised cabinet a girl 1s produced who executes a Russian dance. Some quick-fire effects follow, in which the lady assistant is put into a trunk and elevated into the air. Sears enters a cabinet at the ‘‘Wings,’’ lit hy elec- tric lamps, to appear the next instant behind a large fan opened out at rear of the aes te In place of the lady in the elevated trunk, a 500lb. weight is discovered, which a second or two later is burst open to display a small boy within. The lady herself appears in the center one of the three suspended cylinders, while the male assistant appears in the cabinet at the side of the stage recently vacated by the Wizard. The final illusion consists of building a hox upon a table, placing an assistant within, and causing the inev:table disappearance. HERR CONRADI, Berlin's famous magical expert, has recovered from a serious illness. MASKELYNE AND DEVANT are preparing for another Australian tour. R. F. Moore, cartoonist and ventriloquist, at the Bijou, Philadelphia. HERBERT BROOKS, in his ‘‘$25,000 Trunk Mvstery,’’ at the Family, Ot- tawa, Canada. Mr. ‘*X’’ is an American conjurer who is meeting with success in the English provinces.

Page 355

MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS 1S Back Numbers of MAGIC VOLUME ONE READY MAGIC BOUND IN CLOTH The first volume of Maaic can now be had neatly bound in cloth with title page and index. It con- sists of the first six numbers, Jan- | uary to June, 1910, including the pooeuaay number, GuHosTs. ' Price, $1.00. SINGLE COPIES Single copies of only the Jan- uary, March, April and May. is- sues remain. They can be had, as long as the supply lasts, for 10 cents each. Complete your file before they are out of print. The Magical World A WEEKLY REVIEW OF INTER- NATIONAL MAGIC, AND KINDRED ARTS EDITED BY MAX STERLING Published every Wednesday. Yearly subscriptions, $2.50; single copies, 4 cents. All the magical news while it is news. Regular departments of ‘‘What Others are Doing,’’ ‘‘Practical Magic,’’ ‘‘Whereabouts,"’ etc. New tricks of merit in every number. Only weekly pa- per in the world devoted to the inter- _ ests of the magician and the magic art. Will ‘‘ginger up’’ your interest in the subject every week. Sit down tonight and write for a sample copy. THE MAGICAL WORLD PUBLISHING COMPANY &, Lawson Steet, Moss Side, Manchester, England. JANUARY 1910 PRICT 18 CENTS What A. Conjurer Can Do By Owe Leeware The Marvelous Rising Cards of Joseffy t AD two e

Page 356

74 MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS Night with the Moon. A PARLOR PRESENTATION OF “A NIGHT WITH THE MOON" A Practical Lightning ““Chalk-talk”’ for Amateurs By P. T..SELBIT The June, 1910, number of Macic, containing P. T. Selbit’s splendid ‘‘chalk-talk,’’ “"A Night With The Moon,:’ being now out of print, the publisher has reprinted the sketch tn attrac- tive pamphlet form. In this unique entertainment, Mr. Selbit presents a practical form of lightning sketch work that anyone, be he or she never so ignorant of the art of sketching, may produce without much practice, and provoke considerable merriment. Price 10 cents, postpaid. F. T. SINGLETON, Publisher 3619 Thompson Avenue, Kansas City, Mo.

Page 357

‘The Boston School of Magic (Established over 20 vears) The “Invisible Aeroplane,’’ Handkerchief Trick, complete, $10.00. Finest Nickel Pedestal, to appear a silk in glass tum- bler, complete, $7.00. Hatton and Plate’s ‘Magicians Tricks,’’ $1.75. Halley's ““Dramatic Art of Magic,’’ $1.00 and $1.15. Goldston’s “‘Young Conjuror,’’ $.50 and $1.00. Goldston’s ‘*More Tricks and Puzzles,’’ $.60. Expert Billiard Ball Manipu- lation, $1.00. Medrington’s *‘Magician’s Book of Patter, $.50. Barnello’s ““Red Demons,’’ Fire King Book, $.50. ‘‘Satan Out- done,’’ New Marvelous Card Principle, &1.00. Leroy’s *’Cag- liostro’’ Card Trick, any pack used, $.50. Send 10¢ for Appendix Catalogue and latest lists: 50c for 212 page II- lustrated Book Catalogue, largest ever issued anywhere. None free. W. D. LEROY, 103 Court St., Boston, Mass. Eastern Representative of the Society of American Mawicians Paper Cut-Out for the Changing Die The March number of Maaic contains a gen- uine novelty in the form ofa paper cut-out apparatus for the Changing Die. With a pair of scissors and a little glue, a beautiful black paper die and white shell can be made that will enable anyone to perform this charming il- lusion, Complete instructions viven. A few copies left. 10 cents each, while they last. F. T. SINGLETON, Publisher, eden da) Ave., Kansas City, Mo, Send Me Your PHOTO For My Gallery And I will send you the “‘hest imgromatu trick made.’" Neatly boxed. Sells for 50c and 75c. Harmas, 134 Fourth St., Milwaukee, Wis. When writing to advertisers, kindly mention MAGIC fA Beautiful Parlor Labte_ Illusion x

Page 358

\ MAGIC ADVERTISEMENTS The New Triple Color Changing Handkerchief An original novelty. An instant hit. This beautiful new effect is the very latest handker- chief creation. A single green handkerchief is exhibited, held by one corner with the fingertips of one hand. With a downward stroke of the other hand (which conceals nothing at any stage of the trick), the green handker- chief changes to red; another pass and the red becomes yellow,—three successive colors. The change can be in- stantly reversed and the trick repeated as often as desired. Beautifully and durably made in the best manner possi- ble. Easily operated by anyone, no fakes, the trick being contained within itself. Price, $1.50. We handle a complete line of tricks, magical apparatus and _ magician’s supplies. Amateurs supplied as well as Professionals Send four cents, stamps, today and receive the following FOUR CATALOGUES Superior Magical Apparatus Latest Supplements New Card Miracles Trick Noveltiesand Jokers READ & COVERT $17-D East 43rd St., Chicago, Il. When writing to advertisers. kindly mention MiaGic